Blurred Boundaries Damage Inter-Professional Working

Everybody pays lip-service to the idea that healthcare professionals should collaborate in delivering care to patients. In this article, Rosemary Rushmer explores how a new methodology, connate theory, could lead to improvements in our understanding of what makes healthcare teams tick

key words

* inter-professional working

* integrated working

* blurred-boundaries

* teamworking

* connate theory

Introduction

The need for effective teamworking in the NHS

As far as patients are concerned, health services are delivered by professionals working collaboratively. Patients move from one professional group to another in receipt of services designed to meet their clinical needs. The organisation, deployment and effectiveness of these collaborative networks are in-house issues, mainly invisible to the consuming public. This paper addresses those hidden aspects of health service provision, in looking at the arrangements made between health professions to work together in delivering those services.

As early as 1974, the term the ‘primary care team’ appeared (British Medical Association 1974). It reappeared as a term of wider inclusion across the NHS, the ‘NHS family’ (Scottish Executive Health Department (SEDH) 1998a) and wider again as ‘health and social care’ under the new care trusts in The NHS Plan (Department of Health (DH) 2000). These collaborative arrangements have the capacity to unite health provision across disciplines (integrated working), health sectors (intermediate care) and across agencies (multi-agency working between health, social work and the voluntary sectors), bringing simplified ‘patient journeys’ and move towards the ‘seamless delivery of care’. The duplication of service delivery and thus costs can be reduced and potentially the productivity of the system, and how many clients it can process, increases (Rushmer et al 2003). Service provision can, it has been suggested, be joined- up (Cabinet Office 2000). As well as a strategy for effecting enhanced service provision, legislative changes (SEHD 1998a, 1998b) also identify flatter team-based structures in the NHS as a way of creating the involvement, empowerment and participation of all staff.

The difficulties in effective teamworking in the NHS

However, teamworking seems to have been easier to effect in name than in practice. Trie MHS Pian claims that the NHS is a “1940s system operating in a 21st-century world’. This failure in the system of healthcare provision is claimed to rest, partly, on the Old-fashioned demarcations between staff and barriers between services.’ (DH 2000). So serious is poor teamworking felt to be that The NHS Plan lists it as one of the reasons that the NHS has failed to deliver on healthcare priorities in the past (DH 2000).

Such barriers between healthcare staff have been documented extensively (Poulton et al 1993, West 1995). These suggest that although improvements to the delivery of care could be demonstrated in successful primary care teams, such effective performance is almost impossible to foster given the constrains of the work environment namely working patterns, clinical remits and so on (Cant and Killoran 1993, West et al 1995). Other accounts move the focus away from the system, and clearly lay the cause of inter- professional working difficulties at the feet of the staff themselves, pointing to their attitudes and rigid working practices. Ineffective inter-professional working has been said to arise from the poor communication between health professionals (McClure 1984). A term often used to summarise the inter-professional difficulties experienced between healthcare professionals is ‘tribalism’ (Hunter 1996). Similar reasons are cited for the resistance of change in the NHS, where certain powerful groups might lose status or favoured duties they are said to resist any changes towards inter- professional working vehemently (Bartkus 1997).

What is repeatedly stated is that new forms of inter- professional working are expected of NHS staff (Scottish Executive Health Department 1999, Homan 2000). Effecting this process rests on establishing of co-operative and collaborative working relationships between health professionals and this is bedrock to the success of the new wave of healthcare reforms. Informally staff are encouraged to blur the boundaries, in order to reduce protectionist, rigid demarcations adversely affecting service provision. Staff are left aware of the need to be more flexible in their approach to working with other professional groups. However, the notion is ill- explored. What might blurring the boundaries actually involve? Does it really offer a way forward in resolving the difficulties experienced by differing health professional in working together? What is unclear is how we can conceptualise what an effective collaborative relationship would be like, what would define it, and how it could be worked to the benefit of staff and patients alike. Is an effective collaborative relationship synonymous with blurred boundaries? This rest of this paper will address these issues.

Moving the debate forwards

The Research Base and Methodology

The ideas in this paper derive from more than a decade of involvement with inter-professional teams in the NHS, working with teams from the primary care and the acute sectors. These teams ranged across health service practitioners and managers and professionals from other agencies (social work and the voluntary organisations). This involvement took three main forms: as an academic representative on project teams; development work and teambuilding initiatives in-situ with ‘live’ healthcare teams and more remotely in the classroom as practitioners undertook further and higher education.

Connate theory

This paper explores the use of diagrams to illustrate the main argument it develops. This is connate theory, in which the way relationships are visually described is inherently linked to the qualities of that relationship.

Connate theory is:

‘Visual metaphor which aims to make relationships between people and groups transparent and open to analysis. Complex relationships are rendered visual, so that the way the diagrams look says something about the way the relationship is.’

In this paper Venn diagrams are used to portray aspects of inter- professional working, this does not have to be so. Equally, in other places, other shapes and forms may be more effective in describing different qualities and characteristics of relationships between individuals and groups and the contexts in which they operate. What matters within connate theory is not the precise shape used, but how effectively it shows us the way people interact with each other in order to get something done.

The ideas developed here are based on the way that health professionals work, how health provision is developed and divided between the professional groups and how care is actually delivered at the point of contact with the patient. These ideas and in particular the diagrams (developed below) have been extensively shared and discussed with practitioners and their comments and reflections used to further refine these ideas.

This paper will argue the following main points:

* Effective integrated working through collaborative working relationships and blurring-the-boundaries are completely opposite processes and the terms should not be used interchangeably

* Integrated working can be thought of and used as a template for the successful achievement of inter-professional working, whereas blurred boundaries bring only ambiguity and confusion, with the potential to lead to resentment and distrust.

* The difference between integrated working and blurred boundaries exists in the establishment and maintenance of clear boundaries between the collaborating partners. These clear boundaries are central to the process of integrated working.

* The boundaries must be negotiated and agreed, specific, respectful and open to review. Work tasks can be shared if there is recognition of commonality in expertise or purpose, together with respect for areas that remain distinct and are not open to be shared.

Figure 1. The individual in context

The Individual (after Rushmer et al 2003)

The health professional (A) appears as a circle. The circle gives the person a boundary, it contains and displays everything he or she is – knowledge, skills, attitudes and so on. At the same time, the context is made clear (X) – all those things outside the person (the setting and areas outside his or her expertise – knowledge, skills, and attitudes and so on).

Effective inter-professional working: integrated working vs blurred boundaries

What differentiates integrative working and blurred-boundaries is the extent to which individuals share tasks successfully. In one way these can both be looked on as attempts to teamwork, or work inter- professionally. We turn to integrative working first.

Figure 2. Integrative working (successful inter-professional working: teamworking

Integrative Working – successful inter-professional working: teamworking (after Rushmer et al 2003)

There are two health professionals (or two groups of health professionals) A and B. Firstly, the area of overlap (Y), it is something that A and B have in common. It may be that part of the work of A is also the work of B (sharing tasks). They might also share skills and knowledge, or attitudes and interests. The more they have in common the greater the area of Y will be. I\t is this area of overlap that makes integrated working possible, for it contains skills and tasks they can share.

This is not a blurring of boundaries. As circle is still intact and so is B’s, they each maintain his or her boundaries, operating within his or her own capacity and limits. In the diagram there is an area of As circle that is solely A. This represents his or her unique combination of skills, which B does not share. A should not be frightened of sharing with B because B cannot overwhelm or undermine him or her, because A still maintains this unique area that only he or she holds. This area is not B’s domain. B is respectful of this area and only overlaps with A in the area labelled Y. B does not invade, interfere or attempt to control As unique area of expertise. Likewise B keeps his or her unique expertise and contribution (B) and A is respectful of that. The area of overlap (Y) is clear, has distinct boundaries and this is vital to the success of the overlap, and the ‘health’ of the union. These boundaries are negotiated. There needs to be discussion and agreement between members of the partnership. The individuals should take time to clarify who will do what, when and with what resources and support. Such agreements are binding but not rigid, they can be re-opened if necessary as the situation and context change, allowing them to be dynamic and responsive to changing circumstances.

It would be completely misleading to refer to this union, and agreement to work collaboratively as a blurring of the boundaries for its very success depends upon it being exactly the opposite of that. Its pre-requisite is the clarification of the boundaries regarding what tasks to share, (based on common or complementary skills), on what occasions and to what effect, thereby creating a workable area of Y. Another way to understand the area Y is to think of it as the place where synergy occurs. In area Y exists something that could not be achieved by either A or B on their own (synergy); for example, if A is blue and B is yellow, the area of overlap, Y, (where the ‘new’ exists), would be green. Green cannot be created by blue or yellow alone, it is no longer about achieving alone, or in sequence but about achieving together. Y takes a genuine, creative merging of A and B’s skills, knowledge, experience, and efforts to bring about something beyond their individual capacities.

To understand the difference between successful integrated working and the oft-quoted blurred boundaries, we now turn to consider what happens if boundaries are blurred.

Figure 3. Blurred boundaries (ineffective inter-professional working: failed teamworking)

Blurred Boundaries – ineffective inter-professional working: failed teamworking (after Rushmer eta/ 2003)

In this scenario A and B have tried to establish integrated working and share tasks based on common or complementary skills, but they have not been clear about placing parameters around what each will contribute to Y in terms of task allocation, timing, responsibility and so on. Ambiguity is created and misunderstandings can arise.

The importance of clear boundaries

If there are no boundaries around this area of overlap several consequences arise. There is a high risk of:

* Role uncertainty and role ambiguity can arise (who should be doing this ‘bit’? Should it be me?),

* Feelings of inequity (I feel they should have done this ‘bit’.).

* Stress and anxiety (am I out of my depth here?),

* Feeling unprepared (I didn’t know I was going to be doing this now.).

* Concerns for the future can also arise (if I am doing this today, what might I have to do tomorrow?)

* Feelings of resentment and distrust can build (I really feel dumped on… or, they robbed me of the best part of this job..).

* Implications for the task are that neither party is clear about who is doing what. This can result in either duplication of effort, or that some tasks are missed as each party assumes the other is doing it.

When the limits (boundaries) of sharing are ignored, nothing is clear, certainty is lost and the ability of collaborators to prepare realistically for their work together is gone. Working under blurred boundaries there are no controls sharing can seem more like invasion. Alternatively, blurred boundaries can seem like abdication where one of the parties ends up doing all the work, or all the unpleasant parts of the work. This is not likely to result in synergy, but will rather foster anxiety, stress, poor performance, and feelings of resentment. Instead of trust and confidence being built, they are destroyed.

Crossing boundaries

If successful integrated working requires mutual consent, focus and crispness in the establishment and maintenance of area Y, what happens when these established boundaries are crossed? Firstly crossing boundaries is not the same thing as blurring boundaries. A blurred boundary is imprecision about who does what when, and is detailed above. A crossed boundary (as the name suggests) is the crossing of a boundary that does exist. In everyday life sometimes boundaries are crossed with permission at other times boundaries are violated without consent.

Crossing boundaries with permission

In integrated working (above) boundaries are overlapped with permission and agreement in advance. At other times in the ‘messiness’ of real life situations, boundaries are sometimes crossed unexpectedly, without prior agreement. This may occur for permissible reasons, for example in an emergency – health professionals act as they must, as the task demands. To illustrate this, an emergency situation in an operating theatre might see health professionals ‘helping-out’ by carrying out tasks not normally their own. However, in these cases staff are aware of the boundaries, and are clear that the actions they have taken have Overstepped-the-(normal)-mark’ and are exceptional, and check with the other professionals at the end that things are acceptable. This re-negotiates the boundaries and justifies the breach of the boundary (Carfinkel 1967).

Crossing boundaries as a violation

Sometimes boundaries are crossed without permission or the sanction of the situation. This is more like interference, invasion and is disrespectful to and undermines the person being invaded. B crosses the boundary and invades A’s unique area of expertise and ‘has gone a step too far’ and then stands accused of offending, interfering, or being after A’s job, for example. If this occurs unwittingly, then an apology usually follows as B realises what has happened and attempts to repair the violation in the relationship. Where it is done deliberately it can be seen as a clear signal that B does not trust A to carry out his or her role without very close intrusive supervision.

The usefulness of connate theory and the diagrams

Feedback from healthcare professionals (over a development period of ten years) suggest the categories and diagrams help to de- personalise highly personal and often sensitive work relationship issues and encourage participants to reflect upon practice and helpful and hindering behaviours and attitudes when undertaking integrated working. This seems to be brought about by four inter- related processes:

* Relationships are made visual – everybody can see what is meant.

* Sensitive personal issues are diffused into structural relationships, Taboo subjects become de-personalised and amenable to discussion. Reflection focuses upon the process of task delivery rather than personalities.

* Abstract ideas like ambiguity and role confusion are ‘grounded’ and become meaningful in the work context – so discussion can move forwards in very practical terms (i.e. what health professional might do, or not do, in order to work together more easily on certain tasks).

* It is easier to see the differences between effective integrated working and blurred boundaries. The role of negotiated and agreed boundaries that place order, structure and predictability over the collaborative partnership is illustrated. The parties can see the importance of taking time to develop the ground rules that will inform their joint working.

Conclusion

It would be wrong to leave the discussion at the level of the individual as contextual features are crucial when health professionals face attempts to integrate their work (for example, the availability of protected development time, Mallory 1993, Bohmer eta/ 2001). Other influential situational factors might include the quality of communications, for communications can both ease relationships and prove conciliatory or alternatively be defensive and partial (Deutschman 2001). Historical disputes pervade contexts and defensiveness can make staff unwilling to take part in groups looking at new initiatives (Bain 1998). Additionally there are reasons for thinking that not all participants in collaborative relationships will be equally willing to collaborate, or stand in the same power relationships to the other groups (Labour Research Department 1999).

In other words, the area of X (the context), is not neutral in the process of establishing and maintaining collaborative relationships. Context provides the backdrop against which all action is able to take place, it exerts influence and pressure on the circles (people) and ultimately defines their shape (actions and impact). Participants should attend to the boundaries between themselves and others but also be aware of the constraints and opportunities offered to them by their setting.

Individuals, the organisation and potentially the patient have much to gain from greater co-operative healthcare working relationships. Staff can develop wider expertise; gain knowledge of the role and skills of fellow healthcare professionals; contribute actively to new developments; provide cross cover and support (Rushmer et a/ 2000, Rushmer, et a/ 2002). Learning to adjust to new ways of working can open health professionals to further c\hange (Mintzberg et al 1 998) and willingness to take personal ‘risks’ in sharing and working collaboratively. The organisation ultimately gains increased flexibility in its service provision, brought about by the multi-tasking and multi-skilling of staff, duplication can be avoided, co-ordination and communications improved (Borril 2000).

Connate theory

Ultimately if the value of the diagrams lie in their ability to reduce the complex and the emotionally sensitive to simple diagrammatic forms, that is also its major weakness. Once the clarity in the integrated relationship is achieved, the complexity of the context should be woven back in. Decisions surrounding the nature of the area Y are profoundly complex, situated and volatile. The area of Y is dynamic and requires constant maintenance work as settings change.

The diagrams and their explanation provide a simple outline, helping practitioners gain clarity over the complexity in inter- professional relationships in order to take action. However, these outlines and should be reviewed and contextually coloured in (Sacks 1972). The impact of the context (X) should be recognised and any potential solution viewed critically and developed in its specific setting.

This article has been subjected to a double-blind review

Online archive

For related articles and author guidelines visit our online archive at www.nurseresearcher.co.uk

references

Bain A (1998) Social defenses against organizational learning. Human Relations. 51,3,413-429.

Bartkus B (1997) Employee ownership as a catalyst for organisational change. Journal of Organisational Change Management. 10, 4, 331-344.

Bohmer RM and Edmondson AC (2001) Organizational Learning in Health Care: health care leaders need to design structures and processes that enhance collective learning. Health Forum Journal. 44, 2, 32-35.

Borril C (2000) Effective Teamworking. Paper presented to the Strategic Issues in Health Care Management Conference, St Andrews University. British Medical Association (1974) Primary Health Care Teams. London, BMA.

Cabinet Office (2000) Wiring It Up: Whitehall’s Management of Cross-cutting Policies and Services. London, Performance and Innovation Unit.

Cant S, Killoran A (1993) Team tactics: a study of nurse collaboration in general practice. Health Education Journal. 52, 4, 203-208.

Deutschman M (2001) Re-defining quality and excellence in the nursing home culture. Journal of Gerontological Nursing. 27, 8, 28- 36.

Department of Health (2000) The NHS Plan. A Plan for Investment A Plan for Reform. London, DH.

Garfinkel H (1984) Studies in Ethnomethodology. London, Polity Press.

Homan G (2000) Skills and competency-based pay. In Thorpe R, Homan G (Eds) Strategic Reward Systems. Harlow, Financial Times and Prentice Hall.

Hunter DJ (1996) The changing roles of health personnel in health and health care management. Social Science and Medicine. 43, 5, 799- 808.

Labour Research Department (1999) The NHS Reforms – Primary Care Developments. London, Labour Research Department.

McClure LM (1984) Teamwork, Myth or Reality: community nurses’ experience with general practice attachment. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health. 31, 68-74.

Mintzberg H et al (1998) The Strategy Safari. New York, Free Press.

Poulton BC, West MA (1993) Effective multidisciplinary teamwork in primary health care. Journal of Advanced Nursing. 18, 6, 918- 925.

Rushmer RK, Dowling M (2000) Changing NHS structures: implications for nursing careers. British Journal of Nursing. 9, 22, 2297-2302.

Rushmer RK, Pallis GB (2003) Inter-professional working: the wisdom of integrated working and the disaster of blurred boundaries. PuMc Money and Management. 32, 1, 59-66.

Rushmer RK et al (2002) Introducing self-directed primary care teams in the NHS: an overview of initial strategic issues. In Rushmer RK et al (eds) Organisation Development in Health Care: Strategic issues in health care management. Aldershot, Ashgate.

Sacks H (1972) On the analyzability of stories by children. In Gumperz JJ, Hymes DD (Eds) Directions in Sodolinguistics. New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

Scottish Executive Health Department (1998a) Designed to Care: Renewing the National Health Service in Scotland. Edinburgh, The Stationery Office.

Scottish Executive Health Department (1998b) Towards a New Way of Working: The plan for managing people in the NHS in Scotland. Edinburgh, The Stationery Office Etd.

Scottish Executive Health Department (1999) Learning Together A strategy for education, training and life-long learning for all staff in the NHS. Edinburgh, The Stationery Office.

West MA (1995) The Effectiveness of Teamworking in Primary Care. A report to the Health Education Authority. Sheffield, Institute of Work Psychology.

West MA, Slater J (1995) Teamwork, myths, realities and research. The Occupational Psychologist. 24, 24-29.

Rosemary Rushmer BA(Jnt Hons), PhD, Lecturer in Organization Development, University of St Andrews, Fife, Scotland, UK.

Copyright RCN Publishing Company Ltd. 2005

Pulmonary Complications After Bone Marrow Transplantation: An Autopsy Study From a Large Transplantation Center

Context.-Bone marrow transplantation (BMT) is used to treat various malignant and nonmalignant disorders. Pulmonary complications are some of the most common causes of mortality in BMT recipients. Poor general health and bleeding tendency frequently preclude the use of definitive diagnostic tests, such as open lung biopsy, in these patients.

Objective.-To identify pulmonary complications after BMT and their role as the cause of death (COD).

Design.-The autopsy and bronchoalveolar lavage (BAL) slides and microbiology studies of BMT recipients from a 7-year period were reviewed.

Results.-Pulmonary complications were identified in 40 (80%) of the 50 cases. The most common complications were diffuse alveolar damage (DAD) and diffuse alveolar hemorrhage (DAH). Pulmonary complications were the sole or 1 of multiple CODs in 37 cases (74%). All complications were more common in allogeneic BMT recipients. In 19 (51%) of the 37 cases in which pulmonary complications contributed to the death, cultures were negative. Both DAD and DAH, complications commonly reported in the early post-BMT period, were seen more than 100 days after BMT in 33% and 12% of cases, respectively. Five (83%) of 6 cases of invasive pulmonary aspergillosis diagnosed at autopsy were negative for fungi ante mortem (by BAL and cultures).

Conclusions.-Pulmonary complications are a significant COD in BMT recipients, many of which, especially the fungal infections, are difficult to diagnose ante mortem. The etiology of DAD and DAH is likely to be multifactorial, and these complications are not limited to the early posttransplantation period. Autopsy examination is important in determining the COD in BMT recipients.

(Arch Pathol Lab Med. 2005;129:366-371)

Bone marrow transplantation (BMT) has been used with increasing frequency to treat malignant and nonmalignant hematologie disorders and metabolic and genetic diseases. Infectious and noninfectious pulmonary complications are reported in 307% to 60% of all BMT recipients and result in a high morbidity and mortality.'”11 Multiple factors contribute to the development of pulmonary complications, including immunologie defects secondary to the underlying disease and its treatment, conditioning regimens, development of graft-vs-host disease (GVHD), and the type of transplantation. Many BMT recipients are affected by more than one condition that involves multiple organ systems, which may obscure the contribution of pulmonary complications as a cause of morbidity and mortality. In addition, a significant number of these patients have poor general health and have significant thrombocytopenia, precluding the use of some of the diagnostic tests, such as open lung biopsy and sometimes even bronchoalveolar lavage (BAL), to accurately identify the underlying pulmonary disease.4″7 The aim of this study was to identify the autopsy-documented pulmonary complications after BMT and their role as the cause of death (COD).

MATERIALS AND METHODS

The autopsy files of the University of Minnesota were searched for complete autopsies performed on BMT recipients between January 1, 1996, and December 31, 2002. The autopsy slides and the slides from BAL procedures performed within 2 weeks of death were reviewed. The autopsy protocol at the University of Minnesota Hospitals requires at least one section from each lobe of the lungs with additional sections taken from grossly abnormal areas. Papanicolaou- stained slides for cytomegalovirus (CMV) detection and Gomori methenamine silver-stained slides for fungal detection were available for review in all BAL specimens. The primary diagnosis, transplantation type, and followup information were obtained from electronic reports and medical record reviews. All microbiology results within 1 week of death and the microbiology studies performed on autopsy tissues and/or blood were also reviewed and correlated to the histologie and cytologie findings. The BAL, sputum, and antemortem and postmortem lung tissue cultures were considered lung cultures. All pathogens (bacteria, viral, and fungal) are included. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage was defined as the presence of intra-alveolar hemorrhage in more than 30% of the pulmonary tissue/ Diffuse alveolar damage was defined as hyaline membrane formation (exudative phase) or extensive proliferation of fibroblasts and type 2 pneumocytes (proliferative or organizing phase).

Figure 1. A, Diffuse alveolar damage was the most common pulmonary complication after bone marrow transplantation (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 40). B, Hyaline membranes are visible and involve most of the alveolar spaces in this case (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 100), C, High-power view of hyaline membranes (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 200).

Figure 2. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage. Fresh hemorrhage within the alveolar spaces without inflammation (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 100).

Figure 3. A, Invasive pulmonary aspergillosis. Aspergillus- induced infarct rimmed by a hemorrhagic zone (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 40) B, A blood vessel occluded by Aspergillus hyphae (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 200). C, Gomori methenamine silver stain shows branching septated hyphae (hematoxylin-eosin, original magnification 200).

Figure 4. Pulmonary cytolytic thrombus surrounded by hemorrhage. Note the karyorrhectic debris within the occluding thrombus (hematoxylineosin, original magnification 100).

RESULTS

The autopsy slides from 50 BMT recipients (25 male recipients and 25 female recipients) who had complete autopsies were available for review. The mean patient age was 31 years (range, 6 months to 68 years). Nineteen patients (38%) were younger than 18 years. Seven patients had undergone autologous and 43 patients had undergone allogeneic BMT. None of the patients had undergone nonmyeloablative BMT. The primary disorder was malignant in 32 patients (64%) (3 chronic myeloid leukemia, 3 chronic lymphocytic leukemia, 6 acute myeloid leukemia, 2 acute lymphoblastic leukemia, 6 myelodysplastic syndrome, 2 multiple myeloma, 9 non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and 1 metastatic breast carcinoma) and nonmalignant in 18 patients (36%) (7 Fanconi anemia, 5 Hurler syndrome, 1 aplastic anemia, 1 Wolman disease, 1 Gaucher disease, 1 Canavan disease, 1 hemophagocytic syndrome, and 1 Sjgren syndrome). The average time from transplantation to death was 158 days (range, 6-1217 days). Twenty- four (48%) of 50 deaths occurred more than 100 days after BMT.

Pulmonary complications were found in 40 (80%) of 50 cases, 19 of which had more than one pulmonary finding. Pulmonary complications that were observed were classified as follows: diffuse alveolar damage (DAD) in 18 cases (36%) (Figure 1, A through C), diffuse alveolar hemorrhage (DAH) in 12 cases (24%) (Figure 2), pulmonary edema in 6 cases (12%), invasive pulmonary aspergillosis in 6 cases (12%) (Figure 3, A through C), bronchopneumonia in 6 cases (12%), focal hemorrhage in 7 cases (14%), pulmonary hypertension in 5 cases (10%), thromboemboli in 2 cases (4%), posttransplantation lymphoproliferative disorder (PTLD) in 2 cases (4%), and bronchiolitis obliterans with organizing pneumonia (BOOP), pulmonary cytolytic thrombi (Figure 4), and emphysema each in 1 case (2%) (Table 1). Nineteen (100%) of 19 pediatrie patients and 24 (77%) of 31 adult patients had allogeneic BMT. All of the pulmonary complications showed a higher incidence in allogeneic BMT recipients. A higher incidence of DAH (8/19, 42’Xo) was revealed in the pediatrie age group compared with adults (4/31, 13%). All other complications were more common in adult patients. Six (33%) of 18 DAD cases and 5 (42%) of 12 DAH cases occurred in patients who survived more than 100 days after BMT. Pulmonary complications were the only cause of death in 32 cases (64%) and were 1 of multiple causes of death in 5 patients (10%). All cases of DAD, DAH, pulmonary edema, invasive pulmonary aspergillosis, and bronchopneumonia were the only COD or 1 of multiple contributing factors. Seven of 18 DAD cases also showed DAH. Four of 7 focal hemorrhage cases had nonpulmonary complications as the only cause of death (massive gastrointestinal bleeding, herpes simplex virus hepatitis, intracranial hemorrhage, and residual or recurrent leukemia). The remaining 3 cases of focal hemorrhage were associated with DAD (2 cases) and bronchopneumonia (1 case). In this latter group, the significance, if any, of focal hemorrhage as the COD could not be determined. Pulmonary hypertension was seen in 5 cases. The etiology of pulmonary hypertension could not be determined, although 1 of those cases also had thromboemboli. There was no cases with venoocclusive disease of the lungs. Two patients had pulmonary emboli, one of whom died of massive embolism and the other of nonpulmonary complications (severe gastrointestinal bleeding and GVHD). Two patients had PTLD that involved the lungs: one was treated and the tumor was necrotic; the other case was an incidental finding at autopsy. The former died of nonpulmonary complications, whereas the latter had DAH. One case with BOOP also had DAH as the COD. Pulmonary cytolytic thrombi (PCTs) were found in one case as an incidental findingbecause the patient died of congestive heart failure. A patient with emphysema died of hepatic veno-occlusive disease, and emphysema was not considered to be a contributor to the patient’s demise. Pulmonary edema was present in 6 patients, 2 of whom also had DAH and DAD, respectively.

Table 1. Summary of Clinical and Pathologic Findings*

Other, nonpulmonary complications that led to death included the following (some patients had more than 1 complication): gastrointestinal bleeding (3 patients), multiorgan failure secondary to tumor involvement (3 patients), GVHD (2 patients), intracranial hemorrhage (2 patients), myocardial infarction (1 patient), sepsis (1 patient), thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura (1 patient), capillary leak syndrome (1 patient), congestive heart failure secondary to coronary artery disease (1 patient), multiorgan hemorrhage secondary to thrombocytopenia (1 patient), veno- occlusive disease of the liver (2 patients), herpes simplex virus hepatitis (1 patient), and autoimmune hemolytic anemia (1 patient).

Of the 37 cases in which pulmonary complications were the only or 1 of multiple CODs, 18 had positive cultures within the last week of life or from lung and/or blood obtained at the time of autopsy (lung and blood cultures positive in 3 cases, lung cultures positive in 11 cases, and blood cultures positive in 4 cases). The remaining 19 (51%) of the 37 cases had no documented pathogens from lungs or blood. Microbiology culture results obtained within 1 week of death and, in some patients, culture results from the tissue or blood obtained at autopsy and common pulmonary complications diagnosed at autopsy are given in Tables 2 through 4. Only 2 of 6 bronchopneumonia cases had pathogens cultured within 1 week of death (both bacterial and both from the lungs).

Twenty-three patients had a BAL performed within 2 weeks of death, all of which produced negative results for viral inclusions. One BAL result was positive for Aspergillus identified on Gomori methenamine silver-stained slides. This patient was treated and did not have any evidence of fungal infection at autopsy. Five of the 6 patients who had Aspergillus infections of the lungs diagnosed at autopsy had no evidence of fungal organisms in the BAL performed within 2 weeks of death. Only 3 of 6 patients with Aspergillus infections documented at autopsy had prior positive cultures from the lung, all of which were positive for bacteria and none for fungal organisms. The 3 patients whose BAL cytologie specimens showed atypical cells had diffuse alveolar damage diagnosed at autopsy. Information on the color of the BAL specimen was available in 14 cases. All 6 BAL specimens from DAH cases were grossly red; however, only 6 of the 14 BAL specimens that were grossly red were from DAH cases.

Table 2. Early Versus Late Pulmonary Complications After BMT*

Table 3. Common Pulmonary Complications After BMT and Correlation With Microbiology Results*

Table 4. Common Pulmonary Complications After> BMT Resulting in Death Within 3 Weeks of Transplantation and Correlation With Microbiology Results*

COMMENT

Pulmonary complications were the most common cause of mortality in BMT recipients in this study, representing the only proximate COD in 64% or 1 of multiple CODs in an additional 10% of cases. The BMT recipients have significant immunosuppression due to the underlying disorder and the conditioning therapy (chemotherapy and total body irradiation) that they are subjected to before the transplantation, resulting in impaired cell-mediated and humoral immune function abnormalities for 6 to 12 months.1* Nearly all of the immunologie system is impaired during the first 4 to 5 months after a BMT, with polymorphonuclear leukocytes recovering in 2 to 4 weeks and the lymphocyte count not returning to normal values for months, resulting in serious life-threatening infections of the lungs and other organ systems.9,10

In 51% of the cases in which pulmonary complications were the only or 1 of multiple CODs, blood and lung cultures were negative during the last week of life, suggesting noninfectious pulmonary complications as a significant contributor to the demise of these patients. Immediate noninfectious pulmonary complications occur within the first few weeks after BMT and are thought to be secondary to the cytoreductive therapy (chemotherapy and radiation). Fourteen (74%) of the 19 patients who died of pulmonary complications and had negative blood and lung cultures died more than 3 weeks after the BMT. The relatively large proportion of patients who died more than 3 weeks after the BMT without positive cultures may indicate either nondocumented pathogens or noncytoreductive therapy-related complications such as GVHD. Thirty-three percent of the DAD and 42% of the DAH cases, which are more commonly reported in the early post- BMT period, died more than 100 days after the BMT.

The most common pulmonary complication that we identified in this autopsy series was DAD, which was present in 36% of cases. Other studies have also found DAD to be the most common fatal lung complication in BMT recipients.11,12 The DAD is a final common pathway for various types of acute lung injury, such as infections, drugs, or radiation therapy. The DAD commonly does not have an identifiable infectious etiology in BMT recipients.11,13 In the present series, half (9/18) of the DAD cases had negative antemortem and postmortem cultures, suggesting some form of noninfectious injury as the underlying etiology.

First described in autologous BMT recipients, DAH is a clinical syndrome characterized by an acute onset of alveolar infiltrates, bloody BAL, and hypoxemia in the absence of infection.8 The clinical and radiologie features of DAH are nonspecific. Although pulmonary infections may also cause hemorrhage, the term DAH is reserved for BMT recipients without documented infectious etiology. Commonly, DAH occurs within 2 or 3 weeks of BMT (range, 1-8 weeks) when most patients are still neutropenic.14,15 Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage is associated with a mortality that exceeds 70%, although higher survival rates have been reported in some series.8,14 Initially described in autologous BMT recipients, DAH was later found to be more common in allogeneic BMT recipients with a higher mortality rate, especially in the pediatric age group.16,17 In our study, all DAH cases occurred in allogeneic BMT recipients. The incidence of DAH was higher in pediatric compared with adult cases (42% vs 13%). This may be, in part, explained by the fact that all pediatrie patients were allogeneic BMT recipients in this series. Although DAH is a clinical entity, the diagnosis of which is based on clinical, bronchoscopy, and radiologie findings, we used this term to describe the pathology of cases in which blood was present in at least 30% of the alveolar surfaces of the lung tissue.16,18,19 We identified DAH in 24% of all BMT recipients who had an autopsy in our institution during the study period. A total of 58% of DAH cases had positive cultures before death, raising the possibility that infection may be the underlying cause or contribute to the etiology of DAH, whereas the remaining cases (42%) had negative lung cultures within 1 week of death. The exact cause of DAH in not clear and is likely multifactorial. Some authors believe DAH is secondary to cytoreductive therapy, whereas others claim that the influx of neutrophils into the lung is the underlying pathogenesis, since the onset of DAH frequently coincides with the onset of bone marrow engraftment (1-3 weeks).9,20 However, 3 (60%) of 5 culture-negative DAH cases were seen after 3 weeks of the BMT. The latter finding is consistent with the high proportion (42%) of late-onset DAH found in other series.8 One possible underlying cause of noninfectious and late-onset DAH is acute GHVD.16,21 However, causes other than GVHD are likely, since DAH is commonly associated with autologous BMT, whereas GVHD is rare in these patients.8,15 Similar to DAH, DAD shows intra-alveolar hemorrhage. Coexistence of DAH and DAD in 7 cases raises the possibility that a subset of DAH actually represents DAD with extensive intra-alveolar hemorrhage. On the other hand, this may indicate that the same etiologic agent may cause 2 histologie patterns of injury. As defined in this study, DAH (blood in more than 30% of the alveolar surface) may not be completely superimposable to the clinically diagnosed DAH. The presence of bloody (grossly red colored) BAL specimens received in all of DAH patients who had BAL performed, however, suggests a significant overlap between “clinical” and “pathologic” DAH. Further studies are needed to correlate the pathologically diagnosed DAH to the clinically diagnosed DAH.

Focal hemorrhage, defined as involving less than 30% of the lungs, was seen in 7 cases, most of which involved less than 10% of the tissue. Four of these patients died of nonpulmonary complications. In these patients, focal hemorrhage might be a terminal event related to cardiopulmonary resuscitation efforts. It is unlikely that focal hemorrhage cases are early phases of DAH, although this possibility cannot be entirely ruled out. In 2 cases, focal hemorrhage was associated and may be a part of DAD.

Two patients had secondary malignancy, both of which were PTLD. The cumulative incidence of PTLD after BMT at 10 years is between 0% and 1%, and most post-BMT PTLD develops within 6 months of transplantation.22-24 In our series, one case was diagnosed ante mortem, and this patient was being treated at the time of death. This case had multiple, small nonviable tumor nodules in the lungs. The other case was diagnosed at autopsy and involved the lungs focally.

A recently described complication of BMT, PCTs were seen in one patient who died of congestive heart failure. The PCTs are exclusively seen in pediatric allogeneic BMT recipients at the time of GVHD in other org\an systems, suggesting an acute GVHD of the lungs in which the endothelial cells are the target.25,26 Usually, PCTs present as pulmonary nodules and spontaneously resolve, although rare fatal cases have been reported.27 One case of PCT in this series was diagnosed post mortem in a 1-year-old patient with Hurler disease that had allogeneic BMT.

Nonbacterial pathogens such as Aspergillus and CMV are difficult to identify ante mortem and are frequently only diagnosed at postmortem examination. In one study, 67% of Aspergillus and 65% of CMV infections were not diagnosed ante mortem.13 In another study, Aspergillus infection was missed with BAL and open lung biopsy in 40% of the patients with this complication.28-30 The diagnostic sensitivity of BAL is reported to be 30% to 50% in BMT recipients.31 Similarly in our study, none of the BAL specimens from patients with pulmonary Aspergillus infection documented at autopsy had morphologic evidence of fungal infection or positive antemortem cultures. This is a significant finding, especially since fungal infections are a common cause of morbidity and mortality in BMT recipients.12 An unexpected finding was the presence of bacterial pathogens in only 2 of 6 bronchopneumonia cases. However, these patients are frequently under broadspectrum antibiotic coverage, especially when they present with possible signs of infection.

Acute GVHD after BMT is common, seen in 40% to 70% of the BMT recipients and mostly involving the skin, liver, and gastrointestinal tract.33-35 Lymphocytic bronchitis and obliterative bronchiolitis, histopathologic correlates for acute and chronic GVHD of the lungs, respectively, are reported in 2% to 15% of allogeneic BMT recipients, with a mortality rate of 50%.36 We did not find GVHD that involved the lungs in any of our cases. This may be in part due to the relatively short interval between BMT and death in our cases and the relatively low number of long-term survivors in whom obliterative bronchiolitis could develop.

With the increasing number of long-term survivors after BMT, long- term complications, including secondary malignancies, are becoming a concern.3,37 Twenty-four (46%) of the 50 patients in the current series survived longer than 3 months after the BMT putting them at risk for late-onset noninfectious complications. The spectrum of late-onset, noninfectious pulmonary complications is rather poorly defined and includes, according to some authors, bronchiolitis obliterans, BOOP, DAD, lymphocytic interstitial pneumonia, and nonclassifiable interstitial pneumonia, whereas others include only bronchiolitis obliterans, BOOP, and idiopathic pneumonia syndrome.2,36,38 Recently, these complications have been collectively referred to as late-onset pulmonary syndrome.3 The rates of significant late-onset noninfectious pulmonary complications that involve the lungs are reported to be 10% to 40% in patients with BMT.36,39,40 However, most of these studies included adult patients, and results are conflicting because of range selection and evaluation criteria. Only one case in our series had a late-onset noninfectious pulmonary complication, namely BOOP. This low rate may be due to inclusion of pediatrie patients in this study or to selection bias in the autopsy requests where patients with acute or infectious complications not diagnosed before death are overrepresented.

There is an inherent bias in autopsy and retrospective studies. However, in BMT recipients, the use of transbronchial and open lung biopsy is limited, and many times the diagnosis and confirmation of pulmonary disease are only done at the time of autopsy, making the few autopsy studies reported in the literature a valuable resource. Future prospective studies may overcome some of these drawbacks.

In conclusion, pulmonary complications are a significant COD in BMT recipients. Currently, many of these complications, especially the fungal infections, are difficult to diagnose ante mortem, and autopsy examination is helpful in accurately establishing the COD in these patients. The etiology of both DAD and DAH is multifactorial, and in many of our cases there was no evidence of an infectious etiology. These complications are not limited to certain periods after the BMT and should be included in the differential diagnosis of late-onset pulmonary complications.

We thank Kathy Olson, BA, Laboratory Information Systems Specialist, for providing the microbiology results for the patients.

References

1. Cordonnier C, Bernaudin JF, Bierling P Huet Y, Vernant JP. Pulmonary complications occurring after allogencic bone marrow transplantation: a study of 130 consecutive transplanted patients. Cancer. 1986;58:1047-1054.

2. Palmas A, Tefferi A, Myers JL, et al. Late-onset noninfectious pulmonary complications after allogeneic bone marrow transplantation. BrJ Haematol. 1 998; 100:680-687.

3. Leiper AD. Non-endocrine late complications of bone marrow transplantation in childhood: part I. Br I Haematol. 2002;118:3-22.

4. Dunagan D, Chin R Jr, McCain T, et al. Staging by positron emission tomography predicts survival in patients with non-small cell lung cancer. Chest. 2001:119:333-339.

5. Whittle AT, Davis M, Johnson PR, Leonard RC, Greening AP. The safety and usefulness of routine bronchoscopy before stem cell transplantation and during neutropenia. Bone Marrow Transplant. 1999;24:63-67.

6. Shorter NA, Ross AJ 111, August C, et al. The usefulness of open-lung biopsy in the pediatrie bone marrow transplant population. / Pediatr Surg. 1988:23:533537.

7. Snyder CL, Ramsay NK, McClave PB, Ferrell KL, Leonard AS. Diagnostic open-lung biopsy after bone marrow transplantation. / Pediatr Surg. 1990:25:871876 discussion 876-877.

8. At’essa B, Tefferi A, Litzow MR, Krowka MJ, Wylam ME, Peters SC. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage in hematopoietic stem cell transplant recipients. Am / Respir Crit Care /vied. 2002;1 66:641- 645.

9. Wah TM, Moss HA, Robertson RJ, Barnard DL. Pulmonary complications following bone marrow transplantation. Br I Radiol. 2003:76:373-379.

10. Dichter JR, Levine SJ, Shelhamer JH. Approach to the immunocompromised host with pulmonary symptoms. Hcmatol Oncol CUn North Am. 1993:7: 887-912.

11. Bornbi JA, Cardesa A, Llebaria C, et al. Main autopsy findings in bone marrow transplant patients. Arch Pathol Lab Med. 1987;111:125-129.

12. Nuckols JD. Autopsy findings in umbilical cord blood transplant recipients. Am I CHn Pathol. 1999;112:335-342.

13. Chandrasekar PH, Weinmann A, Shearer C. Autopsy-identified infections among bone marrow transplant recipients: a clinicopathologic study of 56 patients. Bone Marrow Transplant. 1995:16:675-681.

14. Lewis ID, DeFor T, Weisdorf DJ. Increasing incidence of diffuse alveolar hemorrhage following allogeneic bone marrow transplantation: cryptic etiology and uncertain therapy. Bone Marrow Transplant. 2000:26:539-543.

15. Weisdorf DJ. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage: an evolving problem? Leukemia. 2003:17:1049-1050.

16. Agusti C, Ramirez ], Picado C, et al. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage in allogeneic bone marrow transplantation: a postmortem study. Am I Kespir Crit Care Med. 1995:151:1006-1010.

17. Ben-Abraham R, Pare! C, Cohen R, et al. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage following allogeneic hone marrow transplantation in children. Chest. 20().i;124: 660-664.

18. De Lassence A, Fleury-Feith J, Escudier E, Beaune I, Bernaudin JF, Cordonnier C. Alveolar hemorrhage: diagnostic criteria and results in 194 immunocompromised hosts. Am ] Respir Crit Care Med. 1995:151:157-16).

19. Robbins RA, Under J, Stahl MG, et al. Diffuse alveolar hemorrhage in autologous bone marrow transplant recipients. Am j Med. 1989;87:511-518.

20. Chan CK, Hyland RH, Hutcheon MA. Pulmonary complications following bone marrow transplantation. Clin Chest Med. 1990:11:323- 332.

21. Wojno KJ, Vogelsang GB, Beschorner WE, Santos GW. Pulmonary hemorrhage as a cause of death in allogeneic bone marrow recipients with severe acute graft-versus-host disease. Transplantation. 1994)57:88-92.

22. Curtis RE, Travis LB, Rovvlings PA, et al. Risk of lymphoproliferative disorders after bone marrow transplantation: a multi-institutional study. Blood. 1999; 94:2208-2216.

23. Muti G, De Gasperi A, Cantoni S, et al. Incidence and clinical characteristics of posttransplant lymphoproliferative disorders: report from a single center. Transpl Int. 2000;13lsuppl 1 ):S382-S387.

24. Socie G, Curtis RE, Deeg HJ, et al. New malignant diseases after allogeneic marrow transplantation for childhood acute leukemia. I CUn Oncol. 2000;18: 348-357.

25. Gulbahce HE, Manivel JC, Jcssurun J. Pulmonary cytolytic thrombi: a previously unrecognized complication of bone marrow transplantation. Am I Surg Palhol. 2000:24:1147-1152.

26. Woodard JP Gulbahce E, Shreve M, et al. Pulmonary cytolytic thrombi: a newly recognized complication of stem cell transplantation. Bone Marro\v Transplant. 2000:25:293-300.

27. Morales IJ, Anderson PM, Tazelaar HD, Wylam ME. Pulmonary cytolytic thrombi: unusual complication of hematopoietic stem cell transplantation. / Pediatr Hematol Oncol. 2003:25:89-92.

28. Crawford SW, Hackman RC, Clark JG. Open lung biopsy diagnosis of diffuse pulmonary infiltrates after marrow transplantation. Chest. 1988:94:949-953.

29. Crawford SW, Hackman RC, Clark JG. Biopsy diagnosis and clinical outcome of persistent focal pulmonary lesions after marrow transplantation. Transplantation. 1989:48:266-271.

30. Quabeck K. The lung as a critical organ in marrow transplantation. Bone Marrow Transplant. 1994;14(suppl 4):S19-528.

31. Jantunen E, Anttila VJ, Ruutu T. Aspergillus infections in allogeneic stem cell transplant recipients: have we made any progress? Bone Marro\Transplant. 2002:30:925-929.

32. Heurlin N, Bergstrom SE, Winiarski J, et al. Fungal pneumonia: the predominant lung infection causing death in children undergoing bone marrow transplantation. Acta Paediatr. 1996:85:168- 172.

33. Beschorner WE, S\aral R, Hutchins GM, Tutschka PJ, Santos GW. Lymphocytic bronchitis associated with graft-versus-host disease in recipients of bonemarrow transplants. N Engl I Med. 1978;299:1030- 1036.

34. Schultz KR, Green GJ, Wensley D, et al. Obstructive lung disease in children after allogeneic bone marrow transplantation. Blood. 1994:84:3212-3220.

35. Sloane JP, Depledge MH, Powles RE, Morgenstern GR, Trickey BS, Dady PJ. Histopathology of the lung after bone marrow transplantation. I C.lin Pathol. 1983:36:546-554.

36. Socie G, Salooja N, Cohen A, et al. Nonmalignant late effects after allogeneic stem cell transplantation. Blood. 2003:101:3373- 3385.

37. Khurshid I, Anderson LC. Non-infectious pulmonary complications after bone marrow transplantation. Postgrad Med /. 2002:78:257-262.

38. Sakaida E, Nakaseko C, Harima A, et al. Late-onset nonintectious pulmonary complications after allogeneic stem cell transplantation are significantly associated with chronic graft- versus-host disease and with the graft-versus-leukemia effect. Blood. 2003:102:4236-4242.

39. Griese M, Rampf U, Hofmann D, Fuhrer M, Reinhardt D, Bender- Gotze C. Pulmonary complications after bone marrow transplantation in children: twenty-four years of experience in a single pediatrie center. Pediatr Pu/mono/. 2000; 30:393-401.

40. Paul K. Non-infectious lung complications after transplantation. Ann Hematol. 2002;81(suppl 2}:S11-S16.

Monika Roychowdhury, MD; Stefan E. Pambuccian, MD; Deniz L. Asian, MD; Jose jessurun, MD; Alan C. Rose, MD; J. Carlos Manivel, MD; H. Evin Gulbahce, MD

Accepted for publication November 2, 2004.

From the University of Minnesota Medical School, Fairview- University Medical Center, Minneapolis.

Presented in part at the annual meeting of the United States and Canadian Academy of Pathology, Vancouver, British Columbia, March 6- 12,2004.

The authors have no relevant financial interest in the products or companies described in this article.

Reprints: H. Evin Gulbahce, MD, Division of Surgical Pathology, Mayo Building C422, MMC 76, 420 Delaware St SE, Minneapolis, MN 55455 (e-mail: [email protected]).

Copyright College of American Pathologists Mar 2005

Adolescent and Adult Issues in CHARGE Syndrome

Summary:

Very little information has been published about adolescents and older individuals with Coloboma, Heart defects, Atresia choanae, Retarded growth and development, Genital hypoplasia, Ear anomalies and deafness (CHARGE) syndrome. This paper describes the results of a study that identifies the unique issues faced by adolescents and adults with CHARGE. Descriptive information was gathered from parents of patients with CHARGE, and/or the patients themselves, about their developmental, medical, educational, and social history. The resulting body of information provides important insights into the prognosis and special needs of individuals with CHARGE, as well as further research questions. Clin Pediatr. 2005;44:151-159

Introduction

CHARGE syndrome is a congenital disorder that affects multiple organ systems. Hall1 and Hittner et al2 first described the association of malformations in 1979. In 1981 Pagon and colleagues3 coined the acronym CHARGE, representing Coloboma, Heart defects, Atresia choanae, Retarded growth and development, Genital hypoplasia, Ear anomalies and deafness. The etiology of CHARGE has challenged geneticists; however, a mutation in a new member of the chromodomain gene family (CHD7) have been identified in CHARGE individuals and offers a genetic cause for CHARGE syndrome.4 Blake et al5 refined the diagnostic criteria for CHARGE syndrome to include major, minor, and occasional findings (Table 1).

Until now very little information has been published about adolescents and older individuals with CHARGE syndrome.6-8 This is for 2 reasons. First, since CHARGE syndrome is a relatively recent diagnosis, many adolescents and adults with the syndrome were not diagnosed as infants. second, the many complicated medical problems encountered by infants born with CHARGE syndrome meant that, until recently, survival beyond early childhood was uncommon. This is changing with improving medical technology, and many infants with CHARGE syndrome are surviving into their teens and beyond.

The appearance of an older cohort in the CHARGE syndrome population raises many questions, particularly as these patients often present with issues that are not represented in the syndrome criteria. For example, little is known about puberty and the utility of hormone replacement therapy (HRT) in CHARGE syndrome. It has also been difficult to predict the level of independence that adults with CHARGE syndrome achieve. As more patients are diagnosed and survive into their teens, specific medical, psychological, behavioral, and educational concerns arise that should be anticipated and addressed.

Table 1

MEDICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CHARGE SYNDROME, ESTIMATED POPULATION FREQUENCIES, AND SAMPLE FREQUENCIES (n = 30)

This paper describes the results of a study of the unique issues faced by adolescents and adults with CHARGE syndrome. Descriptive preliminary information was gathered from parents of patients with CHARGE syndrome, and/or the patients themselves, about their developmental, medical, educational, and social history. The resulting body of information provides important insights into the prognosis and special needs of CHARGE syndrome individuals, as well as further research questions.

Methods and Materials

Participants were identified by using address lists of the CHARGE Syndrome Foundation, Inc., and United Kingdom CHARGE family support group. Additional participants were recruited at 2 biannual International CHARGE Syndrome Foundation Conferences (1999 and 2001). Inclusion criteria included the following: (1) having a diagnosis of CHARGE syndrome and (2) being age 13 years or older. One or both parents and/or the individual with CHARGE were asked to take part in a structured interview lasting approximately 45 minutes. (The interview questionnaire can be requested from the corresponding author [KDB]). If consent was forthcoming, the interview was conducted in person or over the phone, by either the primary investigator or a research assistant. The data were entered into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and analyzed by use of descriptive statistics.

Results

Thirty participants were identified. Sixteen were female (53%), and 14 were male (47%). Participants ranged in age from 13 to 30 years. The mean age was 17.6 (M = 4.24). Females had a mean age of 17 (M = 3.65), and males had a mean age of 18.4 (M = 4.86). The average age at diagnosis was 5.39 years (M = 6.87), though this information was missing for 2 of the females. Age at diagnosis ranged from 1 week to 21 years.

Interviewees were asked about the presence of specific CHARGErelated abnormalities. The following were reported in order of decreasing frequency: developmental delay, ear abnormalities, coloboma, cranial nerve dysfunction, cardiovascular malformations, genital hypoplasia, growth deficiency, choanal atresia, orofacial cleft, renal anomalies, tracheoesophageal fistula, spinal anomalies, abdominal defects, hand anomalies, and thymic/parathyroid hypoplasia. All frequencies for the sample were equal to or above expected population frequencies reported by Blake et al5 (Table 1). Spinal anomalies, orofacial clefts, and hand anomalies were reported more frequently in this sample than by Blake et ai.5 In addition, as is reportedly typical in this population, walking was delayed for most participants. The mean age at walking (n = 30) was 4.1 years (SD = 3.3).

Participants reported the following specialties as being frequently involved in their care: Ophthalmology, ENT, Endocrinology, Cardiology, Psychiatry, Orthopedics, Neurology, with Orthodontics, Chiropractics, Urology, and Nephrology, less frequent (Table 2).

Information on the development of secondary sex characteristics was gathered for both males and females. Males (n = 14) showed late development of puberty, both with and without HRT. Only 2 males developed secondary sex characteristics when not receiving HRT. Three male individuals had not yet shown signs of pubertal development at the average age of 13.3 years. The average age of pubertal development for males receiving HRT was 15.1 years (n = 8). One individual who had received HRT had not yet reached pubertal milestones at the age of 17. Females (n = 16) showed somewhat late development of puberty but were not as dependent on the use of HRT as males were. The average age of pubertal development for girls not receiving HRT was 13.3 years (n = 8), whereas the average age of pubertal development for girls receiving HRT was 14.3 (n = 3). Five girls who did not receive HRT had not yet reached pubertal milestones at the average age of 13.8. Data on stature were analyzed for the 12 participants who were 19 years or older. Males (n = 5) ranged from 155 to 182 cm (mean = 167.5), and females (n = 6) [missing data from 1 participant] ranged from 50 to 170 cm (mean = 161 cm).

Table 2

REPORTED FOLLOW-UP WITH MEDICAL SPECIALISTS (n = 30)

Figure 1. A 14-year-old male with CHARGE syndrome. Facial features show the flattened cup/lop ear shape. Left-sided facial palsy. Broad forehead and tip of nose. Rounded shoulders, short neck.

Numerous new medical issues were identified by participants. These included scoliosis, sleep apnea, abdominal colic (described as pain in the center of the abdomen that was gripping and coming and going intermittently), retinal detachment, cataracts, migraines, seizures/epilepsy, urinary tract infections, and hypoglycemia (Table 3).

Psychiatric and behavioral diagnoses were also common, as outlined in Tables 4 and 5. Twenty-two participants (73%) reported having sought help from a psychologist.’and 18 of 29 (62%) took prescription medications for specific behavioral problems. These medications included stimulants, antidepressants, sympatholytics, and mood stabilizers. One participant did not provide information about psychotropic medications.

Several questions were asked regarding daily independent living skills. These included questions ranging from personal care (dressing, washing, toileting self) to independent mobility in the community (getting to/from work or school independently) to home care and finances (cleaning, cooking, shopping, finances). Ten of the 30 study participants (33%) had not yet reached a level of independence in any of the areas assessed. These 10 participants ranged in age from 13 to 18 years. Results are summarized in Table 6. Almost two thirds of participants had achieved near or full independence in dressing and toileting. The mean age for toilet training (n = 24) was 5.5 years (SD = 3.1). Ten participants were not yet trained. Of these 10, 2 had persistent nighttime wetting only. Sixty-five percent had achieved near or full independence in washing themselves. Higher order daily living skills showed a different result. Forty-five percent had achieved near or full independence in getting to and from work or school. Thirty percent achieved this in cleaning, and 20% achieved it in shopping. Near or full independence in cooking was not achieved by any of the participants. One participant had achieved full independence in taking care of finances.

Table 3

NEW MEDICAL ISSUES (n = 30)

Table 4

MENTAL HEALTH DIAGNOSES RECEIVED (n = 30)

Table 5

REPORTED BEHAVIORAL CONCERNS (n = 30)

Table 6

DEGREE OF INDEPENDENCE (n = 30)

Discuss\ion

Age at Diagnosis

Participants in this study were diagnosed, on average, at over 5 years of age. This is late, considering that CHARGE syndrome is a congenital condition with a number of characteristic features. The delay in diagnosis is likely due to a lack of awareness of CHARGE syndrome among both health care professionals and the population in general. A population study performed by the Canadian Paediatric Surveillance Program suggests that this is changing, as there has been a trend toward earlier diagnosis in recent years.9

Early diagnosis is important in caring for patients with CHARGE, for it enables families and health care professionals to anticipate and address health care and developmental issues more effectively. Early information enables caregivers to prepare for and perhaps even prevent some medical problems. For example, if CHARGE syndrome is suspected in infancy, the infants can be expected to have some hearing and/or vision problems before they would otherwise be clinically detected. Early ascertainment and correction of hearing and vision problems can have a significant impact on developmental prognosis. Careful coordination of medical and early intervention services is clearly indicated to support the growth and development of these individuals.10

Frequencies of CHARGE Syndrome Anomalies

The frequencies of CHARGE syndrome anomalies reported by participants were equal to or above expected population frequencies reported by Blake et aP (Table 1). Spinal anomalies showed the largest increase in comparison. This follows logic, as many spinal anomalies will not manifest until children are older. Additionally, the present sample of older children and adults is likely to have more identified and more accurate diagnoses for many anomalies than the more age-diverse sample described by Blake et al5 because of the luxury of time.

Orofacial clefts were found 3 times as often in this study group than in previous reports. One hypothesis is that this could be a survival phenomenon. Those who have cleft palate may have survived the neonatal period because the clefting acted as an airway. It has been postulated that in the criteria for CHARGE syndrome the cleft palate may be a substitute for bilateral postnasal choanal atresia (personal communication).

Number of Professionals

Participants in this study engaged a great number of professionals in their care. This is similar to the findings of Hartshorne11 and Blake and Brown12 in the early 1990s. Parents of children with CHARGE syndrome in the study by Hartshorne contacted an average of 17 professional types on a regular basis in caring for their children. Families of individuals with CHARGE syndrome become responsible for keeping track of all of the information given them. Because of this, primary care physicians should attempt to support these efforts by taking the following steps: ( 1 ) provide some level of case coordination for these individuals and their families, (2) engage in case collaboration with attending specialists, (3) facilitate the scheduling of multiple appointments together in order to ease the logistical difficulties many families face, and (4) enhance parents’ understanding of issues by interpreting results and (sometimes conflicting) recommendations made by specialists in order to provide the best medical management for the whole individual.13

Puberty

There appears to be a range in pubertal development and a pattern unique to each gender. Males demonstrated significant delays in puberty, even with HRT. Females did not seem to depend on HRT, but puberty was still somewhat delayed. Hypogonadism has been postulated in CHARGE syndrome.14 The current data show a difference between the male and female participants. It is likely that end-organ unresponsiveness also plays a role in the lack of secondary sexual characteristics in the male. Pubertal delay and the problems that ensue, i.e., osteoporosis, are often overlooked in the management of CHARGE syndrome.? Adolescents with CHARGE syndrome should be followed up closely by endocrine specialists in order to determine problems with growth and puberty, as well as risks for other conditions such as osteoporosis and hypoglycemia. The attainment of normal adult height is supported by the literature.7,15 It is also important to monitor for obesity in later adult life, for this has been shown to be prevalent in those individuals who have reached midlife7 (personal observations by Dr. Blake).

New Issues Identified

This study identified a number of issues that are either being newly recognized as part of the spectrum of CHARGE syndrome characteristics or surfacing as unique to CHARGE in adolescence and adulthood. Anticipating these issues is of great importance, so that appropriate screening and follow-up care can be arranged. The following examples illustrate this point.

Scoliosis was present in 19 of the 30 study participants (63%). Scoliosis typically progresses during periods of accelerated growth. Therefore, children with CHARGE should be monitored closely by orthopedics and physical therapists during these times.

Thirteen (43%) of the study participants experienced sleep apnea. Because children with CHARGE often have tracheal anomalies and low muscle tone, a sleep study/screening and followup with an ENT specialist may be warranted. If others sleep disturbances are present, physicians should provide families with information about sleep hygiene before attempting pharmacologie intervention.

Abdominal colic, defined as “pain in the center of the abdomen, which is gripping and comes and goes intermittently,” was reported by 40% of the individuals surveyed. Individuals with CHARGE syndrome have significant problems with oral feeding, often needing gastrostomy or jejenostomy feeding.12,16 Gastroesophageal (GER) reflux is common and often requires reflux medicine and/or surgery. Ruling out GER is important; however, older individuals with CHARGE may present with gallstones (personal communication from 3 families and a recent case history7).

Parents of children with CHARGE syndrome have reported relief of pain by abdominal massage around the colon location, venting gastrostomy tubes, and avoiding foods likely to cause extra gas.16

One third of participants reported retinal detachment or cataracts. Retinal detachment is more common in individuals with chorioretinal (posterior) colobomata, and can be exacerbated by trauma from head banging or eye poking, behaviors observed frequently in individuals with CHARGE syndrome. Consequently, regular and ongoing ophthalmologic follow-up care is recommended in order to provide treatment at the earliest stages.17

Migraine headaches were reported by more than one fourth of participants. Additionally, 17% reported seizures. Other neurologic problems may be present for those displaying behavioral difficulties. Neurologic assessment, including an EEG, is recommended for individuals presenting with a recent onset of behavior difficulties. In addition, individuals with CHARGE syndrome and their families should be provided with education on seizure management.

Urinary tract infections had been experienced by 17% of participants. For individuals with CHARGE who are experiencing difficulty with communicating, identifying the source of an infection may be difficult. Consequently, it is important to keep in mind that a urinary tract infection may be a viable cause of pain.

Behavior

Behavioral concerns and psychiatric diagnoses were common in participants. Almost one fourth of participants had seen a psychologist. Sixty-two percent took medication for problems with behavior or mood. The most common problems treated were socializing problems, obsessivecompulsive disorder, anxiety disorder, tics/ Tourette syndrome, and autism/pervasive developmental delay. Hartshorne and Cypher18 also found obsessivecompulsive disorder, Tourette syndrome, and autism/pervasive developmental delay, along with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, to be the most common diagnoses reported by parents of children with CHARGE syndrome in their sample. Reported behavioral concerns for the current sample included aggressiveness/outbursts, self-abuse, sleep problems, and tactile defensiveness. Note that many of these behaviors may be a result of neurologic difficulties.19,20 In addition, sensory impairments, balance and equilibrium difficulties, unrecognized pain, and communication barriers can lead an individual to engage in behaviors such as self-abuse and abuse of others. Further, common, regular life demands placed on an individual with a condition as complex as CHARGE syndrome can result in the individual’s engaging in behaviors aimed at reducing anxiety (repetitive motion, compulsions, social withdrawal). Consider the following example:

A 14-year-old young man (Figure 1) with CHARGE syndrome is lying on the floor of his home, curled in a fetal position. He is wringing his hands and blowing “raspberries” into them, repeatedly, at the rate of 1 time per second. He appears to be very tense and somewhat distressed. He has engaged in this behavior on and off for 2 hours. Attempts to stop the behavior verbally have no effect. Attempts to physically redirect the individual result in short cessations of the behavior. When the adult is no longer in view, the behavior continues.

A psychologist or psychiatrist unfamiliar with CHARGE syndrome may observe this individual and conclude that this young man meets the criteria for any of the following diagnoses: obsessive- compulsive disorder, tic disorder, anxiety disorder, autism, or others.

A psychologist or psychiatrist familiar with CHARGE syndrome will conduct a thorough Functional Behavior Assessment (FBA, now required of educational systems in certain circumstances by federal law in the United States) to determine any existing causes or functions of the behavior. Interventions are then based on these causes or fun\ctions. Upon carefully constructed interview and consultation with this young man’s family and school personnel, the psychologist found that (1) the youth is deaf; (2) he is legally blind; (3) he is not, at the time of the behavior, wearing his glasses or cochlear implant speech processor; (4) the youth is currently being treated for otitis media; (5) he is currently taking a broad-spectrum antibiotic, which frequently causes abdominal cramping; (6) he has some skin breakdown around his gastrostomy area; and (7) the youth is bored, with no one and nothing to engage him at the time of the observation.

After careful consideration, the professional will assist the family and caregivers to plan interventions that will (1) reduce the child’s pain, (2) reduce the child’s anxiety (this is done chiefly by giving the child a highly predictable environment), and (3) reduce the child’s boredom by stimulating his available senses.

After a thorough FBA is carried out, remaining behavioral symptomatology should be assessed. If no function or cause can be determined for the behavior, the professional, the individual, and the family should then determine whether the remaining symptoms warrant an exploration of pharmacologie interventions, taking the individual’s full medical history into account.

Independence

Participants in this sample had more independence in self-care skills than they did in higher order, complex tasks of daily living. One interpretation could be that the participants simply lack the ability to learn these skills. However, it could also be argued that these participants have lacked exposure to learning situations designed to teach these higher order skills, it is well known that individuals with both vision and hearing impairments have great difficulty learning things incidentally. Tasks must be broken down into steps and taught in controlled and organized ways in order for learning to take place. For those individuals still living at home (at least 80% of this sample), it is likely that parents and caregivers, lacking the time, energy, and expertise to teach these skills to their dependent youth, take primary responsibility for household chores such as shopping, cleaning, cooking, and managing finances. In contrast, a youth’s independence in self-care (i.e., toileting, dressing, washing) is important to caregivers, as a person’s independence at these tasks eases the burden of care for the caregiver. Thus, these self-care skills are more likely to be taught within the home setting. In-home training, in the form of occupational or educational therapy, can help to bridge this gap for these individuals. Skills should be task analyzed (broken down into simple steps) and taught within natural environments to facilitate learning and generalization.

Limitations

Caution should be observed in interpreting the results of this study, because of its limitations. The survey used was not pilot tested before use. Pilot testing may have ensured better understanding and reliability, which are necessary elements in a new instrument. Additionally, questions posed within this survey were based on parent report alone. Ideally, medical, educational, and psychological records would have been used to increase the validity of information. However, this is difficult to achieve in practice.

The participant pool for this study was obtained through the CHARGE Syndrome Foundation and other parent support groups. This is not likely to be a completely representative sample of the overall population of individuals with CHARGE syndrome. There are many individuals with CHARGE who have very few disabilities or difficulties, and these individuals may not maintain membership or request support from these groups. Therefore, this sample is not likely to fully represent that segment of the population, e.g., those who are more able and less medically involved.

Questions about independent living skills covered lower level skills and high-level skills but did not cover the middle range of independent living skills. Therefore, it was not possible to deHne the entire scope of ability in this sample.

Directions for Future Research

This line of research should be continued with this sample and others to confirm these findings and to determine if there are additional common adolescent and adult issues in CHARGE syndrome. As the population ages, these factors will become increasingly important for early diagnosis and treatment of individuals with CHARGE syndrome. In addition, the effectiveness of various medical, educational, and pharmacologie interventions on health, development, and behavior in CHARGE syndrome should be evaluated.

Conclusions

There is much still to know about individuals with CHARGE syndrome. This paper describes an attempt to identify commonly occurring issues for adolescents and adults. Several new medical issues were identified including scoliosis, delayed puberty, seizures, and ophthalmologic complications. The population of individuals with CHARGE syndrome is highly variable across all areas of development. We cannot describe a typical person with CHARGE syndrome. Therefore, those encountering a child with CHARGE syndrome are urged to gather as much information as possible about the range of medical, educational, and psychological outcomes possible, and to educate fami lies and caregivers about this range before their children move into adolescence. The CHARGE Syndrome Foundation publishes a manual on CHARGE syndrome for fami lies and professionals.8 This is a valuable comprehensive resource written by experts in the field of CHARGE syndrome. It contains medical and developmental information written for physicians, service providers, and families, to aid in management and understanding of the multiple medical and educational facets of CHARGE syndrome.

REFERENCES

1. Hall BD. Choanal alrcsia and associated multiple anomalies. J Pedialr. 1979;95:395-398.

2. Hillner HM, Hirsch NJ, Kieh GM, Rudolph AJ. Colobomatous microphthalmia, heart disease, hearing loss and mental retardation: a syndrome. J Pedialr Ophthalmol Strabismus. 1979; 16:122-128.

3. Pagon RA, Graham JM, /onana ], Yong SL. Coloboma, congenital heart disease, and choanal atresia with multiple anomalies: CHARGE syndrome. J Pedialr. 1981;99:223-227.

4. Vissers LELM, van Ravenswaaij CMA, Admiracl R, et al. Mutations in a new member of the chromodomain gene family cause CHARGE syndrome Nature Genetics; Published online 2004. http: // wwvw. nature, am/naturegerwtics.

5. Blake KD, Davenport SLH, Hall BD, et al. CHARGE syndrome: an update and review for the primary pediatrician. Clin Pedialr. 1998;37:159-174.

6. Lawand C, Graham JMJr, Prasad C, Blake KD. CHARGE association / syndrome: looking ahead. Published by the Canadian Pediatrie Surveillance Program (CPSP); 2003 Resources. http: /’ /www. cps. ca/ english/CPSP/ Resources/CHARGE. him.

7. Searle L, Graham JMJr, Prasad C, Blake KD. CHARCiE syndrome from birth to adulthood: an individual reported on from 0-33 years. Am. / Med Genet, (in press, 2004).

8. Heiner MS, Davenport SLH. CHARGK Syndrome: A Management Manual for Parents. Columbia, CHARCiE Syndrome Foundation, Inc., 1999,2001.

9. Issekut/ KA, Blake KD, et al. An epidemiology analysis of CHARCiK syndrome: preliminary results from a Canadian study. Am J Med Genel (in press 2004).

10. Salem-Hartshorne NS, Jacob S. Characteristics and development of children with CHARGE syndrome. JEarly Intervention, (in press 2004).

11. Hartshorne TS. Dealing with professionals: experience and some suggestions. First International CiHARGK Syndrome Conference for Families and Professionals, St. Louis, MO, 1993.

12. Blake IiD, Brown D. CHARCiE association looking at the future- the voice of a family support group. Child Cure Health Dev. 1993;19:395-409.

13. Blake KD, Russel-Eggitt IM, Morgan DW, et al. Who’s in CHARGE? Multidisciplinary managemcnl ol patients with CiHARGE association. Arch Dis Child. 1990;65:217-223.

14. August PA, Rosebaum KN, Friendly D. Hypopituahag and CiHARGF associauon.JPediatr. 1983;103:424-425.

15. Blake KD, Kirk JMW, Ur K. Growth in CHARGE association. Arc/ ; Dis Child. 1990;68:508-509.

16. Marche DM, Dobbelslcyn C, Rash id M, Blake KD. Oral sensory experiences and feeding development in children with GHARGE syndrome: a report of live cases. Presented at the 28th Annual Conference of the Canadian Association of Speech Language Pathologists and Audiologists, May 2003.

17. Russell-Eggill IM, Blake KD, Taylor DSl, Wyse RKH. The eye in the GHARGK association. UrJ Ophthalmol. 1990:74:421-420.

18. Hartshorne TS, Cypher AD. Challenging behavior in CHARGE syndrome. Ment Health Aspects Dev Dixabil. (in press 2004).

M). Lavvand GMD. Prasad C, Graham JM Jr, Blake KD. The cranial nerve anomalies in CHARGE association/syndrome. I’nedialr CMId 1 ImUh, 2003;8 (Suppl B):26B:3H.

20. Smith IM, Nichols S, Issekul/. K, Blake KD. Behavioral phenotype of CHARGE syndrome: preliminary data from the Canadian Pediatrie Surveillance Program. Am J Me.d Genet, (in press 2004).

Kim D. Blake, MD1

Nancy Salem-Hartshorne, PhD2

Marie Abi Daoud, BSc3

Janneke Gradstein3

1 Department of Pediatrics, IWK Health Centre, Dalhousie University, NS, Canada; department of Psychology, Central Michigan University, Mount Pleasant, Michigan, USA; and 3Dalhousie Medical School, Halifax, NS, Canada.

Reprint requests and correspondence to: Kirn Blake, MD, Associate Professor of Paediatrics, Dalhousie University, 5850/5980 University Avenue, PO Box 3070, Halifax, NS B3J 3G9, Canada.

2005 Westminster Publications, Inc., 708 Glen Cove Avenue, Glen Head, NY 11545, U.S.A.

Copyright Westminster Publications, Inc. Mar 2005

Cheap Drugs: Many People Flock to Mexico to Stock Up

Mar. 16–NUEVO PROGRESO, Mexico — People afflicted with arthritis, rheumatism, high cholesterol, heartburn, heart complications, allergies or infections know they can always head for the border to buy medications.

For many of them, it’s part of the daily routine in this Mexican border town across from Progreso, Texas.

Winter Texans from the Midwestern states or residents of the Rio Grande Valley, can be seen on any day at any of the dozen drugstores in the four square-blocks of Nuevo Progreso’s business district.

Scores of medications, such as those used to lower cholesterol, to treat arthritis and rheumatism and penicillin, are sold here over th counter, just like buying aspirin and Tylenol at a U.S. pharmacy.

In the United States, however, cholesterol reducers like Lipitor and Crestor, can only be purchased with a doctor’s prescription.

For the most part, medicine manufactured in Mexico by the same companies that make them in the United States costs about 30 percent less in Mexico.

Some drugstore clerks either don’t care or won’t discuss that some U.S.-made medicines cost about the same or are sometimes cheaper if bought at a U.S. pharmacy with a good health insurance plan.

“That may be true,” said Emigdio Garcia, owner of Garcia’s of Matamoros, “but what about people who have no insurance?”

For the uninsured, there are few alternatives but to walk or drive into a Mexican town and buy the type of medicine they need.

But even those covered by a U.S. health plan come here to buy medicines.

On a recent trip to this border town, many American shoppers said they have insurance, but declined to give their names. Some Valley residents said they buy medicine on the Mexican side of the border because their parents and grandparents did so for as long as they can remember.

Others said they would rather buy medicine here than going to a U.S. doctor where they have to wait sometimes for hours to see a physician, pay $10 to $20 or more depending on a co-payments and pay twice or three times as much for some medications.

However, medicine such as Lipitor and Crestor, both of which are prescribed by U.S. doctors to lower cholesterol, are more expensive here than in the United States if bought through a U.S. health insurance plan.

A Viagra pill, for instance, costs here from $13 to $15, compared to $10 if bought at an U.S. pharmacy with an insurance card. Miguel Gonzalez, a Corpus Christi resident, said he comes here to see a doctor and to buy medicine whenever he gets the chance.

“I have health insurance with the U.S. government,” he said, “but I only use it if something major happens to me.”

Teresa Sanchez, a McAllen resident, said she buys medicine to treat her arthritis.

“My insurance company would not pay for the prescription,” she said. “But I can buy it here for about half the price of what it would have cost me across.” But not all medications cost the same. Medication prices differ from drugstore to drugstore. In some cases, the price can vary by $2 at a pharmacy only two doors away from another. Store employees said they offer their own discounts in an effort to make a sale.

But whenever a businessperson owns a chain of several stores, like in the case of Azteca or Garcia’s, the discounts are bigger than those offered by someone who owns a single store. Garcia’s, a Matamoros-based business, has two drug stores here and two others in Matamoros.

“We buy large amounts of medications,” Garcia, the family patriarch, said in a recent interview. “That enables us to offer better discounts than what other pharmacies do.”

Winter Texans are among the biggest seasonal customers of the dozen drugstores found here. Unlike some Valley residents, these visitors are not shy to comment on buying medicine here.

“We wouldn’t be here if the drugmakers weren’t so greedy,” Phyllis Baxter, a visitor from Arkansas, said.

“They don’t even have generic drugs for some medications.”

Here, a generic version of Lipitor is widely offered at most drugstores. Baxter said she doesn’t buy a lot of medications, but buys a few whenever she is here.

In one instance, she said she buys a month’s supply of Lansoprazol at $20.

“It costs $90 in the United States,” Baxter, who is covered by a U.S. insurance plan, said. “That is a big difference.”

Lanzoprasol is the generic for Prevacid, she said, adding she wouldn’t be able to buy it back home because it is not available in the market.

“I am a nurse,” Baxter said, “and I know something about medications.”

Don and Martha Vaughn said they buy medicine here for the same reason.

Even with the new discount card offered by the government, Vaughn said he still saves a few dollars buying medicine here rather than in the United States.

Lorenzo Pelly, an internal medicine doctor in Brownsville, described the medicine shopping frenzy across the border as chaos.

“A lot of people go to buy medicine across the border when there are some medications that are cheaper on this side of the border,” he said.

“I know of people who have gone across to buy the wrong type of medications. Instead of getting better, some of them have ended up getting worse,” Pelly said. “It’s a chaos.”

—–

To see more of the Valley Morning Star, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.valleystar.com.

Copyright (c) 2005, Valley Morning Star, Harlingen, Texas

Distributed by Knight Ridder/Tribune Business News.

For information on republishing this content, contact us at (800) 661-2511 (U.S.), (213) 237-4914 (worldwide), fax (213) 237-6515, or e-mail [email protected].

Teen Trying to Gain Weight Needs Extra 500 Calories a Day

Q. I am trying to gain around 15 to 20 pounds. I’m 5-foot-7, 150 pounds and 17 years old. I swim two to four hours a day and lift weights three times a week. I also eat three HUGE meals and have a protein shake every day. Do you have any good ideas for me to gain weight?

A. For expert information on the topic of kids and nutrition, I spoke with Rachel Geik, a registered dietitian and sports nutritionist for Purdue University’s intercollegiate athletics department as well as coordinator of the nutrition, fitness and health program in the university’s foods and nutrition department.

Your first priority should be to focus on consuming adequate calories every day, Geik said. Gaining weight can be a difficult undertaking for a growing young person. Typically, teenagers are seeking ways to lose weight.

She explained that energy (in the form of calories) is primarily used to meet basic needs, such as respiration, blood circulation, brain function and body temperature maintenance. For young people, a significant number of calories also go toward basic growth and development. The leftover calories can be spent on your goal of developing new body mass.

Building muscles is a costly process in terms of energy and calories, Geik said. In fact, you need roughly 500 calories per day above and beyond your basic needs to gain just 1 pound per week.

“You can estimate your daily calorie needs (not counting the extra 500 daily needed to gain weight) by using the Energy Needs Calculator provided by the Children’s Nutrition Research Center at Baylor College of Medicine,” Geik said. You can find the calculator at www.bcm.edu/cnrc/energy_calculator.htm.

Once you find out how many calories to aim for, the challenge is to fit consuming them into your active day. “If your schedule allows you to eat more often, I would recommend that you do so,” she said. Perhaps you can eat a snack in between breakfast and lunch, between lunch and dinner, and in the evening. Or, try eating five to six “mini-meals” each day.”

Many times, people interested in weight gain put too much emphasis on protein intake and overlook their need for carbohydrates.

Since carbohydrates are the main fuel used in physical activity (including swimming), you should be sure to consume plenty – about 50 percent to 60 percent of your total calories – in the form of whole grains, fruits, vegetables, milk, yogurt and starchy beans.

This will fuel your exercise, and spare the protein in your diet for muscle repair and development.

And speaking of protein, think food first!

Whole foods naturally contain “packages” of nutrients that work best together, but engineered shakes and bars lack that powerful quality, Geik said.

Aim for a daily protein intake of 80 to 130 grams. How much is that?

For example, 100 grams of protein is the amount found in 6 ounces – the same size as 2 decks of cards – of lean meat, poultry or fish; 16 ounces of skim milk; 1 cup of low-fat yogurt, 2 tablespoons of natural peanut butter and 1 cup of starchy beans.

Above all, be consistent. If you are erratic and wavering in your eating patterns, then your progress toward your weight goal will also be erratic and wavering.

Trainer tip: Up to 80 percent of obese adolescents will become obese adults, and their chronic conditions will exacerbate with time, according to a report earlier this month in the Albuquerque Tribune. The current cost of treating diabetes in the United States is $138 billion.

As our overweight children become obese adults, the rate of diabetes will triple. Now more than ever, teach your kids the basics of healthy nutrition and regular exercise; otherwise, they will be paying for it later.

– Nicki Anderson is a certified personal trainer, author and owner of Reality Fitness in Naperville. Contact her at RealityFitness1@@aol.com or see www.realityfitness.com.

Once Daily Clarithromycin Extended-Release Vs Twice-Daily Amoxicillin/Clavulanate in Patients With Acute Bacterial Sinusitis: a Randomized, Investigator-Blinded Study

Key words: Acute bacterial sinusitis – Amoxicillin/clavulanate – Anti-inflammatory – Clarithromycin

ABSTRACT

Objective: To compare the efficacy and tolerability of clarithromycin extended-release (ER) to amoxicillin/ clavulanate in patients diagnosed with acute bacterial sinusitis.

Research design and methods: In a controlled, multicenter, investigator-blinded study, 437 ambulatory patients at least 12 years old with signs/symptoms and radiographic findings of acute sinusitis were randomized to receive clarithromycin ER 1000mg once daily or amoxicillin/ clavulanate 875 mg/125 mg twice daily for 14 days.

Main outcome measures: Clinical and bacteriological response rates were determined at a test-of-cure visit, which was conducted up to 10 days following the completion of treatment. Radiological response was assessed at a follow-up visit.

Results: The clinical cure rate in clinically valuable patients was 98% (184/188) in the clarithromycin ER group and 97% (179/185) in the amoxicillin/clavulanate group (95% Cl for the difference in rates [-2.4%, 4.7%]). Clinical cure was sustained at the follow-up visit (96% for each treatment group). The pathogen eradication rates were 94% (61/65) in the clarithromycin ER group and 98% (61/62) in the amoxicillin/clavulanate group (95% Cl for difference in rates [- 12.0%, 2.9%]). The radiological success rate was 94% (172/183) in both the clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/clavulanate groups (95% Cl for difference in rates [-4.9%, 4.9%]). Symptomatic improvement or relief was observed as early as 2days-5days after the initiation of study drug, with a statistically significantly higher resolution rate of sinus pressure (p = 0.027) and improvement/resolution rate of nasal congestion (p = 0.035) during treatment with clarithromycin ER. The resolution/improvement rate at the test-of-cure visit for each treatment group was ≥ 94% for the primary acute sinusitis signs/symptoms, with a statistically significantly higher resolution/ improvement rate of purulent nasal discharge with clarithromycin ER (p= 0.010). Both study drugs had a positive and rapid impact on quality of life. Patients reported a high level of satisfaction and probability of using either study antibiotic again, and health care resource use was low, with slightly fewer sinusitis-related physician and outpatient visits required by patients in the clarithromycin ER group (p = 0.055). The treatment groups were comparable with respect to incidence of drug-related adverse events.

Conclusion: In this multinational population of patients with acute bacterial sinusitis, clarithromycin ER was comparable, and for selected measures superior, to amoxicillin/clavulanate based on clinical, bacteriological, and radiological responses as well as quality of life measures, satisfaction with antibiotic therapy, and health care resource utilization.

Introduction

Acute bacterial sinusitis is a common infection with significant economic impact. Between 1% and 5% of adults are diagnosed with acute sinusitis each year in Europe1. In the United States, there are approximately 20 million cases of sinusitis annually2. Also, based on estimates from a prevalence-based cost-of-illness study, over $3.5 billion is spent annually for medical and surgical treatment of sinusitis3, including $400$600 million for antibiotics4- 5. Sinusitis diminishes quality of life6: between 1990 and 1992, sinusitisassociated symptoms resulted in over 70 million days of restricted activity7. Left untreated, sinusitis may lead to intracranial complications such as meningitis, brain abscess, cavernous-sinus and cortical-vein thrombosis, as well as orbital and respiratory complications.

An infection of one or more of the paranasal sinuses, bacterial sinusitis is generally preceded by an upper respiratory infection. In most cases, the antecedent infection is of viral etiology such as human rhinovirus, which causes approximately half of common colds. Subsequent impairment of the mucociliary transport system and sinus ventilation disrupts the local epithelial defense mechanisms and predisposes the individual with a viral upper respiratory tract infection to the development of sinusitis. The conditions responsible for secondary bacterial infection of the sinuses are unknown, but activities such as nose blowing and coughing may introduce bacteria into the paranasal sinuses during a viral upper respiratory tract infection. Inflammation of the sinus mucosa and mucus production are also important factors in the evolution of sinusitis8. The most common pathogens responsible for acute bacterial sinusitis are Streptococcus pneumoniae and Haemophilus influenzae, which combined, account for greater than 50% of cases8. Other microorganisms such as Moraxella catarrhalis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pyogenes, and anaerobic bacteria may also be isolated from patients with acute bacterial sinusitis8.

Antibiotic therapy for acute bacterial sinusitis is recommended to shorten the duration of infection9 and related symptoms, decrease the risks of mucosal damage and progression to chronic disease, and prevent sequelae. According to 2004 treatment guidelines8 endorsed by the American Academy of Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery, 10days-14days of therapy with amoxicillin or amoxicillin/ clavulanate at 1.5 g-4 g of amoxicillin daily, a cephalosporin (e.g., cefpodoxime, cefuroxime, cefdinir), or alternatively a macrolide/azalide in penicillin-allergic patients, is recommended for first-line treatment of acute bacterial sinusitis in patients with mild disease who have not recently used antimicrobials within the past 4weeks-6weeks. These treatment guidelines are based on considerations of the frequency and distribution of bacterial pathogens and their antimicrobial susceptibility, symptom severity, and the relationship between pharmacokinetic/ pharmacodynamic principles and efficacy of antimicrobial agents.

Clarithromycin possesses activity against the major respiratory tract pathogens10 and concentrates in respiratory tissues (tissue to serum concentration gradient of up to 10:1), making it well suited for the treatment of acute bacterial sinusitis”. The efficacy of clarithromycin in the treatment of acute sinusitis has been demonstrated previously in comparative clinical trials versus beta- lactams and fluoroquinolones12″ 20. Dubois et al. demonstrated that the pathogen eradication rate with clarithromycin was similar to that with amoxicillin/ clavulanate, in patients with acute sinusitis of confirmed bacterial etiology14. Murray et al. demonstrated, in a recent sinusitis study with clinical endpoints, that the extended- release (ER) formulation of clarithromycin was comparable to the immediaterelease (IR) tablet formulation of clarithromycin21. Based on its in vitro microbiological activity, once-daily dosing, and established safety profile10, clarithromycin ER should be included among first-line agents for treating acute bacterial sinusitis.

The objective of this study was to compare the clinical, bacteriological, and radiological efficacy and tolerability of clarithromycin ER with that of amoxicillin/clavulanate in patients with acute bacterial sinusitis.

Methods

Study design

This was a multi-center, multi-country, investigatorblinded, randomized trial. The study protocol was approved by an institutional review board or independent ethics committee for each study site. Before undergoing any study-related procedures, each patient reviewed and voluntarily signed an informed consent statement.

Patient selection

Patients enrolled in the study were ambulatory patients at least 12 years old with a diagnosis of acute, uncomplicated bacterial sinusitis. The diagnosis was based on the presence of: (1) opacification or an air/fluid level in a sinus radiograph (Water’s view) or computerized tomography (CT) scan of maxillary sinus (es), (2) purulent nasal discharge, and (3) at least two relevant signs and symptoms (facial pain or facial pressure over one or both maxillary sinus areas, nasal congestion, and fever) lasting longer than 7 days but no longer than 28 days prior to the screening visit.

Patients with chronic sinusitis or an anatomic abnormality involving the maxillary sinuses were excluded from the study, as were those with an uncontrolled, clinically significant co-morbid disease, including significant hepatic disease or renal insufficiency. Pregnant or lactating females and immunocompromised individuals were also considered ineligible for enrollment in this study.

The use of systemic antibiotics within 14 days before initiation of study drug (30 days for a long-acting, injectable antibiotic like benzathine penicillin) or concurrently with study drug was prohibited. Eligible patients were also prohibited from taking any immunosuppressant drug, including topical or inhaled corticosteroids. The use of decongestants, antihistamines, and other medications for sinusitis symptom relief was not restricted.

Study drug

Patients were randomized in a 1:1 ratio at each investigative site to receive 14 days of treatment with either clarithromycin ER 1000mg (Biaxin XL, Abbott Laboratories), administered once daily, or amoxicillin/ clavulanate 875mg/125mg (Augmentin, GlaxoSmithKline), a\dministered twice daily. Both study drugs were to be taken with food at about the same time each day. To maintain the study blind, patients were instructed not to discuss the appearance of study drug or any aspect of dosing with the investigator.

Study procedures

Patients were assessed five times during the study: once at baseline (≤ 48 h prior to the initiation of study drug) during an office/clinic visit, twice by telephone during treatment (day 3- day 5 and day 7-day 9), and twice following the completion of treatment during an office/clinic visit on day 16-day 18 (test-of- cure) and day 24-day 31 (follow-up).

Clinical signs and symptoms of acute bacterial sinusitis were assessed at each study visit. Sinus fluid samples were obtained at baseline and, if clinically indicated, also at the test-of-cure visit and sent for culture and antibiotic susceptibility testing22. The samples were collected by either needle aspiration or swab of middle meatus exudates guided by fiberoptic endoscopy from all patients at selected sites. Sinus radiograph or CT scan was performed at baseline and the follow-up visit. The amount of nasal mucus produced was estimated by counting the number of tissues used between day 2 and day 3, day 6 and day 7, and day 13 and day 14.

Throughout the study, patients completed several questionnaires; the symptom assessment and the SinoNasal Outcome Test (SNOT-16)23 measured the impact of the study drug on quality of life, while two additional surveys obtained the patients’ opinions about their experience with the study drug and their use of health care resources during the study period. The symptom assessment questionnaire consisted of a general question about how the patient felt based on current sinusitis symptoms (rated as 1 = excellent to 5 = poor), and a second question about change in sinusitis symptoms since the start of study drug (rated as 1 = much better to 5 = much worse). Patients completed the symptom assessment questionnaire at each study visit. The SNOT16 is a shortened version of the 31-item Rhinosinusitis Outcome Measure and was chosen because it is a reliable, valid, and responsive instrument for measuring rhinosinusitis-specific health-related quality of life24. At all except the second visit, patients rated 16 sinusitis-related items (e.g., need to blow nose, facial pain-pressure, lack of a good night’s sleep) using a 4-point scale (0 = no problem to 3 = severe problem). At the test-of-cure visit, patients completed an additional questionnaire about their experience with the antibiotic prescribed for them. Patients used a 7-point scale to rate their general satisfaction with the study drug (O = very dissatisfied to 6 = very satisfied) as well as the likelihood that the patient would use the medication again (O = definitely no to 6 = definitely yes). In addition, after the initial screening visit patients were asked at each study visit about their use of health care resources (e.g., physician office visit, outpatient visit, emergency room visit, hospitalization, procedures, laboratory tests) since the previous visit.

Adverse events were assessed throughout the study and blood specimens were collected at baseline and the test-of-cure visit for hematology and serum chemistry analyses. Third-party designees of the investigators assessed compliance with the study drug by counting unused study medication in returned containers at the test- of-cure visit.

Efficacy endpoints

Clinical response was the primary efficacy endpoint. At test-of- cure visit, patients were classified as either clinical cure or clinical failure, and at the follow-up visit, the clinical cure patients were further classified as sustained cure or recurrence. Clinical cure was defined as resolution or improvement in purulent nasal discharge and at least one additional sinusitis sign or symptom observed at baseline, with no worsening in the remaining signs and symptoms and no additional requirement for antimicrobial therapy. The definition of clinical failure was the worsening of at least one of fhe sinusitis signs or symptoms observed at baseline or appearance of new signs or symptoms at the test-of-cure visit and the necessity of additional antimicrobial therapy. Sustained clinical cure was defined as continued improvement or no worsening of sinusitis signs and symptoms and no worsening in the radiographie appearance of the sinus. Clinical recurrence was defined as signs and symptoms recurring any time prior to the follow-up visit and additional antimicrobial therapy was warranted. Clinical response was classified as indeterminate when a clinical response evaluation was not possible.

A comparison of the culture results from the baseline and test- of-cure visits was performed for specific target pathogens and was used to determine if eradication or persistence resulted following antibacterial treatment. The target pathogens were S. pneumoniae, S. aureus, H. influenzae, M. catarrhalis, and H. parainfluenzae. Eradication was defined as the absence of the original infecting pathogen(s) in a repeat sinus aspirate or endoscopie culture. If the original pathogen(s) was isolated in a repeat aspirate or endoscopie culture, the bacteriological response was persistence. In the absence of repeat culture results, the initial pathogen (s) was presumed eradicated if the patient was classified as a clinical cure and presumed persistent if the patient was classified as a clinical failure. New infection was defined as isolation of a new pathogen at post-treatment from a repeat sinus aspirate or endoscopie culture. Bacteriological response was classified as indeterminate when an evaluation was impossible.

Figure 1. Study populations

Radiological response was determined by the investigators at the follow-up visit and classified as resolution, improvement, unchanged, or worsening. Resolution was defined as complete clearing of sinus radiograph or CT scan evidence of acute bacterial sinusitis. The definition of improvement was reduction in the radiographic or CT scan evidence of acute bacterial sinusitis as compared to baseline findings. Unchanged or worsening radiological response was determined by comparing radiographie sinus findings with baseline radiographie or CT scan findings.

Data analysis

Assuming the clinical cure rate for each treatment group was approximately 87% and the clinical evaluability rate was 85%; then approximately 400 patients were to be enrolled. This sample size provides at least 80% power to assure that the two-tailed 95% confidence interval (CI) around the difference in response between treatments will remain within the lower bound of -0.10 or less in order to establish non-inferiority between the treatments. Statistical analyses were conducted using SAS version 8.2.

Clinical and radiological responses were determined in clinically evaluable and clinical intent-to-treat patient populations (Figure 1). Patient bacteriologic cure rate and pathogen eradication rate were determined in clinically and bacteriologically evaluable and bacteriological intent-to-treat populations. All patients who received at least one dose of the study drug and met the clinical and radiological criteria for acute sinusitis were included in the clinical intent-to-treat population; those meeting these criteria and who had a target pathogen isolated pre-treatment were included in the bacteriological intent-to-treat population. In addition, patients must have received at least 80% of the intended amount of study drug (or at least 3 days of study drug for patients classified as a clinical failure) and not received any other antibiotic prior to the test-of-cure visit (unless the patient was classified as a clinical failure) in order to be considered clinically evaluable. The clinically and bacteriologically evaluable population included patients who met the criteria for clinical evaluability and from whom a pre-treatment target pathogen was isolated.

The comparability of the treatment groups at baseline was analyzed using Fisher’s exact test (gender, race, tobacco use, alcohol use, and prior medical evaluation and treatment for the current acute sinusitis episode) and one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) (age and number of sinusitis episodes in previous year). Baseline clinical signs and symptoms results were summarized by treatment group and compared between treatment groups using the Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel method. Fisher’s exact test was used to compare the treatment groups based on clinical cure rate, patient bacteriological cure rate, and eradication rate for target pathogens at the test-of-cure visit and clinical cure rate and radiological resolution/ improvement rate at the follow-up visit. A 95% CI with a continuity correction around the difference in the clinical cure, patient bacteriological cure, and radiological resolution/ improvement rates, was computed. The treatment groups were further compared using the Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel test with stratification by centers within and outside of the US, country, investigator, gender, race, age, weight, treatment duration, study drug compliance, tobacco and alcohol use, prior medical evaluation and treatment for the current acute sinusitis episode, presence of sinus radiographie evidence of acute bacterial sinusitis, presence of purulent nasal discharge, and presence of at least two supportive signs and symptoms of acute sinusitis. Fisher’s exact test was also used to determine differences between treatment groups, based on the rate of resolution/improvement in clinical signs and symptoms. Treatment group differences based on patient symptom assessment, SNOT-16 evaluation, and treatment satisfaction were evaluated using a between-groups f-test. Usage of sinusitis-related health care resource utilization and incidence of treatment-related adverse events (those classified as probably- or possibly-related) were compared using Fisher’s exact test.

R\esults

A total of 437 patients were enrolled at 49 study centers (4 in Canada, 4 in Greece, 8 in Hungary, 3 in Italy, 4 in Lithuania, 8 in Poland, 4 in Romania, 5 in Spain, 9 in the United States) between May 30, 2003 and February 16, 2004. Of the enrolled patients, 221 were randomized to treatment with clarithromycin ER and 216 to treatment with amoxicillin/clavulanate. Fourteen patients, seven in each treatment group, were excluded from the clinical intent-to- treat population because they did not meet the inclusion criteria for acute sinusitis (Figure 1). Of the randomized patients, 373 (85%) were classified as clinically valuable. In general, the 64 clinically unevaluable patients were distributed evenly by treatment group and reason for non-evaluability, the most common reasons being the patient did not satisfy the entry selection criteria (21 patients) or no post-treatment evaluation was conducted (15 patients). Lack of a target pathogen or lack of a sinus aspiration/ endoscopy were the most common reasons for 328 patients being excluded from the clinically and bacteriologically evaluable population.

There were no statistically significant differences between the treatment groups at baseline based on demographic data, medical history, presenting signs and symptoms, radiographie findings, and sinusitis history (Table 1). The most common presenting signs and symptoms among treated patients were purulent nasal discharge (100%), nasal congestion (99%), sinus pressure (97%), and sinus pain (95%), with most (> 72% in each treatment group) being classified as moderate or severe. Overall, patients had experienced a mean (SD) of 1.3 (0.7) episodes of acute bacterial sinusitis in the year prior to enrollment in the study.

Regarding the current infection, 98% of treated patients had radiological confirmation of their infection at baseline: 57% of patients had involvement of one maxillary sinus and 43% of patients had bilateral infection. Opacification was observed in 77% of patients in each treatment group. Air fluid levels were observed in 43% and 42% of patients in the clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanate groups, respectively.

Sinus secretions were obtained endoscopically in 269 patients and by needle aspiration in 73. The methods had similar overall rates of positive culture (33% and 44%, respectively). A comparison of the target pathogens isolated by the two culture methods is shown in Table 2. The majority of cultures had a single pathogen isolated (80% and 63% of endoscopie and aspiration cultures, respectively). The eradication rate of each target pathogen (44% of all pathogens isolated) is shown in Table 3. For pathogens isolated from samples collected at baseline, the MIC90 values for clarithromycin and amoxicillin/ clavulanate were 8 g/mL and 2 g/mL for H. influenzae, 2g/mL and 0.25g/mL for S. pneumoniae (9%, 4/47 resistant to penicillin), 0.12 g/mL and 0.25 g/mL for M. catarrhalis, and > 32g/ mL and 1 g/mL for S. aureus, respectively. There were seven (15%) S, pneumoniae that were resistant to clarithromycin at baseline, five isolates with high-level ErmB (ribosomal methylase)-mediated resistance and two isolates with intermediate level, MefA (macrolide efflux)-mediated resistance.

Table 1. Demographic and pre-treatment patient characteristics of treated patients

Among the clinically evaluable patients, mean (SD) duration of treatment was 14.0 (0.8 9) day s and 14.2 ( 0.86) days for the clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanate groups, respectively. Oral sympathomimetic agents (e.g., psuedoephedrine, phenylephrine), nasal decongestants, and antihistamines were used by 23.8%, 8.9%, and 6.9% of patients, respectively, during their participation in the study.

Clinical, bacteriological, and radiological responses

Clarithromycin ER was comparable to amoxicillin/ clavulanate based on clinical cure rate in clinically evaluable patients at the test-of-cure visit (98% [184/188] and 97% [179/185] for the respective treatment groups; 95% CI for the difference in cure rates [-2.4%, 4.7%]) (Table 4). The comparison of cure rates between treatment groups was not affected by prognostic risk factor (e.g., age, prior medical evaluation/ treatment for the current infection, unilateral/bilateral sinusitis, etc.). Similar findings were observed in the clinical intent-to-treat population (Table 4). Clinical cure was sustained in 96% of patients in each treatment group at the follow-up visit.

The treatment groups were also comparable based on target pathogen eradication (includes both eradicated and presumed eradicated) (Table 3). The overall pathogen eradication rate in clinically and bacteriologically evaluable patients was 94% (61/65) for the clarithromycin ER group and 98% (61/62) for the amoxicillin/ clavulanate group (95% CI for the difference in eradication rates [- 12.0%, 2.9%]). This rate was 90% among the bacteriological intent- to-treat patients for both treatment groups. The eradication rates were similar for pathogens from patients with single or multiple pathogens isolated. Eradication of S. pneumoniae was 95% for clarithromycin ER and 100% for amoxicillin/clavulanate. Of the 22 S. pneumoniae isolates from the clinically and bacteriologically evaluable patients in the clarithromycin ER group, five were resistant to clarithromycin (four had ErmB with high-level resistance and one had MefA efflux with intermediate-level resistance). All five pneumococcal isolates classified as resistant to clarithromycin by in vitro susceptibility testing were eradicated; and patients were clinical cures when treated with clarithromycin ER. One additional ErmB-containing S. pneumoniae was included in the intent-to-treat population of the clarithromycin ER group; this isolate was also eradicated and the patient was a clinical cure. The eradication of H. influenzae was 100% for clarithromycin ER and 95% for amoxicillin/ clavulanate.

Table 2. Target pathogen isolation rates compared by culture method (intent-to-treat population)

Table 3. Target pathogen eradication rate at the test-of-cure visit in clinically and bacteriologically evaluable patients

Table 4. Clinical, bacteriological, and radiological responses

Efficacy was also evaluated at the follow-up visit based on change from baseline radiographie findings. Resolution or improvement in these findings was observed in 94% (172/183) of patients in both the clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanategroups (95% CI forthe difference in success rates [- 4.9%, 4.9%]). The radiological success rates were also unaffected by prognostic risk factor.

Symptomatic improvement or relief was observed as early as 2 days- 5 days after the initiation of the study drug. At the first assessment, the majority of clinically evaluable patients had experienced resolution or improvement in the primary presenting signs/symptoms of acute sinusitis, with selected statistically significant differences favoring clarithromycin ER: A significantly higher proportion of clarithromycin-ER treated patients reported improvement/resolution of nasal congestion (p = 0.035) and resolution of sinus pressure (p = 0.027). At the test-of-cure visit, the resolution/improvement rate for each treatment group was > 94% for the primary acute sinusitis signs/symptoms in clinically evaluable patients, with a statistically significantly higher rate of resolution/ improvement for purulent nasal discharge with clarithromycin ER (p = 0.010) (Table 5).

A decrease in nasal secretions over the course of the study, as estimated by tissue use, was observed with both treatment groups. Compared to the first collection period (day 2 and day 3), there was a 40% and 69% decrease in the use of tissues in both treatment groups during the second (day 6 and day 7) and third (day 13 and day 14) collection periods, respectively.

Quality of life, patient satisfaction, and health care resource utilization

According to the patients’ self-assessment of their symptoms, 92% of the clinical intent-to-treat patients stated they felt either ‘fair’ or ‘poor’ due to their sinusitis symptoms at baseline. At subsequent visits, increasing proportions of patients in both treatment groups indicated improvement, with 53% and 27% stating they felt ‘excellent’ and ‘very good’, respectively, at the follow- up visit. Rating their change from baseline at follow-up, 85% of patients reported being ‘much better’. Mean score for the S NOT-16 decreased from 1.6 in the clarithromycin ER group and 1.7 in the amoxicillin/clavulanate group at baseline to 0.2 in both groups at the follow-up visit.

Table 5. Rate of resolution or improvement in pretreatment signs and symptoms of acute sinusitis in clinically evaluable patients

Across the treatment groups at the follow-up visit, 80% of the clinical intent-to-treat patients were satisfied with the medication they received in the study, rating their satisfaction 5 or 6, with 78% satisfied enough to use the medication again. Patients’ use of health care resources related to sinusitis was very low during their participation in the study, with fewer physician and outpatient visits in the clarithromycin ER group (four patients in the clarithromycin ER group made six visits vs. 10 patients in the amoxicillin/clavulanate group who made 12 visits, p = 0.055).

Tolerability

The overall frequency of drug-related adverse events was 22% (48/ 221) and 20% (43/216) in the clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanate groups, respectively, with the majority of affected patients reporting events of either mild or moderate intensity. The most commonly reported drug-related adverse events were diarrhea (4% with clarithromycin ER and 6% with amoxicillin/ clavulanate), abnormal taste (11% and 1%, respectively, p

Less than 2% of patients in the clarithromycin ER group and 3% of patients in the amoxicillin\/clavulanate group discontinued therapy prematurely as a result of a drug-related adverse event (s): four patients in the clarithromycin ER group (one each with abnormal taste, nausea/vomiting, allergic reaction, and urticaria) and six patients in the amoxicillin/clavulanate group (one each with diarrhea, bloody diarrhea, dyspnea, abdominal pain/diarrhea, gastroenteritis, and headache/ hypertension). There were no clinically significant changes from baseline in hematology indices. A clinically significant increase, defined as three times the upper limit of normal, from baseline in transaminase level was observed at the post-treatment evaluation in two patients (one patient’s SGPT and one patient’s SGOT) in the amoxicillin/ clavulanate group (from within the reference range of 141IU/L and 172IU/L).

Discussion

The results of this multi-center, multi-country, randomized, investigator-blinded study demonstrate that clarithromycin ER administered once daily for 14 days is comparable to amoxicillin/ clavulanate administered twice daily for 14 days in patients with acute bacterial sinusitis. There was no difference between treatment groups in clinical response, with clinical cure rates of at least 97% in both groups. Likewise, clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanate were comparable (rates ≥ 94%) based on overall target pathogen eradication and radiological response. All five pneumococcal isolates classified as resistant to clarithromycin by in vitro susceptibility testing were eradicated and patients were clinical cures when treated with clarithromycin ER. The ability of clarithromycin to successfully eradicate organisms that are considered resistant by in vitro testing is likely associated with concentrations of clarithromycin that are higher in tissue and in white blood cells as compared to blood25 as well as the complexity of the relationship between the host’s immune response and the virulence of the pathogen.

In this study, the use of endoscopy, a less invasive culture method, yielded similar culture results as compared to the standard sinus puncture method. This is consistent with the findings of others: In a review by Benninger et al., there was 60%-85% concordance between results derived from endoscopically-guided middle meatal cultures and those from maxillary sinus (puncture) cultures26. Thus, the use of endoscopy may allow more frequent culture and identification of causative pathogens, leading to improved diagnosis and treatment of acute bacterial sinusitis. Clarithromycin ER was superior to amoxicillin/clavulanate based on differences in symptomatic response observed as early as 2days- 5days after the initiation of the study drug (improvement/ resolution of nasal congestion and resolution of sinus pressure) and at the test-of-cure visit (resolution/improvement of purulent nasal discharge).

Results across the patient-reported outcomes supported the effectiveness of both treatments. Based on patients’ responses to symptom assessment and SNOT-16, clarithromycin ER and amoxicillin/ clavulanate had a positive and rapid impact on quality of life. Using other tests of quality of life (i.e., Allergy Outcomes Survey, Rhinoconjunctivitis QOL Questionnaire, the Short Form 36 survey, instantaneous six-item Symptom Severity Survey, and a Visual Analogue Scale), Rechtweg et al. found clarithromycin-treated patients felt better more quickly, but were comparable to those treated with amoxicillin/clavulanate based on long-term (28 days) improvement in sinusitis symptoms”. Our patients reported a high level of satisfaction with and probability of using either study antibiotic again. This suggests that the patients felt that the reduction in symptoms greatly ameliorated the problems created by sinusitis. The efficacy of both study drugs was also demonstrated in very low health care resource utilization rates, with slightly fewer visits required by patients in the clarithromycin ER group.

Our clinical results are consistent with those from six recently conducted, randomized, double- or investigatorblinded studies of acute bacterial sinusitis, in which similar clinical results were observed when clarithromycin IR was compared to other agents (levofloxacin, gatifloxacin, ciprofloxacin, sparfloxacin, and cefuroxime axetil)12 ,i3,is,i7,)9,2o_ Bacteriological response was not assessed in any of these studies. There has been only one previous comparison of clarithromycin and amoxicillin/ clavulanate in patients with sinusitis. In a multi-center, randomized, single- blind study of almost 500 patients with acute maxillary sinusitis, Dubois et al. documented pathogen eradication rates of 87% and 90% and clinical success rates of 97% and 93% with clarithromycin and amoxicillin/clavulanate, respectively14. The pathogen eradication rate with clarithromycin ER in our study, conducted over a decade after the study of Dubois et al., shows no change over time in bacteriological efficacy. More recently, Murray et al. established comparability between the ER and IR formulations of clarithromycin based on only clinical endpoints in adults with acute maxillary sinusitis21. Across the studies, including our own, the most common adverse events involved the gastrointestinal tract12-15,17,19-21.

Conclusions

In this multinational population of patients with acute bacterial sinusitis, clarithromycin ER was comparable, and for selected measures superior, to amoxicillin/clavulanate, an agent recommended for first-line therapy, based on clinical, bacteriological, and radiological responses as well as quality of life measures, satisfaction with antibiotic therapy, and health care resource utilization.

Acknowledgments

This study was supported by a grant from Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL,USA.

We wish to acknowledge the following investigators who enrolled patients in this study:

Canada: I. Dan Dattani, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan; Benjamin Lasko, Toronto, Ontario; Donald Rhodes, Kitchener, Ontario; Claude St- Pierre, Sherbrooke, Quebec.

Greece: Harry Bassaris, Patra; Dimitrios Ganetsos, Athens; Efstratios Moschovakis, Piraeus; Paul Nikolaidis, Thessaloniki.

Hungary: Istvan Gati, Veszprem; Peter Halmos, Salgtotarjan; Livia Hende, Szombathely; Janos Huszka, Budapest; Mihaly Kisely, Szombathely; Laszlo Paput, Budapest; Peter RasonyiKovacs, Budapest; Hajnalka Szabadka, Budapest.

Italy: Eugenio Mira, Pavia; Eugenio Pallestrini, Geneva; Agostino Serra, Catania.

Lithuania: Romas Kasinkas, Vilnius; Jonas Laimutis Martinkenas, Vilnius; Kestutis Povilaitis, Kaunas; Virgilijus S akalinskas, Vilnius.

Poland: Stanislaw Betlejewski, Bydgoszcz; Stanislaw Chodynicki, Bialystok; Wieslaw Golabek, Lublin; Jacek Iwko, Gilwice; Pawel Kubik, Jelenia Gora; Wojciech Mikulewicz, Wroclaw; Krzysztof Prs, Wroclaw; Zbigniew Swierczynski, Bielsko-Biala.

Romania: Florian Bucovici, Bucharest; Romeo Calarasu, Bucharest; Constantin Mocanu, Bucharest; Dorin Sarafoleanu, Bucharest.

Spain: Manuel Bernai, Barcelona; Ignacio Cobeta, Madrid; Miguel Angel Diez, Vallodolid; Emilio Salguero, Badajoz; Manuel Tomas, Palma de Mallorca.

USA: Patricia Buchanan, Eugene, OR; Wayne Gilbert, Johnson City, TN; Trevor Goldberg, Charlotte, NC; C. Scott Horn, San Antonio, TX; Frank Mazzone, San Luis Obispo, CA; Donald L. McNeil, Jr., Columbus, OH; Paul M. Obert, Birmingham, AL; Kevin Wingert, Clovis, CA.

References

1. Brankston ER, Conter HS, Corriveau R, et al. Cefprozil versus cefuroxime axetil in the treatment of acute sinusitis. Clin Drug Invest 1998;15:81-90

2. Gwaltney Jr JM. Acute community-acquired sinusitis. Clin Infect Dis 1996;23:1209-25

3. Ray NF, Baraniuk JN, Thamer M, et al. Healthcare expenditures for sinusitis in 1996: contributions of asthma, rhinitis, and other airway disorders. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1999;103:408-14

4. Scott Levin(TM) Prescription Audit for Verispan, L.L.C., January-December 2002

5. Physician Drug & Diagnosis Audit (PDDA) from Verispan, L.L.C., January-December 2002

6. Senior BA, Glaze C, Benninger MS. Use of the rhinosinusitis disability index (RSDI) in rhinologic disease. Am J Rhinol 2001;15:15-20

7. Kaliner MA, Osguthorpe JD, Fireman P, et al. Sinusitis: bench to bedside. Current findings, future directions. Otolaryngol Head NeckSurg 1997;116:51-20

8. Anon JB, Jacobs MR, Poole MD, et al. [Sinus and Allergy Health Partnership]. Antimicrobial treatment guidelines for acute bacterial rhinosinusitis. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg 2004;130(Suppl l):l-45

9. Dagan R, Klugman KP, Craig WA, Baquero F. Evidence to support the rationale that bacterial eradication in respiratory tract infection is an important aim of antimicrobial therapy. J Antimicrob Chemother 2001 ;47:129-40

10. Darkes MJ, Perry CM. Clarithromycin extended-release tablet: a review of its use in the management of respiratory tract infections. Am J Respir Med 2003;2:175-201

11. Fraschini F, Scaglione F, Pintucci G, Maccarinelli G, Dugnani S, Demartini G. The diffusion of clarithromycin and roxithromycin into nasal mucosa, tonsil, and lung in humans. J Antimicrob Chemother 1991;27(Suppl A):61-5

12. Adelglass J, Jones TM, Ruoff G, et al. A multicenter, investigatorblinded, randomized comparison of oral levofloxacin and oral clarithromycin in the treatment of acute bacterial sinusitis. Pharmacotherapy 1998;18:1255-63

13. Clifford K, Huck W, Shan M, Tosiello R, Echols RM, Heyd A, [Sinus Infection Study Group]. Double-blind comparative trial of dprofloxacin versus clarithromycin in the treatment of acute bacterial sinusitis. Ann Otol Rhinol Laryngol 1999;108:360-7

14. Dubois J, Saint-Pierre C, Tremblay C. Efficacy of clarithromycin vs. amoxicillin/clavulanate in the treatment of acute maxillary sinusitis. Ear Nose Throat J 1993;72:804-10

15. Henry DC, Moller Jr DJ, Adelglass J, et al. [Sparfloxacin Multicenter AMS Study Group]. Comparison of sparfloxacin and clarithromycin in the treatment of acute bacterial maxillary sinusitis. Clin Ther 1999;21:340-52

16. Karma P, Pukan\der J, Penttila M, et al. The comparative efficacy and safety of clarithromycin and amoxicillin in the treatment of outpatients with acute maxillary sinusitis. J Antimicrob Chemother 1991;27(Suppl A):83-90

17. Lasko B, Lau CY, Saint-Pierre C, Reddington JL, Martel A, Anstey RJ, [The Canadian Sinusitis Study Group]. Efficacy and safety of oral levofloxacin compared with clarithromycin in the treatment of acute sinusitis in adults: a multicentre, double-blind, randomized study. J Int Med Res 1998;26:281-91

18. Marchi E. Comparative efficacy and tolerability of clarithromycin and amoxydllin in the treatment of outpatients with acute maxillary sinusitis. Curr Med Res Opin 1990; 12:19-24

19. Fogarty C, et al. Gatifloxacin vs clarithromycin in the management of acute sinusitis. J Resp Dis 1999;20(Suppl):S17-S22

20. Stefansson P, Jacovides A, Jablonicky P, Sedani S, Staley H. Cefuroxime axetil versus clarithromycin in the treatment of acute maxillary sinusitis. Rhinology 1998;36:173-8

21. Murray JJ, Solomon E, McCluskey D, Zhang J, Palmer R, Notario G. Phase III, randomized, double-blind study of clarithromycin extended-release and immediate-release formulations in the treatment of adult patients with acute maxillary sinusitis. Clin Ther 2000;22:1421-32

22. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance standards for antimicrobial susceptibility testing. Eighth informational supplement 1998;18:No.l

23. Piccirillo JF. Outcomes research and otolaryngology. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg 1994; 111:764-9

24. Anderson ER, Murphy MP, Weymuller EA. Clinimetric evaluation of the sinonasal outcome test-16. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg 1999;121:702-7

25. Benninger MS, Appelbaum PC, Denneny JC, Osguthorpe DJ, Stankiewicz JA. Maxillary sinus puncture and culture in the diagnosis of acute rhinosinusitis: the case for pursuing alternative culture methods. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg 2002;127:7-12

26. Guay DRP, Gustavson LE, Devcich KJ, Zhang J, Cao G, Olson CA. Pharmacokinetics and tolerability of extended-release clarithromycin. Clin Ther 2001;23:566-77

27. Rechtweg JS, Moinuddin R, Houser SM, Mamikoglu B, Corey JP. Quality of life in treatment of acute rhinosinusitis with clarithromycin and amoxicillin/clavulanate. Laryngoscope 2004;114:806-10

CrossRef links are available in the online published version of this paper: http://www.cmrojournal.com

Paper CMRO-2837_4, Accepted for publication: 24 November 2004

Published Online: 21 December 2004

doi: 10.1185/030079904X18009

Ernie Riffer(a), Joy Spiller(b), Robert Palmer(b), Virginia Shortridge(b), Todd A. Busman(b) and Joaquin Valdes(b)

a Central Phoenix Medical Clinic, Phoenix, AZ, USA

b Abbott Laboratories, North Chicago, IL, USA

Address for correspondence: Dr Ernie Riffer, Central Phoenix Medical Clinic, 4747 N. 7th Street, Suite 100, Phoenix, AZ 85014, USA. Tel.: +1 602 200 3814; Fax: +1 602 200 3839; email: [email protected]

Copyright Librapharm Jan 2005

Dual Relationships: A Continuum Ranging From the Destructive to the Therapeutic

This article is a review of the literature regarding the nature, scope, and complexity of dual relationships, which range from the destructive to the therapeutic. The dynamics, consequences, standards of practice, and ethical dilemmas regarding sexual and nonsexual counselor-client dual relationships are discussed. Common elements of concern pertaining to both types of relationships are identified, and the potential benefits of some forms of nonsexual dual relationships are explored.

Ethical decision making is an ongoing process with no easy answers. In order to promote the well-being of clients, counselors must constantly balance their own values and life experiences with professional codes of ethics as they make choices about how to help their clients effectively. Therefore, knowing ethical codes and the consequences of unsanctioned practice can be useful tools to counselors during their attempts to establish therapeutic relationships with clients (Herlihy & Corey, 1997). However, although professional codes of conduct provide guidelines for how counselors should behave with clients, they do not furnish absolute answers for how counselors must act in every situation (Remley, Hermann, & Huey, 2003). Consequently, practitioners must combine their understanding of ethical codes with sound judgment to serve the best interests of their clients.

Some of the most challenging ethical situations result from dual relationships between counselors and others. “A dual relationship is created whenever the role of counselor is combined with another relationship, which could be professional (e.g., professor, supervisor, employer) or personal (e.g., friend, close relative, sexual partner)” (Herlihy & Remley, 2001, p. 80). For example, a counselor who serves as both a therapist and a business partner or friend to a client is engaged in a dual relationship (Maley & Reilly, 1999). Because there are many types of dual relationships and because ethical codes provide only general guidelines for handling these relationships, counselors sometimes have difficulty understanding what dual relationships are and how to handle them. The purpose of this article is to explore this issue and to provide counselors with information about, and suggestions for, managing ethical dilemmas pertaining to personal and professional entanglements between practitioners and their clients. Although other forms of dual relationships have been discussed in the literature (e.g., between supervisor and supervisee, professor and student), this article is focused on dual relationships between counselors and their clients.

In this article, dual relationships are defined and pertinent ethical standards from several professional organizations are cited. Examples of harmful and helpful dual relationships are discussed as well as their impact on the client, counselor, and profession as a whole. Guidelines regarding multiple relationships, developed to protect the client as well as the practitioner, are examined. This article demonstrates that dual relationships fall on a continuum ranging from the destructive to the therapeutic.

What Are Dual Relationships?

A dual or a multiple relationship exists whenever a counselor has other connections with a client in addition or in succession to the counselor-client relationship. “This may involve assuming more than one professional role (such as instructor and therapist) or blending professional and non-professional relationships (such as a counselor and friend or counselor and business partner)” (Corey, Corey, & Callanan, 1998, p. 225). According to the American Counseling Association Code of Ethics & Standards of Practice (American Counseling Association [ACA], 1995), “Examples of such relationships include, but are not limited to, familial, social, financial, business, or close personal relationships with clients” (p. 3). Similarly, the most recent revision of the Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct (American Psychological Association [APA], 2002) provides the following definition:

A multiple relationship occurs when a psychologist is in a professional role with a person and (1) at the same time is in another role with the same person, (2) at the same time is in a relationship with a person closely associated with or related to the person with whom the psychologist has the professional relationship, or (3) promises to enter into another relationship in the future with the person or a person closely associated with or related to the person, ( 3.05)

Typically, dual relationships are classified as either sexual (occurring with either a current or former client) or nonsexual (with a current client). According to Coleman and Schaefer (1986), sexual dual relationships are abusive and can include either overt forms of sexual contact with clients (e.g., passionate kissing, fondling, sexual intercourse, oral or anal sex, and sexual penetration with objects) and/or other less obvious expressions of sexual behavior (e.g., sexual gazes and seductiveness). There are also numerous kinds of nonsexual and nonromantic dual relationships, including the following: personal or friendship relationships, social interactions and events, business or financial relationships, collegial or professional relationships, supervisory or evaluative relationships, religious affiliation relationships, collegial or professional plus social relationships, and workplace relationships (Anderson & Kitchener, 1996).

Dual relationships can come about in two ways: by choice and by chance. When dual relationships are formed as a result of a conscious choice made by the counselor, he or she must examine the potential positive and negative consequences that the secondary relationship might have for the primary counseling relationship. The counselor should choose to enter into the dual relationship only when it is clear that such a relationship is in the client’s best interests. However, in some circumstances, the counselor has little choice about engaging in a dual relationship. For example, in sparsely populated rural areas, a dual relationship between a practitioner and a client may be unavoidable because

Their children may have the same teacher, they may both volunteer for the United Way drive, or they may bump into each other waiting at the dentist’s office. Since they drive the same streets all the time, they may even be involved in the same traffic accident at some point! (Welfel, 1998, p. 180)

In other circumstances, fate can play a role in blurring the boundaries between counselors and their clients. Pope and Vetter (1992) illustrated this point with one counselor’s story of some very disruptive neighbors: It was only after filing a formal complaint against the neighbors that the counselor learned that one of his clients was his landlord. Although the circumstances surrounding multiple relationships may vary-sexual or nonsexual, current or former client, and cultivated by the counselor or brought about by circumstance-they all share a common defining element, the potential to either aid or sabotage the counseling relationship.

*Relevant Moral Principles

Gladding (2000) described several moral principles that form the basis of making ethical decisions: autonomy, nonmaleficence, beneficence, justice, fidelity, and veracity. From these moral principles flow the ethics and standards of practice of professional mental health associations, their purpose being to establish relatively clear expectations for professional behavior. Particularly significant to the ethical standards regarding dual relationships are autonomy and nonmaleficence. Both play vital roles in determining the impact an additional connection between counselor and client will have on the counseling relationship. Autonomy refers to the client’s power to choose his or her own direction and the counselor’s responsibility to advance this behavior (Corey et al., 1998). In a dual relationship, the degree of potential for destructiveness is relative to the potential degree of autonomy lost by the client. For instance, a client who is a highly skilled craftsman may not feel free to decline his counselor’s request to commission a piece of furniture, despite the fact that he is already overbooked. On the other end of the continuum, the therapeutic gain to be made by a client in a multiple relationship is proportionate to its empowering impact on the client. A highly skilled craftsman lacking self-esteem and confidence may be well served by the genuine and fair offer of his counselor to commission a work from him.

Nonmaleficence dictates that professionals have a responsibility to avoid behaviors or practices that cause harm or have the potential to cause harm (Corey et al., 1998). In keeping with this moral principle, when faced with a dual relationship, counselors must consider two factors. First, professionals must assess the potential for harm to the client if they enter into a secondary relationship. Second, they must then weigh that against the potential for harm if they do not partake in the additional relationship. This bilateral assessment challenges the clinician to address issues from the perspective of the client’s best interest rather than me\rely from the path of least resistance.

*Definitions From the Ethical Standards

Considering the range of impact a secondary relationship can have on the counselor-client relationship, few would argue against the need for ethical guidelines. However, in the instance of counselor- client dual relationships, many suggest that the codes lack clarity and, in some instances, are impractical, at best, and counterproductive, at worst (Gabbard, 1994a; Gottlieb, 1993; Lazarus, 1994; Sonne, 1994). A comparison of the ethics and standards of practice of ACA (1995), APA (2002), the American Association for Marriage and Family Therapy (AAMFT; 2001), the National Association of Social Workers (NASW; 1996), and the American Mental Health Counselors Association (AMHCA; 2000) supports the position that there are variation, ambiguity, and ambivalence regarding dual relationships.

Despite the fact that

therapist-client sexual contact has long been recognized as contrary to the client’s best interest, only in recent years has it been explicitly proscribed by organizations representing mental health practitioners (the American Psychiatric Association in 1973, the American Psychological Association in 1979, and the National Association of Social Workers in 1980). (Smith & Fitzpatrick, 1995, Therapist-Client Sexual Contact, 2)

To date, the code of ethics of all professional helping organizations clearly prohibit this behavior. For example, “counselors do not have any type of sexual intimacies with clients and do not counsel persons with whom they have had a sexual relationship” (ACA, 1995, p. 3). “Psychologists do not engage in sexual intimacies with current therapy clients/patients” (APA, 2002, 10.05). It is interesting to note that, among the five standards of practice examined herein, only the NASW (1996) Code of Ethics and the most recent version of APA’S (2002) Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct recognize the client’s social network beyond the counseling office by prohibiting “sexual activities or sexual contact with clients’ relatives or other individuals with whom clients maintain a close personal relationship when there is a risk of exploitation or potential harm to the client” (NASW, 1996, 1.09b).

Although the consensus regarding sex with current clients seems straightforward, the guidelines regarding postcounseling sexual relationships vary among the professional organizations. Before 1992, neither ACA nor APA proscribed posttermination sexual relationships. When introducing such a proscription in 1992, the first 15 drafts of the APA ethical standards included recommendations for a total ban on posttermination relationships. Currently, the ACA, APA, AAMFT, and AMHCA standards mandate that professionals cannot engage in sexual intimacy with former clients for 2 years following termination. Counselors who do develop sexual relations with clients after this 2-year period must thoroughly document that the relations did not have a destructive nature. For those who believe the counseling relationship continues through perpetuity, the 2-year waiting period is problematic. Perhaps that is why NASW’s (1996) policy concerning sexual relations with former clients reads as follows:

Social workers should not engage in sexual activities or sexual contact with former clients because of the potential for harm to the client. If social workers engage in conduct contrary to this prohibition or claim that an exception to this prohibition is warranted because of extraordinary circumstances, it is social workers-not their clients-who assume the full burden of demonstrating that the former client has not been exploited, coerced, or manipulated, intentionally or unintentionally. (1.09b)

The ethical concerns of nonsexual dual relationships do not vary from those of sexual intimacies. The issues of autonomy and nonmaleficence face any counselor confronted with this decision- making process as well. In ACA’s (1995) Code of Ethics and Standards of Practice, counselors are encouraged to avoid dual relationships when possible:

Counselors are aware of their influential positions with respect to clients, and they avoid exploiting the trust and dependency of clients. Counselors make every effort to avoid dual relationships with clients that could impair professional judgment or increase the risk of harm to clients. (p. 3)

APA’s (2002) Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct standard on multiple relationships addresses the potential for diluting a professional’s objectivity:

A psychologist refrains from entering into a multiple relationship if the multiple relationship could reasonably be expected to impair the psychologist’s objectivity, competence, or effectiveness in performing his or her functions as a psychologist, or otherwise risks exploitation or harm to the person with whom the professional relationship exists. (3.05)

Similar positions can be found in the most recent professional codes of the AMHCA, NASW, and AAMFT.

Ambiguity within the code of ethics concerning these nonsexual and sexual relationships places an enormous burden on the shoulders of clinicians who find themselves in, or on the verge of entering into, a multiple relationship. For a clinician confronted with an ethical dilemma regarding client dual relationships, whether sexual or nonsexual, the solution is often obscured by a myriad of circumstances unique to that particular situation. In our pluralistic society, many counselors are reevaluating their traditional approach to the therapeutic process, thereby encountering more secondary relationships and the ramification their impact has on the counseling relationship.

*Destructive Dual Relationships: Sexual and Nonsexual

On the continuum of dual relationships, there seems little disagreement among clinicians that a sexual relationship between a counselor and a current client is the most harmful. Borys and Pope (1989) surveyed 4,800 mental health professionals to examine opinions and practices regarding various dual relationships. Ninety- eight percent of the respondents cited “sexual activity with a client before termination of therapy” (p. 289) as never ethical.

Despite the honorable attitudes reflected in surveys regarding counselor-client intimacies, behavior indicates that there remains cause for serious professional concern. Nearly half of the practitioners responding to a survey by Stake and Oliver (1991) reported treating clients who had sexual contact with a previous therapist. On careful examination of surveys concerning sexual intimacies with clients, Housman and Stake (1999) cited the following: “The percentage of psychologists reporting sex with current clients has ranged from 3% to 12% among male therapists and from 0.5% to 3% among female therapists” (Introduction section, 1).

Perhaps most alarming was the study by Pope and Bajt ( 1988) in which 100 senior psychologists were chosen to participate by virtue of their apparent familiarity with ethical professional behavior. The participants were current or former members of state ethics committees, the APA’s ethics committee, authors of legal or ethical psychology textbooks, and diplomats of the American Board of Professional Psychology. Pope and Bajt found that even in this prestigious sample of psychologists, 9% indicated that they had engaged in sex with a client.

“It is clear from survey research, and from case study reports, that therapist sexual contact has almost universally negative consequences for the client” (Stake & Oliver, 1991, Introduction section, 1). Sexual intimacies with current clients demonstrate the counselor’s disregard for the counseling relationship in favor of the sexual one. By its very compelling nature, the sexual relationship becomes primary and the counselor has failed in his or her obligation to promote autonomy and nonmaleficence. “The client’s need for help, willingness to share, and reliance on the practitioner make giving and receiving help possible; they also make the client especially susceptible to the practitioner’s authority and influence” (Kagle & Giebelhausen, 1994, p. 216). Because of this power imbalance, clients may feel they have neither the freedom to choose to enter or not enter into a sexual relationship with their counselor nor the freedom to leave it.

The tragic cost for the patient of such a relationship may include cognitive dysfunction, sexual confusion, ambivalence, suppressed rage, guilt, depression, psychosomatic disorders, and risk of suicide (Kagle & Giebelhausen, 1994; Smith & Fitzpatrick, 1995; Stake & Oliver, 1991). Furthermore, Stake and Oliver cited the destruction of the integrity of the therapeutic relationship, the client’s diminished trust in future caregivers, and the exacerbation of the very symptoms for which the client had sought help as further negative results of sexual contact.

Sexual relations with former clients do not elicit the same unanimous concern from professionals in the mental health field. The decision to allow counselors, albeit under very specific conditions, to engage in sexual intimacies with clients 2 years after termination demonstrates this ambivalence. Many scholars have voiced the concern that the 2-year delay is arbitrary, changes the nature of therapy, and contradicts a counselor’s responsibility to do no harm and to enable patient autonomy. These issues are summarized well by Gabbard (1994a), who questioned the notion that a counselor no longer has any professional relationship or responsibilities to a former client. All therapy, regardless of duration, focus, and theoretical approach, requires professional responsibilities that persist long after termination. These responsibilities include maintenance and permitted transmission of records as well as the preservation of the client’s rights to appropriate privacy, confidentiality, and privilege.

The concern that posttermination sexual relations\hips may drastically alter the nature of therapy is twofold. “Patients who may have wanted or needed a relationship free from sexual possibilities (e.g., those who seek therapy because they have been victims of rape or incest) may find themselves evaluated by a therapist as potential future sex partners” (Gabbard, 1994a, Harm to Patients and the Therapeutic Process, 1). On the other hand,

Rather than viewing their attraction to a therapist as a normal event that may safely emerge in a context with no possibility of ever being consummated, patients may come to recognize that, at least eventually, sexual union with the person serving as their therapist is a real possibility, recognized and condoned by the ethics code. (Gabbard, 1994a, Harm to Patients and the Therapeutic Process, 2)

A patient hoping to fulfill this attraction may attempt to hide from the practitioner any aspects of him- or herself that may appear unattractive or prolong the therapeutic process. Hence, in hopes of pursuing this secondary relationship with their counselor, clients may consciously or unconsciously sabotage their own therapeutic efforts. Conversely, the counselor’s finding him- or herself attracted to a client may alter the nature and duration of therapy to expedite the process in hopes of a future sexual relationship.

Even if a relationship has been terminated, the client’s autonomy remains at high risk because of the inherent power differential that continues after counseling. Counselors have access to intimate and sensitive information concerning their clients that could be abused in certain situations. The implicit threat of exploitation facing former clients, who come to believe their trust was broken and wish to file a complaint, is all too real. Furthermore, filing a complaint compels the client to waive the right to privilege and confidentiality. What was once held in the strictest confidence may well become a matter of public record (Gabbard, 1994a). In this case, the counseling relationship is subverted and held hostage by the counselor’s own needs.

Indeed, counselor-client sexual contact represents all that is problematic in boundary violations. The professional and personal concerns of counselors about to begin a sexual relationship with a current or terminated client loom large. It is essential that mental health professionals understand the laws and regulations that govern this issue in their states. The potential damage to counselors- lawsuit, felony conviction, having their licenses revoked, expulsion from professional organizations, loss of insurance coverage, and termination-is well summarized by Corey et al. (1998). Furthermore, counselors “may also be placed on probation, be required to undergo their own psychotherapy, be closely monitored if they are allowed to resume their practice, and be required to obtain supervised practice” (Corey et al., 1998, p. 247).

In many situations, nonsexual dual relationships can also be caustic to the counseling relationship. Some clinicians believe the risk that the secondary relationship will override the counseling relationship is too great and therefore harmful to the client. For instance, Kagle and Giebelhausen (1994) argued that nonsexual dual relationships violate professional boundaries. “The practitioner’s influence and the client’s vulnerability carry over to the second relationship” (p. 215). As such, the practitioner is in a position to exploit the client for his or her own personal gain. Furthermore, Sonne (1994) has argued that the nature of such dual relationships undermines the fiduciary relationship a practitioner has with his or her client. Because of this second relationship, the counselor is now susceptible to other interests (personal, financial, or social, etc.) that he or she may put before the best interests of the client.

In a study by Borys and Pope (1989), 1,108 practitioners completed a survey on multiple relationships. Of the respondents, 70.8% claimed it was never ethical to solicit a patient regarding products, 63.5% believed inviting a client to a social event was also unethical, and 57.9% deemed counseling an employee as ethically inappropriate.

Welfel (1998) cautioned that even well-meaning counselors should think twice before beginning a dual relationship:

Counselors with good intentions to help people who need therapy are often especially vulnerable because they underestimate the limits their other role places on them and overestimate their capacity for objectivity in the face of strong personal interests. In other words, they do not recognize the conflict of interest inherent in the situation, (p. 172)

For example, the dynamics of dual relationships can be troublesome for the counselor recovering from substance addiction. Recently, “the National Association of Alcoholism and Drug Abuse Counselors (NAA-DAC) reported that approximately 58% of its 1994 membership was recovering from a substance addiction” (Doyle, 1997, p. 428). Because fellowship meetings play an integral role in the recovery process, these counselors may encounter a current client at a local AA meeting. Such circumstances may enhance the client’s feelings of trust and provide the counselor with additional information helpful to the counseling relationship. On the other hand, such circumstances may place counselor and client in a secondary relationship that is not only potentially detrimental to counseling but possibly damaging for the practitioner as well.

“Both the client’s right to confidentiality and the counselor’s anonymity are at risk” when both individuals belong to the same group. “From the counselor’s perspective, his or her anonymity as a recovering person [could be] compromised” (Doyle, 1997, p. 430). In addition, the effectiveness of the counseling sessions may be jeopardized because of the counselor’s use of self-disclosure at the meeting. Because the opportunity for substance abuse counselors and their clients to meet in therapeutic arenas is great (especially in small communities), it is vital that counselors receive proper training regarding these dual relationships.

It is also crucial that counselors take action to protect the well-being of a client who has been the victim of a harmful dual relationship, whether the relationship is sexual or nonsexual in nature. According to Malley and Reilly (1999), counselors should provide or arrange for therapeutic services for clients who have been exploited and abused by another practitioner. In addition, counselors are obligated to report unethical behavior to appropriate authorities, such as state licensing boards, national certifying boards, national ethics committees, and state certification boards.

*Therapeutic Dual Relationships

Clearly, some dual relationships are harmful to the therapeutic process. However, on the other end of the continuum are secondary relations that complement, enable, and enhance the counseling relationship. The counselor who is about to begin a dual relationship is not always destined for disaster. In fact, to refuse “to provide counseling to individuals with whom one has another relationship would [in certain instances, such as a rural setting] prevent people in need [of aid] from receiving assistance” (Doyle, 1997, p. 428). Such behavior merely trades one ethical concern for another.

Furthermore, Corey et al. (1998) examined the issue of client autonomy from another perspective. They contended that the ways in which counselors can misuse their power and influence are varied. “Simply avoiding a dual relationship does not prevent exploitation” (p. 228). In some instances, maintaining such boundaries may in fact place a needless emphasis on the power differential and the hierarchy of the relationship. Ironically, in such instances, the secondary relationship is destructive to the counseling relationship because it was avoided!

In working with clients from other cultures, clinicians often find themselves crossing boundaries to promote the counseling relationship. Herr (1999) summarized cross-cultural counseling as “therapeutic techniques designed to be sensitive and responsive to cultural differences between counselors and clients” (p. 153). It is the receptiveness to their client’s culture that has led therapists to cross into additional relationships with them in order to enhance the helping relationship. “In other cultural contexts, where people are unaccustomed to depending on strangers or outsiders for advice and help and where objective detachment would not be understood as facilitative, a dual relationship of reciprocal trust and ‘connectedness’ may be required” (Pedersen, 1997, p. 25). For example, a culturally common practice to show gratitude and respect in many Asian communities is gift giving. While Western-trained professionals may believe that accepting a gift would blur boundaries, a refusal of the gift may result in the client feeling insulted (Corey et al., 1998).

Schank and Skovholt (1997) conducted interviews with psychologists who lived and practiced in rural areas and small communities. Participants were asked to describe multiple relationships they routinely came across in daily practice. In order to be accepted, these psychologists found they needed to work within the existing community system. Unlike large urban environments where anonymity is well received, the culture of smaller and more remote locales calls for familiarity. Smith and Fitzpatrick (1995) explained that mental health professionals in rural settings are often regarded with suspicion. Inhabitants of such environments may view a counselor who participates in community activities as more approachable than those who avoid outside office contact. In many small communities, it is the well-earned trust of the population that will enable the therapist to effectively serve the community.

In a controversial article that incited numerous responses (Borys, 1994; Brown, 1994\; Gabbard, 1994b; Gottlieb, 1994; Gutheil, 1994), Lazarus ( 1994) addressed the 1992 revised ethical principles of psychologists and warned that “when taken too far [the ethical guidelines regarding dual relationships] can become transformed into artificial boundaries that serve as destructive prohibitions and thereby undermine clinical effectiveness” (p. 255). Citing the positive outcomes of numerous boundary crossings with clients (i.e., socializing, playing tennis, taking long walks, accepting and giving small gifts), he explained that his attitudes and practices are not completely contrary to accepted belief: “I remain totally opposed to any form of disparagement, exploitation, abuse, or harassment, and I am against any form of sexual contact with clients. But outside of these confines, I feel that most other limits and proscriptions are negotiable” (Lazarus, 1994, p. 259).

As a result of the present litigious climate, Lazarus (1994) acknowledged that he is more cautious and “a less humane practitioner today” (p. 259). The current ethics and boundaries in psychotherapy, although well intentioned, are also in response to the profession’s growing concern about liability and the constant threat of legal suits. He cautioned colleagues not to hide behind rigid boundaries, where they are often of little help to their clients. “I would say that one of the worst professional or ethical violations is that of permitting current risk-management principles to take precedence over humane interventions” (Lazarus, 1994, p. 260).

Similarly, Kiselica (2001) has suggested that successful counseling of adolescent boys calls for “a transformation that requires us to reexamine how rigidly we interpret concepts such as client-therapists boundaries and dual relationships” (p. 52). Counselors should seek out restaurants, parks, gymnasiums, and playgrounds for enhancing the therapeutic alliance. These environments provide familiar and nonthreatening settings for young males who are used to “developing intimate relations in less formal settings” (Kiselica, 2001, p. 47). In addition to meeting outside of the office, Kiselica also advised counselors of young boys to be prepared to divulge appropriate personal information about themselves to the client:

Although traditional boys may find it difficult to disclose very personal matters to others directly, they tend to open up to others who take the lead with self-disclosure. . . . Sharing light conversations that are characterized by gradual and mutual self- disclosure and are held outside of the office can pave the way for discussions regarding more substantive matters, (p. 49)

*Assessing Multiple Relationships

“Boundary issues regularly pose complex challenges to clinicians. The effects of crossing commonly recognized boundaries range from significant therapeutic progress to serious, indelible harm” (Smith & Fitzpatrick, 1995, Recommendations and Conclusions, 4). The assorted theoretical viewpoints of mental health professionals further complicate the issue of dual relationships. Lamb and Catanzaro (1998) proposed that professional attitudes regarding nonsexual boundaries are influenced by theoretical orientations. Because these orientations vary widely, some clinicians may be confused about how “to identify and make appropriate decisions regarding nonsexual boundary events or behaviors with individuals with whom psychologists interact in their professional roles” (Lamb & Catanzaro, 1998, Introduction section, 5).

What one professional may deem as appropriate behavior, another professional may view as a boundary violation. Even some of our most knowledgeable and prominent figures in the mental health field had questionable practices with their clients. For example, Sigmund Freud analyzed his friend and his own daughter. D. W. Winnicott was known to take patients into his home as part of their treatment. Finally, Melanie Klein invited a client to follow her on a vacation. During this time, she analyzed him for 2 hours on her hotel bed (Smith & Fitzpatrick, 1995, Types of Boundary Violations, 2). The complexity surrounding multiple relationships often makes evaluating them a difficult task for practitioners. “Sometimes the code of ethics provides adequate guidance; other times, the dilemma is ‘at the cutting edge of practice’ or one ethical principle seems to conflict with another” (Welfel & Kitchener, 1992, Components of Moral Behavior, 3).

In response to the increasing need for additional guidance, frameworks have been devised to assess the risks of multiple relationships and the variables to consider when assessing the ethics of a second relationship. These variables include, but are not limited to, the standards of practice, the client’s well-being, the type of dual relationship (sexual or nonsexual), the therapeutic process, the client’s mental status, the motives of the counselor, the circumstances surrounding termination, and boundaries (Herlihy & Remley, 2001; Welfel, 1998). A general theme cutting across discussions of these variables harkens back to professional obligations of nonmaleficence and autonomy.

There are general rules offered throughout the literature to aid the assessment of multiple relationships. When functioning in more than one role with a client, Corey et al. (1998) recommended thinking through potential problems before they occur and offered the following to guide the process:

1. Set healthy boundaries from the outset.

2. Secure the informed consent of clients and discuss with them both the potential risks and benefits of dual relationships.

3. Remain willing to talk with clients about any unforeseen problems and conflicts that may arise.

4. Consult with other professionals to resolve any dilemmas.

5. Seek supervision when dual relationships become particularly problematic or when the risk for harm is high.

6. Document any dual relationship in clinical case notes.

7. Examine your own motivations for being involved in dual relationships.

8. When necessary, refer clients to another professional. (p. 230)

In addition, Welfel (1998) recommended that counselors consider limiting their professional activities with people who are their clients and friends:

In other words, the mental health professional ought to offer only briefer, less intense services to those with stronger business, social or community tics to the counselor and to reserve long-term counseling for people with whom outside connections are nonexistent or peripheral. (p. 183)

Discussion

A code of ethics is one hallmark that distinguishes professions from occupations. Over time, ethics has been defined and redefined to reflect the current collective, philosophical, and theological characteristics of the social context. Once strictly based on divine authority, society was guided by the scholarly interpretations of the code of God. While moral theology provided a framework for ethics, the intrinsic finality of “God’s Word” did little to encourage discussion or debate. During the 19th century, the orientation of ethics moved away from God toward a theory based on reason. This rational movement brought with it freedom for people to question ethical principles and apply them to their current lives in ways that were practical and representative of their pluralistic society.

The current standards of practice involving dual relationships need to be reexamined and extended to adequately address the current moral dilemmas confronting mental health professionals. The standards of practice are developed by an ethics committee within a professional organization that has the responsibility of helping to ensure that a wide range of moral principles are reflected in the final codes for that organization. However, for these codes to be applicable and relevant, thoughtful input on the part of the organization’s members is crucial. Therefore, it is necessary for professionals to hold active membership in their organization. By joining together, practitioners experiencing similar dilemmas (e.g., the rural psychologists) can effectively voice their concerns so appropriate changes can be made. In addition, it is the responsibility of the professional association to provide a safe and nonjudgmental environment for members to engage in frank conversations with advisory boards regarding the reality of multiple relationships.

According to M. Kocet (personal communication, January 16, 2003), the chairperson of the committee charged with revising the ACA ethical standards, there is growing support among counselors to reexamine traditional, rigid beliefs about dual relationships. This is welcome news, because the codes of professional mental health associations typically regard dual relationships as interactions that are harmful in nature and to be avoided. However, the current version of APA’s (2002) Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct realistically states, “Multiple relationships that would not reasonably be expected to cause impairment or risk exploitation or harm are not unethical” ( 3.05). It seems that this addition to the code, unique among the professional organizations, states the obvious. However, that there needs to be such a statement reflects the dilemma of practitioners finding their way in the ethical maze of dual relationships. Consequently, we hope that the revised ACA ethical standards developed by Kocet and his colleagues provide clearer direction regarding both the risks and the potential benefits of dual relationships than past versions of the standards did.

These risks and benefits of dual relationships are best understood in the broader context of the counseling relationship. From the literature review undertaken in this article, it appears that a variable that makes sexual relationships with clients or posttermination sexual relationships destructive is also found in toxic nonsexual dual relationships. This variable is the intensity of th\e counselor’s additional interest or interests that have developed as a result of the second relationship. It appears that the increase in the secondary interest necessarily fosters a decrease in the primary relationship of counseling. Hence, to the degree that the intensity of the counselor’s personal concerns increase in the second relationship, there is also a greater danger that the client will lose autonomy and a greater potential for harm to the client. Furthermore, the positive or negative value of the relationship is determined by the degree to which it enhances the primary counseling relationship. Therefore, in positive dual relationships, the interest of the counselor stays focused on the well-being and autonomy of the client.

Studies are needed to investigate the impact of nonsexual dual relationships on clients from the client’s perspective, because there appear to be no studies of this kind to date. Future research in this area might yield valuable data for consideration in the development of ethical standards, or at least more informed dialogue on the subject. Meanwhile, it should be noted that there is empirical evidence from several studies suggesting that the majority of counselors believe that posttermination friendships between counselors and their former clients could be acceptable as long as such friendships do not result in any harm to the former clients (Akamatsu, 1988; Gibson & Pope, 1993; Salisbury & Kinnier, 1996). In response to these latter findings, Herlihy and Remley (2001) warned that counselors should try to avoid meeting their social needs through former clients. They cautioned counselors contemplating the development of friendships with former clients to

consider several factors in making their decisions, including the length and nature of the counseling relationship, client diagnoses or issues, circumstances of termination, the possibility that clients might want to return to counseling, unresolved transference or countertransference issues, and whether any harm to the clients can be foreseen. (p. 83)

In closing, we reiterate that the subject of dual relationships is a complicated topic that requires all counselors to examine the potential risks and benefits of entering these relationships. We hope that the issues and recommendations reviewed in this article will help more counselors to respond to potential dual relationships in ways that produce therapeutic outcomes with their clients.

References

Akamatsu, T. J. (1988). Intimate relationships with former clients: National survey of attitudes and behavior among practitioners. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 19, 454-458.

American Association for Marriage and Family Therapy. (2001). AAMFT code of ethics. Alexandria, VA: Author.

American Counseling Association. (1995). Code of ethics and standards of practice. Alexandria, VA: Author.

American Mental Health Counselors Association. (2000). Code of ethics of the American Mental Health Counselors Association. Alexandria, VA: Author.

American Psychological Association. (2002). Ethical principles of psychologists and code of conduct. Washington, DC: Author. Retrieved December 15, 2002, from http://www.apa.org/ethics/code2002.html

Anderson, S. K., & Kitchener, K. S. (1996). Nonromantic, nonsexual posttherapy relationships between psychologists and former clients: An exploratory study of critical incidents. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 27, 59-66. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Borys, D. S. (1994). Maintaining therapeutic boundaries: The motive is therapeutic effectiveness, not defensive practice. Ethics and Behavior, 4, 267-273.

Borys, D. S., & Pope, K. S. (1989). Dual relationships between therapist and client: A national study of psychologists, psychiatrists, and social workers. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 20, 283-293.

Brown, L. S. (1994). Concrete boundaries and the problem of literal-mindedness: A response to Lazarus. Ethics and Behavior, 4, 275-281.

Coleman, E., & Schaefer, S. (1986). Boundaries of sex and intimacy between client and counselor. Journal of Counseling and Development, 64, 341-344.

Corey, G., Corey, M. S., & Callanan, P. (1998). Issues and ethics in the helping professions. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.

Doyle, K. (1997). Substance abuse counselors in recovery: Implications for the ethical issue of dual relationships. Journal of Counseling & Development, 75, 428-432.

Gabbard, G. O. (1994a). Reconsidering the American Psychological Association’s policy on sex with former patients. Is it justifiable? Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 25, 329-335. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Gabbard, G. O. (1994b). Teetering on the precipice: A commentary on Lazarus’s “How Certain Boundaries and Ethics Diminish Therapeutic Effectiveness.” Ethics and Behavior, 4, 283-286.

Gibson, W. T., & Pope, K. S. (1993). The ethics of counseling: A national survey of certified counselors. Journal of Counseling & Development, 71, 330-336.

Gladding, S. T. (2000). Counseling: A comprehensive profession (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Gottlieb, M. C. (1993). Avoiding exploitive dual relationships: A decision-making model. Psychotherapy, 30, 41-48.

Gottlieb, M. C. (1994). Ethical decision making, boundaries, and treatment effectiveness: A reprise. Ethics and Behavior, 4, 287- 293.

Gutheil, T. G. (1994). Discussion of Lazarus’s “How Certain Boundaries and Ethics Diminish Therapeutic Effectiveness.” Ethics and Behavior, 4, 295-298.

Herlihy, B., & Corey, G. (1997). Codes of ethics as catalysts for improving practice. In B. Herlihy & G. Corey (Eds.), Ethics in therapy (pp. 37-56). New York: Hatherleigh.

Herlihy, B., & Remley, T. (2001). Legal and ethical challenges in counseling. In D. C. Locke, J. E. Myers, & E. L. Herr (Eds.), The handbook of counseling (pp. 69-90). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Herr, E. L. (1999). Counseling in a dynamic society: Contexts & practices for the 21st century. Alexandria, VA: American Counseling Association.

Housman, L. M., & Stake, J. E. (1999). The current state of sexual ethics training in clinical psychology: Issues of quantity, quality and effectiveness. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 30, 302-311. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Kagle, J. D., & Giebelhausen, P. N. (1994). Dual relationships and professional boundaries. Social Work, 39, 213-220.

Kiselica, M. S. (2001). A male-friendly therapeutic process with school-age boys. In G. R. Brooks & G. E. Good (Eds.), The new handbook of psychotherapy and counseling with men: A comprehensive guide to setting, problems, and treatment approaches: Vol. I (pp. 43- 58). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Lamb, H. D., & Catanzaro, S. J. (1998). Sexual and nonsexual boundary violations involving psychologists, clients, supervisees, and students: Implications for professional practice. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 29, 498-503. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Lazarus, A. (1994). How certain boundaries and ethics diminish therapeutic effectiveness. Ethics and Behavior, 4, 253-261.

Malley, P. B., & Reilly, E. P. (1999). Legal and ethical dimensions for mental health professionals. Philadelphia: Accelerated Development.

National Association of Social Workers. (1996). Code of ethics. Washington, DC: Author.

Pedersen, P. B. (1997). The cultural context of the American Counseling Association code of ethics. Journal of Counseling & Development, 76, 23-28.

Pope, K. S., & Bajt, T. R. (1988). When laws and values conflict: A dilemma for psychologists. American Psychologist, 43, 828-829.

Pope, K. S., & Vetter, V. A. (1992). Ethical dilemmas encountered by members of the American Psychological Association: A National Survey. American Psychologist, 47, 397-411. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Remley, T. P., Hermann, M., & Huey, W. C. (Eds.). (2003). Introduction. In T. P. Remley, M. Hermann, & W. W. Huey (Eds.), Ethical and legal issues in school counseling (2nd ed., pp. xiii- xvi). Alexandria, VA: American School Counselor Association.

Salisbury, W. A., & Kinnier, R. T. (1996). Posttermination friendships between counselors and clients. Journal of Counseling & Development, 74, 495-500.

Schank, J. A., & Skovholt, T. M. (1997). Dual-relationship dilemmas of rural and small-community psychologists. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 28, 44-49. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Smith, D., & Fitzpatrick, M. (1995). Patient-therapist boundary issues: An integrative review of theory and research. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 26, 499-506. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Sonne, J. L. (1994). Multiple relationships: Does the new ethics code answer the right questions? Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 25, 336-343. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Stake, J. E., & Oliver, J. (1991). Sexual contact and touching between therapist and client: A survey of psychologists’ attitudes and behavior. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 22, 297-307. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Welfel, E. R. (1998). Ethics in counseling and psychotherapy: Standards, research and emerging issues. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/ Cole.

Welfel, E. R., & Kitchener, K. S. (1992). Ethics education: An agenda for the 90s. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 23, 179-181. Retrieved February 18, 2002, from PsycARTICLES database.

Sharon M. Moleski, Community Counseling Program, and Mark S. Kiselica, Department of Counselor Education, both at The College of New Jersey. Correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to Sharon M. Moleski, 56 Jamestown Road, Eatontown, NJ 07724 (e-mail: [email protected]).

Copyright American Counseling Association Winter 2005

Anamarie 4 Years Later

Weight gain and size of child, 7, remain unexplained

Anamarie Regino is 7 years old, 5-feet-1-inch tall and 200 pounds. Four years ago, she became the most publicized overweight youngster in New Mexico history when the state took her away from her family for 2 1/2 months.

The Children, Youth and Families Department contended her weight was life-threatening and said her parents weren’t managing it adequately.

At the time, the state said Anamarie was 3 1/2 feet tall and weighed 124 pounds — some three times heavier and 50 percent taller than the average 3-year-old.

To date, Anamarie has not been given a specific diagnosis. She continues to grow at an unusual rate, although her weight gain has tapered off with medication for insulin resistance. Her condition, which includes some developmental delays, requires various therapies, monitors and a strict diet.

Anamarie’s mother, Adela Martinez-Regino, says her daughter hadn’t lost any weight when the state returned her to her family. Any diagnosis that might come to mind — pituitary or thyroid problems or Prater-Willi syndrome — has been tested and put aside, says Martinez-Regino. “There’s no scientific explanation,” she says.

Her current pediatrician, Javier Aceves, has said other children share similar characteristics with Anamarie, but the traits don’t combine to fit a single syndrome.

Martinez-Regino continues to talk publicly about Anamarie in the hopes that she can find other parents who might be dealing with the same situation.

‘A little strange’

Only 6 pounds, 13 ounces at birth, Anamarie began to gain significant weight at 2 months old.

“It was solid weight, too, not that chubby stuff you see in babies,” says her mother.

By the time the little girl was 3, bone scans showed her to have the bones of a 7-year-old. At 3, she was sometimes mistaken for a 10- year-old.

Now, at 7, she has the bones of a 14-year-old, and suffers from asthma and sleep apnea — interrupted breathing during sleep, one of the most severe problems for obese children. She receives physical, occupational and speech therapy for various disabilities. Anamarie has “lazy eye,” meaning her eyes don’t track together, and she recently had her second surgery to correct it. A drooping eyelid was also fixed during that surgery.

Today, the Martinez-Regino family — once the center of much state interest — is dealing with Anamarie’s health without state intervention. “I’ve not had any contact from the state since January 2001,” says Martinez-Regino.

“It’s a little strange, considering they wanted to take her away from us.”

Matt Dillman, spokesman for New Mexico’s Children, Youth and Families Department, says that under state confidentiality laws, “We can’t even confirm we’ve had the case.”

For the first few months after Anamarie was returned to her family, her mother says, a staffer from the state lived with the family, monitoring Anamarie’s eating. Today, Anamarie sees her pediatrician once a month. She has a machine in her bedroom to monitor her sleep apnea, and an oxygen machine if she gets sick.

A special bike

Her physical therapist, Robert Romero, says her gross motor skills are behind for her age, but her fine motor skills are better. Her mother says Anamarie loves to do arts and crafts projects, especially beading.

“She really wanted a bicycle — all her friends had them,” says her mother. “We got her one with training wheels, but they couldn’t hold her up.”

At Kidpower Therapy Associates, Anamarie is able to ride a special three-wheel bicycle. During a recent session there, Romero said her physical progress is encouraging. “When she first came (four years ago), she needed to be held just walking on the cushions,” he said. Now her balance is much better and she handles herself well on the various equipment.

“Choose wisely, grasshopper,” says Romero, as Anamarie selects the five exercises she will do that day and writes them on a board. At first tired, she becomes more energized and talkative during the 50-minute session, even asking Romero to time her on her last exercise, following a bike route with stops and starts.

Kidpower also provides Anamarie’s occupational therapy and speech therapy.

“She speaks and reads and writes English and Spanish, but she needs some speech help,” Martinez-Regino says.

Both the physical and the occupational therapy can help her visual/perceptual skills.

“She has some very weak eye muscles,” says Romero, “which could lead to some safety issues in how she literally perceives the world.”

Anamarie also attends “adaptive PE” at her public elementary school. “She goes for walks and on Wednesdays, she goes to the University of New Mexico pool for swimming,” says her mother.

A strict diet

Meanwhile, the family deals with the same eating issues any parents of an overweight youngster would face. Anamarie’s regimen calls for almost 1,300 calories a day. Martinez-Regino says Anamarie’s typical breakfast is: 1/2 cup cereal like Shredded Wheat or Grape-Nuts, 1/2 cup low-fat milk, 1/2 banana or 1/2 apple, and one egg.

Lunch is 1/2 sandwich (ham or turkey on whole wheat bread with a slice of cheese), a 4-ounce container of fat-free yogurt, an apple or banana and a whole graham cracker plus half of another.

Dinner is 1 ounce of broiled or baked meat (the family has a kitchen scale to determine the weight), a small serving of vegetables, an apple or banana and a 4-ounce container of fat-free yogurt.

Anamarie can have one snack a day, which she has when she comes home from school: a small container of yogurt, a piece of fruit and 10 graham cracker sticks (not quarters of whole crackers).

She’s been on a strict diet since she began eating solid foods as an infant, says her mother. When she first came home from foster care, she was allowed only 800 calories a day, but that figure increased as she grew in height and her physical activity increased.

Regino-Martinez doesn’t want Anamarie to hide her eating, so they talk about what she ate at school. “If she has a cupcake because it’s someone’s birthday, then we just decrease what she has for snack or for dinner.”

While enchiladas are still on the family’s menu, it’s only once a month and then they’re made with lean meat and low-fat cheese and the tortillas aren’t fried in oil.

A constant battle

The initial diagnoses doctors suggested — like Prater-Willi syndrome or leptin receptor deficiency — didn’t fit Anamarie, says her mother. “Those are the things where parents have to literally lock the cabinets to keep kids from eating everything,” says Martinez-Regino.

“That’s just not like Anamarie. I still have Halloween candy in the house that she’s not interested in.” She says that as a toddler, Anamarie didn’t even know what a cookie was until they enrolled her in a state-run pre-school program.

Anamarie’s doctor recently prescribed metformin for her insulin resistance and her family is pleased with its effects. “She was gaining five pounds a month before,” says her mother. But from October through December, prime months for holiday feasting and goodies, Anamarie gained only a total of two pounds.

“Before, she ate everything on her plate,” says Martinez-Regino. “Now she doesn’t always finish everything.”

Anamarie’s teachers and classmates know she has to monitor her eating, bringing her lunch from home each day. “It’s hard though. Kids have candy at school, there are vending machines and soft drinks.

“And when the ice cream truck drives down our street, oh, that’s so hard.”

Testicular Cancer: Epidemiology, Assessment and Management

By reading this article and writing a practice profile, you can gain a certificate of learning. You have up to a year to send in your practice profile. Guidelines on how to write and submit a profile are featured at the end of this article.

Aim and intended learning outcomes

The aim of this article is to summarise the epidemiology, diagnosis and treatment of testicular cancer. It outlines the pivotal role that nurses play in the management of the disease, from raising awareness and promoting self-examination to clinical assessment, treatment and follow-up. After reading this article you should be able to:

* Identify men at higher risk of developing testicular cancer.

* Describe the clinical signs and symptoms of testicular cancer.

* Explain the testicular self-examination (TSE) technique and the benefits of regular examination in the early detection and treatment of testicular cancer.

* Assist in raising awareness of the disease and promoting self- examination among male patients.

* Summarise the key treatments for testicular cancer and the overall management of the patient.

* Recognise the need for psychological support relating to body image and fertility for male patients following orchidectomy.

Summary

Testicular cancer is the most common type of cancer in men aged 15 to 44 years. This article discusses the causes, diagnosis and treatment of the disease.

Key words

* Men’s health

* Patients: psychology

* Self-examination

* Testicular cancer: prevention and screening

These key words are based on subject headings from the British Nursing Index. This article has been subject to double-blind review.

Introduction

Cancer of the testis is a malignant tumour, which mainly affects young and middle-aged men in their reproductive years (Adami et al 1994). It is a relatively rare disease in the UK compared with other cancers. Approximately 1,900 new cases are diagnosed every year, accounting for fewer than 2 per cent of all male-registered malignant neoplasms (Cancer Research UK (CRUK) 2002). However, the incidence rate has more than doubled over the past two decades and it is the most common cancer among men aged 15 to 44 years (CRUK 2002). Approximately half of all cases in the UK occur in men under 35 years of age (CRUK 2002). The reason for the recent rise in cases is uncertain, although environmental oestrogenic compounds that affect embryonic testis (Sharpe and Skakkebaek 1993) and improvements in cancer registration (Forman and Moller 1994) have been postulated as contributory factors.

In contrast to the increasing incidence, mortality associated with testicular cancer has sharply declined. Advances in treatment options, particularly combined chemotherapy (Newlands et al 1983), have improved the likelihood of survival – demonstrated by a 50 per cent reduction in death rates over the past 20 years (Toledano et al 2001). Cure rates for testicular cancer are relatively high – in excess of 95 per cent if diagnosed at an early stage, that is, before the cancer metastasises beyond the testicular tissue (Dearnaley et al 2001). However, while the benefits of early diagnosis are clear, evidence suggests that a large proportion of men continue to be unaware of the risk of the disease and less than one in five regularly practise TSE (Katz et al 1995, Khadra and Oakeshott 2002, Moore and Topping 1999, Wardle et al 1994). This knowledge deficit presents a major concern for the timely detection and treatment of testicular cancer, highlight-ing the importance of improving men’s access to information to identify personal susceptibility and aid effective TSE practice.

Histology

Approximately 95 per cent of testicular cancers are germ-cell tumours (GCTs), with the remainder consisting of lymphomas and other histological types arising from interstitial cells (Cook 2000). Testicular GCTs are classified into two broad sub-types:

* Pure seminomas, which arise from cells of the seminiferous tubules and comprise 40 per cent of GCTs.

* Non-seminomas, which make up the remainder. These are sub- divided into four categories:

* Embryonal carcinoma.

* Teratoma.

* Choriocarcinoma.

* Yolk sac tumour.

Non-seminomas tend to occur more frequently in younger men, with a peak incidence in males aged 25-29 years compared to 35-39 years for seminoma (Forman and Moller 1994).

TIME OUT 1

List the symptoms of testicular cancer and compare with the following text.

Signs and symptoms

The most common sign of testicular cancer is a lump in the testicle, which can be painful or painless. Swelling of the testicle, change in the tissue texture, aching, feeling of heaviness in the scrotum and asymmetry within the testis can also occur as the tumour enlarges (Cook 2000, Dearnaley et al 2001) (Box 1). Other symptoms such as haemoptysis, breathlessness and back pain suggest widespread disease and around 10 per cent of men may present with one or more of these (Dearnaley et al 2001).

Disease progression

Testicular cancer may be localised (stage I) or metastatic. Seminomas spread via the lymphatic system, while non-seminomas can metastasise by blood and lymphatic routes (Dearnaley eta/ 2001). The clinical progression of testicular cancer is classified into four stages (Box 2).

Testicular cancer is a highly curable disease. The overall cure rate is currently 80-90 per cent (CRUK 2002), which improves further when diagnosis and treatment are undertaken at an early stage. Five- year survival rates for patients with localised disease are 95 per cent for seminoma and 99 per cent for teratoma (Clark et al 2000). Although the prognosis is poorer for men presenting at a more advanced stage, data illustrate that 90 per cent of men with metastatic disease are alive five years after diagnosis (Clark et al 2000).

Box 1. Signs and symptoms of testicular cancer

Box 2. Staging of testicular cancer

TIME OUT 2

Before reading the next section compile a list of factors that you feel may increase the chance of developing testicular cancer. Then compare your risk factors with the following text.

Aetiology

The causes of testicular cancer are not well understood. However, factors linked to higher risk include a history of undescended testicle(s) (cryptorchidism), family history of the disease, previous experience of testicular cancer and being of white ethnicity (CRUK 2002) (Box 3). The major risk factor is cryptorchidism, which occurs in about 10 per cent of patients (CRUK 2002). Men born with undescended testes have five to ten times the risk of developing the disease compared with those in the general population (Swerdlow et al 1997).

A genetic link is implicated in around one third of patients. Worldwide, the highest incidence of testicular cancer is in northern Europe and the lowest is in Asia and Africa (Parkin et al 1992). Testicular cancer is five times more likely to occur in Caucasian men than those of black origin (Bosl et al 2001). Brothers of men with testicular cancer are six to ten times more likely to develop the disease (Dearnaley et al 2001). Familial lineage is also implicated through the identification of a gene, testicular germ- cell tumour 1 (TGCT1), mapped to chromosome Xq27, which increases susceptibility to testicular GCTs (Rapley et al 2000).

Studies have also associated an elevated risk of testicular cancer with in utero exposure to oestrogen or oestrogenic chemicals (Sharpe and Skakkebaek 1993); inguinal hernia; testicular torsion; post-puberty mumps orchitis (CRUK 2002); high socioeconomic status (Swerdlow and Skeet 1988); and an increase in sedentary behaviour (CRUK 2002). However, results have been inconsistent and further epidemiological research is required.

Barriers to accessing medical assessment

In the UK, men are less likely to access health services and receive health promotion advice than their female counterparts (Baker 2002, Banks 2001, Mills et al 1999). Compared with women, men are half as likely to attend the GP surgery and also present at a more advanced stage of illness (Barton 2000, DeVille-Almond 1998). This underuse of services and information has been confirmed by ‘well man’ and family planning clinic attendance data (Brindis etal 1998, Walsh 1998), and is attributed to a number of physical and social factors, including:

* Machismo – traditional masculine characteristics include being physically and emotionally strong, independent and self-contained (Harrison and Dignan 1999). These characteristics impede the ability to ask for help, show vulnerability and take on health issues (Banks 2001, Doyal 2001, Sharpe and Arnold 2000).

* Inexpressiveness – men’s difficulty in articulating their needs has been highlighted as a major barrier to seeking medical advice (Good et al 1989).

* Inaccessibility – male engagement with healthcare services is restricted by the (Baker 2002, Sweetman 2002):

* Opening hours, which conflict with regular employment activity.

* Female-orientated environment of such services, that is, surgery colour schemes and available literature.

Box 3. Risk factors for testicular cancer

* Fact that they are predominantly staffed by women.

Delays in accessing health services not only have implications for the prognosis and treatment options of the patient, but also affect NHS resources. Men’s reluctance to engage with health services is believed to contribute to their higher rates of mortality and morbidity compared with women (Robertson 1995). Nationally, men ar\e twice as likely to develop cancer than women, and it is the second most common cause of male deaths (Baker 2002).

Research illustrates that a significant number of patients with testicular cancer – about 50 per cent – present with advanced stage testicular cancer (Medical Research Council 1985, Wynd 2002). Inadequate knowledge has been cited as a contributory factor to excessive delays between men finding a potential sign of testicular cancer and seeking medical advice (Rosella 1994, Thornhill et al 1986). Two independent studies highlighted an average interval of 14 weeks between symptom discovery and presentation for medical assessment (Jones and Appleyard 1989, Tavolini et al 1999). Further barriers cited by men for postponing medical consultation include fear of receiving a cancer diagnosis and consequential surgery; anxiety associated with sexually transmitted infection; and guilt linked to sexual behaviour (Brodsky 1999, Gascoigne and Whitear 1999, Moore and Topping 1999, Post and Belis 1980). Such deferral is critical given the poorer prognosis and more severe and invasive treatment associated with advanced stage disease (Dearnaley et al 2001, Proutand Griffin 1984).

Testicular self-examination (TSE)

TSE is the routine assessment and manual palpation of the testicles to detect unusual changes, which might identify testicular disease (Cook 2000). Although the efficacy of TSE has been subject to debate, several authors have promoted its use to increase rates of early cancer detection and as a means of reducing treatment- related morbidity (Dearnaley ef al 2001, Singer etal 1993, Thornhill et al 1986, Wardle et al 1994).

Routine self-examination has not been shown to reduce testicular cancer mortality rates and it has been postulated that it may cause unnecessary anxiety among men (Buetow 1996, Kirk 2000, Morris 1996). However, TSE has been viewed as a valuable and relatively inexpensive method of enhancing male health awareness (Friman and Finney 1990, Moore and Topping 1999, Rosella 1994). All of the known risk factors for testicular cancer are predetermined (Brenner et al 2003), the majority of testicular tumours (95 per cent) are malignant (Javadapour 1980) and evidence to support the correlation between TSE and increased anxiety levels is unsubstantiated (Weist and Finney 1996). Findings from a study by Best et al (1996), which examined the impact of a testicular cancer and TSE training programme on a sample of 1,286 high-school boys, demonstrated that although TSE instruction significantly increased knowledge, anxiety levels remained unaffected.

TIME OUT 3

List three things that you feel are barriers to men practising testicular self-examination and write down the ways in which you feel these may be addressed.

Figure 1. Testicular self-examination technique

Factors affecting testicular self-examination practice Knowledge of testicular cancer risk, potential symptoms and correct TSE procedure is important to performing self-examination (Neef et al 1991, Rosella 1994). Knowledge of testicular cancer is consistently higher among men who regularly practise TSE compared with those who do not (Barling and Lehmann 1999, Moore and Topping 1999, Reno 1988). Insufficient information has been cited as a reason for men not undertaking self-examination (Katz et al 1995, Khadra and Oakeshott 2002). Research with men in the United States and the UK has identified other attitudinal and socio-demographic factors associated with TSE performance. These include:

* Older age (Khadra and Oakeshott 2002, Singer et al 1993, Wardle et al 1994).

* White ethnicity (Khadra and Oakeshott 2002, Wynd 2002).

* Higher educational attainment (Wynd 2002).

* Greater social support and encouragement to practise TSE (Brubaker and Wickersham 1990, Moore et al 1998, Wynd 2002).

* Contact with someone with testicular cancer (Khadra and Oakeshott 2002).

* Higher perceived susceptibility to testicular cancer (Katz et al 1995, Reno 1988).

* Greater confidence in the ability to self-examine correctly (Barling and Lehmann 1999, Brubaker and Wickersham 1990, Katz et al 1995).

* Exposure to testicular cancer education (Khadra and Oakeshott 2002, Singer et al 1993).

Testicular self-examination technique All men should practise TSE regularly – about once a month – from puberty onwards. It may be pragmatic to advise men to choose a specific day, such as the first day of the month or payday, to help them remember to self-examine. The best time to undertake this procedure is standing up, during or soon after a warm bath or shower, when the scrotal sac is relaxed and changes are easier to feel (Rosella 1994). This allows the individual to become familiar with the usual weight and texture of the testes (Rosella 1994) and detect any abnormalities at an early stage.

Figure 1 illustrates the self-examination technique. Men should roll each testicle in turn between the thumb (on top) and the index and middle fingers (underneath) several times in an S shape to feel for anything that is unusual from the last examination including a lump, hardness or swelling (Box 1). Testicles should be egg-shaped and feel smooth (Pinkowish 2000) with a soft tube, the epididymis, towards the back of each testicle. It is normal to have one testicle that is slightly larger and hangs a little lower than the other, however, this difference should be consistent from one examination to the next (Cook 2000). It is important that any abnormalities detected are reported to the GP without delay.

TIME OUT 4

Now that you have read about testicular self-examination, write a brief summary of how you would explain to a patient why and how to check his testicles.

Testicular cancer education Studies have demonstrated increased TSE performance following education about testicular cancer (Klein et al 1990, Walker and Guyton 1989). Methods used have included the distribution of written literature (Ganong and Markovitz 1987), viewing an educational videocassette (Marsh 1991), verbal instruction (Luther et al 1985) and performing TSE on a prosthetic model (Steffen et al 1994). Research on men’s awareness of testicular cancer and TSE practice has also indicated that 74-90 per cent would welcome further information about the disease and TSE instruction (Moore and Topping 1999, Thornhill etal 1986, Whiteford and Wordley 2003) and if given such advice would undertake self- examination (Neef et al 1991, Reno 1988).

Nurses in all specialties are in an ideal position to inform male patients about testicular cancer and self-examination (Brown 2003, Cook 2000, Whiteford and Wordley 2003). Given the epidemiology of testicular cancer, education needs to start at adolescence and continue throughout the thirties (Brown 2003). There are numerous routes by which information can be conveyed including (Brown 2003, Cook 2000, Whiteford and Wordley 2003):

* Leaflet distribution via A&E, outpatient clinics, general practice and walk-in centre waiting rooms, and repeat prescriptions.

* New patient health checks and well man clinics in general practice.

* Pre-employment screening by occupational health departments, workplace intranet sites and wage slips.

* Secondary school and student health services.

* Workplace and leisure facility changing rooms and toilets.

The use of written and pictorial literature portraying the TSE technique may be particularly beneficial given men’s potential embarrassment, lack of confidential facilities and time limitations (Cook 2000).

TIME OUT 5

Write down the ways in which men could be educated to perform testicular self-examination. Consider how these can be incorporated into your role.

Clinical assessment

Men generally seek medical assistance after finding a testicular lump, enlargement or aching. It is far less common for men to present with lower back pain, which is related to metastases of the para-aortic lymph nodes or breathlessness and haemoptysis which may indicate pulmonary metastases (Dearnaley et al 2001).

Medical staff will examine the testes to discover if the lump is attached to the testes or if it is another non-associated lump such as a hydrocele or hernia. Urgent ultrasound may assist with the diagnosis. Males with a two-week history of orchitis or epididymo- orchitis need urgent referral to a urologist and should be seen within two weeks (Dearnaley et al 2001).

To assist further with diagnosis and establish metastatic disease, blood samples will be taken to investigate for evidence of raised levels of alpha-fetoprotein (AFP) or human chorionic gonadotrophin (HCG), because seminomas secrete HCG but not AFP whereas non-seminomas may secrete either or both. Pregnancy tests can be used as an inexpensive method to establish raised levels of HCG (Dearnaley et al 2001, Pinkowish 2000). These levels will be monitored throughout the treatment to establish prognosis, response to treatment and for follow-up screening. They are measured before orchidectomy and post-orchidectomy until they have reduced to normal levels (Dearnaley et al 2001).

When these initial investigations are complete a patient with a solid intratesticular lump will be immediately referred for inguinal orchidectomy where a diagnosis can be made. A fine needle biopsy of the lump will not be taken because of the risk of metastatic spread or local recurrence (Pinkowish 2000, Poirier and Rawl 2000). It is important to monitor the spread of metastases to other parts of the body. Radiography of the chest, abdomen and pelvis assesses metastatic spread and aids staging. Computed tomography (CT) scans may be used to give a more accurate picture (Dearnaley ef a/2001, Pinkowish 2000). Following orchidectomy, comprehensive discussion with the patient needs to identify the choice of treatment or surveillance to manage the disease (Dearnaley et al 2001). A multidisdplinary approach throughout the process is advocated by the National Institute for Clinical Excellence (NICE) (2002).

Trea\tment by clinical stage

Non-seminoma GCTs spread via the blood and lymphatic system. Treatment for a low-risk stage I non-seminoma GCT requires surveillance only but high-risk tumours may require adjuvant chemotherapy or surveillance (Table 1). A stage Il metastatic non- seminoma GCT with good prognosis will be treated with three courses of chemotherapy. A stage III tumour with an intermediate prognosis will be treated with four courses of chemotherapy and stage IV with a poor prognosis with four to six courses of chemotherapy with referral to an oncologist (Dearnaley et al 2001).

Seminomas metastasise via the lymphatic system. Treatment for a stage I seminoma requires adjuvant para-aortic radiotherapy in addition to orchidectomy. A stage Il metastatic seminoma with good prognosis requires radiotherapy targeting the para-aortic and ipsilateral pelvic nodal areas. Higher-grade stage Il seminomas may require three courses of chemotherapy. A metastatic seminoma with intermediate prognosis requires four courses of chemotherapy and no patients are regarded as having a poor prognosis (Dearnaley et al 2001).

TIME OUT 6

Based on the summary of treatments presented here, draw up a list of issues that the patient might be concerned about with regard to each. Now consider the resources that are available in your clinical area to help explain the treatment and management of side effects or associated problems.

Side effects of treatment

Chemotherapy Treatment for testicular cancer is now successful. However, regimens involving combined chemotherapy with cisplatin can cause short and long-term side effects, which need to be discussed with the patient before treatment. Dearnaley et al (2001 ) report that the patient may experience the following acute symptoms:

* Alopecia.

* Fatigue.

* Nausea and vomiting.

* Neutropenia.

* Sepsis.

Cisplatin may also temporarily damage the auditory and peripheral sensory nerves but this normally resolves within six to 12 months’ post-treatment in most patients (Dearnaley et al 2001). More serious long-term vascular side effects including cerebral vascular accident, thromboembolic disease and myocardial infarction have been reported in men treated with cisplatin-based chemotherapy due to the development of hypertension and hyperlipidaemia (Vaughn et al 2002). Some patients will need to make lifestyle changes following diagnosis. Increased exercise, adjustment to diet and, if required, the addition of medication will reduce hypertension and lipid abnormalities. Patients who smoke should be encouraged to stop and be referred to a smoking cessation programme (Vaughn et al 2002).

Table 1. Treatment of seminomas and non-seminomas following orchidectomy

Chemotherapy with cisplatin has been used for many years to treat testicular cancer and it is generally believed that the risk of developing a dsplatin-linked tumour is low, with the benefits of treatment outweighing the risks (Pinkowish 2000). Leukaemia has been linked to treatment for testicular cancer when etoposide has been included in the therapy regimen. However, this is only relevant in less than 1 per cent of patients (Pinkowish 2000).

Before treatment, many patients will be concerned about their ability to father children as orchidectomy and chemotherapy can cause azoospermia and oligospermia (Dearnaley et al 2001, Vaughn et al 2002). Despite having oligospermia some men have still been able to father children (Stephenson eta/1995). Spermatogenesis is affected by cisplatinbased chemotherapy and the recovery is dependent on several factors including (Vaughn et al 2002):

* Patient age.

* Severity of oligospermia before treatment.

* Cumulative dose of chemotherapy received.

Fertility needs to be discussed with the patient indepth and a decision made whether to bank sperm before treatment begins. Nerve- sparing retroperitoneal lymph node dissection surgery is used to preserve normal ejaculation (Vaughn et al 2002).

Radiotherapy A patient who is exposed to radiation therapy will be at greater risk of developing a secondary solid tumour. Vaughn et al (2002) identify the overall risk at approximately two to three times greater than that of a person the same age in the general population. These are reported as sarcomas and cancers of the genitourinary and gastrointestinal tract (Bokemeyer and Schmoll 1995).

Supporting the patient

Traditionally when the patient has decided to seek help regarding a testicular lump he will usually go to his GP. This route usually means that he will not have contact with a nurse and is reliant on the GP for support. However, the increasing number of walk-in centres and nurse-led clinics mean that there is a greater chance that a nurse may be the first contact.

The patient may feel reluctant to discuss openly why he has attended due to the nature of the condition. Many males will also be embarrassed about discussing their fears and anxieties or may try to hide their feelings from medical and nursing staff. Everyone has experienced embarrassment but it requires significant skill from the nurse to make patients feel at ease, and enable them to discuss their concerns. Patients’ views of an intimate body area will influence their embarrassment when talking to a nurse (Price 2001). Most men who have testicular cancer are young, otherwise fit and healthy and may feel their ‘macho’ image is under threat (Morman 2000).

Following an initial nursing assessment, all patients with a testicular lump will be directed to the GP for urgent review and referral for ultrasound. Many men may not listen to or accept advice that is given to them, so the nurse needs to emphasise the importance of the medical consultation. The patient who has been referred for an urgent appointment with a urologist will be anxious and will have only had his family and close friends for support in the interim period. Males do not generally want to take responsibility for their health, so appear to transfer it to women (Barton 2000).

To prevent further complications, the patient will be treated rapidly and this is where psychological needs may be missed. Most patients will have many questions they want to ask but, unless they are given the opportunity to raise them, they will remain unanswered. Dearnaley ef a/(2001) emphasise the need for high quality information to be accessible to reduce fears and anxieties about treatment and prognosis. This is also a key recommendation by NICE (2002). Clark et al (2000) outline the concerns raised by males who had testicular cancer and believed the disease may threaten their:

* Future health.

* Employment.

* Relationships.

* Sexual performance.

* Fertility.

Secondary care urology teams can include a specialist nurse who may be involved in outpatient clinics. The medical team is concerned with the treatment and removal of the tumour but, given the current climate of target-driven cancer care (Department of Health 2000), other patient needs are in danger of being missed. By failing to address the physical and psychological needs of the patient, there is a danger of treating the condition and not the person. If a patient is referred for urgent orchidectomy this is the ideal time for the specialist nurse to discuss the treatment plan. To deliver information effectively, the nurse requires extensive communication skills and knowledge of the subject, along with written resources to reinforce information (Caress 2003).

The admitting nurse has the opportunity to discuss the surgical procedure with the patient and allow him time to express his fears and anxieties – not only about the diagnosis and impending surgery but also about his future. The nurse should recognise the patient’s needs and organise the appropriate support systems at an early stage (Baker 1997). Remaining up to date with changes in health care is not easy, particularly for nurses who do not specialise in a particular field and need to deal with information on a wide variety of subjects (Caress 2003). Therefore, the patient should be referred to a specialist nurse, if one is available, because he or she has additional skills which may help reduce the patient’s anxieties.

It is important to remember not to overload the patient with information and to consider whether the patient wants to listen to the information being offered to him. Patients might understand and accept information that is given to them, but may decide not to do anything about it (Caress 2003). Patients who receive appropriate pre-operative information and support recover with fewer problems (Martin 1996). Information on followup care needs to be reinforced post-operatively by the nurse to guarantee the patient can understand and comply with treatment after discharge (Beddows 1997).

As the post-operative patient recovers on the ward the surgeon will confirm his diagnosis. A positive diagnosis of testicular cancer will be devastating for the patient. The extent of the disease, and any metastatic spread, will be detected by increased levels of tumour markers (AFP or HCG) in the blood and these will be used to aid diagnosis and manage further treatment. If a decision is made that chemotherapy or radiotherapy is required, the patient will be referred to the specialist oncology team (NICE 2002). The offer of a prosthesis should be discussed with the patient before discharge. This procedure would usually be provided when treatment is complete.

Other than outpatient visits, for example, for a wound check, and routine follow-up appointments, the patient will not usually have further contact with a secondary care nurse unless referred to an oncology team with specialist nurse input. Therefore, access to additional support is important for patients and carers, for example, through national or local voluntary cancer groups or websites (Clark et al 2000, NICE 2004) and the primary care nurse can assist in this process. If there is no local support group the patient should beencouraged to access a website or make contact by phone. Contact details should be available to all nurses in the primary care setting (Box 4).

Box 4. Support groups and websites

Body image is a major concern for many male patients, particularly in terms of how an orchidectomy may affect their relationships and self-confidence. Some men feel that by the removal of a testicle they lose their masculinity and their ability to have sexual relationships. Morman (2000) suggests that men view the possibility of losing a testicle as humiliating and threatening to the male gender role. However, at least clinically, this is not the case. A man’s capability to have an erection, sexual intercourse or orgasm will not change with the loss of one testicle (Shabbir and Morgan 2004) and it is paramount that this message is reinforced with all patients who have testicular cancer (NICE 2002).

TIME OUT 7

Using the information that you have read, write down the issues that you feel the patient may be concerned about following diagnosis of testicular cancer, for example, treatment side effects, and what psychological support can be provided.

Follow-up

Follow-up care with an oncologist, surgeon or both, is vital for the patient with testicular cancer. Regular assessments are required to monitor tumour markers in the blood, chest X-rays, CT scans of the abdomen and a full medical examination with psychological support. This process may continue for several years and may vary depending on the type and stage of the disease (Shabbir and Morgan 2004). During this follow-up period, the patient is observed to detect early signs of relapse and/or development of secondary cancers when salvage treatment can be most effective (Dearnaley et al 2001).

Dearnaley et al (2001 ) suggest that patients with all stage seminomas and stage I non-seminoma GCTs may be discharged an average of five years’ post-diagnosis, although it is recognised that this period may be extended given the 1-2 per cent chance of relapse within ten years. All patients should be made aware that, if the initial treatment fails, there is a variety of salvage treatments available and that there is still a need to perform ongoing monthly TSE (Pinkowish 2000).

Conclusion

Although comparatively rare, cancer of the testis is the most common malignancy to affect men in their twenties and thirties, when they are economically productive and in their reproductive prime. While the majority of risk factors for this disease are predetermined, negating the option of primary prevention, treatment for testicular cancer is highly successful if diagnosed at an early stage.

Nurses can play a key role, not only in educating men about testicular cancer and self-examination – factors crucial to early detection – but also in delivering psychological support to patients and their families. It is therefore imperative for nurses to be sufficiently informed about testicular cancer risk, symptoms, TSE technigue, assessment procedures, treatment regimens and available support services to guarantee the best outcome for patients with this malignancy

TIME OUT 8

Now that you have completed this article, you may like to write a practice profile. Guidelines to help you are on page 56.

NS281 McCullagh J, Lewis C (2005) Testicular cancer: epidemiology, assessment and management. Nursing Standard. 19, 25, 45-53. Date of acceptance: November 25 2004.

Online archive

For related articles visit our online archive at: www.nursing- standard.co.uk and search using the key words above.

REFERENCES

Adami H et al (1994) Testicular cancer in nine northern European countries. International Journal of Cancer. 59, 1, 33-38.

Baker P (2002) Getting It Sorted: A New Policy for Men’s Health. A Consultative Document. London, The Men’s Health Forum.

Baker C (1997) The value of home support for cancer patients: a study. Nursing Standard. 11, 32, 34-37.

Banks I (2001) No man’s land: men, illness, and the NHS. British Medical Journal. 323, 7320, 1058-1060.

Barling N, Lehmann M (1999) Young men’s awareness, attitudes and practice of testicular self-examination: a health action process approach. Psychology, Health S Medicine. 4, 3, 255-263.

Barton A (2000) Men’s health: a cause for concern. Nursing Standard. 15, 10,47-52.

Beddows J (1997) Alleviating preoperative anxiety in patients: a study. Nursing Standard. 11, 37, 35-38.

Best D et al (1996) Testicular cancer education: a comparison of teaching methods. American Journal of Health Behavior. 20, 4, 229- 241.

Bokemeyer C, Schmoll H (1995) Treatment of testicular cancer and the development of secondary malignancies. Journal of Clinical Oncology. 13, 1, 283-292.

Bosl G et al (2001 ) Cancer of the testis. In DeVita V et al (Eds) Cancer Principles and Practice of Oncology. Philadelphia, PA, JB Lippincott.

Brenner J et al (2003) Teaching testicular self-examination: education and practices in pediatric residents. Pediatrics. 111,3, 239-244.

Brindis C et al (1998) A profile of the adolescent male family planning client. Family Planning Perspectives. 30, 2, 63-66.

Brodsky M (1999) The young male experience with treatment for nonseminomatous testicular cancer. Sexuality and Disability. 17, 1, 65-77.

Brown C (2003) Testicular cancer: an overview. Medsurg Nursing. 12, 1, 37-43.

Brubaker R, Wickersham D (1990) Encouraging the practice of testicular self-examination: a field application of the theory of reasoned action. Health Psychology. 9, 2, 154-163.

Buetow S (1996) Testicular cancer: to screen or not to screen? Journal of Medical Screening. 3, 1, 3-6.

Cancer Research UK (2002) Testicular Cancer-UK. London, CRUK.

Caress A (2003) Giving information to patients. Nursing Standard. 17, 43, 47-54.

Clark A et al (2000) Practice development in cancer care: self- help for men with testicular cancer. Nursing Standard. 14, 50,41- 46.

Cook R (2000) Teaching and promoting testicular self- examination. Nursing Standard. 14, 24, 48-51.

Dearnaley D et al (2001) Managing testicular cancer. British Medical Journal. 322, 7302, 1583-1588.

Department of Health (2000) The NHS Cancer Plan. A Plan for Investment, A Plan for Reform. London, The Stationery Office.

DeVille-Almond J (1998) Public health. Power points. Nursing Times. 94, 36, 32-34.

Doyal L (2001) Sex, gender, and health: the need for a new approach. British Medical Journal. 323, 7320, 1061-1063.

Forman D, Moller H (1994) Testicular cancer. Cancer Surveys. 19- 20, 323-341.

Friman P, Finney J (1990) Health education for testicular cancer. Health Education Quarterly. 17, 4, 443-453.

Ganong L, Markovitz J (1987) Young men’s knowledge of testicular cancer and behavioural intentions toward testicular self-exam. Patient Education and Counseling. 9, 251-261.

Gascoigne P, Whitear B (1999) Making sense of testicular cancer symptoms: a qualitative study of the way in which men sought help from the health care services. European Journal of Oncology Nursing. 3, 2, 62-71.

Good G et al (1989) Male role and gender role conflict: relations to help seeking in men. Journal of Counselling Psychology. 68, 376- 380.

Harrison T, Dignan K (1999) Men’s Health: An Introduction for Nurses and Health Professionals. London, Churchill Livingstone.

Javadapour N (1980) Germ cell tumor of the testes. Cancer. 5, 242- 255.

Jones W, Appleyard I (1989) Early diagnosis of testicular cancer. The Practitioner. 233, 1466, 509-510.

Katz R et al (1995) Cancer awareness and self-examination practices in young men and women. Journal of Behavioral Medicine. 18, 4, 377-384.

Khadra A, Oakeshott P (2002) Pilot study of testicular cancer awareness and testicular self-examination in men attending two South London general practices. Family Practice. 19, 3, 294-296.

Kirk D (2000) Testicular self-examination. Practitioner. 244, 1616, 994.

Klein J et al (1990) The development of a testicular self- examination instructional booklet for adolescents. Journal of Adolescent Health Care. 11, 3, 235-239.

Luther S et al (1985) Teaching breast and testicular self-exams: evaluation of a high school curriculum pilot project. Health Education. 16, 1, 40-43.

Marsh E (1991) Testicular cancer health education for adolescent males. Journal of Urological Nursing. 10, 2, 1165-1185.

Martin D (1996) Pre-operative visits to reduce patient anxiety: a study. Nursing Standard. 10, 23, 33-38.

Medical Research Council Working Party on Testicular Tumours (1985) Prognostic factors in advanced non-seminomatous germ-cell testicular tumours: results of a multicentre study. Lancet. 1, 8419, 8-11.

Mills R et al (1999) Man to man. Nursing Times. 95, 19, 32-33.

Moore R, Topping A (1999) Young men’s knowledge of testicular cancer and testicular self-examination: a lost opportunity? European Journal of Cancer Care. 8, 3, 137-142.

In brief

Author

Jo McCullagh BSc(Hons), MPhil, is senior health promotion specialist, Sefton Health Improvement Support Service; and Gareth Lewis RN, BSc(Hons), is men’s health nurse, South Sefton Primary Care Trust, Liverpool.

Email: gareth.lewis@south sefton-pct.nhs.uk

Copyright RCN Publishing Company Ltd. Mar 2-Mar 8, 2005

Evaluation and Management of Pain in Patients With Klippel- Trenaunay Syndrome: A Review

ABSTRACT.

Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome (KTS) is a rare disorder that consists of a triad of capillary vascular malformation, venous malformations and/or varicose veins, and soft tissue and/or bony hypertrophy. Pain is a real and debilitating problem in these patients. We have observed 9 common causes of pain in KTS: (1) chronic venous insufficiency, (2) cellulitis, (3) superficial thrombophlebitis, (4) deep vein thrombosis, (5) calcification of vascular malformations, (6) growing pains, (7) intraosseous vascular malformation, (8) arthritis, and (9) neuropathic pain. The management of pain in patients with KTS depends on its cause. These patients are best evaluated initially in a center with an experienced multidisciplinary team that includes a primary health care provider, surgeons, and ancillary staff. The ongoing care of a patient with KTS often depends on a local provider who is more readily accessible to the patient but may not have the expertise of a large center to manage the complications of KTS. The purpose of this communication is to review the common causes of pain in these patients to provide local health care providers and patients and their families with appropriate management strategies. Pediatrics 2005;115:744-749; pain, pain management, Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome, vascular malformation, chronic venous insufficiency.

ABBREVIATIONS. KTS, Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome; DVT, deep vein thrombosis.

Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome (KTS) is a rare disorder that comprises the triad of (1) capillary vascular malformation, (2) varicose veins and/or venous malformation, and (3) soft tissue and/ or bony hypertrophy.1-4 It is a mixed malformation with soft tissue and bony malformations and is associated with predominantly venous, lymphatic, and capillary vascular malformations, with involvement of usually 1 of the lower limbs. Chronic lymphedema will frequently aggravate the clinical presentation. The manifestations of KTS are protean, and, in many patients, pain is a frequent and debilitating problem. We previously5 reported that 38% of patients had significant pain, and Baskerville et al6 found that 88% of their patients had pain. The lower extremity is most often affected in KTS, and pain is a great problem in these patients compared with those whose upper extremity is affected.

Over the past 25 years, we have collectively had the opportunity to evaluate and treat >300 patients with KTS.5,7-13 On the basis of this experience, we have observed several different patterns and causes of pain. It has become clear that to deal appropriately with pain in patients with KTS, one first must define the exact cause of the pain. The purpose of this communication is to share our experiences so that patients with this rare problem receive the best possible care.

THE MAYO MODEL OF CARE FOR VASCULAR MALFORMATIONS

At Mayo Clinic Rochester, we use a multidisciplinary approach to the evaluation and treatment of patients of all ages with vascular anomalies, including KTS. The core of this team includes a pediatrician/family physician or internist and vascular, orthopedic, and plastic surgeons. In addition, the expertise of vascular internists of the Gonda Vascular Center, radiologists, physiatrists, pain management specialists, and dermatologists are employed. Periodically, formal reviews of our experience are conducted and published. The basis of this communication is the cumulative experience of this multidisciplinary team.

CAUSE OF PAIN IN KTS

We believe that there are 9 common causes of pain in KTS. Some patients may have only 1 cause of pain, but others may have several causes of pain.

Chronic Venous Insufficiency

Venous abnormalities are a hallmark of KTS. Superficial varicosities; persistent large superficial embryonic veins, usually in the lateral position in the leg; and deep venous valvular incompetence, aneurysmal dilation, hypoplasia, or aplasia are common. Varicose veins become more prominent and problematic with increasing age. Ambulatory venous hypertension is a well-defined entity because of increasing venous pressure after exercise as a result of valve incompetence or outflow obstruction. The discomfort that results from generalized venous congestion is poorly understood, but clearly, varicosities and venous malformations are more painful when distended with venous blood. The discomfort associated with venous incompetence is usually described as a “dull, achy” sensation and typically is more noticeable as the day progresses because of venous pooling of blood.

Varicose veins have been thought to result from primary valvular incompetence. Recent theories propose that decreased elasticity of vein walls cause dilation of the walls, leading to separation of the valve leaflets.14 Others have shown that varicosities can result even without valvular incompetence.15 Persistence of embryonic veins that normally regress during gestation is clearly a major cause of varicosities in KTS. Another plausible explanation that has been proposed for increased venous congestion is inefficient calf pump function. However, Baskerville et al6 compared foot volumetry in normal patients and KTS patients and found no significant differences in reduction of foot volumes during exercise to suggest inefficient calf pump in limbs of patients with KTS.

Chronic venous congestion can lead to pigmentation, eczema, lipodermatosclerosis, varicosity, atrophy blanche, corona phlebectatica, and, ultimately, breakdown of the skin and ulcerations. It has been found that the severity of the skin ulceration correlates with the degree of ambulatory venous hypertension.16,17 Patients with ambulatory venous pressure 80 mm Hg.18

The mainstay of treatment of this type of pain and discomfort is external compression of the venous system. It can be treated with elastic or nonelastic compression garments. It usually is best to use a closed-toe compression garment. The length of the garment is dictated by the extent of leg involvement. However, we have found that if the entire leg is involved, then a full-length pantyhose- type garment works best. This type of garment is least likely to drift downward while worn and also can provide compression to the groin and buttocks. The greatest pressure that the patient can tolerate should be used. Most patients can tolerate compression of 40 to 50 mm Hg. However, some patients cannot tolerate this level of pressure and will need compression of 30 mm Hg. Foot and leg overgrowth can present a challenge to fitting appropriately a support garment and a challenge to the patient to put on the garment. In some patients, it will be impossible to design a garment that can be applied because of a very large foot. These patients will have to be instructed in methods of wrapping the extremity with compression bandages. In rare cases of complete deep vein obstruction, patients with large superficial veins do not tolerate compression garments. Duplex evaluation of the venous anatomy in these patients is very important.

Frequent elevation of the extremity during the day is very important in reducing pain and the development of stasis ulcers. At all times, when it is possible to elevate the affected extremity, it should be done. We frequently recommend elevating the foot of the bed for good drainage of the venous system during the night. In severe cases, a patient may have to alter his or her occupation from a job that requires prolonged standing to one that allows the patient to sit and, preferably, elevate the leg.

In selected cases, surgical intervention, sclerotherapy, or endovascular laser ablation may be indicated in patients who are symptomatic with pain and edema. Asymptomatic patients are usually managed conservatively because of the high (50%) recurrence rate of varicosities.9 In the highly selected group of patients who are considered for surgical procedures, a thorough assessment of the venous anatomy should be performed with duplex scanning, contrast phlebography, MRI, and magnetic resonance phlebography. Duplex scanning and ascending and descending phlebography are used to assess valvular incompetence of the deep, superficial, or perforator veins; discover deep venous anomalies and obstructions; and assess collateralization, respectively. Frequently, the abnormalities seen in KTS include persistence of embryonic veins, agenesis, hypoplasia, valvular incompetence, or aneurysms of deep veins.

The most common surgical treatment in patients with KTS is stripping of the veins and avulsion or excision of varicosities and vascular malformations. The primary goal of imaging is to confirm patency of the deep venous system before these procedures are performed. In a very rare subset of patients, removal of the tortuous but patent superficial venous system leads to venous hypertension if deep venous reconstruction is not also performed. Although most surgical procedures for varicosities are uncomplicated, it is often impossible to remove all varicosities because of the extent of involvement. Fifty percent of patients who have surgery will have some form of recurrent varicosities. Despite this, patients report subjective improvement in symptoms andan overall clinical improvement as reflected by a reduction in the clinical severity score after surgery.9 Recurrent varicosities can and have been reoperated on if the benefits outweigh the risks of the procedure. Sclerotherapy of cavernous venous malformation with alcohol and foam sclerotherapy of the venous malformations have been used by others, with mixed results.

Cellulitis

Patients with KTS are prone to cellulitis, and whether this is attributable to an actual bacterial infection or an inflammatory response as a result of venous stasis, localized lymph accumulation, or thrombosis is not always clear.19 Chronic lymphedema is clearly a major cause of cellulitis and lymphangitis. In our series,5 13% of patients had infectious cellulitis. These patients may be more susceptible to infection because of poor skin integrity or from venous pooling. Thus, it is imperative for patients to maintain excellent skin hygiene. Maintaining strict hygiene can be challenging because of hyperhidrosis associated with KTS that is accentuated by the use of stockings, shoes, etc. Particularly for patients with significant foot and toe involvement, thorough washing of leg, foot, and toes may be challenging. We encourage patients to wash the affected body parts thoroughly with soap and water twice a day. If the patient prefers showers to bathtubs, then we suggest that he or she place a stool in the shower so that he or she can sit and wash thoroughly between the toes. It is imperative that patients wear clean stockings every day and allow their shoes and feet to dry between shoe changes. These patients should avoid going barefoot.

For some patients, use of a compression garment will reduce the incidence of cellulitis, but in others, it may increase the risk for cellulitis because of the associated hyperhydrosis or because of abrasions of keratohemangiomas by the stocking. One must experiment with this to know which is best for individual patients.

If there is new-onset erythema, local discomfort, and warmth, then cellulitis always must be suspected. It is imperative to treat these patients with antibiotics as soon as the diagnosis is apparent.

Usually, patients who have had recurrent cellulitis are able to recognize the heralding symptoms of cellulitis up to 24 hours before the infection is clinically apparent. For these patients, we suggest that they have a 10-day supply of an appropriate antibiotic at home so that they can begin taking antibiotics at the first sign or symptom of cellulitis. In rare patients, this may not be enough to prevent serious recurrent cellulitis, and one must consider prophylactic antibiotics. We think that it is best in these situations to consult with an infectious disease expert to plan the most appropriate course of treatment for these rare situations.

Growing Pains

Growing pains are normal in healthy children. Children with KTS are just as likely to have growing pains as are healthy children. The muscles are affected more so than the joints, and the area is usually normal on examination with no evidence of erythema, skin ulceration, mass, or swelling. Compared with pain caused by other factors, that of growing pains is relieved by simple comforting measures such as holding, stroking, and massaging of the limb.

Thrombophlebitis

Inflammation of the superficial veins is common in KTS and, in our series,5 occurred in 15% of patients. Aseptic inflammation probably results from venous stagnation in the lower extremity varicose veins. This type of pain is best treated with simple analgesics and antiinflammatory agents along with compression and elevation. If recurrent, then vein stripping, ligation, or injection sclerotherapy may be helpful. This should be undertaken only in a select group of patients in whom an intact deep venous system has been demonstrated. In patients with large embryonic veins or when the saphenous junctions are involved, anticoagulation should be considered.

When left untreated, superficial thromboses usually are a self- limiting problem. In 7 to 14 days, the pain subsides and a small knot may be palpable (the organized thrombus). These clots may calcify and become “phleboliths” that are apparent on radiographs. Treatment, if used, consists of nonsteroidal antiinflammatory agents and mild analgesics.

When a calcified phlebolith is on a weight-bearing surface (Fig 1), such as the plantar aspect of the foot, it can be painful when downward pressure is applied on the foot. Adding a pad to the insole will usually relieve this type of pain.

Deep Vein Thrombosis

Deep vein thrombosis (DVT) is more common in patients with KTS than in those with normal varicose veins.20 In our series, 11 (4%) of 252 patients had documented DVT.5 It is important to diagnose and treat immediately any DVT with anticoagulation or, selectively, with thrombolytics if the DVT involves the large iliofemoral veins. Pain is a usual presentation, in addition to swelling and cyanotic discoloration of the leg.

We recommend that patients with KTS avoid estrogen-containing contraceptives and heed precautionary measures to prevent thrombosis during long periods of immobilization. Whether patients with KTS should receive prophylactic anticoagulation therapy or antiplatelet therapy is controversial. Certainly prophylactic anticoagulation therapy should be considered for patients who have had recurrent DVTs, particularly when complicated by pulmonary embolus. It is unclear whether prophylactic anticoagulation or antiplatelet therapy is effective in preventing superficial thrombophlebitis. Considering that spontaneous bleeding from superficial venular blebs can be problematic, one must consider this when contemplating chronic anticoagulation. Patients with recurrent DVT should be considered for placement of an inferior vena cava filter to prevent major pulmonary embolus.

Fig 1. Phlebolith on the plantar aspect of the heel, which resulted in heel pain.

Intraosseous Vascular Malformations

Rarely, patients with KTS can have intraosseous vascular malformations.21 Although rare, they usually occur in long bones (Fig 2), but we have reported 1 patient13 who had multiple osteolytic lesions of the calvarium (Fig 3). These lesions cause intense pain. When they involve long bones, there is an increased risk for fracture. A variety of analgesics can be tried, but in most cases, surgical removal of the malformation may be necessary. If the lesions cannot be removed, then management of the pain can be challenging. Some of these patients may require long-term opiates for pain control.

Calcified or Scarified Vascular Malformations

Calcified vascular malformations can be a source of pain if located around structures that are mobile, such as the ankle joint (Fig 4). We have seen this occur in natural calcification of a vascular malformation. We have also seen it as a result of sclerotherapy of a vascular malformation. If well localized, then surgical removal may relieve this type of pain.

Arthritis

In a study of 27 patients with purely venous malformations occurring within the extremities, it was found that 81% (13 of 16) of lower limb cases and 36% (4 of 11) of upper limb cases involved arthritis of the knee and elbow joint, respectively. In 7 of the 16 lower limb cases in this study, patients had to undergo surgical treatment for severe functional impairment, which consisted of synovectomy and excision of the venous mass.22 In our experience, arthritis occurs in a very small number of patients with KTS, but in those patients, it is a major problem. Usually it involves the knee, but we have also treated patients with ankle involvement. MRI of the affected joint will establish the presence of intra-articular vascular malformation. Proliferative vascular synovitis and an associated joint effusion is the usual accompanying findings on MRI.

Fig 2. Intracavitary vascular malformation of the tibia. The patient had significant pain from this lesion and also had a pathologic fracture.

Destruction of cartilage occurs probably from recurrent hemarthrosis when the vascular malformation is within a joint (Fig 5). Alternatively or in addition, the presence of the vascular malformation may create a chronic synovitis. Patients with this have pain and, as a result, keep the knee flexed, and they can develop a flexion contracture.

Treatment includes analgesics and maneuvers to prevent the flexion contracture. This may involve physical therapy, passive stretching, and bracing. Synovectomy may be useful but is unproved at this time. If the flexion contracture is severe enough to prevent walking and the leg cannot be straightened, then amputation may be necessary to control the pain and allow the patient to walk (with a prosthesis).

Neuropathic Pain

Neuropathic pain results from damage or dysfunction of neuronal pathways and is a shooting, burning, aching (or a combination) pain that is poorly responsive to conventional analgesics. It often occurs in areas with altered sensation. We have evaluated 4 patients who have KTS with neuropathic pain. Their pain is disabling and associated with hyperesthesia. All 4 patients are adults, and all have KTS involving the leg. Three of the 4 had extensive surgical procedures on the leg, and in 2 of these, the pain occurred after the surgical procedures. We speculate that neuropathic pain can result from damage to nerves at the time of operation. Also, we think that this pain can result from effects of the venous abnormality on the nerve that shares the neurovascular bundle. It may result from direct compression of the nerve and/or abnormal venous pressure of the nutrient vascular system of the nerve.

The management of neuropathic pain is difficult as such pain responds poorly to conventional analgesics and less well to opioids. In the past 30 years, antidepressants and anticonvulsants have been the 2 major classes of drugs used to treat neuropathic pain.23-25 Their mechanism of action \relies on inhibition of excitatory pathways or enhancement of inhibitory pathways. Drugs such as carbamazepine, phenytoin, lamotrigine, and felbamate inhibit the excitatory sodium channels, whereas valproic acid increases the inhibitory pathways of γ-aminobutyric acid. In this manner, the excess firing of neuronal pathways that lead to pain is dampened. The choice of which agent to use is a matter of trial and error as not one has been shown to be more efficacious than another. We tend to introduce 1 agent at a time at a low starting dose, titrate up to desired effect, and if not beneficial after a trial period of 2 to 3 weeks, we substitute another agent. More than 1 drug is sometimes necessary to control the pain. The short-term use of steroids (Prednisone) can also be used for acute neuropathic pain.

Fig 3. Vascular malformation of the calvarium. The patient had severe headaches from these lesions.

Fig 4. Calcified vascular malformation of the anterior aspect of the ankle. The patient was active athletically, and this lesion produced significant pain and impairment. It was resected, and the patient did well.

Fig 5. MRI of the knee demonstrating intra-articular vascular malformation.

DISCUSSION

KTS occurs in 1 of 20 000 to 40 000 live births. The manifestations of KTS are protean and historically has been confused with other overgrowth syndromes such as Proteus syndrome and Parkes Weber syndrome. The absence of clinically significant arteriovenous shunting distinguishes KTS from Parkes Weber syndrome.26

The triad of capillary malformations (port wine stain), varicosities or venous malformations, and limb hypertrophy has been found to occur in 98%, 72%, and 67% of patients, respectively, in our series5 of 252 patients. All 3 features were present in 63% of patients, and 37% had 2 of the 3 features, which illustrates that not all patients with KTS have all 3 features of the triad, and patients can receive a diagnosis of KTS with only 1 or 2 features. The cause of KTS is still unclear. Several theories have been proposed, including (1) Servelle’s theory of a primary obstruction of the venous system resulting in venous hypertension and therefore development of abnormal venous pathways and tissue overgrowth; (2) failure of regression of the lateral limb bud vein; and (3) alteration of the tight balance between angiogenesis and vasculogenesis, which is controlled by numerous genes, among other theories.27-30 KTS is a mixed malformation whereby soft tissue and bony malformation is associated with predominantly venous, lymphatic, and capillary vascular malformations, with involvement of usually 1 of the lower limbs.

Although pain is such a prevalent morbidity factor and affects up to 88% of patients with KTS, the causes of pain have not been well documented up until now. We have observed that there are 9 most common causes of pain in these patients: (1) chronic venous insufficiency, (2) cellulitis, (3) thrombophlebitis, (4) DVT, (5) calcification of vascular malformations, (6) growing pains, (7) intraosseous vascular malformation, (8) arthritis, and (9) neuropathic pain. Common complications that accompany KTS and also may contribute to pain include pregnancy-associated complications, coagulation abnormalities, and the psychological effects of the visible overgrowth.

Perhaps chronic venous insufficiency accentuates and predisposes to the other causes of pain. If that is the case, then controlling the venous insufficiency and improving venous drainage might reduce pain of a variety of causes. Although the true pathophysiology of venous insufficiency is not yet fully understood at this point, mechanisms that incorporate external compression, limb elevation, exercise, and even a pump to improve venous drainage may be beneficial.

Because it is such a rare condition and because of its protean manifestations, most health care providers are uncomfortable treating patients with KTS. Hence, most patients become frustrated by their inability to find local health care providers who can help them deal with the many complications associated with KTS. For patients in whom pain significantly affects their quality of life, it is important to have local health care providers who can work with the patients on an ongoing basis to manage chronic pain. Because there are numerous causes of pain in KTS, the first step in management is to define the exact cause of the pain. One also must recognize that individual patients may have >1 source of pain, and treatment strategies must be designated to deal with all of the types of pain in an individual patient. A multidisciplinary team that has experience with KTS may best perform the initial evaluation of these patients. However, a local health care provider is best in providing ongoing care. We hope that this review will be useful to achieve this.

REFERENCES

1. Meine JG, Schwartz RA, Janniger CK. Klipel Trenaunay Weber syndrome. Pediatr Dermatol. 1997;60:127-132

2. You CK, Rees J, Gillis DA, Steeves G. Klippel Trenaunay syndrome: a review. Can J Surg. 1983;26:399-403

3. Guidera KJ, Brinker MR, Kousseff BG, et al. Overgrowth management in Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber and Proteus syndromes. J Pediatr Orthop. 1993;13:459-466

4. Berry SA, Peterson C, Mize W, et al. Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome. Am J Med Genet. 1998;79:319-326

5. Jacob AG, Driscoll DJ, Shaughnessy WJ, Stans AW, Clay RP, Gloviczski P. Klippel Trenaunay syndrome: spectrum and management. Mayo Clin Proc. 1998;73:28-36

6. Baskerville PA, Ackroyd JS, Thomas ML, Browse NL. The Klippel Trenaunay syndrome: clinical, radiological and hemodynamic features and management. Br J Surg. 1985;72:232-236

7. Telander RL, Kaufman BH, Gloviczki P, Stickler GB, Hollier LH. Prognosis and management of lesions of the trunk in children with Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome. J Padiatr Surg. 1984;19:417-422

8. Gloviczki P, Hollier LH, Telander RL, Kaufman B, Bianco AJ, Stickler GB. Surgical implications of Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome. Ann Surg. 1983;197:353-362

9. Noel AA, Gloviczki P, Cherry KJ, Rooke TW, Stanson AW, Driscoll DJ. Surgical treatment of venous malformations in Klippel- Trenaunay syndrome. J Vase Surg. 2000;32:840-847

10. Cherry KJ, Gloviczki P, Stanson AW. Persistent sciatic vein: diagnosis and treatment of a rare condition. J Vasc Surg. 1996;23:490-497

11. Gloviczki P, Stanson AW, Stickler GB, et al. Klippel- Trenaunay syndrome: the risks and benefits of vascular interventions. Surgery. 1991;110:469-479

12. McGrory BJ, Amadio PC, Dobyns JH, Stickler GB, Unni KK. Anomalies of the fingers and toes associated with Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome. J Bone Joint Surg Am. 1991;73:1537-1546

13. Sorom A, Driscoll DJ, Stanson AW. Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome: a rare cause of severe headache. Int Angiol. 2002;11:7-8

14. Travers JP, Brookes CE, Evans J, et al. Assessment of wall structure and composition of varicose veins with reference to collagen, elastin and smooth muscle content. Eur J Vasc Endovasc Surg. 1996;11:230-237

15. Rose SS, Ahmed A. Some thought on the etiology of varicose veins. J Cardiovasc Surg. 1986;27:534-543

16. Araki CT, Back TL, Padberg FT, et al. The significance of calf pump function in venous ulceration. J Vasc Surg. 1994;20:872- 877

17. Labropoulos N, Ginannoukas AD, Nicolaides AN, et al. The role of venous reflux and calf muscle pump function in nonthrombotic chronic venous insufficiency. Correlation with severity of signs and symptoms. Arch Surg. 1996;131:403-406

18. Nicolaides AN, Zukowski AJ. The value of dynamic venous pressure measurements. World J Surg. 1986;10:919-924

19. Quartey-Papafio CM. Lesson of the week: importance of distinguishing between cellulitis and varicose eczema of the leg. BMJ. 1999;318:1672-1673

20. Fowkes FJ, Price JF, Fowkes FG. Incidence of diagnosed deep vein thrombosis in the general population: systematic review. Eur J Vasc Endovasc Surg. 2003;25:1-5

21. Samlaska CP, Gagliardi JA. Diffuse venous malformation with intraosseous involvement. Hawaii Med J. 1994;53:218-221

22. Enjolras O, Ciabrini D, Mazoyer E, Laurian C, Herbereteau D. Extensive pure venous malformation in the upper or lower limb: a review of 27 cases. J Am Acad Dermatol. 1997;36:219-225

23. McQuay H. Neuropathic pain: evidence matters. Eur J Pain. 2002;6(suppl A):11-18

24. Dickenson AH, Matthews EA, Suzuki R. Neurobiology of neuropathic pain: mode of action of anticonvulsants. Eur J Pain. 2002;6(suppl A):51-60

25. Jensen TS. Anticonvulsants in neuropathic pain: rationale and clinical evidence. Eur J Pain. 2002;6(suppl A):61-68

26. Biesecker LG, Happle R, Mulliken JB, et al. Proteus syndrome: diagnostic criteria, differential diagnosis, and patient evaluation. Am J Med Genet. 1999;84:389-395

27. Tian X, Liu M, Kadaba R, et al. Positional cloning of a novel angiogenic factor gene: VG5Q mutations cause susceptibility to KTS. Nature. 2004;427:640-645

28. Whelan AJ, Watson MS, Porter FD, Steiner RD. Klippel Trenaunay Weber syndrome associated with a 5:11 balanced translocation. Am J Med Genet. 1995;59:492-494

29. Ceballos-Quintal JM, Pinto-Escalante D, Castillo-Zapata I. A new case of Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber (KTW) syndrome: evidence of autosomal dominant inheritance. Am J Med Genet. 1996;63:426-427

30. Servelle M. Klippel and Trenaunay’s syndrome. 768 operated cases. Ann Surg. 1985;201:365-373

Adriana Lee, MD*; David Driscoll, MD*[double dagger]; Peter Gloviczki, MD; Ricky Clay, MD||; William Shaughnessy, MD; and Anthony Stans, MD

From the Departments of *Pediatric and Adolescent Medicine, Orthopedic Surgery, [double dagger]Divisions of Pediatric Cardiology, Vascular and ||Plastic Surgery, Mayo Clinic School of Medicine, Gonda Vascular Center, Mayo Clinic and Mayo Foundation, Rochester, Minnesota.

Accepted for publication Aug 11, 2004.

doi:10.1542/peds.2004-0446

No conflict of interest declared.

Reprint requests to (D.D.) Division of Pediatric Cardiology, Mayo Clinic, 200 1st Street SW, Rochester, MN 55905

PE\DIATRICS (ISSN 0031 4005). Copyright 2005 by the American Academy of Pediatrics.

Copyright American Academy of Pediatrics Mar 2005

Virtual Colonoscopy Is Less Invasive But Less Reliable

Studies suggest the technique still needs refinement

HealthDayNews — Colonoscopy is the potentially life-saving procedure that everyone over 50 knows they should get, but one that few want to endure.

It utilizes a tiny camera inside a slender tube that’s inserted through the rectum. This lets the physician look for early signs of cancer inside the entire large intestine, from the rectum all the way through the colon to the lower end of the small intestine.

But it requires the use of powerful laxatives and sometimes days of liquid diet. And that’s only part of the regimen. The patient must also be sedated for a full colonoscopy, so he or she can lose a day or more between the preparation and the procedure itself.

With March designated National Colorectal Cancer Awareness Month, doctors are urging people 50 and older who are at average risk for developing the disease to undergo a colonoscopy to ensure they stay cancer-free. Doctors emphasize the need for colonoscopy because colorectal cancer is the one form of cancer in men and women that is totally preventable through early screenings.

But because of the complicating factors associated with colonoscopy, many people risk their lives by avoiding the test.

“They’re afraid of the procedure,” said Dr. David Alberts, director of the University of Arizona Cancer Center. “They can’t fit it into their schedule. It’s a very sad event when we see these men and women in their 60s with metastatic colon cancer never having had a colonoscopy.”

Researchers are working to perfect a less-inconvenient substitute procedure called virtual colonoscopy.

In virtual colonoscopy, a CT scan of the abdomen is used to create a computer-generated model of a person’s colon and the organs surrounding it. Doctors review the two- or three-dimensional model to look for obvious abnormalities, such as cancerous or pre-cancerous lesions.

However, recent research has found virtual colonoscopies do not detect colon cancer as efficiently or accurately as a standard colonoscopy.

For the time being, a traditional colonoscopy remains the best method for detecting and preventing colon and rectal cancer, which will cause approximately 56,290 deaths in 2005, according to the American Cancer Society.

“Usually what I tell people is that a traditional colonoscopy is the gold standard,” said Eden Stotsky, a colon cancer survivor and health educator for the Johns Hopkins Cancer Center in Baltimore.

Through the traditional test, physicians can find and remove precancerous lesions on the spot. “If you find the polyp and remove it, your chances of getting colon cancer reduces significantly,” Stotsky said.

The American Cancer Society estimates that about 104,950 new cases of colon cancer and 40,340 new cases of rectal cancer will be diagnosed in 2005.

Doctors are holding out hope that virtual colonoscopy eventually will provide a more convenient alternative, particularly for younger people undergoing routine exams. Patients still have to endure unpleasant test preparation involving laxatives, but don’t have to be sedated for the procedure.

“Because there are no sedatives, there is no down time,” Alberts said. “You can come in and have the procedure, then drive home or go to work.”

Virtual colonoscopy is ideal for patients who react poorly to sedatives or who do not like invasive procedures, according to experts.

“It seems to promise that it has the absence of significant invasiveness,” said Dr. Bernard Levin, vice president of cancer prevention at the University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center in Houston. “There’s no tube involved, no sedation needed and is very much quicker.”

However, a study performed at Oregon Health & Science University found that virtual colonoscopy was associated with more cancer deaths and procedure-related deaths than standard colonoscopy.

According to the research, there were 66 more colon cancer deaths per 100,000 patients who had virtual colonoscopy, compared with standard colonoscopy. The findings were presented at the annual meeting of the American College of Gastroenterology in November.

That research was supported by another study published in the Jan. 1, 2005, issue of The Lancet. This study found that traditional colonoscopy was much more accurate in detecting small lesions.

For example, traditional colonoscopy found 99 percent of polyps between 6 millimeters and 9 millimeters, while virtual colonoscopy found only 64 percent of polyps that size.

“There is still a gap between the high promise and the delivery,” Levin said. “I would say we’re two to five years away from knowing how virtual colonoscopy can be optimized for screening and follow-up.”

Alberts said the big problem is that virtual colonoscopy is a complex procedure and most radiologists don’t have the proper training. He said that in facilities with highly trained staff, virtual colonoscopy has proven nearly as accurate as traditional colonoscopy.

“It’s a very outstanding technology, but the technology has outstripped the ability of the human,” Alberts said. “I think that will change over time, but you can’t be absolutely sure when you go to a virtual colonoscopy who the radiologist is or how much training he or she has had, and that is a problem.”

Another drawback is that if a polyp is found during a virtual colonoscopy, the patient will have to undergo preparation and come back for a traditional colonoscopy to remove the lesion.

Levin envisions a day when clinics have facilities for both virtual and traditional colonoscopy, side-by-side.

“That way, you can go back and have a conventional colonoscopy the same day without having to cleanse again,” he said. “That would be the most efficient way this could be done.”

More information

To learn more about colonoscopies, visit the National Digestive Diseases Information Clearinghouse.

Evaluation of Female Pelvic-Floor Muscle Function and Strength

Evaluation of pelvic-floor muscle (PFM) function and strength is necessary (1) to be able to teach and give feedback regarding a woman’s ability to contract the PFM and (2) to document changes in PFM function and strength throughout intervention. The aims of this article are to give an overview of methods to assess PFM function and strength and to discuss the responsiveness, reliability, and validity of data obtained with the methods available for clinical practice and research today. Palpation, visual observation, electromyography, ultrasound, and magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) measure different aspects of PFM function. Vaginal palpation is standard when assessing the ability to contract the PFM. However, ultrasound and MRI seem to be more objective measurements of the lifting aspect of the PFM. Dynamometers can measure force directly and may yield more valid measurements of PFM strength than pressure transducers. Further research is needed to establish reliability and validity scores for imaging techniques. Imaging techniques may become important clinical tools in future physical therapist practice and research to measure both pathophysiology and impairment of PFM dysfunction. [B K, Sherburn M. Evaluation of female pelvic- floor muscle function and strength. Phys Ther. 2005;85:269-282.]

Key Words: Evaluation, Function, Measurement, Pelvic-floor muscles, Reliability, Strength, Validity.

Urinary incontinence is defined by the International Continence Society (ICS) as the complaint of any involuntary leakage of urine.1 Urinary incontinence is more common in women than in men and affects women of all ages. Prevalence rates vary between 9% and 72% of women aged 17 to 79 years living in the community.2 The most common type of urinary incontinence in women is stress urinary incontinence (SUI), defined as the complaint of involuntary leakage on effort or exertion, or on sneezing or coughing.1 Urinary incontinence is a socially embarrassing condition, causing withdrawal from social situations and reduced quality of life.3,4 Stress urinary incontinence may be an important barrier to regular physical and fitness activities in women.5-7 This withdrawal may threaten women’s general health and well-being because regular moderate physical activity is important in prevention of osteoporosis, obesity, diabetes, high blood pressure, coronary heart disease, breast and colon cancer, and depression and anxiety.8

Kegel9 was the first to report training of the pelvic-floor muscles (PFM) to be effective in management of urinary incontinence in women. In uncontrolled, nonrandomized studies, he claimed an 84% cure rate in a variety of incontinence types. Since then, several randomized controlled trials (RCTs) have supported the results of his clinical series and have demonstrated that PFM training is more effective than no treatment or placebo treatment for SUI.10-15 Cure rates, measured as ≤2 g of leakage on pad weigh tests after PFM training, vary between 44% and 67% in RCTs comparing PFM training with untreated controls or other treatment modalities.13,14,16

The PFM form the floor of the pelvic basin and help maintain continence by actively supporting the pelvic organs and closing the pelvic openings with their anterior and cephalad action when contracting.17 The PFM comprise the pelvic diaphragm muscles (pubococcygeus, puborectalis, and iliococcygeus, together known as the levator ani), which can be referred to as the deep layer of the PFM; the urogenital diaphragm muscles (ischiocavernosus, bulbospongiosus, and transversus perinei superficialis, together known as the perineal muscles), which can be referred to as the superficial layer of the PFM; and the urethral and anal sphincter muscles (Figs. 1, 2). The PFM are encased in fascia, which is connected to the endopelvic (parietal) fascia surrounding the pelvic organs and which also assists in pelvic organ support.17-19 Although the deep and superficial layers of the PFM comprise different anatomical structures and innervation, clinically, they work as a functional unit. The PFM normally contract simultaneously as a mass contraction, but the contraction quality and contribution of the 2 layers may differ. Correct action of the PFM has been described as a squeeze around the pelvic openings and an inward lift.9 Measurement of the PFM muscle action becomes complicated by its diaphragmatic form and its attachments to the endopelvic fascia and pelvic organs.

Figure 1.

The pelvic-floor muscles form the floor of the pelvis and a structural support for internal organs. Reprinted with permission from: Hahn I, Myrhage R. Bekkenbotten: Bygnad, Funktion Och Traning. Goteborg, Sweden; AnaKomp AB; 1999:39. Copyright 1999 AnaKomp AB.

Figure 2.

Inferior view of the pelvic-floor muscles, showing the pelvic diaphragm (levator ani muscles) and urogenital diaphragm (perineal muscles). 2005 Anatomedia Pty Ltd (www.anatomedia.com).

In people without urinary incontinence, the PFM contract simultaneously with, or precede, the increase in abdominal pressure as an unconscious automatic co-contraction.20,21 A voluntary contraction is a simultaneous contraction of all muscles of the pelvic floor and can be described as an inward movement and closure around the pelvic openings.22 Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) studies have demonstrated that, during voluntary contraction, the coccyx is moved ventrally toward the pubic symphysis. Thus, the PFM contract concentrically.23 A true PFM contraction does not involve any visible movement of the pelvis. Submaximal PFM contractions may be performed as isolated contractions; however, a maximum PFM contraction does not seem to be possible without a co-contraction of the abdominal muscles,24 especially the transversus abdominis and internal oblique muscles.25 This abdominal contraction can be observed as a small inward movement of the lower abdomen.

Normal continence is maintained by the complex integration of pelvic, spinal, and supraspinal factors. The PFM are one of many factors contributing to the urethral closure mechanism for continence and are the target tissue in physical therapist management of incontinence and other pelvic-floor dysfunctions.26 Other important pelvic factors for continence are contraction of smooth and striated muscles within the urethral wall, patent vascular plexi, and intact ligaments and fascia supporting the bladder and urethra in their optimal position during an increase in abdominal pressure.27,28 If factors other than the function of the PFM are the cause of incontinence (eg, if urethral ligaments are totally ruptured during childbirth), PFM training may be unsuccessful. However, because the PFM are untrained in most people, training these muscles has a great potential for improvement, and well-functioning PFM may compensate for other factors unrelated to function.

Muscle strength can be defined as the maximal force that a muscle can generate and is often referred to as the weight the muscle can lift once, or the one repetition maximum (1RM).29 When assessing muscle strength, the person being tested is asked to attempt to perform a maximum voluntary contraction of the specific muscle. This force can be measured by different instruments, each with its own qualities. Pelvic-floor muscle training may be beneficial for pelvic- floor dysfunctions other than urinary incontinence (eg, fecal incontinence, bladder outlet obstruction, pelvic organ prolapse, pain, sexual disorders). However, to date, there is evidence from RCTs and systematic reviews to support PFM training for women with stress and mixed urinary incontinence only.30

The International Classification of Impairments, Disabilities, and Handicaps (ICIDH),31 lately changed to International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF),32 is a World Health Organization (WHO)-approved system for classification of health and health-related states. According to this system, the causes of a nonoptimally functioning pelvic floor (eg, muscle and nerve damage after vaginal birth) can be classified as the pathophysiological component. A nonfunctioning PFM (reduced force generation, incorrect timing or coordination) is the impairment component, and the actual leakage is a disability. How it affects the woman’s quality of life and participation in fitness activities is an activity and participation component.

Pelvic-floor muscle training aims to make changes in all these components, and therefore all components should be measured in physical therapy. The theory for strength training is that, by changing PFM impairment (structural support, timing, and strength of automatic contraction), leakage will be stopped or markedly reduced. Thus, the patient can function adequately and have enhanced quality of life. DeLancey33 suggested that cure rates after PFM training could be even higher than shown so far, if treatment could be based on a better understanding of the pathophysiology associated with incontinence symptoms in individual patients. The purposes of this article are to give an overview of evaluation methods available to measure PFM function and strength and to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the different methods as they relate to clinical practice and research. For the purposes of \this article, PFM function is defined as ability to perform a correct contraction, meaning a squeeze around pelvic openings and an inward movement (lift) of the pelvic floor, and PFM strength is defined as maximum voluntary contraction, meaning that a person attempts to recruit as many fibers in a muscle as possible for the purpose of developing force.

Methods

A computerized search was conducted in PubMed with the terms “pelvic floor”/”pelvic-floor muscles”/”pelvic muscles” AND “measurement”/”evaluation”/”assessment,” with the limitation of English language. In addition, a hand search of the abstract books of the International Continence Society annual meetings from 1987 to 2004 and the World Confederation of Physical Therapy meetings from 1991 to 2004 was conducted.

The main reasons for physical therapists to conduct high-quality measurement of PFM function and strength are:

1. Without proper instruction, many women are unable to volitionally contract these muscles on demand because the PFM are situated at the floor of the pelvis and are seldom used consciously. Several studies9,34-37 have shown that more than 30% of women do not contract their PFM correctly at their first consultation, even after thorough individual instruction. The most common error: contracting the gluteal, hip adductor, or abdominal muscles instead of the PFM. Some women also stop breathing or try to exaggerate inspiration instead of contracting the PFM. Some studies36,37 have demonstrated that many women strain, causing PFM descent, instead of actively squeezing and lifting the PFM upward. For proper contraction of the PFM, it is mandatory that women receive precise training with appropriate monitoring and feedback. Hay-Smith et al30 found that, of the 43 RCTs they reviewed, only 15 stated that a correct PFM contraction was checked before training began.

2. In intervention studies evaluating the effect of PFM training, the training is the independent variable meant to cause a change in the dependent variable, SUI.38 Thus, measurement of PFM function and strength before and after training is important to determine whether the intervention has made changes.13,39 Even in the presence of tissue pathology (eg, neuropathy), if there is no change in PFM function or force development after a training program commensurate with that pathology, the training program has been of insufficient dosage (intensity, frequency, or duration of the training period)40 or the participants have had inadequate adherence. It is likely that such programs have not followed muscle training recommendations.41

In general, when measuring muscle strength,42 it can be difficult to isolate the muscles to be tested, and many test subjects need adequate time and instruction in how to perform the test. In addition, the test situation may not reflect the whole function of the muscles, and the generalizability from the test situation to real-world activity (external validity) has to be established.38 Therefore, when reporting results from muscle testing, it is important to specify the equipment used, position during testing, testing procedure, instruction and motivation given, and the parameters that are tested (eg, ability to contract, maximum force generation, duration of contraction). When testing the PFM, additional challenges are present because muscle action and location are not easily observable.

Measurement Tools to Evaluate PFM Function and Strength

Methods for evaluating PFM function and strength can be categorized as:

1. Methods to measure ability to contract (clinical observation, vaginal palpation, ultrasound, MRI, electromyography [EMG]).

2. Measures to quantify strength (manual muscle test by vaginal palpation, manometry, dynamometry, cones).

These methods measure different aspects of PFM activity, anterior and cephalad movement, squeeze pressure, and electrical activity. All of these methods have their place in physical therapist evaluation, but all have their limitations. Measurement of PFM performance is an evolving science, which is changing as new technologies become available.

Ability to Contract

Clinical observation. Observation of a correct PFM contraction can be done clinically,9 by ultrasound,43-45 or with dynamic MRI.23,46 In 1948, Kegel described observation of a correct PFM contraction as squeeze around the urethral, vaginal, and anal openings and an inward lift that could be observed at the perineum.9,22 Shull et al47 stated that, by clinical observation, a person is generally observing superficial perineal muscles. From this observation, however, it can be assumed that the levator ani muscles are responding similarly due to their co-contraction with the superficial perineal muscles. However, to be certain, more than external observation of the skin must be undertaken.

Figure 3.

Most physical therapists use vaginal palpation to evaluate and give feedback on ability to contract the pelvic-floor muscles.

Vaginal palpation. This is the technique currently used by most physical therapists to evaluate a correct PFM contraction and was first described by Kegel as a method to evaluate PFM function.9,22 He placed one finger in the distal one third of the vagina and asked the woman to lift inward and squeeze around the finger. Kegel did not use this method to measure PFM strength. He used vaginal palpation to teach women how to contract their PFM and classified the contraction qualitatively as correct or not correct. For measuring PFM strength, he developed the “perineometer,” a pressure manometer, which measured the ability of the PFM to develop vaginal squeeze pressure.9

Van Kampen et al48 reported that since Kegel first described vaginal palpation as a method to evaluate PFM function, more than 25 different vaginal palpation methods have been developed. Some examiners use one finger, and others use 2 fingers. Worth et al49 and Brink et al50 have evaluated pressure, duration, muscle “ribbing,” and displacement of the examiner’s finger in a specific scoring system.

There has been no systematic research to determine the best method of vaginal palpation to assess the ability to contract. This may be because, in the context described here, vaginal palpation is used only to determine qualitatively whether or not there is a muscle contraction (Fig. 3).

Ultrasound and MRI. More recently, real-time diagnostic ultrasound and MRI have been used to evaluate PFM action during contraction.23,43-49,51-55 Ultrasound can be performed either with the probe placed suprapubically or at the perineum (curved-array ultrasound probe, 3.5 and 5 MHz, and vaginal probe, 7.5 MHz) or with the probe inserted into the vagina or rectum (linear or end-firing probe, 5 and 7.5 MHz)56-58 (Fig. 4). Magnetic resonance imaging can be conventional (2-dimensional image acquisition), ultrafast image acquisition, or 3-dimensional image acquisition.50 B et al,23 using dynamic MRI, could not confirm displacement of 2 to 4 cm of the PFM estimated by Kegel after vaginal palpation in a supine position.22 With the subjects in a sitting position, a mean inward lift of the PFM of 10.8 mm (SD=6.0) was measured by MRI. This finding corresponds with results from a recent study using ultrasound where a mean lift of 11.2 mm (95% confidence interval=7.2-15.3) was visualized with the subjects positioned supine.59 Further testing of responsiveness, reproducibility, and validity of data obtained with these methods needs to be done, particularly to understand the implications of subject position on the different displacement values, but there is consensus that both ultrasound and MRI should be considered an investigational imaging technique in the evaluation of female urinary incontinence and pelvic-floor dysfunction.56 Ultrasound is increasingly being used clinically because this technology is becoming more economically available to physical therapists.

EMG. Electromyography can be used to measure the electrical activity of skeletal muscles and is a direct representation of the outflow of motoneurons in the ventral horn in the spinal cord to the muscles as a result of either voluntary or reflex PFM contraction. Electromyographic measurement can be conducted with either surface or intramuscular electrodes.60,61 Surface electrodes are recommended to measure the activity of large, superficial muscles, whereas the use of intramuscular electrodes (needle or wire) is the method of choice to detect activity from muscles that are small or located deep within the body (eg, the PFM).60 In clinical practice, however, surface electrodes on a vaginal probe are most commonly used due to the high sensitivity of the perineal region and skills required for using wire or needle electrodes (Fig. 5).

Several types of apparatus and different techniques of surface EMG,62-64 wire EMG,21,25,65 and concentric needle EMG66-68 have been used to measure PFM activity. In general, the number of activated motor units increases with increasing force when the muscle force is low, whereas frequency of firing of motor units increases at high force levels. It is reasonable, therefore, to expect that electrical activity may represent the level of force developed by the muscle.60 However, Turker60 recommended that researchers be cautious about using the EMG information as the absolute measure of force because most muscles give nonlinear responses. Turker60 also stated that comparison of single motor unit data among and within subjects on different occasions is highly unlikely, but that it is possible to compare firing and synaptic characteristics of motor units that have similar recruitment thresholds. Podnar and Vodusek68 recommended concentric needle EMG as the most informative test to detect PFM denervation or reinnervation.

Figure 4.

Ultrasonography applied suprapubically. Sagittal midline view of pelvic floor relaxed (A) and fully contracted (B), with pelvic- floor displacement marked.

Figure 5.

Apparatuswith multiple functions: measurement of pelvic-floor muscle function with surface electromyography and vaginal and rectal squeeze pressure (Enraf Nonius International, 2600 AV Delft, the Netherlands).

Heitner69 concluded that surface EMG was superior to vaginal palpation in assessment of all variables other than lift, and Gunnarsson70 showed that PFM activity can be measured reliably with surface EMG. However, when surface EMG is used clinically, interpretation of the signals must be made with caution because the risk of cross talk from other muscles is high60,61 and because of variability in electrode placement within the vagina. Wire EMG and concentric needle EMG, therefore, are recommended for scientific purposes.

Quantification of Muscle Strength

Measurement of squeeze pressure is the most commonly used method to measure PFM maximum strength and endurance. The patient is asked to contract the PFM as hard as possible (maximum strength), to sustain a contraction (endurance), or to repeat as many contractions as possible (endurance). The measurement can be done in the urethra, vagina, or rectum using manual muscle testing with vaginal palpation, pressure manometry, or dynamometry.

Manual muscle testing. Laycock71 developed the modified Oxford Grading System72 to measure PFM strength using vaginal palpation of the PFM. This is a 6-point scale: 0=no contraction, 1=flicker, 2=weak, 3=moderate, 4=good (with lift), and 5=strong. This measurement scale is commonly used by physical therapists because it can be incorporated with vaginal palpation in the clinical assessment, its use is considered a physical therapist’s core manual skill, it is simple to use, and it does not require expensive equipment.

B and Finckenhagen73 questioned the responsiveness of this scale because they did not find that the scale could differentiate among weak, moderate, good, or strong contractions when they compared the measurements with measurements of vaginal squeeze pressure using a vaginal balloon connected to a fiberoptic microtip pressure transducer (cm H2O) in a study of 20 female physical therapist students (mean age=25 years, range=21-38), 7 with reported symptoms of SUI and 13 who were asymptomatic. Morin et al74 confirmed these findings, showing that digital palpation categories did not correspond with measurement with a dynamometer.

The results from studies evaluating intratester and intertester reliability of vaginal palpation strength measurements49,73,75-78 are conflicting. Isherwood and Rane75 found high intertester reliability, whereas Jeyaseelan et al76 concluded that intertester reliability should not be assumed and needs to be established when 2 or more clinicians are involved in pretreatment and posttreatment assessment. B and Finckenhagen73 and Laycock and Jerwood77 found agreement between testers in only 45% and 47% of the tested cases, respectively, using Laycock’s modified Oxford scale. Several investigators73,74,78-81 have compared vaginal palpation and vaginal squeeze pressure using a pressure manometer. Isherwood and Rane75 measured vaginal palpation using the Oxford Grading System and compared the measurements with those obtained using a “perineometer” with an arbitrary scale of 1 to 12. They found a high kappa value of .73. Heitner69 tested 39 women with SUI (mean age=49 years, SD=12) to determine the reliability of data obtained with intravaginal surface EMG and vaginal palpation and concluded that lift was most reliably tested with palpation and that all other measures of muscle function were better tested with EMG.

Manometry. Kegel9 used a vaginal pressure device connected to a manometer (the perineometer), showing the pressure (in millimeters of mercury) as a measure of PFM strength. He did not report any data about responsiveness, reliability, or validity for his method. The term “perineometer” is somewhat misleading because the pressure- sensitive region of the probe of the manometer is not placed at the perineum, but in the vagina at the level of the levator ani muscles. Currently, several types of vaginal pressure devices are available to measure vaginal squeeze pressure, all with different device sizes and technical parameters82-84 (Figs. 6, 7). Thus, measurements obtained with different methods cannot be compared.47 In newer types of apparatus, a specialized balloon catheter connected to a fiberoptic microtip and strain-gauge pressure transducer has shown high responsiveness.82-87

Figure 6.

Vaginal squeeze pressure measured with a vaginal balloon connected to a microtip pressure transducer (Camtech AS, Sandvika, Norway).

Figure 7.

One commonly used “perineometer,” the Peritron with vaginal probe (NEEN HealthCare, Dereham, Norfolk, United Kingdom).

Of the 3 pelvic canals, measurement across the urethra has the best face and content validity for measuring the closure pressure caused by the force of muscle contraction. This location is where the increased pressure created by the muscle contraction is required. However, because of the risk of infection and the lack of equipment availability in most physical therapy clinics, this method has mostly been used for research purposes.26,34 Rectal pressure may not be a valid measure of the PFM in relation to urinary incontinence because this measure also includes contraction of the anal sphincter muscle. Therefore, vaginal squeeze pressure is used clinically.

A common reliability and validity problem is placement of the pressure transducer in the urethra, vagina, or rectum. The balloon or transducer has to be placed at the same anatomical level and where the PFM are located. In the urethra, the most common placement of the transducer is at the highest pressure point.26 Kegel9,22 suggested that the PFM were located in the distal third of the vagina, and B88 found that most women had the highest pressure rise when the middle of the balloon was placed 3.5 cm inside the introitus of the vagina. However, individual differences were found.88

Squeeze pressure measurements obtained from all the 3 canals can be invalid because an increase in abdominal pressure will increase the measured pressures. The PFM create one wall of the abdominopelvic cavity, and all rises in abdominal pressure will increase the pressure measured in the urethra, vagina, and rectum. Both B et al36 and Bump et al37 have shown that straining is a common error when women attempt to contract their PFM, and therefore an erroneous measurement can be registered. However, because a correct contraction involves an observable inward movement of the perineum or the instrument, and straining creates a downward movement, some authors24,89 have suggested that a valid measurement can be ensured by simultaneous observation of inward movement of the perineum.

Some researchers90 have tried to avoid co-contraction of the abdominal muscles interfering with measurement of PFM strength by use of surface EMG on the rectus abdominis muscle to train subjects to relax their abdominal muscles or by simultaneous abdominal pressure measurement. Several researchers,24,25,91,92 however, have shown that there is a co-contraction of the abdominal muscles (lower transversus abdominis and internal oblique) during attempts of a correct, maximal contraction. Performance of a near-maximum PFM contraction is important to achieve the best training effect.29,93 A normal co-contraction of the lower abdominal wall, therefore, should be taught. Dougherty et al91 allowed an increase in abdominal pressure of 5 mm Hg only, to ensure the least abdominal pressure interference with the measurement results. B et al24 used a more clinically useful method of standardizing the testing by not allowing any movement of the pelvis during measurement. Contraction of other muscles such as the hip adductor and external rotator muscles and the gluteal muscles, also alters intravaginal pressure measurement.24,55 B and Stien66 showed with concentric needle EMG in women without urinary incontinence that contraction of these other muscles increased muscle activity in both the striated urethral wall muscle and the PFM. However, this gross motor pattern is not the normal neuromotor action of the PFM and lower transversus abdominis muscles and is therefore discouraged.

Results reported from different squeeze pressure and EMG apparatuses may not be able to be compared due to differences in the diameter of the vaginal probes. It is unknown whether these size differences may give different results or alter muscle function. There is discussion on both the optimum diameter of vaginal devices and whether 1 or 2 fingers should be used for vaginal palpation.47 Most women use vaginal tampons, which are the size of one finger. Although vaginal birth may have stretched the PFM and endopelvic fascia, time may have normalized this stretched fascia in many women. When palpating, the anterior and posterior vaginal walls are always in apposition and in contact with the finger. However, the urogenital hiatus can be markedly widened in some women, and using 1 or 2 fingers to palpate will depend on the width of this urogenital hiatus. It is unknown whether a wide-diameter vaginal device or 2- finger palpation stretches the PFM, inhibiting its activity or, conversely, increasing its activity by providing firm proprioceptive feedback.

Several authors78,82,83,94 have shown that vaginal squeeze pressure can be measured with satisfactory reliability. However, Dougherty et al91 reported a within-subjects mean of 15.5 mm Hg (SD=3.9) for vaginal squeeze pressure and a between-subjects mean of 132.4 mm Hg (SD=11.5) in subjects without urinary incontinence aged 19 to 61 years. This variation was confirmed by B et al,83 who also showed that at the first attempt some women needed some time to find and recruit motor; units, whereas other women fatigued, causing the strength to drop considerately after only a few attempts. However, comparing the res\ults of the whole group of women on 2 different occasions 14 days apart, reproducible results were found. Wilson et al94 also found a difference between first and last contractions. They did not find any difference between measurements obtained with a full or empty bladder or during the menstrual cycle. Dougherty et al91 did not find any difference when muscle strength was measured on different days, at different times of the day, or during stress. In summary, vaginal squeeze pressure is a clinically useful measurement technique when used with careful instructions to the patient and visual observation of the perineum by the physical therapist.

Dynamometers. Sampselle et al95 were the first to report on the use of a dynamometric speculum to measure PFM strength. This dynamometer measures the dorsoventral muscle force (in newtons) directly. However, so far, no report of responsiveness, reliability, and validity has been published on this apparatus. The dynamometric speculum developed by Dumoulin et al96 was shown to yield data with satisfactory reliability and to be a sensitive tool for measuring dorsoventral PFM force (Fig. 8). This dynamometer comprises 2 parallel aluminum branches-one fixed and one adjustable to different vaginal diameters-and a computerized central unit.97 The voltage output was found to be linearly correlated with a force of 0 to 15 N applied to the speculum arms (R^sup 2^=.999). This dynamometer also was found to have best reliability at an opening of 1 cm, with a coefficient of dependency of .88 (SEM=1.49 N). In contrast to the speculums developed by Sampselle et al95 and Dumoulin et al,97 Verelst and Leivseth98 recently developed a dynamometer to measure mediolateral PFM contraction force. Their dynamometric speculum also has 2 nonflexible, adjustable parallel branches, one of these containing the strain gauges, and has been tested for linearity to 60 N (2% nonlinearity), with best reliability at an opening of 40 mm. One disadvantage that dynamometric speculums share with most tools for measuring PFM strength is that they measure only one function (squeeze and not lift). In addition, clinical experience has shown that they have the same disadvantage as manometers, in that the force measured by the dynamometer also can be affected by intra-abdominal pressure rises or contractions of other muscle groups such as the adductor or gluteal muscles.

Figure 8.

Vaginal dynamometer. Printed with permission from Dumoulin et al, Montreal, Quebec, Canada.

Figure 9.

Different sizes and shapes of vaginal cones.

Vaginal weights/cones. Plevnik99 developed vaginal cones in 1985. The cones were meant to be both a measuring tool and a training method. The original set of cones consisted of 9 weights with equal volume but with increasing weight from 20 to 100 g. In newer versions, packages of 3 and 5 cones are common, and they come in differing sizes and shapes (Fig. 9). The heaviest weight that a woman can hold for 1 minute without voluntarily contracting the PFM is termed the “resting PFM strength” or “passive PFM strength.” The weight that can be held for 1 minute with voluntary contraction is termed “active PFM strength.”99

Cones have not been tested for responsiveness, and it could be argued whether 9, 5, or 3 cones are the most suitable number to grade muscle strength. The responsiveness, therefore, may be too low to detect small differences. The muscle force that is required to hold each of the cones is not known. No studies have been found that have addressed intrarater or interrater reliability or placement of the cone within the vagina in relation to the PFM.

Deindl et al65 applied wire EMG within the PFM and showed that insertion of the cone did increase the overall motor unit activity. Hahn et al79 found low correlations between weight of the cones and vaginal squeeze pressure measurement (r=.10) and between vaginal digital palpation and cone weight (r=.18) in women with incontinence. Twenty percent of the women had low palpation scores and low vaginal pressure measurements despite the fact that they could retain the heaviest cone. Radiography showed that the cone was resting on the coccyx in some women. In addition, other muscles such as the gluteal, hip adductor, and the external rotator muscles can be contracted instead of the PFM to keep the cone in place. Kerschan- Schindl et al80 found there was only a weak correlation between maximal PFM contraction force and ability to hold the cones. No studies have been found that compared the actual weight of the cone with measurement of voluntary maximum PFM contraction force in individual women. In a study by Olah et al,100 17% of the subjects were not able to use the cones because they were either too large or too small in relation to the vagina. In summary, the use of cones is to be approached with caution until further good-quality research is forthcoming.

Measurement of Lift

Some attempts have been made to measure the lifting aspect of PFM function.101 Ultrasound27,45,46,59,81 and MRI23,52-54 are newer technologies, where the actual lift inside the pelvis can be seen. These methods yield data with strong face and content validity, and both perineal and transabdominal applications of ultrasound have been tested for reliability.58,102 Artibani et al,56 however, concluded that only a few of the imaging techniques have been properly evaluated with respect to specificity, sensitivity, and predictive value for use in diagnosis and management of urinary incontinence and that the use is often based more on expert opinion, common sense, local expertise, and availability than on research data.

Pelvic-floor muscle location, volume, and anatomy can be measured with ultrasound and MRI.56,103 In a systematic review of studies of real-time ultrasound as an objective measure of muscle size, not necessarily the PFM, Perkin et al103 concluded that ultrasound yielded valid and reliable measurements of skeletal muscle size under controlled conditions. However, they identified fat, fascia orientation, muscle shape, and pathology as confounding factors. More research is needed to obtain normative data for PFM size for both MRI and ultrasound.

Whether measurement of lift is a good measure of PFM strength warrants some discussion. For instance, is lifting through a large distance a measure of greater PFM force, or might it indicate a stretched or ruptured investing fascia within which the PFM can lift a great distance? A large displacement may not therefore be a measure of greater strength. Most likely a well-positioned pelvic floor with high volume and strength will be in a position where little voluntary lift can be added. Peschers et al104 demonstrated that there was downward movement of the PFM during coughing even in women without urinary incontinence, and a large lift during voluntary contraction has been shown in women without urinary incontinence.23,59 The role of the fascia covering the PFM is not yet fully appreciated in displacement data obtained for PFM lift. Ongoing research evaluating the utility of ultrasound for PFM imaging may combine with increasing availability of this technology to create a useful clinical tool for physical therapists.

Discussion

Assessment of PFM function is not an easy task, and to date no single method has been shown to measure both functions of the muscles: elevation and compression force. Most methods available are influenced by subjective judgment. Skill and clinical experience, therefore, may play an important role in determining the reliability and validity of the results now and in the future.38,73,76

Observing the inward movement of a correct PFM contraction is the starting point for measurement of PFM function. However, this inward movement of the skin may be created by contraction of the superficial perineal muscles and have no influence on the urethral closure mechanism. Conversely, there may be palpable PFM contraction with no visible outside movement. Particularly in women who are obese, a correct lift can be difficult to observe from the outside. In the future, ultrasound may overtake the role of clinical observation, and would also serve as a biofeedback and teaching tool.

Whether the muscle action observed by clinical observation or ultrasound is sufficiently strong to increase urethral closure pressure can only be measured by urodynamic assessment in the urethra and bladder. Most interestingly, Bump et al37 found that, although contracting correctly, only 50% of subjects who were continent were able to voluntarily contract the PFM with enough force to increase urethral pressure.

Today, most physical therapists use vaginal palpation and the modified Oxford scale to evaluate PFM function and strength because both squeeze pressure and lift can be registered. As stated by Kegel,9 vaginal palpation is a good method to qualitatively report whether there is a PFM contraction or not. However, whether palpation is adequate for clinical outcome measurement and for scientific purposes to measure muscle force is questionable. Even experienced assessors have been found to have low agreement.73,77

Because all increases in abdominal pressure will affect urethral, vaginal, and rectal pressures, squeeze pressure cannot be used alone. With simultaneous observation of inward movement of the perineum, it is likely that a correct contraction is measured.31 Cautious teaching of the patient, standardization of instruction and motivation, and standardization of the patient’s position and performance are mandatory. If the aim is to measure the ability to close the urethra, urethral pressure should be measured. If overall PFM strength is the aim of the investigation, vaginal squeeze pressure (pressure manometry or dynamometric force) is preferred because this is the least invasive method with no known risk of infection.

Muscle strength measurement may be considered an indirect measure of PFM functionin real-life activities. Women with no leakage do not contract voluntarily before coughing or jumping. Their PFM contraction is considered to be an automatic co-contraction occurring as a quick and strong activation of an intact neural system. Other important factors for a quick and strong contraction are the location of the pelvic floor within the pelvis, the muscle bulk, and intact connective tissue. A stretched and weak pelvic floor may be positioned lower within the pelvis compared with a well- trained or noninjured pelvic floor.27 The time for stretched muscles to reach an optimal contraction may be too slow to be effective in preventing descent against increased abdominal pressure (eg, sneeze), thereby allowing leakage to occur. Several case control studies comparing PFM strength in women with and without incontinence have demonstrated that women who are continent have better function and strength in the PFM than women who are incontinent and that there is an association between improvement in muscle strength and reduction in urinary incontinence.98,105,106

Future measurement of both pathophysiological and impairment levels (ICF classification) could include ultrasound, MRI, and intramuscular EMG. To date, PFM function and strength seem to be best measured by a combination of observation, vaginal palpation, and urethral or vaginal squeeze pressures. In measurement of disability, pad tests, leakage episodes, and women’s reports are the “gold standard” recommended by the International Continence Society.1 Finally, the activity/ participation domain can be measured by general and disease-specific quality-of-life questionnaires.107,108

Clinical Recommendations

On the basis of our review of the literature, we believe the following clinical recommendations can be made:

* Pelvic-floor muscle palpation is the recommended technique for use by the physical therapist to understand, teach, and give feedback to patients about correctness of the contraction. Position of the patient, instructions given, and the use of 1 or 2 fingers have to be standardized and reported.

* Ultrasound applied at the perineum, and particularly suprapubically, is a noninvasive method and likely to be an important tool in the future for physical therapists to assess correctness of the PFM contraction, its anatomical position, and muscle volume; for biofeedback; and for measurement of PFM activity. It is especially valuable in circumstances where an invasive technique is inappropriate.

* Measurement of vaginal squeeze pressure is difficult, and clinical skills and experience are important factors in achieving reproducible and valid results. The method has to be used with caution. Only contractions with visible inward movement of the measurement device can be considered valid measurements of PFM strength.

* The use of dynamometers may be a future valid, reliable, and responsive method of measuring PFM force.

No single measurement tool gives a full picture of PFM strength or function. In addition, to date, there are no measurement tools with demonstrated responsiveness, reliability, and validity that are capable of measuring the automatic action of the PFM in real-life situations as a response to increased abdominal pressure. Future technological developments may provide the possibility of measuring PFM function during different forms of physical exertion. Physical therapists need to be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of current technology to become less reliant on manual palpation skills alone.

Physical therapists need to be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of current technology to become less reliant on manual palpation alone.

References

1 Abrams P, Cardozo L, Fall M, et al. The standardization of terminology of lower urinary tract function: report from the standardisation sub-committee of the International Continence Society. Neurourol Urodyn. 2002;21:167-178.

2 Hunskaar S, Burgio K, Diokno A, et al. Epidemiology and natural history of urinary incontinence (UI). In: Abrams P, Cardozo L, Khoury S, Wein A, eds. Incontinence. Plymouth, United Kingdom: Plymbridge Distributors Ltd; 2002:165-201.

3 Hunskaar S, Vinsnes A. The quality of life in women with urinary incontinence as measured by the Sickness Impact Profile. J Am Geriatr Soc. 1991;39:378-382.

4 Norton P, MacDonald LD, Sedgwick PM, Stanton SL. Distress and delay associated with urinary incontinence, frequency, and urgency in women. Br Med J. 1988;297:1187-1189.

5 B K, Hagen R, Kvarstein B, Larsen S. Female stress urinary incontinence and participation in different sport and social activities. Scand J Sports Sci. 1989;11:117-121.

6 Nygaard I, DeLancey JOL, Arnsdorf L, Murphy E. Exercise and incontinence. Obstet Gynecol. 1990;75:848-851.

7 Brown W, Miller Y. Too wet to exercise? Leaking urine as a barrier to physical activity in women. J Sci Med Sport. 2001;4:373- 378.

8 Bouchard C, Shephard RJ, Stephens T. Physical Activity, Fitness, and Health: International Proceedings and Consensus Statement. Champaign, Ill: Human Kinetics Inc; 1994.

9 Kegel AH. Progressive resistance exercise in the functional restoration of the perineal muscles. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1948;56:238-249.

10 Fantl JA, Neuman DK, Colling J, et al. Urinary Incontinence in Adults: Acute and Chronic Management. 2nd update. Clinical Practice Guidelines. Rockville, Md: US Dept of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Agency for Health Care Policy and Research; 1996: 1-154.

11 Henalla SM, Hutchins CJ, Robinson P, MacVicar J. Non- operative methods in the treatment of female genuine stress incontinence of urine. J Obstet Gynecol Neonatal Nurs. 1989;9:222- 225.

12 Berghmans LCM, Hendricks HJM, B K, et al. Conservative treatment of stress urinary incontinence in women: a systematic review of randomized clinical trials. Br J Urol. 1998;82:181-191.

13 B K, Talseth T, Holme I. Single blind, randomised controlled trial of pelvic floor exercises, electrical stimulation, vaginal cones, and no treatment in management of genuine stress incontinence in women. Br Med J. 1999;318:487-493.

14 Wilson PD, B K, Nygaard I, et al. Conservative treatment in women. In: Abrams P, Cardozo L, Khoury S, eds. Incontinence. Plymouth, United Kingdom: Plymbridge Distributors Ltd; 2002:571- 624.

15 Lagro-Janssen A, Debruyne F, Smiths A, Van Weel C. The effects of treatment of urinary incontinence in general practice. Fam Pract. 1992;9:284-289.

16 Mrkved S, B K, Fjrtoft T. Is there any additional effect off adding biofeedback to pelvic floor muscle training? A single-blind randomized controlled trial. Obstet Gynecol. 2002;100:730-739.

17 Retzky SS, Rogers RM. Urinary incontinence in women. Ciba Clin Symp. 1995:47:3-6.

18 Netter F. Atlas of Human Anatomy. 2nd ed. Teterboro, NJ: Icon Learning Systems/Havas Medical Media; 2001.

19 Warwick R, Williams PL. Gray’s Anatomy. 35th ed. Edinburgh, United Kingdom: Longmans; 1973:531-532.

20 Constantinou CE, Govan DE. Contribution and Timing of Transmitted and Generated. Pressure Components in the Female Urethra: Female Incontinence. New York, NY: Allan R Liss Inc; 1981:113-120.

21 Sapsford R, Hodges P. Contraction of the pelvic floor muscles during abdominal manoeuvres. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2001;82: 1081- 1088.

22 Kegel AH. Stress incontinence and genital relaxation. Ciba Clin Symp. 1952:35-51.

23 B K, Lilles F, Talseth T, Hedlund H. Dynamic MRI of pelvic floor muscles in an upright sitting position. Neurourol Urodyn. 2001;20: 167-174.

24 B K, Kvarstein B, Hagen R, Larsen S. Pelvic floor muscle exercise for the treatment of female stress urinary incontinence, II: validity of vaginal pressure measurements of pelvic floor muscle strength and the necessity of supplementary methods for control of correct contraction. Neurourol Urodyn. 1990;9:479-487.

25 Neumann P, Gill V. Pelvic floor and abdominal muscle interaction: EMG activity and intra-abdominal pressure. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 2002;13;125-132.

26 Lose G. Simultaneous recording of pressure and cross- sectional area in the female urethra: a study of urethral closure function in healthy and stress incontinent women. Neurourol Urodyn. 1992;11: 54-89.

27 Howard D, Miller J, DeLancey J, Ashton-Miller J. Differential effects of cough, Valsalva, and continence status on vesical neck movement. Obstet Gynecol 2000;95:535-540.

28 Ashton-Miller J, Howard D, DeLancey J. The functional anatomy of the female pelvic floor and stress continence control system. Scand J Urol Nephrol Suppl. 2001;(207):l-7.

29 Wilmore J, Costill D. Physiology of Sport and Exercise. 2nd ed. Champaign, Ill: Human Kinetics Inc; 1999.

30 Hay-Smith E, B K, Berghmans L, et al. Pelvic Floor Muscle Training for Urinary Incontinence in Women. Oxford, United Kingdom: The Cochrane Library, The Cochrane Collaboration; 2001:3.

31 International Classification of Impairments, Disabilities, and Handicaps (ICIDH). ICIDH-2 Beta-1 Draft. Zeist, the Netherlands: World Health Organization; 1997.

32 International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF). Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization; 2002.

33 DeLancey J. Stress urinary incontinence: where are we now, where should we go? Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1996;175:311-319.

34 Benvenuti F, Caputo GM, Bandinelli S, et al. Reeducative treatment of female genuine stress incontinence. Am J Phys Med. 1987;66: 155-168.

35 Hesse U, Schussler B, Frimberger J, et al. Effectiveness of a three step pelvic floor reeducation in the treatment of stress urinary incontinence: a clinical assessment. Neurourol Urodyn. 1990;9:397-398.

36 B K, Larsen S, Oseid S, et al. Knowledge about and ability to correct pelvic floor muscle exercises in women with urinary stress incontinence. Neurourol Urodyn. 1988;7:261-262.

37 Bump R, Hurt WG, Fantl JA, Wyman JF. Assessment of Kegel exercise performance after brief verbal instruction. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1991;165:322-329.

38 Thomas JR, Nelson J\K. Research Methods in Physical Activity. 3rd ed. Champaign, Ill: Human Kinetics Inc; 1996.

39 B K, Hagen RH, Kvarstein B, et al. Pelvic floor muscle exercise for the treatment of female stress urinary incontinence, III: effects of two different degrees of pelvic floor muscle exercise. Neurourol Urodyn. 1990;9:489-502.

40 Elser D, Wyman J, McClish D, et al. The effect of bladder training, pelvic floor muscle training, or combination training on urodynamic parameters in women with urinary incontinence. Neurourol Urodyn. 1999;18:427-436.

41 Pollock ML, Gaesser GA, Butcher JD, et al. The recommended quantity and quality of exercise for developing and maintaining cardiorespiratory and muscular fitness and flexibility in healthy adults. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 1998;30:975-991.

42 Kraemer WJ, Fry A. Strength testing: development and evaluation of methodology. In: Maud P, Foster C, eds. Physiological Assessment of Human Fitness. Champaign, Ill: Human Kinetics Inc; 1995:115-138.

43 Beco J, Sulu M, Schaaps JP, Lambotte R. Une nouvelle approche des troubles de continence chez la femme: l’echographie urodynamique par voie vaginale. J Gynecol Obslet Biol Reprod. 1987;16:987-998.

44 Petri E, Koelbl H, Schaer G. What is the place of ultrasound in urogynecology? A written panel. Int Urogynecol J. 1999;10:262- 273.

45 Dietz H, Jarvis S, Vancaillie T. The assessment of levator muscle strength: a validation of three ultrasound techniques. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Uysfunct. 2002;13:156-159.

46 Stoker J, Halligan S, Bartram C. Pelvic floor imaging. Radiology. 2001;218:621-641.

47 Shull B, Hurt G, Laycock J, et al. Physical examination. In: Abrams P, Cardozo L, Khoury S, Wein A, eds. Incontinence. Plymouth, United Kingdom: Plymbridge Distributors Ltd; 2002:373-388.

48 Van Kampen M, De Weerdt W, Feys H, Honing S. Reliability and validity of a digital test for pelvic muscles strength in women. Neurourol Urodyn. 1996;15:338-339.

49 Worth A, Dougherty M, McKey P. Development and testing of the circumvaginal muscles rating scale. Nurs Res. 1986;35:166-168.

50 Brink C, Sampselle CM, Wells T, et al. A digital test for pelvic muscle strength in older women with urinary incontinence. Nurs Res. 1989;38: 196-199.

51 Dietz H, Wilson P, Clarke B. The use of perineal ultrasound to quantify levator activity and teach pelvic floor muscle exercises. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 2001;12:166-169.

52 Schoenenberger A, Debatin J, Guldenschuh I, et al. Dynamic MR defecography with a superconducting, open-configuration MR system. Radiology. 1998;206:641-646.

53 Christensen LL, Djurhus JC, Constantinou CE. Imaging of pelvic floor contractions using MRI. Neurourol Urodyn. 1995;14:209-216.

54 Hjartadottir S, Nilsson J, Petersen C, Lingman G. The female pelvic floor: a dome-not a basin. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand. 1997;76:567-571.

55 Peschers U, Gingelmaier A, Jundt K, et al. Evaluation of pelvic floor muscle strength using four different techniques. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 2001;12:27-30.

56 Artibani W, Anderse J, Gajewski J, et al. Imaging and other investigations. In: Abrams P, Cardozo L, Khoury S, Wein A, eds. Incontinence. Plymouth, United Kingdom: Plymbridge Distributors Ltd; 2002: 425-478.

57 Thompsen J, O’Sullivan P. Levator plate movement during voluntary pelvic floor muscle contraction in subjects with incontinence and prolapse: a cross-sectional study and review. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 2001;12(suppl 3):40.

58 Murphy C. Investigation of Transabdominal Diagnostic Ultrasound in the Conservative Management of Pelvic Floor Dysfunction [master’s degree thesis]. Melbourne, Victoria, Australia: School of Physiotherapy, University of Melbourne; 2002.

59 B K, Sherburn M, Allen T. Transabdominal ultrasound measurement of pelvic floor muscle activity when activated directly or via transversus abdominis muscle contraction. Neurourol Urodyn. 2003;22: 582-588.

60 Turker K. Electromyography: some methodological problems and issues. Phys Ther. 1993;73:698-710.

61 Fowler C, Benson J, Craggs M, et al. Clinical neurophysiology. In: Abrams P, Cardozo L, Khoury S, Wein A, eds. Incontinence. Plymouth, United Kingdom: Plymbridge Distributors Ltd; 2002: 389- 424.

62 Thorp JM, Bowes WA, Droegemuller W, Wicker H. Assessment of perineal floor function: electromyography with acrylic plug surface electrodes in nulliparous women. Obstet Gynecol. 1991;78:89-92.

63 Thorp JM, Stephenson H, Jones LH, Cooper G. Pelvic floor (Kegel) exercises: a pilot study in nulliparous women. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 1994;5:86-89.

64 Gunnarsson M, Mattiasson A. Circumvaginal surface electromyography in women with urinary incontinence and in healthy volunteers. Scand J Urol Nephrol. 1994;157(suppl):89-95.

65 Deindl F, Schussler B, Vodusek D, Hesse U. Neurophysiologic effect of vaginal cone application in continent and urinary stress incontinent women. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 1995;6:204-208.

66 B K, Stien R. Needle EMG registration of striated urethral wall and pelvic floor muscle activity patterns during cough, Valsalva, abdominal, hip adductor, and gluteal muscle contractions in nulliparous healthy females. Neurourol Urodyn. 1994;13:35-41.

67 Allen RE, Hosker GL, Smith A, Warrell DW. Pelvic floor damage and childbirth: a neurophysiological study. Br J Obstet Gynecol 1990;97: 770-779.

68 Podnar S, Vodusek D. Protocol for clinical neurophysiologic examination of the pelvic floor. Neurourol Urodyn. 2001;20:669-682.

69 Heitner C. Validaingsonderzoek Naar Palpatie en Myofeedback bij Vrouwen Met Symptomen van Stress Unne-Incontinentie [PhD thesis]. Maastricht, the Netherlands: University of Maastricht; 2000.

70 Gunnarsson M. Pelvic Floor Dysfunction: A Vaginal Surface EMG Study in Healthy and Incontinent Women. Lund, Sweden: Department of Urology, Faculty of Medicine, Lund University; 2002.

71 Laycock J. Clinical evaluation of the pelvic floor. In: Schussler B, Laycock J, Norton P, Stanton SL, eds. Pelvic Floor Re- education. London, United Kingdom: Springer-Verlag; 1994:42-48.

72 Aid to the Investigation of Peripheral Nave Injuries. British Medical Research Council War Memorandum. London, United Kingdom: His Majesty’s Stationery Office; 1943:11-46.

73 B K, Finckenhagen HB. Vaginal palpation of pelvic floor muscle strength: inter-test reproducibility and the comparison between palpation and vaginal squeeze pressure. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand. 2001;80: 883-887.

74 Morin M, Dumoulin C, Bourbonnais D, et al. Pelvic floor maximal strength using vaginal digital assessment compared to dynamometric measurements. Neurourol Urodyn. 2004;23:336-341.

75 Isherwood P, Rane A. Comparative assessment of pelvic floor strength using a perineometer and digital examination. Br J Obstet Gynecol 2000;107:1007-1011.

76 Jeyaseelan S, Haslam J, Winstanley J, et al. Digital vaginal assessment: an inter-tester reliability study. Physiotherapy. 2001;87:243-250.

77 Laycock J, Jerwood D. Pelvic floor muscle assessment: the PERFECT scheme. Physiotherapy. 2001;87:631-642.

78 McKey PL, Dougherty MC. The circumvaginal musculature: correlation between pressure and physical assessment. Nurs Res. 1986;35: 307-309.

79 Hahn I, Milsom I, Ohlson BL, Ekelund P. Comparative assessment of pelvic floor function using vaginal cones, vaginal digital palpation and vaginal pressure measurement. Gynecol Obstet Invest. 1996;41: 269-274.

80 Kerschan-Schindl K, Uher E, Wiesinger G, et al. Reliability of pelvic floor muscle strength measurement in elderly incontinent women. Neurourol Urodyn. 2002;21:42-47.

81 Jarvis S, Dietz H, Vancaillie T. A comparison between vaginal palpation, perineometry and ultrasound in the assessment of levator function. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct. 2001;12(suppl 3):31.

82 Dougherty MC, Abrams R, McKey PL. An instrument to assess the dynamic characteristics of the circumvaginal musculature. Nurs Res. 1986;35:202-206.

83 B K, Kvarstein B, Hagen R, Larsen S. Pelvic floor muscle exercise for the treatment of female stress urinary incontinence, I: reliability of vaginal pressure measurements of pelvic floor muscle strength. Neurourol Urodyn. 1990;9:471-477.

84 Laycock J, Jerwood D. Development of the Bradford perineometer. Physiotherapy. 1994;80:139-142.

85 Abrams R, Batich C, Dougherty M, et al. Custom-made vaginal balloons for strengthening circumvaginal musculature. Biomaterials. 1986;14(384):239-248.

86 Kvarstein B, Aase O, Hansen T, Dobloug P. A new method with fiberoptic transducers used for simultaneous recording of intravesical and urethral pressure during physiological filling and voiding phases. J Urol. 1983;130:504-506.

87 Svenningsen L, Jensen . Application of fiberoptics to the clinical measurement of intra-uterine pressure in labour. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand. 1986;65:551-555.

88 B K. Pressure measurements during pelvic floor muscle contractions: the effect of different positions of the vaginal measuring device. Neurourol Urodyn. 1992;11:107-113.

89 Bump R, Mattiasson A, B K, et al. The standardization of terminology of female pelvic organ prolapse and pelvic floor dysfunction. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1996;175:10-17.

90 Cammu H, Van Nylen M. Pelvic floor exercises versus vaginal weight cones in genuine stress incontinence. Eur J Obstet Gynecol Reprod Biol. 1998;77:89-93.

91 Dougherty M, Bishop K, Mooney R, el al. Variation in intravaginal pressure measurement. Nurs Res. 1991;40:282-285.

92 Sapsford R, Hodges P, Richardson C, et al. Co-activation of the abdominal and pelvic floor muscles during voluntary exercises. Neurourol Urodyn. 2001;20:31-42.

93 International Olympic Committee. Strength and Power in Sport. Oxford, United Kingdom: Blackwell Science Ltd; 1992.

94 Wilson P, Herbison G, Heer K. Reproducibility of perineometry measurements. Neurourol Urodyn. 1991;10:399-400.

95 Sampselle CM, Miller JM, Mims BL, et al. Effect of pelvic muscle exercise on transient incontinence during pregnanc\y and after birth. Obstel Gynecol. 1998;91:406-412.

96 Dumoulin C, Gravel D, Bourbonnais D, et al. Reliability of dynamometric measurements of the pelvic floor musculature. Neurourol Urodyn. 2004;23:134-142.

97 Dumoulin C, Bourbonnais D, Lemieux M. Development of a dynamometer for measuring the isometric force of the pelvic floor musculature. Neurourol Urodyn. 2003;22:648-653.

98 Verelst M, Leivseth G. Are fatigue and disturbances in pre- programmed activity of pelvic floor muscles associated with female stress urinary incontinence? Neurourol Urodyn 2004;23:143-147.

99 Plevnik S. A new method for testing and strengthening of pelvic floor muscles [abstract]. In: Proceeding of the 15th Annual Meeting of the International Continence Society; September 1985; London, United Kingdom. 1985:267-268.

100 Olah KS, Bridges N, Denning J, Farrar DJ. The conservative management of patients with symptoms of stress incontinence: a randomized, prospective study comparing weighted vaginal cones and interferential therapy. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1990;162:87-92.

101 Hahn I, Ohlsson B, Lindstrm S. Pelvic elevation force: a new technique to assess pelvic floor function. Neurourol Urodyn. 1991;10: 396-397.

102 Schaer G, Koechli O, Schuessler B, Haller U. Perineal ultrasound for evaluating the bladder neck in urinary stress incontinence. Obstet Gynecol. 1995;85:220-224.

103 Perkin H, Bond E, Thompson J, et al. Real time ultrasound: an objective measure of skeletal muscle. Physical Therapy Reviews. 2003;8: 99-108.

104 Peschers U, Fanger G, Schaer G. Bladder neck mobility in continent nulliparous women. Br J Obstet Gynecol. 2001;108:320-324.

105 Mrkved S, Salvesen K, B K, Eik-Nes S. Pelvic floor muscle strength and thickness in continent and incontinent nulliparous pregnant women. Int Urogynecol J. 2004:15:384-390.

106 Morin M, Bourbonnais D, Gravel D, et al. Pelvic floor muscle function in continent and stress urinary incontinent women using dynamometric measurement. Neuourol Urodyn 2004:23:668-674.

107 Berghmans L, Bernards A, Hendriks H, et al. Guidelines for the physiotherapeutic management of genuine stress incontinence. Physical Therapy Reviews. 1998;3:133-147.

108 Lose GFJ, Victor A, Walter S, et al. Outcome measures for research in adult women with symptoms of lower urinary tract dysfunction. Neurourol Urodyn. 1998;17:255-262.

K B, PT, PhD, is Professor and Exercise Scientist, Norwegian University of Sport and Physical Education, PO Box 4014, Ullevl Stadion, 0806 Oslo, Norway ([email protected]). Address all correspondence to Dr B.

M Sherburn, PT, M Women’s Health, is Lecturer and Researcher, The University of Melbourne, School of Physiotherapy, Melbourne, Australia.

Dr B provided concept/idea/project design. Both authors provided writing.

Copyright American Physical Therapy Association Mar 2005

Oklahoma Cracks Down on Junk Food in Schools

OKLAHOMA CITY — A bill to prohibit junk food sales in elementary schools and restrict them in higher grades passed the Oklahoma Senate on Tuesday after it was amended to delay the ban until 2007.

Pushed by the Oklahoma Fit Kids Coalition, a private group made up mostly of health professionals, the bill barring the sale of soft drinks and low nutritional snack items tackles the growing problem of obesity, diabetes and other health problems among young people.

A similar bill was voted down in the Senate a year ago after opposition from vending machine companies and school officials, who said they needed the money from vending sales to supplement their budgets.

Sen. Bernest Cain, D-Oklahoma City, said his measure had a “good chance” in the House, where it is sponsored by Rep. Susan Winchester, R-Chickasha, speaker pro tem.

The bill provides that foods of low nutritional value cannot be sold in elementary school, except on special occasions. Such foods also would be prohibited at junior high schools, except for special occasions and after-school activities.

In high school, soft drinks and snack items could be sold, but schools must offer healthy alternative foods and provide incentives to encourage healthy food choices, such as low prices.

Opponents said it was not right for the Legislature to supplant decisions of local school officials on vending machines and take choices away from constituents.

“It nibbles, nibbles at personal freedoms that we all ought to cherish,” said Sen. Owen Laughlin, R-Woodward.

“I personally believe in local control and this flies in the face of that,” said Sen. Randy Brogdon, R-Owasso.

Cain said it was irresponsible for the Legislature to duck decisions that could improve the health of Oklahoma school children.

He said Oklahoma has a growing problem of diabetes and the highest rate of heart disease of any state in the country.

It was not long ago, Cain said, that senators smoked cigarettes from the floor, but now laws have been passed to restrict smoking in most public places.

Sen. Kathleen Wilcoxson, R-Oklahoma City, said when she was a teacher she felt guilty about using vending machine money to paint her school room because she knew it was not right to supply junk food to children.

She said lawmakers should not do anything to perpetuate a system that “contributes to our children’s poor health.”

Over Cain’s objections, Sen. Glenn Coffee, R-Oklahoma City, won approval of an amendment to delay the bill taking effect until July 1, 2007.

Coffee, Senate minority leader, said the delay would allow contracts with vendors to expire.

Some Heart Recipients Report Strange Changes

Say transplant recipients claim they sense traits, tastes of organ donors

For most of her life, the young woman hated sports.

And though she was born and raised in Tucson, she never liked Mexican food. She craved Italian and was a pasta junkie.

But three years ago, all that changed for Jaime Sherman, 28, when she underwent a heart transplant at University Medical Center, after battling a heart defect since birth.

“Now I love football, baseball, basketball. You name it, I follow it,” said Sherman, a psychology student at Arizona State University. “And Mexican food is by far my favorite.”

She’d heard similar stories – of people who get donor hearts, develop new and surprising tastes and traits, then trace them to the donor. It’s an eerie phenomenon that has triggered controversy and skepticism.

Could it be happening to her?

No scientific evidence exists to explain how characteristics of an organ donor might live on in the person who gets their organ. But theories and speculation abound, from the transforming power of beating a death sentence to the notion that the body’s cells store memory.

Some blame the toxic effects of potent transplant drugs and heavy anesthesia, while others cite the psychological trauma of knowing someone had to die to save a life.

But even the self-described skeptics admit there may be more to this than imagination, though they insist it happens to a minority of patients.

“It’s highly controversial, but I don’t exclude it completely,” said Dr. Jack G. Copeland, UMC’s chief of cardiothoracic surgery and head of the heart team that has performed more than 700 transplants in 25 years, including Sherman’s.

Driven personality

Bill Wohl was a Type-A, overweight, money-obsessed businessman pursuing a jet-setter life – until five years ago, when he got a new heart at UMC.

Today, at age 58, he works part time and spends most of his new- found energy winning speed and performance medals in swimming, cycling and track. It’s a passion matched only by the good he wants to do with his new charitable foundation.

And he surprises himself by crying when he hears Sade, a singer he’d never heard of – and a reaction unimaginable before his transplant.

For months after his February 2000 operation, Wohl was convinced he’d received the heart of some poor kid who died in a car accident.

“I was sure that was the scenario. No one tells you anything about your donor,” he said.

For years, efforts were made to keep secret the identities of organ donors, so emotionally explosive was losing one life to save another. But now, they can write letters to one another or to surviving family six months after the transplant. The letters are transferred through the Donor Network of Arizona.

“So one day, six months later, there’s the letter,” Wohl said. “OK, it says I’ve got the heart of a 36-year-old Hollywood stuntman. I looked at his picture – at this incredibly good-looking, super- fit, super-athletic guy – and I thought, are you kidding me? That’s whose heart I’ve got?”

Wohl’s donor was a man named Michael Brady – who used the stage name Brady Michaels during his career as a stuntman for Universal Studios.

Specializing in aerial skydiving stunts, Brady appeared in action films, TV shows and commercials for Chevy trucks and Burger King. On the day he died, Brady was in Benson, preparing for a stunt in which he’d parachute onto the top of a moving train for the UPN daredevil show “I Dare You.”

Climbing up the iron ladder on the side of the train, he accidentally fell, hitting his head and dying instantly.

“He was a very loving and caring son who loved God and cared about people &,” Brady’s parents wrote to Wohl, noting their son had done volunteer work with children and AIDS patients in California. “We fulfilled our son’s wishes to donate his organs.”

Wohl immediately responded and has since met the Brady family, becoming “like an uncle,” he said.

At their first meeting, Brady’s brother, Chris, brought a stethoscope and asked Wohl if he could place it on his chest.

“He said, ‘Would you mind? I want to connect with my brother one more time.’ So, of course, I said yes,” Wohl said.

It was Chris who told Wohl the stuntman had loved Sade.

“That’s when I said, ‘Whoa,’ ” Wohl said.

“Is there some sort of connection possible? I don’t know,” Wohl said. “Some people think I’ve become more sensitive because of the ordeal I’ve been through. Or is there a very real part of Mike – of who Mike was – living inside me now?”

Strong resemblance

Jaime Sherman understands.

When she met her donor’s family nearly two years ago, they kept staring at her, at first unable to speak.

“Finally, his mother said, ‘You look so much like him,’ ” she said.

That’s when she learned 29-year-old Scott Phillips – who died of a head injury after a fight at a Phoenix bar – was a sports fan who loved Mexican food. He played on several teams at Kansas State University and followed college and pro sports.

Sherman’s metamorphosis from nonfan to superfan occurred well before she knew anything about her donor, though her obsession with Kansas State began after she met his family.

She recently dreamed she met Scott, too. “I went up to thank him, and he said, ‘Jaime, I’m so happy for you.’ I feel quite close to him,” she said. “I know he was a wonderful guy.”

Well aware of the speculation that traits can transfer from organ donor to recipient, Sherman accepts the concept.

“I’m a psychology major, and my professors will tell you it’s all in your mind,” she said. “But the scientists, the psychologists – they don’t have someone else’s heart beating inside them. I do. I have a very strong faith in God. And I am willing to believe there are things we cannot explain.”

So are some other transplant recipients.

There is the ballet dancer, Claire Sylvia, who wrote the book “A Change of Heart” after her 1988 heart-lung transplant, when she developed unfamiliar cravings for beer, green peppers and chicken nuggets – foods she had disdained as a health-conscious dancer. After contacting her donor’s family, she learned these were the favorite foods of the young motorcyclist who became her donor.

There is the 8-year-old girl who got the heart of a 10-year-old murder victim, according to medical reports. Plagued by nightmares of the crime after her transplant, the girl used the images in her dreams to help locate and convict her donor’s killer.

No scientific explanation

Tales of post-transplant transformations have become the stuff of “medical jokes,” said Copeland.

“Fiction,” said Dr. Sharon Hunt, heart transplant surgeon at the Stanford University School of Medicine. “There is no science to explain such a thing.”

But Copeland does not entirely dismiss the notion.

“With any solid organ, you are transferring DNA from the donor to the recipient,” he said. “These are genes that relate not only to the specific organ, but to other systems as well, such as cerebral function. So there may be something to this thing that personalities can change.”

But Copeland stresses the huge change a transplant brings to a person’s life.

“They go from being a cardiac cripple, an invalid, to being a pretty active normal person again,” he said. “We’ve seen all kinds of effects from that kind of change – people turn athletic, they get divorced, they get married, they have kids. They tend to take one day at a time and live life to the fullest. Whether that could be confused with acquiring the habits of your donor, or whether this is a real phenomenon, we don’t know.”

Others blame the potent anti-rejection drugs and steroids transplant patients must take. Or the “hospital grapevine theory” that says patients may hear hospital staff talking about donors while anesthetized. Or the brain effects of anesthesia itself. Or sheer coincidence.

“The combination of the post-transplant drugs and the pre- transplant trauma of nearly dying is a very heavy hit, both physically and psychologically,” said Dr. John Schroeder, a Stanford cardiologist specializing in heart transplant research. People become a lot more emotional, they cry more easily, some even hear voices.

“Bottom line is, we don’t buy the idea the donor is somehow emerging in the recipient,” he said. “But it certainly is a mystery, and it’s hard to put it all up to coincidence.”

Perhaps most controversial is the theory of “cellular memory” or “systemic memory” – the idea that cells, or even atoms and molecules, contain the living being’s memory and energy, which are transferred in a donated organ.

Proposed by University of Arizona psychologists – who also have studied near-death experiences and spiritual mediums – the theory was developed after studying 10 heart transplant patients who reported donor-related changes, including a male UMC patient who got a woman’s heart, and soon was bothered by his new preference for the color pink and desire to wear perfumes.

“What happens to these patients is not just a personality change, but a targeted personality change,” said Dr. Gary Schwartz, a psychology professor and director of UA’s Human Energy Systems Laboratory.

“If this is the result of drugs, or stress, or coincidence, none of those would predict the specific patterns of information would match the donor.”

There is no way to determine how many patients actually experience this because many never learn anything about their donors.

But most medical professionals – and even many organ- transplant recipients – find such accounts somewhat fantastical.

“The heart is a pump and no more – it is not capable of emotional transfer,” said Patti Cook, 68, who got her donor heart at UMC in 1989, and is president of the New Heart Society, a statewide support group. “I’ve seen this stuff on TV, but I think some people need their 15 minutes of fame. I don’t think the idea holds credibility.”

It is the profound, all-encompassing gratitude to the donor – known or unknown – that may be at the root of this phenomenon, believes Nina Gibson, UMC’s patient No. 583, who was given her new heart five years ago.

She knows her donor was a 21-year-old male who broke his neck while riding on the back of a motorcycle after a night of partying. She has no interest in motorcycles or anything that might be linked to a healthy, adventurous young man.

“But his family gave all of his organs that night, and several people are alive today because they did, in the midst of incredible trauma,” said Gibson, 62, a psychologist who lives in Vail.

“The power of knowing somebody did that, and you are alive, is overwhelming. People have to make sense of that somehow, and they do it in very different ways,” Gibson said. “All I can tell you is that I have never met this family, but there is a bond I have with their son that you cannot understand until you are at death’s door.”

* Contact reporter Carla McClain at 806-7754 or [email protected].

Fighting for Two: Rare Cancer Has Local TV Anchor in a Battle for Her Life and for Her Unborn Baby

It was right in the middle of the 6 o’clock broadcast, and Michelle Kingsfield couldn’t turn her head. The pebbleshaped knots that had been popping up in her neck for the past several weeks might as well have been boulders. It hurt too much to move. “Take out my turns,” she instructed the cameraman. The producer came out of his booth at the commercial break, asking, “Are you going to make it through this newscast? Because you don’t look so good.” The Channel 22 co-anchor has been off the air since that Nov. 10 broadcast.

Kingsfield and her husband, Steve Edgerley, had been worried about the mass on her neck that had been growing rapidly, pinching her nerves and immobilizing her neck. “Cancer,” a nagging voice whispered in Kingsfield’s ear. But doctor after doctor suspected nothing worse than a persistent infection or an abscess.

She had been on sick leave for eight days before her Nov. 18 appointment with a pathologist. He, too, was reassuring, even to the point of discouraging her from getting a biopsy. “This doesn’t present itself like cancer,” he said.

“We’re here, let’s do it,” she said.

After a preliminary examination of the biopsy slides, the pathologist all but confirmed his initial impression. “I’m 95 percent sure it isn’t cancer,” he said.

Call tomorrow for the final results, he told her. Kingsfield felt so reassured she didn’t call. She figured she would hear the results at her 2:15 appointment that afternoon with her head and neck specialist, Dr. C. Michael Collins.

“I’m so glad you don’t have cancer,” Edgerley said, kissing her goodbye that morning before heading off to his job as a fifth- and sixth-grade teacher at Dayton’s Hickorydale Elementary School.

“Is your husband here today?” Collins asked when she arrived for her appointment, looking discomfited when she said “No.” He reached out, held her hand, and told her, “I’m afraid I have some very bad news. The biopsy showed you have a rapidly growing, large-cell lymphoma.”

It would be terrible news for anybody, but Kingsfield had another concern: She was pregnant.

“I don’t know what it means for the baby,” Collins said.

Nearly hysterical, Kingsfield paged her husband at school. Her ragged sobs made her words almost impossible to hear: “I have lymphoma!”

“You have glaucoma?” he responded, an Emily Litella moment he later understood as a desire not to hear, not to comprehend.

He rushed to the doctor’s office, where he found his wife preoccupied with thoughts of their unborn child. She was all but certain that the baby could not survive a grueling round of chemotherapy. “When you’re pregnant, you don’t drink more than a cup of caffeine, you can’t eat certain kind of fish.” she told herself. Chemotherapy? Unthinkable.

“My poor baby, my poor baby,” she moaned during the shell- shocked drive home to Centerville.

Finally, Edgerley blurted the question he had been holding in all along. “Michelle,” he said, “What about you?”

The roller coaster

The mother or the baby? It seemed a Sophie’s Choice of modern obstetrics; Kingsfield had never heard of a case of a mother delivering a healthy baby after undergoing chemotherapy.

It was one of many questions for which she had no immediate answer: “What kind of lymphoma do I have, what kind of chemo will I get? What is my prognosis?”

First she had to undergo a battery of tests: blood work, bone marrow tests, PET scans, biopsies of the two infected lymph nodes.

Until then, the baby was in limbo.

The cancer diagnosis was a devastating letdown from the exhilaration of the past few months. In August, after trying for more than a year, the couple had learned that Kingsfield was expecting a sibling for son Casey Robert, 2.

Kingsfield was beaming with her news when we met for one of our regular “girlfriends lunches” in late October. We became friends the Christmas of 1999, when we were somewhat reluctant performers in a Huber Heights Community Theatre’s production of It’s A Wonderful Life. Kingsfield’s co-anchor, Mark Pompilio, and K99.1-FM radio host Nancy Wilson lit up the stage; Kingsfield and I bonded over our lessthan-scintillating performances.

At the cast party her then-fiance Edgerley came up and gave her a kiss. “Honey, acting just isn’t your thing,” he said, with his trademark combination of candor and offbeat humor.

They met as co-workers at a television station in Joplin, Mo. It was her first job after Kingsfield graduated from the University of Missouri at Columbia, fulfilling the prediction of her father, Gary Kingsfield, that the loquacious young daughter he nicknamed “Mich the Mouth” would go into broadcast journalism.

Kingsfield was dating another man to whom she later became engaged. Edgerley was 12 years her senior with a reputation as a confirmed bachelor. Someone to banter with, to pal around with, but certainly not a romantic interest.

She saw another side of him when they worked together on Joplin’s Muscular Dystrophy Telethon in 1993, which Edgerley had emceed for nearly a decade. “He was so caring and compassionate, and he had such a strong relationship with these families,” she said. Still, Steve Edgerley was the last thing on her mind when she called off her engagement three weeks before the wedding. Even though she was so far along “The Wedding Path” — florist, caterers, invitations mailed out –something didn’t feel right.

Kingsfield blurted the news to a co-worker and then raced into the bathroom to cry. The co-worker was in on Edgerley’s secret: Now working at another TV station in Fort Myers, Fla., Edgerley was so smitten with Kingsfield he had tacked her wedding invitation on his refrigerator, not having the heart to respond.

His former co-worker immediately called Edgerley with the news of the broken engagement. “The Eagle has landed,” he reported.

Edgerley called that very night. “I was simply a ‘concerned friend,’ ” he said, grinning wickedly.

It wasn’t long before Kingsfield booked a flight to Fort Myers. Edgerley hugged her when she got off the plane and she thought, “Hmmm … that feels nice.” They walked a ways, and then he dropped their bags and hugged her long and hard. “Hmmm,” she thought, “this is it.”

They married July 15, 2000, in her hometown of St. Louis; Casey was born June 29, 2002. “A beautiful delivery,” Kingsfield said.

And now this.

The afternoon of the diagnosis, they retreated to their bedroom and hugged and talked and cried. The take-charge Kingsfield, seldom at a loss, cried out, “What am I going to do?” and “I don’t want to die. I don’t want to die. Casey isn’t even going to remember me.”

Those words reverberated in Edgerley’s mind for days. He could hardly bear to look at his son.

In the midst of their grieving, they received an uncharacteristic mid-afternoon call from Steve’s sister in New York, Susan Edgerley. She was the first family member to whom they broke the news. “You’re in such a cloud,” she recalled. “You think you’re going to wake up from a bad dream. And then the words come out of your mouth, and it makes it real.”

Edgerley will never forget the moment when devastation turned into determination. “It couldn’t have been much more than an hour of talking and crying,” he said, “before she walked downstairs and announced, ‘We’re going to kick some butt.’ “

The reporter in her wanted answers now; but for many questions, particularly the fate of the baby, she would have to wait.

It was the beginning of what Edgerley calls the “roller coaster,” the wild swings of good news and bad news that characterized the early weeks of the cancer diagnosis.

The following Monday, they learned she had anaplastic large-cell non-Hodgkins lymphoma, which occurs only in 2 percent of lymphoma patients. Kingsfield and her sister, Cheryl Neal — who had flown in from New Jersey to offer moral support — spent the weekend researching the different kinds of lymphoma on the Internet. They hoped her diagnosis would be anaplastic large-cell because it responds rapidly to chemotherapy. It’s considered curable, not merely treatable — an important distinction for a 35-yearold patient.

The bone marrow biopsy showed no bone involvement, dramatically improving her prognosis. The roller coaster went up, up, up.

But a PET scan, an imaging test that shows stages of cancer, revealed “hot spots,” suggesting the likelihood of light bone involvement. That made her lymphoma a stage 4 cancer and reduced her prognosis to a 30 percent chance of survival.

The roller coaster came crashing down. “How do you not wake up every day thinking you’re going to die?” Kingsfield asked herself.

Her husband responded with the support and optimism she had always counted on.

“Thirty percent?” he said. “That’s all we need.”

On Dec. 1, they flew to Boston for a consultation with a nationally known oncologist, Dr. George Canellos, at the Dana- Farber Cancer Institute. For the first time, all the tests would be assembled in one place.

Before they met with the doctor, Steve’s sister-in-law brought in seven friends from her prayer group. “In that prayer group, I felt, for the first time, a sense of peace, a sense that God is with you,” Kingsfield recalled. “I was prepared for whatever the doctor would say.”

After reviewing her blood work, and assessing Kingsfield’s general health and fitness level, Canellos gave her a much more favorable prognosis: A 70 percent chance of survival.

“I’ll take three out of four,” she told her husband. Mr. Optimist had to admit it: He liked those odds better, too.

She couldn’t wait to start her first chemotherapy the next day. “I’m seeing daily in my body how this cancer is taking over, and I wanted to get something in my body to fight it,” she said. “Now this cancer has some competition.”

That night in bed, she began what would become a chemotherapy ritual: She pictured the drugs as red boxing gloves, punching the cancer cells. “By the time I fell asleep, there were none left,” she said.

Within days, the swelling on her neck was all but gone — a dramatic affirmation that the chemotherapy was working. “It’s one of the most astounding remissions I’ve ever seen,” said her oncologist, Dr. Mark Romer.

She was winning the first round, but what about the baby?

The miracle baby

In the days following her cancer diagnosis, Kingsfield had nearly given up hope for the baby’s survival. She came close to indulging in a glass of wine at Thanksgiving, thinking, “This baby isn’t going to make it anyway. But I just couldn’t do it.”

It was Romer who provided the first ray of hope. It’s possible, he said, that the baby could survive chemotherapy without interfering with the mother’s ability to fight her cancer.

Consultation with a specialist confirmed those hopes. Kingsfield would be among a small study group of women — fewer than 200 — who have been pregnant while undergoing an aggressive form of chemotherapy known as CHOP therapy, a potent blend of the drugs cytoxan, adriamycin, oncovin and prednazone. No side effects had been detected in any of the children during an 11-year study period.

Kingsfield still faced increased risks of low-birth weight or delivering prematurely, but those were risks she was willing to take. “You can’t decide not to do something simply because it’s difficult,” she said, in announcing her decision to her mother, Joyce Skaggs of St. Louis.

The mother or the baby? Kingsfield learned that, for many pregnant women with cancer, the choice didn’t have to be either/or. “There’s a lot of misinformation out there, and Michelle initially got a lot of negative information about the chemo affecting her chance for a cure,” Romer said. “You can take some types of chemo and it will not cause birth defects and it will not reduce chance of cure.”

She couldn’t do anything to jeopardize her survival; she needed to be there for Casey, for Steve. “I’m so glad I never had to make that choice,” she said. “It bothered me for a long time.”

She is about to enter her 31st week of pregnancy with what she calls her miracle baby. She believes the pregnancy caused her cancer symptoms to present themselves earlier, and more painfully. (Anaplastic large-cell lymphoma is characterized by a painless swelling in the neck.) “I think the timing is incredible. Had the diagnosis been made even a few weeks earlier — in the first trimester — the outcome for the pregnancy would have been totally different. And had I been diagnosed later, my prognosis might have been completely different. It’s an example of God taking care of me and the baby.”

The pregnancy has made her treatment more difficult, emotionally and physi- cally. Recovery from the chemo is a little harder, a little longer, the side effects more intense. An irritated colon, for instance, is more painful with the baby’s weight pressing against it.

She has finished five of her six chemotherapy sessions; the last is scheduled for March 17, allowing for enough time for the chemo to get out of her system before the baby is born.

The second chemotherapy, two days before Christmas, proved to be the worst, sending her to Miami Valley Hospital on New Year’s Day with exhaustion and dehydration. In her Dec. 28 diary entry, she wrote, “The doctors told me, ‘Chemotherapy will make you tired.’ That was the understatement of the year. But how do you explain a fatigue that drains you to the point where you’re so tired the thought of getting out of bed to go to the bathroom is just too much?”

Edgerley remembers that as the low point: “She didn’t have the energy to cry. I looked at her and saw one small tear frozen on her cheek.”

At that moment, he told her, “I’ve never loved you as much as I do right now.”

In the early days after her diagnosis, he recalled, they were back to their “firstdate manners.”

Added Kingsfield: “Your relationship with your husband totally changes. When you’re faced with the threat of someone being taken away, you realize how much you love them and how much they love you. “

But cancer puts strains on a marriage even as it strengthens the bond. Michelle worries that Steve is doing too much, and that nobody’s attending to his needs: “If he has a bad day at work, I can always trump that.”

Steve fears that he isn’t doing enough: “Michelle is so tough, so resilient, I forget that she needs help.”

Typically, she feels exhausted and depleted for nearly two weeks after the chemotherapy; then she experiences a week of relative strength before it starts all over again. But the baby seems to be on track, in terms of weight and development, although the likelihood remains high that she could deliver before her May 10 due date.

Feeling the need for some happy surprises in her life, she doesn’t want to know the baby’s sex. “It’s a girl,” she jokes with Romer, “because girls are tough.”

“It’s a girl,” he jokes back, “because girls take care of their moms.”

Her viewers have mailed get-well cards by the truckload; the couple started counting after 400, and gave up all hope of responding to them all. But she is keeping every one of them. Every night, before bedtime, she and Steve read a few letters, many of them from cancer survivors, all of them wishing her well. “They’re so thoughtful and sincere,” she said. “It’s nice to go to sleep with pleasant thoughts.”

She brings the letters with her, for company, when she undergoes her chemotherapy. “Day out and day in you do the news, and you wonder, ‘Do I even make a difference? If I leave town, would anyone notice?’ I must make a difference. The way they write these letters, people feel like they know me, they’re comfortable with me.”

After the baby’s birth, a PET scan will be done to determine if all the cancer has gone. If that test shows she’s in remission, she’ll go back on the air sometime after her maternity leave. When she does, she’ll no longer be facing the camera, speaking to an anonymous audience: “I’ll be talking to all those people who wrote me letters.”

Dealing with cancer

She’s mindful of the power of her medium, and how she can use it to educate people about cancer. So she knew what she had to do when her friend and co-anchor, Mark Pompilio, asked her to take off her wig for last week’s two-part segment, Michelle’s Journey.

She did it without hesitation, even though she knows she’s in a business where “there’s so much scrutiny on everything from your hair to your makeup to your clothes.”

“This is me,” she said. “This is the reality.”

She also did it because she wants other cancer patients to know that it’s not the end of the world if you lose your hair. “It doesn’t define who you are,” she said. “Take a look at the courage you’ve shown, your struggles and how you’ve overcome them.”

There are days when she sees another woman’s beautiful, shiny hair and feels wistful. Days when she looks in the mirror and almost frightens herself, her nearly bald head a stark reminder that she has cancer. Days when she feels unattractive and her husband reassures her, “You’re beautiful, you’re adorable, you’ve got just the right face for it.”

In her journal she wrote, “The first time I put on a wig I felt very sad. This isn’t me. It doesn’t look like me. You can tell this is a wig. I began learning quickly about machine-sewn versus hand done. Some aren’t adjustable and could fly off in a strong wind. I knew I didn’t want that. I have enough to worry about, right?”

The loss of her hair, she understands now, isn’t “the big picture.”

Here’s the big picture: Getting cured so she can be there to raise her children, to grow old with her husband. Even if the PET scan shows her to be cancerfree, there is a one-in-four chance of recurrence.

“In my heart I feel like it’s all going to be OK, that when we get this scan, I believe it will be cancer-free,” she said. “Then another part of me asks, ‘Am I being positive because that’s what I’m supposed to do?’ “

Added Edgerley, “We’re looking for a healthy baby and for Michelle to be cured. In my gut I think that’s what’s going to happen. But it’s not a done deal. We need to be ready, we need to be prepared.”

Kingsfield and I met for one of our girlfriends lunches on one of her good days, increasingly rare as the pregnancy progresses and the chemotherapy takes a cumulative toll. “Cancer isn’t all bad, you know,” she says, shooting me a sideways glance, as if anticipating my surprised look.

It’s not that she’d wish this on anyone. But, at 35, she has learned some things that might have taken much longer. “I used to be Supermom,” she said. “It used to be like, ‘Look at me, I can do it all.’ Now the job is gone, I can’t run the household, I can’t do all the things my son asks me to, which is hard.”

When Casey gets a cold, Kingsfield can’t hug or kiss him for a week. “Mommy can’t get sick,” she explains.

There are days when she tells herself, “I’m so useless, I can’t do anything. And here I was a person who was busy from the minute I got up to the minute I went to bed.”

So she has been forced to shift her thinking. Perhaps your identity, she reflects, isn’t so centered around what you do as around who you are.

“At some moment any cancer patient and any cancer survivor needs to look deep inside themselves and pull out some inner strength.” she said. “You need to find something, whether that’s faith or focusing on family and kids. I have more faith than I thought I had, more faith in God and in Steve and in Casey.”

When you have cancer, she said, “You realize how many people you have in your life who care about you.”

She learned she has co-workers and neighbors who will organize a “Meals for Michelle” program to bring in regular meals. Her neighbors are putting together a cookbook, Reporting the Local Meals, with the proceeds going to The Leukemia and Lymphoma Society.

“I have so many people praying for me,” she said. “I can picture God saying, ‘Enough about Michelle already, I know about Michelle.”

None of that would be enough without her family. She has a husband who looks at her at her very sickest and says, “I’ve never loved you as much as I do now.”

She has a son who makes her laugh when she’s feeling her lowest. After her last chemotherapy, Casey brought out his doctor bag, gave her a shot and counseled, “This won’t hurt, Mommy. It will make you laugh.”

Most of all, she has a companion on her journey, someone who makes her feel less alone.

“The baby seems to know when I’m sad,” she said, patting her stomach. “It will give me a little kick and remind me how blessed I am and how lucky I am to have this buddy helping me through this.”

The Male of the Species Becomes More Irritable As He Gets Older. It’s a Fact of Life Women Through the Ages Have Had to Live With, but Now It Seems That Grandpa’s Grumps Are a Medical Condition.

GRUMPY old men have long been an established figure of fun. In recent years they’ve even had their own television shows. But now they’re up for therapy. For it now seems that crustiness among us mid-life chaps isn’t necessarily a natural carnaptious rite of passage we must undergo before collecting our bus pass and slippers: just as women have to negotiate the change of life, with its attendant hormone-generated mood swings, depression and low libido, now it is being argued that men also experience “change of life”, and can suffer from a related condition, labelled irritable male syndrome, which should be more widely recognised.

Irritable male syndrome (IMS) is not just the long-suffering spouse’s nickname for what happens when the TV remote gets lost down the side of the sofa. According to Jed Diamond, an American psychotherapist specialising in men’s health, it is an identifiable condition, resulting in depression, moodiness, anxiety and low sex drive. And, he believes, going by the testimony of hundreds of people he has interviewed, IMS can, and does, destroy relationships – it almost broke up his own marriage.

Diamond’s book, The Irritable Male Syndrome, has just been published in Britain, having already created much interest in the United States. But before you roll your eyes, presuming this to be yet another manifestation of New Age loopiness from California – and the 61-year-old Diamond does indeed reside in the small town of Willits, north of San Francisco – it’s worth bearing in mind that the very term, irritable male syndrome, was, in fact, coined in recent years by an Edinburgh researcher, Dr Gerald Lincoln, of the Medical Research Council’s Human Reproductive Sciences Unit. Lincoln, while not endorsing all of Diamond’s book, emphasises that there is a gradual decline in testosterone levels in men after about the age of 30 which may be causally linked to mood changes and irritability.

Testosterone, of course, is that much-maligned male hormone which gets blamed for everything from adolescent pimples to road rage, but it is fundamental to the development of male sexual characteristics. Irritable male syndrome, however, is down to more than just hormones, stresses Diamond, who was in Britain last week promoting the new book (his last, The Male Menopause, has been translated into almost 20 languages). IMS is a multidimensional problem, in which hormonal fluctuations interact with the psychological and sociological factors which can affect men, particularly in mid- life. “There are four related aspects of irritable male syndrome,” he says. “One, the hormonal fluctuations, particularly testosterone; secondly, physiological changes in things such as dopamine and serotonin (both neurotransmitters) levels; thirdly, we can see that it’s related to the stresses which men are experiencing more prevalently these days (such as whether they will find a good job or have enough money to retire) and, finally, changes in male identity that men are going through, concerning their place and importance in society these days, when women can do anything, including having babies, without them.”

Diamond relates the problem to the andropause or male menopause, which, he says, occurs generally between the ages of 40 and 55 but sometimes as early as 35 and as late as 65, but adds that not all men necessarily go through it. And he likens it to “adolescence – hormonally-driven but more complex”. It is tempting to lump many of the symptoms – particularly the anxiety and irritability and their erosive effect on relationships – under what we loosely term mid- life crisis, but Diamond regards mid-life crisis as purely the psychological and social side of a broader problem. “What IMS adds are the hormonal and physiological aspects.”

Following up his book on the male menopause, he conducted an online survey on the Men’s Health website and was taken aback by the worried men and disrupted relationships he discovered through some 10,000 responses. “I’ve seen hundreds of men and their wives who talk about these problems destroying relationships.”

Far closer to home, however, Diamond, 61, who has ten grandchildren, describes in the book how his own marriage almost went down the tubes due to his own irritability and anger, which he now puts down to IMS. He believes the condition is treatable, using a combination of mental, spiritual and physical exercises but also advocates testosterone replacement therapy (TRT), which remains a controversial issue, having been regarded in the past as both unproven and also possibly linked to prostate cancer.

Diamond recognises this, but points out that studies carried out in London by Dr Malcolm Carruthers, of the Andropause Society, have been studying TRT with patients for ten to 15 years without finding increases in cancer levels, and adds that similar research has been going on in Denmark for 60 years without grounds for concern.

However, the medical world remains far from decided on the issue of the male menopause itself, although, claims Diamond, more and more medical authorities are accepting it. “If we only see it in terms of drops in testosterone, well, many men don’t have significant drops and they obviously don’t have the cessation of hormones the way women do when their ovaries shut down; but if we regard it as a continuing change to do with hormonal fluctuations, over time that can affect our psychological, interpersonal and social well-being, we then see that it’s really a very common change of life that we go through as men, and I think more health care professionals are recognising that.”

In Edinburgh, Dr Lincoln coined the term, irritable male syndrome, after carrying out research on male animals, including Soay rams, whose sex hormone levels dropped “precipitately” after the mating season and who became irritable and unpredictable. “At the same time,” he says, “I was working alongside colleagues dealing with young men on testosterone replacement therapy, for testicular cancer or other conditions, and if they came off their testosterone supplement, they became depressed and sometimes irritable. They could tell you if you had given them a placebo [instead of testosterone]. So, men clearly require a critical level of testosterone to maintain male behaviour.”

Dr Lincoln has reservations, however, at any idea of a quick- fix solution for problems associated with aging. “Women have a menopause because they have run out of eggs and there is associated decline in hormone secretion, producing marked behavioural effects. In men, it is a much more gradual aging process , and although depressive and irritable behaviours become more common, it’s still not clear how much is attributable just to hormone change.

“Clinicians are concerned at the idea of the widespread use of testosterone supplementation in men. There have been detailed studies on giving older men testosterone and it doesn’t necessarily help, although it can in some cases. And there are obvious risks.”

Lincoln points out that low libido can also be associated with other conditions which should also be checked out. “Diabetes is a classic example associated with impotence, the same with low thyroid function. But if you genuinely did have low testosterone, this could be supplemented.” What Dr Lincoln does commend in Diamond’s book is its highlighting of the issue and of men’s health in general. “I believe there should be more research into this. There is already research into the male contraceptive pill, in which the behavioural issues are being carefully studied.” In his book, Diamond quotes the comedian Elayne Boosler’s line: “When women are depressed, they either eat or go shopping. Men invade another country.” For men on the verge of TRT, however, the solutions may not be quite so simple.

* The irritable Male Syndrome, by Jed Diamond, is published by Rodale/Pan Macmillan at GBP 12.99

Camp Aids Kids Who Can’t Go Out in the Sun

CLAVERACK, N.Y. — Caren and Dan Mahar can’t stop the sun from shining to save their 12-year-old daughter, but they’ve done everything short of it. Since finding Katie has xeroderma pigmentosum, a rare genetic disorder that turns sunlight to poison, they created a shady world for her with window tint, hats and sunscreen. Katie plays by moonlight.

But the Hudson Valley couple have also shucked their comfortable suburban lives to run a charity that helps kids like Katie, raising $1.5 million for research and for a special camp for children who can’t go out in the sun.

When the Mahars – like other parents of sick children – asked themselves `What can we do?’ their answer was exceptional. The former mail carrier and stay-at-home mom not only are trying to coax along a lifesaving cure, but are helping families around the world with sun-sensitive children. They’re raising funds, awareness and spirits with a special camp for kids.

“A lot of times I’m just petrified,” Dan Mahar admitted, standing by the indoor pool at the camp they built. “I’m not the man who’s best qualified for this job. But I’m the one who happens to have it.”

The camp was started, in part, so Katie wouldn’t feel isolated. It has placed the Mahars at the nexus of XP families all over. Neil Johnson, whose 18-year-old daughter Alixe is a camp regular, doesn’t believe she would be doing as well physically or mentally without the Mahars, who have become close friends.

“I’ve got a kid with XP, but I didn’t drop everything to pursue a foundation in search of a cure. I still have my 401k, I still have a job. I still have my benefits,” said Johnson, of Greensboro, N.C. “Those two chucked all that with a vision.”

Katie is the fourth of the Mahars’ five children, a seventh grader with long chestnut hair and an unguarded laugh. She likes Spanish class, phoning friends and watching “Seventh Heaven” on TV.

But like others with the disorder, exposure to sunlight or other strong sources of ultraviolet radiation increases her cancer risk significantly. Many people with XP are plagued by tumors and die young, though with early diagnosis and aggressive shielding, sufferers can live at least into middle age.

The Mahars discovered Katie had a problem when she was a baby; a brief stay under a shade tree left her with painful blisters. Since then, the Mahars have essentially structured their lives to keep Katie out of strong light. Their home is a dimly lit cocoon where windows are tinted and bright fluorescent lights are banished.

Katie goes to school like her siblings. But she is slathered with sun screen and meets the morning bus wearing a hood, sunglasses, gloves and a tinted visor. The protective gear stays on until she gets to a classroom.

“If someone lifts up the shade, my friends will say, `Don’t do that! Don’t you know Katie’s in the room?'” Katie said.

The couple realized that light-shielding strategies, though necessary, were not enough. What they really needed was a cure.

Overcoming their desire for privacy, the couple turned a spotlight on their lives to raise research money. A stream of reporters tramped through their house.

The family sold baked goods outside of Kmart for a year to raise $10,000. Caren recalls proudly bringing the check to scientists – and being told she collected the medical research equivalent of lunch money.

“They laughed in my face,” Caren says. “I can’t explain how sick and hurt I felt.”

Undaunted, Caren and Dan pressed on with the Xeroderma Pigmentosum Society and its dual mission of finding a cure and supporting families. Days are now consumed with fund-raising and networking. Caren is the calm voice on the phone giving advice on window tinting to shellshocked parents grappling with XP.

And when she talks to scientists now, it’s often as a speaker at symposiums.

For a time, the Mahars tried to cater to Katie’s needs while living a normal suburban life. It was a bumpy ride. Caren recalls people parking nearby to watch Katie play in the back yard at night. “Like a freak show,” she said.

And while a night camp in their yard did indeed bring kids with light sensitivity together, it also meant a llama wandering into their kitchen from the petting zoo in the garage.

“It got to the point where I couldn’t focus anymore,” Dan said. “It just had to be all or nothing.”

Dan quit his postal job so the couple could devote themselves full-time to the fledgling organization, with Caren drawing a salary from it.

A couple who read about the Mahars sold them a cozy house in the woods. Uprooting all their kids was tough, but Dan told them they had chances to succeed in life that Katie didn’t, and he needed to make things equal.

Since 2003, the rural spread has been home to Camp Sundown, tucked among rock outcroppings and tall pines behind the Mahar’s home. For a few weeks each summer and one weekend each fall, campers spend sunlight hours playing games and splashing around a pool inside the sprawling main building. After dark, they sing around the campfire or go on field trips to ride go-carts or take a cruise around Manhattan.

Dan admits leaving the security of their old life was scary. But there are upsides. Katie’s siblings have cottoned to country life. The Mahars are constantly amazed that strangers are so generous with time, money and materials. They say their life is more spiritual now.

There is still no cure for XP, but Dan still harbors hope. He likes to think Katie will take a nostalgic walk through her old camp one day.

“I want Katie to bring her granddaughter back and say, `This is where I carved my initials in a tree.'”

On the Net:

XPS: www.xps.or

Poll: Antidepressants for Teens Excessive

The percentage of teens who have been prescribed antidepressant medications exceeds the percentage estimated to suffer from depression, a poll has found.

In a recent Gallup Youth Survey, 9 percent of 13- to 17-year- olds said they had been prescribed medication for depression at some point in their lives.

The National Institute of Mental Health, however, estimates that 5 percent of adolescents suffer from major depression.

The most commonly prescribed type of antidepressants — selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors — are not without risks.

The Food and Drug Administration now requires that manufacturers of these medications include a warning indicating that they increase the risk of suicidal thoughts in adolescents who take them.

The youth survey also found that 10 percent of teenagers had been prescribed medication for attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder.

The nonprofit Children and Adults with Attention Deficit- Hyperactivity Disorder estimates that between 3 percent and 7 percent of children have this disorder.

Dr. Gott: Sarcoidosis, Lupus Disease Are Not Related

Dear Dr. Gott: Please explain the difference between sarcoidosis and lupus, as well as the symptoms of each.

Dear Reader: Sarcoidosis, a disease of unknown cause, is marked by low-grade areas of inflammation in many of the body’s organs, chiefly the lungs, lymph glands and liver. Symptoms may be absent or minimal. Swollen glands are common and a rash may be present, but the disorder is often diagnosed by accident during routine chest X- ray examinations. The diagnosis is confirmed by biopsy. Treatment is rarely required.

In contrast, lupus is a potentially fatal autoimmune disease. It causes rash, pleurisy, swollen glands, arthritis and kidney damage. It is diagnosed by blood tests. Steroid therapy may be required to prevent renal failure.

Experts consider the two disorders to be unrelated.

To give you related information, I am sending you a copy of my Health Report “Lupus: The Great Imitator.” Other readers who would like a copy should send a long, self-addressed, stamped envelope and $2 to Newsletter, P.O. Box 167, Wickliffe, OH 44092. Be sure to mention the title.

Dear Dr. Gott: Is it true that eating bread will cure arthritis?

Dear Reader: Not to my knowledge.

Arthritis can be caused by inflammation or age-related wearing down of the joints; both conditions are best treated with medication.

Dear Dr. Gott: I’m a 77-year-old male in good health. Several months ago I developed an intermittent tremor in my left hand that intensifies when I’m under stress. My doctor indicates this might be Parkinson’s disease, but isn’t too concerned.

Dear Reader: Parkinson’s disease, a common neurological disorder that leads to shaking at rest, a shuffling gait, an immobile face and other symptoms, is caused by a depletion of a brain chemical called dopamine. The reason for this is not known.

Parkinson’s disease is usually progressive. In the early stages, no treatment is necessary, but as the tremor and other manifestations become more prominent, drug therapy is advisable. The diagnosis is made by the patient’s “clinical appearance.” Patients with Parkinson’s disease should, in my opinion, be under the care of neurologists.

You may have this disease — or you could have another condition, such as benign familial tremor, an inherited shakiness that is not a hazard to health. I suggest that you ask your doctor to refer you to a neurologist, who — after examining you — will confirm (or reject) the diagnosis and advise you whether treatment is necessary at this stage.

Behet’s Disease: A Review

ABSTRACT

Behet’s disease (BD) is a multi-system inflammatory disorder dominated clinically by recurrent oral and genital ulceration, uveitis, and erythema nodosum. Behet’s disease runs a chronic course, with unpredictable exacerbations and remissions whose frequency and severity may diminish with time. Behet’s disease typically arises in young adults, although childhood-onset BD has also been reported. The disease can affect both genders and has a worldwide distribution, although it is more prevalent in countries of the ancient Silk Route. The cause of BD remains unknown, although an autoimmune reaction triggered by an infectious agent in a genetically predisposed individual has been suggested. The treatment of BD is symptomatic and empirical, but generally specific to the clinical features of each patient. The majority of affected individuals do not have life-threatening disease, although mortality can be associated with vascular-thrombotic and neurological disease.

KEY WORDS: Behet’s, disease, genital, ocular, oral.

(I) INTRODUCTION

Behet’s disease (BD) is a multi-system inflammatory disorder dominated clinically by recurrent oral and genital ulceration, uveitis, and erythema nodosum. The disease tends to wax and wane, the frequency and duration of exacerbations being unpredictable. Behet’s disease is a vasculitis, affecting vessels of different types, sizes, and localizations. Since the etiology of Behet’s disease is unknown, treatment tends to be empirical and is usually comprised of systemic corticosteroids and immunosuppressants.

The present review details current knowledge of Behet’s disease- a disorder of relevance to both the mouth and many other organ systems. A MEDLINE review up to July, 2004, was conducted. The computer search was complemented by a hand search of all bibliographic references from the reference lists of included literature.

(II) DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA

Prior to 1990, five different criteria for the diagnosis of Behet’s disease had been suggested (Mason and Barnes, 1969; Behet’s Disease Research Committee of Japan, 1974; O’Duffy, 1974; Dilsen et al., 1986). Such a diversity in diagnostic criteria limited comparisons between relevant studies and hampered collaborative research. There are now internationally agreed diagnostic criteria for Behet’s disease, derived from a collaborative study of 914 patients in 12 centers from seven countries (International Study Group for Behet’s Disease, 1990). The agreed diagnostic criteria require the presence of recurrent oral ulceration (three times in one year) plus two of the following in the absence of other systemic disease: recurrent genital ulceration, eye lesions (uveitis or retinal vasculitis), skin lesions (erythema nodosum, pseudofolliculitis, papulo-pustular lesions, or acneiform nodules), or a positive pathergy test. This group of diagnostic criteria is simpler to use and has an improved discriminatory performance than its predecessors (Table 1).

(III) EPIDEMIOLOGY

The mean age at onset of BD is most commonly in the third decade, although the age at time of final diagnosis usually is in the fourth decade (Bang et al., 1997a). Both genders can be affected, although both male and female predominance has been described in studies of affected patients from different geographic regions of the world. A higher prevalence of BD has been observed in adult females in Korea (Bang et al., 1997a, 2001), Israeli Jews (Krause et al., 1999, 2001), Singapore (Tan et al., 1999), and Camas village of Turkey (Tuzun et al., 1996), while a higher prevalence of BD in males has been found in the West Indies (Lannuzel et al., 2002), Spain (Gonzalez-Gay et al., 2000; Baixauli et al., 2001), Israeli Arabs (Krause et al., 2001), London (Muhaya et al., 2000), Japan (Muhaya et al., 2000), Jordan (al Aboosi et al., 1996), Iran and Turkey (Gurler et al., 1997; Kaya et al., 2002), India (Pande et al., 1995), Lebanon (Ghayad and Tohme, 1995), Saudi Arabia (al Dalaan et al., 1994), and Kuwait (Mousa et al., 1986).

Table 1. International Study Group Criteria for Behet’s Disease (1990)a

Behet’s disease has a worldwide distribution (Table 2), although it has a higher prevalence in countries of the ancient Silk Route (from the Mediterranean basin to Japan), suggesting perhaps that an as-yet-unknown genetically determined factor was spread via the migration of old nomadic tribes.

Table 2. Demographics of Behet’s Disease in Various Countries

BD is most common in Turkey, where the reported prevalence ranges from 80/100,000 in nine villages near Istanbul to 370/100,000 in Camas village (Tuzun et al., 1996), and may be least common in the USA, where the incidence is about 1/300,000/year (O’Duffy, 1978).

BD has also been reported in many countries such as Israel (prevalence, 120/100,000) (Jaber et al., 2002), Japan (prevalence, 15/100,000) (Mizuki et al., 2000), Germany (prevalence, 2.26/ 100,000) (Zouboulis et al., 1997), Iran (prevalence, 16.7/100,000) (Davatchi et al., 1992), Iraq (prevalence, 17/100,000) (Al Rawi and Neda, 2003), and Spain (prevalence, 0.66/100,000) (Gonzalez-Gay et al., 2000). Of interest, it was recently found that the frequency of BD in the Afro-Caribbean population of Guadeloupe (French West Indies) was at least 3/100,000 (Lannuzel et al., 2002)-a rate higher than those reported in some Caucasian populations (and in a population unrelated to the aforementioned Silk Route).

Table 3. Demographics of Childhood-onset Behet’s Disease in Various Countries

About 2-3% of all affected individuals have childhood-onset BD (generally defined as definitive BD before the age of 16 years) (Saylan et al., 1999). Children of both genders can be affected, but there are few comparative studies of children and adults with BD. Onset of BD in children as young as 2 years of age has been reported (Kari et al., 2001), but most children develop clinical features between 7 and 13 years of age (Kone-Paut et al., 1998, 2002; Gul et al., 2000) (Table 3).

Childhood BD may be more likely to have a vague familial pattern than adulthood disease (Treudler et al., 1999).

(IV) CLINICAL FEATURES

Behet’s disease gives rise to a wide spectrum of clinical features characterized by unpredictable exacerbations and remissions (Table 4).

The clinical manifestations of BD may show geographic variation. For example, the pathergy reaction occurs in 57-65% of patients from the Middle East and Turkey (Ourler et al., 1997; Al Fahad and Al Araji, 1999; Krause et al., 1999), but has lower frequency in Western European countries (Davies et al., 1984; O’Duffy, 1994). Likewise, gastrointestinal disease, which occurs in about one-third of patients from Taiwan and a quarter of patients from Spain, rarely occurs in those from Jordan, Saudi Arabia, and Turkey (al Dalaan et al., 1994; al Aboosi et al., 1996; Gurler et al., 1997; Baixauli et al., 2001; Chen and Chang, 2001). In childhood BD, neurological and gastrointestinal disease may be more common in patients from France and Saudi Arabia, whereas cutaneous disease occurs more frequently in Turkey (Kone-Paut et al., 1998).

In addition to the site of residency, the ethnicity of a patient may influence the clinical features of BD. Ocular lesions may be more common in Turkish than German patients living in Germany (Zouboulis et al., 1997), and Israeli Arab patients may have more severe ocular disease (e.g., posterior uveitis) than Israeli Jewish patients from the same geographic region. Also, the disease severity of Jewish patients of North African origin may be higher than that of Jewish patients originating from Turkey, Iran, or Iraq (Krause et al., 2001). This may suggest that genetic factors play a stronger influencing role than any acquired factor upon the etiology and clinical presentation of BD.

Reports from different countries indicate a variable effect of pregnancy on the course of BD between patients, and even during different pregnancies in the same patient (Bang et al., 1997b; Marsal et al., 1997; Uzun et al., 2003), the increase in frequency and intensity of oral ulcer outbreaks being the main feature in most patients who showed exacerbation during their pregnancy (Uzun et al., 2003).

(a) Recurrent Oral (Aphthous-like) Ulcerations

Ulceration akin to recurrent aphthous stomatitis (RAS) occurs in all patients diagnosed with Behct’s disease. The oral ulceration is the initial clinical feature of up to 86.5% of adults and children with BD. In Turkey, 3.8% of patients followed up because of recurrent aphthous stomatitis develop BD (Ekmekci et al., 2003).

All three types of RAS-like ulcers (Porter et al., 1998) can arise in BD, although minor ulcers seem to be the most common presentation in BD (Whallett et al., 1999). One study suggested that major RAS-like ulcers may be more common in BD patients than in those with RAS (Krause et al., 1999). The oral ulcers of BD have the same periodicity as those of RAS and can affect any oral mucosal surface, although they may be more common on the soft palate and pharynx than in RAS (Main and Chamberlain, 1992). Some patients have almost continuous episodes of oral ulceration. Recurrent oral ulceration is often reported in other family members of patients with BD (Krause et al., 1999). As in RAS, tobacco smoking may reduce the severity of ulceration of BD (Silveira and McGrath, 1992; Ayata et al., 20\02; Kaklamani et al., 2003).

Table 4. Principal Clinical Features of Behet’s Disease

(b) Genital Ulcers

The genital ulcers of BD initially manifest as papules or pustules that later ulcerate. The ulcers are usually painful, superficial, and well-demarcated and have an edematous border and a yellow fibrin-covered base. The ulcers may be indurated and can become secondarily infected. In males, the ulcers are usually localized on the scrotum, penis, inguinal area, pubis, and perineum. In females, the vulvae, major and minor labia, cervix, and vagina are the most frequently affected sites. The ulcers usually heal in a few weeks, with scarring (Nazzaro, 1966); vaginal ulcers can give rise to bladder or urethral fistulae (Dunlop, 1979). The vaginal and vulval ulceration of BD can cause difficulty with micturation, dyspareunia, and may hinder walking (Kontogiannis and Powell, 2000).

Genital ulcers are rarely the initial manifestation of BD, are less common than oral ulcers, and, although arising in both children and adults, are more common in the latter (Krause et al., 1999). Peri-anal ulceration may occasionally arise in adults or children with BD (Kari et al., 2001).

(c) Ocular Disease

Ocular manifestations in adult BD patients include panuveitis, anterior uveitis, posterior uveitis, bilateral swelling of the optic nerve head, retinal vasculitis, and bilateral lamellar macular hole. Ocular involvement is usually bilateral, although severity of disease may differ between eyes. Ocular symptoms vary from a gritty sensation and blurring of vision to severe pain and blindness (al Aboosi et al., 1996). Ocular disease is the most common cause of significant morbidity in BD, since it may lead to visual loss in about five years if not treated (Shimizu et al., 1979). Blindness is possible.

Most studies report ocular disease in 43% to 65% of patients with BD. Inflammatory eye disease develops at least three years after the oral ulceration of BD (Imai, 1971). However, in a minority of patients (7.3%; range, 0.5-12.5%), ocular disease can be the initial clinical feature (Kim et al., 1994; Pande et al., 1995; Bang et al., 1997a; Gurler et al., 1997; Zouboulis et al., 1997; Krause et al., 2001). Behet’s disease accounts for up to 20% of Japanese patients with uveitis (Mishima et al., 1979).

Patients with predominantly anterior uveitis have a relatively good visual prognosis. The time between the onset of uveitis and the resulting complications is related to the severity, frequency, and number of inflammatory episodes. In general, male patients have a poorer prognosis than females (Yazici et al., 1984a).

The presence of HLA-B51 increases susceptibility to ocular disease (Nishiyama et al., 2001), and Factor V (FV Leiden) mutation may be an additional risk factor for the development of ocular disease, particularly retinal vaso-occlusion (Verity et al., 1999a).

(d) Cutaneous Lesions

The most frequent cutaneous features of BD are papulopustular lesions, erythema nodosum, and erythema nodosum-like disease. Papulo- pustular lesions are cutaneous sterile folliculitis or acne-like lesions on an erythematous base which initially manifest as papules and evolve into pustules within 24 to 48 hours. These lesions usually arise simultaneously, most frequently on the skin of the back, face, and chest. The papulo-pustular lesions are characterized histopathologically by a lymphocytic vasculitis (Lakhanpal et al., 1988).

Erythema nodosum-like lesions frequently occur in BD. These are most frequently observed on the lower extremities (although they can occur on the upper extremities) and are characterized by painful purplish nodules (Saylan et al., 1999). The nodules are surrounded by a peripheral halo, do not ulcerate, and resolve spontaneously, leaving behind areas of hyperpigmentation. Usually, there are only three or four lesions, although they can be more numerous. The histopathology of the erythema nodosum lesions shows a focal small- vessel vasculitis and perivascular lymphocytic infiltrate, particularly involving the venules, with panniculitis (Chun et al., 1989). Other cutaneous lesions, such as necrotic folliculitis and aphthosis, may also be seen in BD, but to a lesser extent.

Cutaneous involvement of BD shows some geographic differences and varies from 35% in Jordan and Turkey to 91% in Taiwan (al Aboosi et al., 1996; Eldem et al., 1998; Chen and Chang, 2001).

The frequency of cutaneous lesions in BD is similar in adults and children (Eldem et al., 1998; Kone-Paut et al., 1998). There is no correlation between the number of papulopustular lesions and patient age, gender, duration of disease, or age of onset of BD. However, papulo-pustular lesions may be significantly more likely in BD patients with a positive pathergy test (Alpsoy et al., 1998).

The non-specific hyperactivity reaction observed in response to minor cutaneous trauma in BD is known as the pathergy phenomenon. It was initially described by Blobner in 1937 and later was reviewed by Katzenellenbogen and Feuerman (1965). In a positive pathergy test, pricking the skin with a sterile needle, with or without the injection of a small amount of saline, gives rise to a 1- to 2-mm papule usually surrounded by an erythematous halo. The papule may remain unchanged or transform into a 1- to 5-mm pustule. The pustule becomes prominent 24 hours after needle insertion, becomes maximum in size after 48 hours, and disappears within 4-5 days.

Interaction of cellular adhesion molecules together with endothelial proliferation may play an important role in the formation of skin pathergy reaction lesions in patients with BD (Inaloz et al., 2004).

There is geographic variation in the frequency of occurrence of pathergy in Behet’s disease. It is highest in patients residing in regions of the ancient Silk Routes and decreases sharply outside these regions.

The pathergy phenomenon is usually positive during the active phases of BD and becomes negative or weakly positive when disease remits (Fresko et al., 1993). The frequency of positivity of the pathergy reaction in BD is higher in males than in females. The age of onset of BD does not affect the intensity of the reaction (Yazici et al., 1985). The pathergy test may not be specific to BD-indeed, it has been observed in healthy individuals (Aral et al., 1986).

The intensity of the pathergy reaction may vary within the same patient at different times, and there is usually intraobserver and inter-observer variation. Many factors influence the results of the pathergy test: needle gauge, sharpness of the tip, direction of needle penetration, in situ injection or just a skin puncture with no injection, the number of skin punctures, the delay in reading the result, the description of a positive reaction, and, finally, where to draw the line between a positive and a negative result. All these factors may influence the pathergy test result (Davatchi et al., 2003), and since the pathergy test is not standardized, it is perhaps unsurprising that a wide range of different results has been obtained by different groups.

The variable association of pathergy test positivity with BD and its occurrence among healthy subjects prevent it from being used as a screening test (Yurdakul et al., 1988). An alternative and more quantitative method of testing for abnormal inflammatory responsiveness is to examine erythema following the injection of monosodium urate crystals into the forearm skin. Normally, erythema is maximal 24 hours after injection and has resolved by 48 hours. In contrast, the response in BD tends to persist for 48 hours or longer. In Turkish patients, this test was 61% sensitive and 100% specific for BD when compared with other rheumatological diseases (Cakir et al., 1991).

(e) Neurological Involvement

The neurological complications of BD predominantly involve the central nervous system (CNS), although, rarely, there may be involvement of muscle and peripheral nerves. CNS disease is a potentially serious complication of BD and may manifest as pseudotumor cerebri, brain-stem involvement, neuropsychiatric symptoms, and meningo-encephalitis (Martini, 1995). CNS disease of BD can be divided into two categories, namely, parenchymal and vascular. Any area of the CNS may be affected, but the most frequent clinical presentations consist of bilateral pyramidal signs, headache, mental disorders (memory defects, disinhibition, and apathy), hemiparesis (usually unilateral), sphincter dysfunction, brain stem findings, and the pyramido-cerebellar syndrome (Akman- Demir et al., 1996).

There is considerable variation (from 2.2 to 44%) in the frequency of neurological disease in patients with BD (Main and Chamberlain, 1992; al Dalaan et al., 1994; Gurler et al., 1997; Krause et al., 1998; Gonzalez-Gay et al., 2000; Chen and Chang, 2001). Headache seems to be the most common clinical feature of neurological disease in BD, affecting up to 47% of examined groups (Krause et al., 1999).

Children with BD may have a greater tendency than adults to develop CNS disease (other than headaches) with significant cerebral involvement (Krause et al., 1999). Neurological complications may be more common in pediatric BD patients from France and Saudi Arabia than in those from Turkey and Iran. These complications include meningitis, benign intracranial hypertension, hemiparesis or paraparesis, seizures, and peripheral neuropathy (Kone-Paut et al., 1998). There is an increased frequency of seizures in adults with BD, and it is twice as prevalent as that seen in epilepsy (Aykutlu et al., 2002).

(f) Vascular Disease

Behet’s disease gives rise to a chronic relapsing systemic vasculitis involving arteries and veins of various sizes. The vascular involvement may consist of thrombophlebitis, deep vein thrombosis, and arterial obstruction. Aneurysms, particularly of the pulmonary arteries, may also develop (Yazici et al., 1998). Worldwide, vascular involve\ment in BD is common, although there is some geographic variation in frequency. Vascular complications are slightly less common in children (from 10.5 to 21%) (Kone-Paut et al., 1998, 2002; Krause et al., 1999) than in adults (from 8 to 26.5%) (al Dalaan et al., 1994; al Aboosi et al., 1996; Ourler et al., 1997; Kone-Paut et al., 1998; Krause et al., 1999, 2001; Baixauli et al., 2001), although the disease can be more severe in children than in adults (Kone-Paut et al., 1998).

Venous involvement usually arises within five years of the initial presentation of BD (Koc et al., 1992) and indeed can be the initial feature of the disease. Superficial and deep vein thrombosis are common features, although embolization is uncommon. Recurrent thrombophlebitis of the legs may lead to stasis dermatitis and crural ulcers (Koc et al., 1992). Thrombosis of the inferior vena cava and hepatic veins in patients with Budd-Chiari syndrome and BD carries a poor prognosis (Bayraktar et al., 1997).

Arterial disease is less common than the venous complications of BD but has greater morbidity. The most frequently affected vessels, in decreasing order, are the pulmonary, femoral, popliteal, subclavian, and carotid arteries. Arterial involvement predisposes to aneurysm formation or arterial occlusion.

(g) Renal Disease

Several renal disorders have been associated with BD and can be divided into five groups, namely, (1) glomerulonephritis (GN), (2) amyloidosis, (3) renal vascular involvement, (4) interstitial nephritis, and (5) other problems such as complications of drug therapy or genito-urinary system abnormalities (Akpolat et al., 2002).

The frequency of renal problems varies from 0% to 55%. This wide difference may reflect inadequate investigation of some reported patients and/or a lack of significant relevant systemic features suggestive of renal disease. Indeed, in a recent report, the most common renal problems of BD were asymptomatic hematuria and proteinuria (Akpolat et al., 2002).

(h) Gastrointestinal Disease

Gastrointestinal disease is most frequent in patients from Japan (from 50 to 60%) (Shimizu et al., 1979), followed by those from the UK (from 38 to 50%) (Whallett et al., 1999; Kari et al., 2001), and is least common in Turkish patients with BD (2.8%) (Ourler et al., 1997).

Mucosal ulcers are the most common gastrointestinal (GI) feature of BD (Krause et al., 1999). The ulceration predominantly occurs in the ileocecal region but can occur throughout the GI tract, including the esophagus (Jankowski et al., 1992). Depending upon the site of involvement, the ulceration can give rise to dysphagia, abdominal pain, diarrhea (occasionally bloody), intestinal perforation, and peri-anal fistula formation.

Children with BD have a tendency toward more non-specific GI symptoms than do adults, and this probably accounts for the higher incidence of abdominal pain and diarrhea in affected children (Krause et al., 1999; Kone-Paut et al., 2002).

(i) Cardiac Disease

Valvular disease (Chikamori et al., 1990), myocardial infarction and aneurysms (Ioakimidis et al., 1993; Siepmann and Kirch, 1997), intracardiac thrombus (Mogulkoc et al., 2000), and endomyocardial fibrosis (Huong et al., 1997) have been observed in patients with BD. Of significance, mitral valve prolapse and dilatation of the proximal aorta were observed in 50% and 30% of patients with BD, respectively (Morelli et al., 1997).

(j) Musculoskeletal Disease

There is considerable variation (e.g., from 15 to 88% of examined patient groups) in the incidence of musculoskeletal disease in BD (Pande et al., 1995; Zouboulis et al., 1997; Krause et al., 1999; Tan et al., 1999; Kaya et al., 2002). Arthralgia or arthritis can be the first manifestation of BD in 0.5% to 7% of patients (Gurler et al., 1997; Zouboulis et al., 1997). Mono-arthritis is the most frequent pattern of involvement, although asymmetrical polyarthritis can occur. The knee is the most frequently affected joint, although the ankle, hand, wrist, and elbow can also be affected. The arthritis of BD is usually transient, lasting two months or less. Long-term arthritic disease is rare (Yurdakul et al., 1983).

(k) Other Clinical Features of Behet’s Disease

Amyloidosis

Amyloidosis in BD is rare and has a 50% mortality rate after an average duration of 3.4 years (range 1 to 11). Amyloidosis in BD may be associated with nephrotic syndrome or significant proteinuria. Peripheral and pulmonary arterial involvement and arthritis are the strongest predictors of amyloidosis in BD (Melikoglu et al., 2001).

Periodontal disease

There may be increased deposits of plaque and higher periodontal index scores in patients with active BD compared with healthy control subjects, although there does not appear to be a notably increased susceptibility to early tooth loss. An elevation of circulating antibodies to Actinobacillus actinomycelemcomitans has been reported in patients with BD (Celenligil-Nazliel et al., 1999).

Recurrent epididymo-orchitis

Reports have described the prevalence of epididymitis in BD as 4% (al Dalaan et al., 1994), 4.6% (Cho et al., 2003), 5% (al Aboosi et al., 1996), 12.3% (Kaklamani et al., 2000), and 19.2% (Cetinel et al., 1998). Epididymitis is usually accompanied by multi-organ involvement and thus is a feature of severe BD (Cho et al., 2003).

Budd-Chiari syndrome

Budd-Chiari syndrome (sudden occlusion of the major hepatic veins) is a rare and serious complication of BD. Although the mortality rate of BD is less than 10% (Orloff and Orloff, 1999; Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003), the development of Budd-Chiari syndrome in patients with BD has been associated with a mortality rate of 61% (Orloff and Orloff, 1999).

(V) ETIOPATHOGENESIS

The cause of BD is not known, but an autoimmune reaction triggered by an infectious or environmental agent (possibly local to a geographic region) in a genetically predisposed individual seems most likely. However, if BD has an autoimmune basis, it is unusual, since there is no female preponderance, no association with other autoimmune diseases or HLA antigens typically associated (A1, B8, DR3, DR4) with such disease, and no associated specific autoantibodies. There are, however, scattered reports of neonatal BD in the children of mothers with BD (Fam et al., 1981; Eglin et al., 1982), possibly caused by transplacental transfer of an as-yet- unidentified antibody.

(a) Suggested Infectious Etiologies

Early studies isolated probable HSV-1 from oral ulcers (Kilbourne and Horsefall, 1951). HSV-1 DNA has been identified in peripheral blood lymphocytes and monocytes of patients with BD (Eglin et al., 1982; Bonass et al., 1986), and elevated circulating antibodies to HSV-1 have been reported in patients with BD. However, HSV-1 DNA was not detected in oral ulcers of BD (Studd et al., 1991).

Etiological links between hepatitis viruses and Behet’s disease seem unlikely, since a significantly elevated frequency of hepatitis A virus (HAV), Hepatitis B virus (HBV), or Hepatitis C virus (HCV) seropositivity has not been observed in patients with BD (Hamuryudan et al., 1995; Oguz et al., 1995; Aksu et al., 1999).

There is considerable evidence that Streptococcus sanguis may have some etiological role in BD. Individuals with BD may have higher numbers of S. sanguis in the mouth (Isogai et al., 1990b), higher serum antibody liters to this organism (Lehner et al., 1991; Yokota et al., 1992), or increased T-cell reactivity to S. sanguis antigens than appropriate control subjects (Hirohata et al., 1992). In addition, elevated serum antibody liters to uncommon serotypes of S. sanguis (strains 113-20, 114-23, and 118-1) have been detected in some patienls with BD (Yokota et al., 1992). Patients with BD may have hypersensitivity reactions to various strains of streptococci but not to other bacterial antigens (Kaneko S et al., 1997). Higher streptococcal antigen titer levels have been demonstrated in BD patients than in controls or in patients with uveitis not associated with BD (Namba et al., 1986).

It has been suggested that patients may have an infection focus, such as dental caries or tonsillitis, before clinical manifestation of BD (Tsuchida et al., 1997). Streptococci are often isolated from these infectious foci, and streptococcal antigens are mitogenic for lymphocytes from patients with BD (Kaneko et al., 1985). Denial treatment and streptococcal antigen skin-testing can induce clinical features in patients with previously stable BD (Mizushima et al., 1988), and the pathergy can be suppressed following surgical cleaning of the skin (Fresko et al., 1993).

In vitro production of inflammatory cytokines (interleukins [IL]- 1, IL-6, IL-8, interferon gamma, and tumor necrosis factor-alpha [TNF-α]) by peripheral blood mononuclear cells and T- lymphocytes of patients with BD is enhanced following stimulation wilh streptococcal-related antigens (Hirohala et al., 1992; Kaneko F et al., 1997). In addition, neutrophil activation in BD appears to be correlated wilh the proportion of 5. sanguis within the oral flora (Isogai et al., 1990a).

Increased serum levels of IgA anlibodies to the mycobacterial 65- kDa heat-shock protein (HSP; which cross-reads with strains of S. sanguis) have been reported in patients wilh BD (Lehner et al., 1991). The expression of HSP60 in epidermal regions is up-regulated at lesional sites in BD, and antibodies to streptococcal HSP60 might cause tissue damage (Ergun et al., 2001).

There are thus increasing data supporting the notion that BD may have a bacterial trigger, but how this trigger induces disease is currently unknown.

(b) Immunopathogenic Aspects

The major immunological features of BD consist of increased T- and B-cell responses to heat-shock proteins (HSP), increased neutrophil activity, and alterations in cytokine levels, although the interrelationships between and among these features are not clear.

Heat-shock proteins are a group of intrace\llular proteins which scavenge for other intracellular proteins under denaturating stress conditions such as infection, hypoxia, trauma, and toxic drugs (Lamb and Young, 1990; Direskeneli and Saruhan-Direskeneli, 2003). Significant sequence homology exists between mammalian and microbial HSPs. For example, they may share antigenic epitopes with herpes simplex viruses and streptococci-micro-organisms that have been implicated in the pathogenesis of BD (Lehner, 1997; Direskeneli and Saruhan-Direskeneli, 2003).

In several recent studies of patients with BD, increased numbers of γδ T-cells have been found in peripheral blood and in affected tissues, a phenotypically distinct subset of these cells being observed at sites of inflammation (Mizuki et al., 2000). In addition, levels of circulating γδ T-cells may increase in active disease (Hasan et al., 1996). Such γδ T-cells are found in epithelial surfaces and are thought to regulate inflammatory and immune processes. They participate in early responses against micro-organisms by responding to non-peptide antigens in a non-MHC restricted fashion. In humans, the predominant circulating subset Vγ9 Vδ2 γδ T-cells recognize phosphoantigens and antigenic alkylamines-both of which are abundant among bacteria and mammalian metabolites. This subset of γδ T-cells can acquire a cytotoxic-effector function upon in vitro culture with both bacterial and viral antigens (Hasan et al., 1996).

Activated γδ T-cells, capable of producing IFN-γ and TNF-α, are present in the peripheral blood in significantly higher numbers in patients with BD than in those with RAS and in healthy controls (Freysdottir et al., 1999). Such γδ T- cells are expanded in the peripheral blood mononuclear cell population during active BD (Bank et al., 2003). One possible mechanism driving this expansion might be an inappropriate response to products of micro-organisms present in the mucosal ulcers (Bank et al., 2003). Since activation of peripheral blood mononuclear cells with peptides of the mycobacterial 65-kDa HSP and homologous human peptides from mitochondria specifically stimulates the γδ subset of T-cells from BD patients, and not from patients who have only recurrent oral ulcers (and not BD), this response might provide the basis for a diagnostic test for BD (Hasan et al., 1995, 1996). Similar to T-cell studies, cross-reactivity has also been demonstrated for anti-HSP60 antibodies. Both anti- streptococcal and anti-retinal HSP60 antibodies are elevated in the sera of BD patients with uveitis (Tanaka et al., 1999).

Several studies have suggested that neutrophil and monocytc activity may be increased in BD (Mizushima, 1986; Takeno et al., 1995). Superoxide production is increased in the neutrophils of BD patients compared with appropriate control subjects, and this increase seems to be related to the presence of the HLA-B51 (Takeno et al., 1995). In addition, the migration of neutrophils during attacks, but not during remission, increases in BD (Carletto et al., 1997). Production of TNF-α, IL-6, and the neutrophil chemoattractant IL-8 by monocytes has also been found to be elevated (Mege et al., 1993).

An elevation of IL-10 can occur in BD, and a correlation between IL-12 and the soluble tumor necrosis factor receptor 75 (TNFR-75) levels with disease activity has been observed, suggesting a Th1- type immune response in active disease (Turan et al., 1997). However, although noting enhanced IL-4, IL-10, and IL-13 production, some studies also noted lower IL-12 production in active BD patients when compared with inactive BD, recurrent aphthous stomatitis, and control patients, thus suggesting that the immune system in BD may be characterized by a divergent cytokine production profile of mixed Th1/Th2 (Th0) cell types (Raziuddin et al., 1998; Aridogan et al., 2003).

To date, neither in vitro nor in vivo models of the immunopathogenesis of BD remain. Disease might commence with exposure to some external factor, such as antigens of streptococci or herpes virus, which may induce γδ T-cell proliferation and activation. Subsequently, the inflammatory cytokines could stimulate neutrophils and monocytes. It is still not known whether any alteration in the local oral microbial environment truly triggers the immune response in BD, or whether another defect of mucosal immunity is involved.

(c) Genetic Aspects

A genetic basis to Behet’s disease is suggested by the geographic distribution of affected individuals, the observed association with certain HLA haplotypes, and familial aggregation of some affected individuals. However, the inheritance of Behet’s disease does not follow Mendelian patterns.

A relationship between HLA-B5 and BD has been confirmed in several studies of patients with BD from Middle Eastern and Mediterranean countries (al Dalaan et al., 1994; Ghayad and Tohme, 1995; Pande et al., 1995; Davatchi et al., 1997; Krause et al., 1998; Al Fahad and Al Araji, 1999), but the relationship between this HLA antigen and BD is not prominent in patients from either the US or the UK (Bird Stewart, 1986).

HLA-B51, one of the split antigens of HLA-B5, has also been found to be increased in frequency in BD patients, and has been reported as 54.1% in Turkey (Kaya et al., 2002), 57% in Japan (Mizuki et al., 1997), 75.9% in Greece (Mizuki et al., 2002), 70.4% in Israeli Jews, and 76.2% in Israeli Arab patients (Krause et al., 2001). HLAB*5101 is the most frequently detected of the B51 alleles in the normal population and in patients with BD. It was observed in 98.1% in sampled Japanese families and at the same frequency in BD patients who are B51-positive (Mizuki and Ohno, 1996). In Israel, HLAB*5101 was the predominant allele in 62% of HLA-B51-positive Israeli BD patients and in 78% of Jewish BD patients (Paul et al., 2001). The HLAB*5108 allele may be increased in patients with BD from Italy and Saudi Arabia (Mizuki et al., 2001a). The predominant suballeles in both patient and control groups of Turkish and German patients was found to be HLA-B*5101 and B*5108, although with a slightly increased frequency of HLA-B*5108 in the diseased individuals (Kotter et al., 2001). These results might be brought about due to different HLA-B*51 allelic distributions among various ethnic groups, implying that BD spread in Asian and Eurasian populations, along with its association allele HLA-B*51, before it diverged into suballeles (Mizuki et al., 2001a).

It has been suggested that the association of HLA-B51 may be more relevant to affected male than female patients (Zouboulis et al., 1997; Choukri et al., 2001). It is still not known whether HLA-B51 participates directly in the pathogenesis of BD or is associated with it only because of linkage disequilibrium with a nearby gene (Mizuki et al., 1995)-a notion supported by the knowledge that BD still arises in the absence of HLA-B51 alleles (Mizuki and Ohno, 1996).

Strong associations between the major histocompatibility complex class I chain-related gene A (MICA) allele and TNF alleles (TNFFB*2 Nco RFLP) and BD have been reported (Mizuki et al., 1992; Verity et al., 1999b). Recently, a highly divergent MHC class I chain-related gene family, MIC, was identified within the class I MHC region. Among the five MIC genes identified so far, two genes, MICA and MICB, are functional genes located between the HLA-B and TNF genes (Bahrain and Spies, 1996; Groh et al., 1996). The major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I chain-related gene A (MIC- A) has been proposed as a candidate gene for BD susceptibility. MIC- A is located 46 kb centromeric to the HLA-B gene on chromosome 6. This gene is mainly expressed in epithelial cells, fibroblasts, endothelial cells, and monocytes (Bahram et al., 1994; Zwirner et al., 1998). The function of the MICA gene product is still unknown, but its amino acid sequence suggests that it may bind peptides or other short ligands and participate in antigen presentation or T- cell recognition (Bahram et al., 1994; Zwirner et al., 1998). Of relevance to BD, strong associations between the MICA-A6 allele and BD in Israeli Arab, but not in Israeli non-Ashkenazi Jewish, patients have been described (Cohen et al., 2002).

More recent evidence suggests that MICA is not an independent susceptibility gene for BD. HLA-B51 was found to be the most strongly, and primarily, associated marker in Jordanian BD patients, and the significant increase in the allele frequencies of MICA-A6, C1-4-1-217, and C1-2-5-188 in the patient groups was explained by a linkage disequilibrium with HLA-B51 (Mizuki et al., 2001b). Similar findings in three different populations have also been described (Japanese, Greek, and Italian) (Mizuki et al., 2000), suggesting that the pathogenic gene of BD is HLA-B51 itself, but unlikely to be other genes located in the vicinity of HLA-B.

It remains theoretically possible that a particular isoform of MICA might act in combination with B51 to increase the risk or severity of the condition, since the MICA gene product may have immunomodulatory functions and is predicted to interact with the γδT-cell receptor (Russell et al., 2001).

A novel association between BD and the HLA-C locus has been reported. The HLA-Cw* 1602 allele was found in 12.5% of patients from Spain and not in any of the controls. Although HLA-Cw* 1602 is known to be in linkage disequilibrium with HLA-B51, the authors reasoned that this was unlikely to be the explanation for their finding, in that the frequency of other more commonly known Cw alleles was not found to be increased (Sanz et al., 1998).

The factor V Leiden mutation, a well-known cause of activated protein C resistance that results in a propensity for thrombosis, has attracted interest, particularly in view of a thrombotic tendency of some patients with BD. While Lesprit et \al. (1995) found no evidence for this propensity, Gul et al. (1996) showed it to be present among 38% of patients with BD and deep vein thrombosis, compared with 9% of patients without this complication. In addition, 60% and 38% of patients with thrombotic complications of BD, compared with 18% and 0% of patients without thrombosis, had this mutation, as reported from Turkey (Oner et al., 1998) and Saudi Arabia (Mammo et al., 1997), respectively. These studies also emphasize that other, as-yet-unidentified, factors are important for the observed increase in thrombotic complications.

(VI) MANAGEMENT

The treatment of BD is symptomatic and empirical, but is generally specific to the clinical features of each patient. Treatment is usually multidisciplinary, requiring close collaboration among specialists in oral medicine, dermatology, ophthalmology, and others. Male patients and those with early-onset disease usually require more aggressive treatment than do other affected individuals (Imai et al., 1997; Yazici and Ozyazgan, 1999).

There are few controlled studies of the management of BD, and since BD has such a variable clinical presentation and course, it may be difficult to evaluate the efficacy of any one therapy (Yazici and Barnes, 1991). Most relevant studies have focused upon ocular inflammation, mucocutaneous manifestations, and arthritis as end- points, with vascular and neurological manifestations seldom being sufficiently frequent to be included in statistical analyses. There has been recent progress, however, in the development of clinical scoring systems to assess response to treatment (Bhakta et al., 1999). Table 5 summarizes the therapeutic approaches to the treatment of BD.

The treatment of BD remains unsatisfactory due to the rarity and heterogeneity of the condition, uncertainties about the relevant etiology and pathogenesis, and the lack of data from well- controlled clinical trials. In particular, the management of severe manifestations, such as vascular and neurological involvement, remains entirely empirical. There is now an urgent need to establish the exact beneficial effects of new therapies such as IFN-α, anti-TNFα agents, and newer immunosuppressive agents such as tacrolimus and mycophenolate mofetil in a methodological manner.

(VII) PROGNOSIS

Behet’s disease runs a chronic course with unpredictable exacerbations and remissions, the frequency and severity of which may diminish with time. The disease generally runs an improving or stable course after the first five years. After the fourth decade, the clinical severity reduces, with clinical complications generally recurring at longer intervals (Bardak, 1999). Hence, the prognosis of patients with BD is generally favorable, once the initial insult abates (Yazici, 2002).

However, central nervous system involvement and major vessel disease are exceptions, since their onset may occur 5-10 years into the course of the disease (Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003). Mortality as measured by the standardized mortality ratio (SMR) also tends to decrease significantly with the passage of time (Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003).

The age of onset does seem to be a prognostic factor, with patients with early onset, before 25 years of age, having a poorer prognosis than those with onset after 40 years of age (Yazici et al., 1984b). Recent studies focused upon demographic features and prognosis. Male gender and early age at onset were associated with the more severe presentations of the disease, which included vascular thrombotic, ocular, gastrointestinal, or central nervous system manifestations (Demiroglu and Dundar, 1997; Bang et al., 2003; Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003).

Table 5. Therapies for Behet’s Disease

Nevertheless, there is considerable variation between and among patients. While BD runs an indolent course in some patients, with mucocutaneous manifestations dominating the clinical picture, others have serious complications, such as uveitis and vascular occlusive disease, that can lead to significant morbidity (Koc et al., 1992). Morbidity is high; ocular and neurological involvement may result in significant disability and can greatly diminish quality of life. Perhaps optimistically, however, the numbers of those developing blindness due to BD may be falling (Yazici, 2002).

Mortality was found to occur in 9.8% of BD patients (Kural- Seyahi et al., 2003), mainly due to major vessel disease, neurological involvement, and perforated intestinal ulcers (Yazici et al., 1996; Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003). Vascular involvement may be the major cause of death in BD (Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003). Mortality in BD is specifically increased among young males (Yazici et al., 1996; Kural-Seyahi et al., 2003).

Data that treatment ultimately prolongs the lives of BD patients are lacking, and neoplastic disease, as well as treatment morbidities, has been reported to occur concurrent with BD. The neoplastic disease may include solid tumors and hematological or lymphoid malignancies. Treatment-related morbidities may include surgical morbidity and radiotherapy-related morbidity (Cengiz et al., 2001).

HLA-B51 positivity generally does not determine the prognosis and response to therapy. A comparative study from Turkey and the United Kingdom found no association between the presence of the HLA-B51 allele and clinical severity of the disease (Demiroglu and Dundar, 1997).

There has been considerable progress in the treatment of ophthalmic and mucocutaneous lesions of BD during the last two decades. Unfortunately, this is not true for the vascular- thrombotic and neurological lesions with which the mortality in BD is mainly associated (Yazici, 2002).

(VIII) CONCLUSION

Behet’s disease remains an elusive disorder, having variable clinical presentations and unknown etiology, and lacking any specific therapy. Behet’s disease thus remains a significant challenge to clinicians of many specialties. However, in view of the establishment of well-defined diagnostic clinical criteria, it should now be possible to investigate the cause and therapy of this potentially serious disorder with greater focus than was previously possible. In particular, there would seem to be a need to develop a clinical and DNA data bank using worldwide-recognized clinical criteria (and the pathergy test method) to review more clearly the microbial associations of BD and to undertake well-organized randomized controlled trials of both antimicrobials and immunologically active agents. Through such work, it should be possible to establish more clearly the etiology and hence more effective treatment and preventive strategies for BD.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Special thanks to the Saudi Arabian Armed Forces Medical Services and Cultural Bureau Office in London for sponsoring Dr. Al Otaibi.

Received March 16, 2004; Accepted August 1, 2004

REFERENCES

Akman-Demir G, Baykan-Kurt B, Serdaroglu P, Gurvit H, Yurdakul S, Yazici H, et al. (1996). Seven-year follow-up of neurologic involvement in Behet syndrome. Arch Neural 53:691-694.

Akoglu TF, Direskeneli H, Yazici H, Lawrence R (1990). TNF, soluble IL-2R and soluble CD-8 in Behet’s disease. J Rheumatol 17:1107-1108.

Akpolat T, Akkoyunlu M, Akpolat I, Dilek M, Odabas AR, Ozen S (2002). Renal Behet’s disease: a cumulative analysis. Semin Arthritis Rheum 31:317-337.

Aksu K, Kabasakal Y, Sayiner A, Keser G, Oksel F, Bilgic A, et al. (1999). Prevalences of hepatitis A, B, C and E viruses in Behet’s disease. Rheumatology (Oxford) 38:1279-1281.

Aktulga E, Altac M, Muftuoglu A, Ozyazgan Y, Pazarli H, Tuzun Y, et al. (1980). A double blind study of colchicine in Behet’s disease. Haematologica 65:399-402.

Akyol M, Dogan S, Kaptanoglu E, Ozcelik S (2002). Systemic isotrelinoin in the treatment of Behet’s patients with arthritic symptoms and acne lesions. Clin Exp Rheumatol 20(4 Suppl):S-55.

al Aboosi MM, al Salem M, Saadeh A, al Jamal M, Hijawi M, Khammash M, et al. (1996). Behet’s disease: clinical study of Jordanian patients. Int J Dermatol 35:623-625.

al Dalaan AN, al Balaa SR, el Ramahi K, al Kawi Z, Bohlega S, Bahabri S, et al. (1994). Behet’s disease in Saudi Arabia. J Rheumalol 21:658-661.

Al Fahad SA, Al Araji AH (1999). Neuro-Behet’s disease in Iraq: a study of 40 patients. J Neural Sci 170:105-111.

Al Rawi ZS, Neda AH (2003). Prevalence of Behet’s disease among Iraqis. Adv Exp Med Biol 528:37-41.

Alpsoy E, Aktekin M, Er H, Durusoy C, Yilmaz E (1998). A randomized, controlled and blinded study of papulopustular lesions in Turkish Behet’s patients. Int J Dermatol 37:839-842.

Alpsoy E, Durusoy C, Yilmaz E, Ozgurel Y, Ermis O, Yazar S, et al. (2002). Interferon alfa-2a in the treatment of Behet disease: a randomized placebo-controlled and double-blind study. Arch Dermatol 138:467-471.

Aral O, Dilsen N, Konice M (1986). Positive skin pathergy reactivity as a genetic marker of Behet’s disease. In: Recent advances in Behet’s disease. Lehner T, Barnes CG, editors. London: Royal Society of Medical Services, pp. 173-175.

Aridogan BC, Yildirim M, Baysal V, Inaloz HS, Baz K, Kaya S (2003). Serum levels of IL-4, IE-10, IE-12, IE-13 and IFN-gamma in Behet’s disease. J Dermatol 30:602-607.

Ayata EM, Celik AF, Melikoglu M, Hamuryudan V, Yazici H (2002). The effect of smoking on oral ulcers (OU) of Behet’s syndrome (BS) (abstract). Berlin: 10th International Congress on Behet’s Disease.

Aykutlu E, Baykan B, Serdaroglu P, Gokyigit A, Akman-Demir G (2002). Epileptic seizures in Behet disease. Epilepsia 43:832-835.

Bahram S, Spies T (1996). The MIC gene family. Res Immunol 147:328-333.

Bahram S, Bresnahan M, Geraghty DE, Spies T (1994). A second lineage of mammalian major histocompatibility complex class I genes. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 91:6259-6263.

Baixauli A, Calvo J, Tamarit JJ, Campos C, Garcia S, Herrera A (2001). Behet’s disease: retrospective study. Ann Med Interna 18:405- 410.

Bang D, Yoon KH, Chung HG, Choi EH, Lee ES, Lee S (1997a). Epi\demiological and clinical features of Behet’s disease in Korea. Yonsei Med J 38:428-436.

Bang D, Chun YS, Haam IB, Lee ES, Lee S (1997b). The influence of pregnancy on Behet’s disease. Yonsei Med J 38:437-443.

Bang D, Lee JH, Lee ES, Lee S, Choi JS, Kim YK, et al. (2001). Epidemiologic and clinical survey of Behet’s disease in Korea: the first multicenter study. J Korean Med Sci 16:615-618.

Bang DS, Oh SH, Lee KH, Lee ES, Lee SN (2003). Influence of sex on patients with Behet’s disease in Korea. J Korean Med Sci 18:231- 235.

Bank I, Duvdevani M, Livneh A (2003). Expansion of gammadelta T- cells in Behet’s disease: role of disease activity and microbial flora in oral ulcers. J Lab Clin Med 141:33-40.

Bardak Y (1999). Effects of age and sex on Behet’s disease. J Rheumatol 26:1008-1009.

Bayraktar Y, Balkanci F, Bayraktar M, Calguneri M (1997). Budd- Chiari syndrome: a common complication of Behet’s disease. Am J Gastroenterol 92:858-862.

Behet’s Disease Research Committee of Japan (1974). Behet’s disease: guide to diagnosis of Behet’s disease. Jpn J Ophthalmol 18:291-294.

Bhakta BB, Brennan P, James TE, Chamberlain MA, Noble BA, Silman AJ (1999). Behet’s disease: evaluation of a new instrument to measure clinical activity. Rheumatology (Oxford) 38:728-733.

Binder AI, Graham EM, Sanders MD, Dinning W, James DG, Denman AM (1987). Cyclosporin A in the treatment of severe Behet’s uveitis. Br J Rheumatol 26:285-291.

Bird Stewart JA (1986). Genetic analysis of families of patients with Behet’s syndrome: data incompatible with autosomal recessive inheritance. Ann Rheum Dis 45:265-268.

Blobner F (1937). Zur rezidivierenden Hypopyoniritis. Z Augenheilkunde 91:129-139.

Bonass W, Bird-Stewart J, Chamberlain MA (1986). Molecular studies in Behet’s syndrome. In: Recent advances in Behet’s disease. Lehner T, Barnes CG, editors. London: Royal Society of Medical Services, pp. 37-41.

Cakir N, Yazici H, Chamberlain MA, Barnes CG, Yurdakul S, Atasoy S, et al. (1991). Response to intradermal injection of monosodium urate crystals in Behet’s syndrome. Ann Rheum Dis 50:634-636.

Carletto A, Pacor ML, Biasi D, Caramaschi P, Zeminian S, Bellavite P, et al. (1997). Changes of neutrophil migration without modification of in vitro metabolism and adhesion in Behet’s disease. J Rheumatol 24:1332-1336.

Celenligil-Nazliel H, Kansu E, Ebersole JL (1999). Periodontal findings and systemic antibody responses to oral microorganisms in Behet’s disease. J Periodontol 70:1449-1456.

Cengiz M, Altundag MK, Zorlu AF, Gullu IH, Ozyar E, Atahan IL (2001). Malignancy in Behet’s disease: a report of 13 cases and a review of the literature. Clin Rheumatol 20:239-244.

Cetinel B, Obek C, Solok V, Yaycioglu O, Yazici H (1998). Urologic screening for men with Behet’s syndrome. Urology 52:863- 865.

Chen YC, Chang HW (2001). Clinical characteristics of Behet’s disease in southern Taiwan. J Microbiol Immunol Infect 34:207-210.

Chikamori T, Doi YL, Yonezawa Y, Takata J, Kawamura M, Ozawa T (1990). Aortic regurgitation secondary to Behet’s disease. A case report and review of the literature. Eur Heart J 11:572-576.

Cho YH, Jung J, Lee KH, Bang D, Lee ES, Lee S (2003). Clinical features of patients with Behet’s disease and epididymitis. J Urol 170:1231-1233.

Choukri F, Chakib A, Himmich H, Hue S, Caillat-Zucman S (2001). HLA-B*51 and B*15 alleles confer predisposition to Behet’s disease in Moroccan patients. Hum Immunol 62:180-185.

Chun SI, Su WP, Lee S, Rogers RS III (1989). Erythema nodosum- like lesions in Behet’s syndrome: a histopathologic study of 30 cases. J Cutan Pathol 16:259-265.

Cohen R, Metzger S, Nahir M, Chajek-Shaul T (2002). Association of the MlC-A gene and HLA-B51 with Behet’s disease in Arabs and non- Ashkenazi Jews in Israel. Ann Rheum Dis 61:157-160.

Davatchi F, Shahram F, Akbarian M (1992). Epidemiology of Behet’s disease Iran. In: Rheumatology APPLAR 1992. Nasution AR, Darmawan J, Isbagio H, editors. Tokyo: Churchill Livingstone, pp. 95-98.

Davatchi F, Shahram F, Akbarian M (1997). Behet’s disease: analysis of 3443 cases. APLAR J Rheumatol 1:2-5.

Davatchi F, Shahram F, Nadji A, Jamshidi AR, Chams C, Chams H, et al. (2003). Influence of pathergy test on the accuracy of different diagnosis criteria for Behcet’s disease. Adv Exp Med Biol 528:109- 112.

Davies PG, Fordham JN, Kirwan JR, Barnes CG, Dinning WJ (1984). The pathergy test and Behet’s syndrome in Britain. Ann Rheum Dis 43:70-73.

Davies UM, Palmer RG, Denman AM (1988). Treatment with acyclovir does not affect orogenital ulcers in Behet’s syndrome: a randomized double-blind trial. Br J Rheumatol 27:300-302.

Demiroglu H, Dundar S (1997). Inflects of age, sex, and initial presentation on the clinical course of Behet’s syndrome (letter). South Med J 90:567.

Demiroglu H, Ozcebe OI, Barista I, Dundar S, Eldem B (2000). Interferon alfa-2b, colchicine, and benzathine penicillin versus colchicine and benzathine penicillin in Behet’s disease: a randomised trial. Lancet 355:605-609.

Dilsen N, Konice M, Aral O (1986). Our diagnostic criteria of Behet’s disease-an overview. In: Recent advances in Behet’s disease. Lehner T, Barnes CG, editors. London: Academic Press, pp. 177-180.

Direskeneli H, Saruhan-Direskeneli G (2003). The role of heat shock proteins in Behcet’s disease. Clin Exp Rheumatol 21:S44-S48.

Dunlop E (1979). Genital and other manifestations of Behet’s disease seen in venereological clinical practice. In: Behet’s syndrome: clinical and immunological features. Lehner T, Barnes G, editors. London: Academic Press, pp. 159-175.

Eglin RP, Lehner T, Subak-Sharpe JH (1982). Detection of RNA complementary to herpes-simplex virus in mononuclear cells from patients with Behet’s syndrome and recurrent oral ulcers. Lancet 2:1356-1361.

Ekmekci P, Boyvat A, Ozdemir E, Gurler A, Gurgey E (2003). Is long term observation of patients with recurrent aphthous stomatitis necessary? Clinical follow-up of 1238 cases. Adv Exp Med Biol 528:127-130.

Eldem B, Onur C, Ozen S (1998). Clinical features of pediatric Behet’s disease. J Pediatr Ophthalmol Strabismus 35:159-161.

Ergun T, Ince U, Eksioglu-Demiralp E, Direskeneli H, Gurbuz O, Gurses L, et al. (2001). HSP 60 expression in mucocutaneous lesions of Behet’s disease. J Am Acact Dermatol 45:904-909.

Estrach C, Mpofu S, Moots RJ (2002). Behet’s syndrome: response to infliximab after failure of etanercept. Rheumatology (Oxford) 41:1213-1214.

Fam AG, Siminovitch KA, Carette S, From L (1981). Neonatal Behet’s syndrome in an infant of a mother with the disease. Ann Rheum Dis 40:509-512.

Fresko I, Yazici H, Bayramicli M, Yurdakul S, Mat C (1993). Effect of surgical cleaning of the skin on the pathergy phenomenon in Behet’s syndrome. Ann Rheum Dis 52:619-620.

Freysdottir J, Lau S, Fortune F (1999). Gammadelta T cells in Behet’s disease (BD) and recurrent aphthous stomatitis (RAS). Clin Exp Immunol 118:451-457.

Ghayad E, Tohme A (1995). Bchcet’s disease in Lebanon: report of 100 cases. J Med Liban 43:2-7.

Gonzalez-Gay MA, Garcia-Porrua C, Branas F, Lopez-Lazaro E, Olivieri I (2000). Epidemiologic and clinical aspects of Behet’s disease in a defined area of Northwestern Spain, 1988-1997. J Rheumatol 27:703-707.

Goossens PH, Verburg RJ, Breedveld FC (2001). Remission of Behet’s syndrome with tumour necrosis factor alpha blocking therapy (case report). Ann Rheum Dis 60:637.

Groh V, Bahram S, Bauer S, Herman A, Beauchamp M, Spies T (1996). Cell stress-regulated human major histocompatibility complex class I gene expressed in gastrointestinal epithelium. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 93:12445-12450.

Gul A, Ozbek U, Ozturk C, Inanc M, Konice M, Ozcelik T (1996). Coagulation factor V gene mutation increases the risk of venous thrombosis in Behet’s disease. Br J Rheumatol 35:1178-1180.

Gul A, Inane M, Ocal L, Aral O, Konice M (2000). Familial aggregation of Behet’s disease in Turkey. Ann Rheum Dis 59:622-625.

Gurler A, Boyvat A, Tursen U (1997). Clinical manifestations of Behet’s disease: an analysis of 2147 patients. Yonsei Med J 38:423- 427.

Hamuryudan V, Moral F, Yurdakul S, Mat C, Tuzun Y, Ozyazgan Y, et al. (1994). Systemic interferon alpha 2b treatment in Behet’s syndrome. J Rheumatol 21:1098-1100.

Hamuryudan V, Sonsuz A, Yurdakul S (1995). More on hepatitis C virus and Behet’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 333:322-323.

Hamuryudan V, Ozyazgan Y, Hizli N, Mat C, Yurdakul S, Tuzun Y, et al. (1997). Azathioprine in Behet’s syndrome: effects on long-term prognosis. Arthritis Rheum 40:769-774.

Hasan A, Childerstone A, Pervin K, Shinnick T, Mizushima Y, van der Zee R, et al. (1995). Recognition of a unique peptide epitope of the mycobacterial and human heat shock protein 65-60 antigen by T cells of patients with recurrent oral ulcers. Clin Exp Immunol 99:392-397.

Hasan A, Fortune F, Wilson A, Warr K, Shinnick T, Mizushima Y, et al. (1996). Role of gamma delta T cells in pathogenesis and diagnosis of Behet’s disease. Lancet 347:789-794.

Haugeberg G, Velken M, Johnsen V (2004). Successful treatment of genital ulcers with infliximab in Behet’s disease. Ann Rheum Dis 63:744-745.

Hirohata S, Oka H, Mizushima Y (1992). Streptococcal-related antigens stimulate production of IL6 and interferon-gamma by T cells from patients with Behet’s disease. Cell Immunol 140:410-419.

Hirohata S, Suda H, Hashimoto T (1998). Low-dose weekly methotrexate for progressive neuropsychiatric manifestations in Behet’s disease. J Neurol Sci 159:181-185.

Huong DL, Wechsler B, Papo T, de Zuttere D, Bletry O, Hernigou A, et al. (1997). Endomyocardial fibrosis in Behet’s disease. Ann Rheum Dis 56:205-208.

Imai H, Motegi M, Mizuki N, Ohtani H, Komatsuda A, Hamai K, et al. (1997). Mouth and genital ulcers with inflamed cartilage (MAGIC syndrome): a case report and literature review. Am J Med Sci 314:330- 332.

Imai Y (1971). Studies on prognosis and symptoms of Behet’s disease in long term observation. Jpn J Clin Ophthaimol 25:661-694.

Inaloz \HS, Evereklioglu C, Unal B, Kirtak N, Eralp A, Inaloz SS (2004). The significance of immunohistochemistry in the skin pathergy reaction of patients with Behet’s syndrome. J Eur Acad Dermatol Venereol 18:56-61.

International Study Group for Behet’s Disease (1990). Criteria for diagnosis of Behet’s disease. Lancet 335:1078-1080.

Ioakimidis D, Georganas C, Panagoulis C, Gournizakis A, Iliopoulos A, Kremastinos D, et al. (1993). A case of Adamantiadis- Behet’s syndrome presenting as myocardial infarction. Clin Exp Rheumatol 11:183-186.

Isogai E, Ohno S, Kotake S, Isogai H, Tsurumizu T, Fujii N, et al. (1990a). Chemiluminescence of neutrophils from patients with Behet’s disease and its correlation with an increased proportion of uncommon serotypes of Streptococcus sanguis in the oral flora. Arch Oral Biol 35:43-48.

Isogai E, Ohno S, Takeshi K, Yoshikawa K, Tsurumizu T, Isogai H, et al. (1990b). Close association of Streptococcus sanguis uncommon serotypes with Behet’s disease. Bifidobacteria Microflora 9:27-41.

Jaber L, Milo G, Halpern GJ, Krause I, Weinberger A (2002). Prevalence of Behet’s disease in an Arab community in Israel. Ann Rheum Dis 61:365-366.

Jankowski J, Crombie I, Jankowski R (1992). Behet’s syndrome in Scotland. Postgrad Med J 68:566-570.

Kaklamani VG, Vaiopoulos G, Markomichelakis N, Kaklamanis P (2000). Recurrent epididymo-orchitis in patients with Behet’s disease. J Urol 163:487-489.

Kaklamani VG, Tzonou A, Markomichelakis N, Papazoglou S, Kaklamanis PG (2003). The effect of smoking on the clinical features of Adamantiades-Behet’s disease. Adv Exp Med Biol 528:323-327.

Kaneko F, Oyama N, Nishibu A (1997). Streptococcal infection in the pathogenesis of Behet’s disease and clinical effects of minocycline on the disease symptoms. Yonsei Med J 38:444-454.

Kaneko F, Takahashi Y, Muramatsu Y, Miura Y (1985). Immunological studies on aphthous ulcer and erythema nodosum-like eruptions in Behet’s disease. Br J Dermatol 113:303-312.

Kaneko S, Suzuki N, Yamashita N, Nagafuchi H, Nakajima T, Wakisaka S, et al. (1997). Characterization of T cells specific for an epitope of human 60-kD heat shock protein (hsp) in patients with Behet’s disease (BD) in Japan. Clin Exp Immunol 108:204-212.

Kari JA, Shah V, Dillon MJ (2001). Behet’s disease in UK children: clinical features and treatment including thalidomide. Rheumatology (Oxford) 40:933-938.

Katzenellenbogen I, Feuerman EJ (1965). Beitrag zum Morbus Behet Die Bedeutung der spezifschen. Hauthyperraktivitt und der Behetin Reaktion Hautarzt 16:13-18.

Kaya TI, Dur H, Tursen U, Gurler A (2002). Association of class I HLA antigens with the clinical manifestations of Turkish patients with Behet’s disease. Clin Exp Dermatol 27:498-501.

Kilbourne ED, Horsefall FL (1951). Primary herpes simplex virus infection of the adult. Arch Intern Med 88:495-502.

Kilmartin DJ, Forrester JV, Dick AD (1998). Tacrolimus (FK506) in failed cyclosporin A therapy in endogenous posterior uveitis. Ocul Immunol Inflamm 6:101-109.

Kim DK, Chang SN, Bang D, Lee ES, Lee S (1994). Clinical analysis of 40 cases of childhood-onset Behet’s disease. Pediatr Dermatol 11:95-101.

Koc Y, Gullu I, Akpek G, Akpolat T, Kansu E, Kiraz S, et al. (1992). Vascular involvement in Behet’s disease. J Rheumatol 19:402- 410.

Kone-Paut I, Yurdakul S, Bahabri SA, Shafae N, Ozen S, Ozdogan H, et al. (1998). Clinical features of Behet’s disease in children: an international collaborative study of 86 cases. J Pediatr 132:721- 725.

Kone-Paut I, Gorchakoff-Molinas A, Weschler B, Touitou I (2002). Paediatric Behet’s disease in France. Ann Rheum Dis 61:655-656.

Kontogiannis V, Powell RJ (2000). Behet’s disease. Postgrad Med J 76:629-637.

Kotter I, Gunaydin I, Stubiger N, Yazici H, Fresko I, Zouboulis CC, et al. (2001). Comparative analysis of the association of HLA- B*51 suballeles with Behet’s disease in patients of German and Turkish origin. Tissue Antigens 58:166-170.

Krause I, Uziel Y, Guedj D, Mukamel M, Molad Y, Amit M, et al (1998). Mode of presentation and multisystem involvement in Behet’s disease: the influence of sex and age of disease onset. J Rheuatol 25:1566-1569.

Krause I, Uziel Y, Guedj D, Mukamel M, Harel L, Molad Y, et al. ( 1999). Childhood Behet’s disease: clinical features and comparison with adult-onset disease. Rheumatology (Oxford) 38:457-462.

Krause I, Mader R, Sulkes J, Paul M, Uziel Y, Adawi M, et al. (2001). Behet’s disease in Israel: the influence of ethnic origin on disease expression and severity. J Rheumatol 28:1033-1036.

Kural-Seyahi E, Fresko I, Seyahi N, Ozyazgan Y, Mat C, Hamuryudan V, et al. (2003). The long-term mortality and morbidity of Behet syndrome: a 2-decade outcome survey of 387 patients followed at a dedicated center. Medicine (Baltimore) 82:60-76.

Lakhanpal S, O’Duffy JD, Lie J (1988). Pathology. In: Behet’s disease: a contemporary synopsis. Plotkin G, Calabro J, O’Duffy J, editors. New York: Futura Publishing Company, pp. 102-142.

Lamb JR, Young DB (1990). T cell recognition of stress proteins. A link between infectious and autoimmune disease. Mol Biol Med 7:311- 321.

Lannuzel A, Lamaury I, Charpentier D, Caparros-Lefebvre D (2002). Neurological manifestations of Behet’s disease in a Caribbean population: clinical and imaging findings. J Neurol 249:410-418.

Larkin G, Lightman S (1999). Mycophenolate mofetil. A useful immunosuppressive in inflammatory eye disease. Ophthalmology 106:370- 374.

Lehner T (1997). The role of heat shock protein, microbial and autoimmune agen

Longtime Enthusiast Revives San Antonio Indoor Skateboarding Park

Mar. 2–Toby Johnson’s an old man in the skateboarding world. At 43, and with a few gray hairs poking out from under his ball cap, he might as well be called grandpa.

During the late ’70s, Johnson was one of the state’s top-ranked skaters and worked at one of San Antonio’s first skate parks. Eventually, though, family duties called, and he spent the next two decades managing auto repair shops and raising kids.

But the boarding bug dies hard, and now Johnson’s back in the business.

About a month ago, he reopened the city’s only indoor skateboarding facility, S.A. Skatepark — a series of ramps, handrails, ledges and a swimming pool-like bowl housed in a Northeast Side warehouse. Its previous owner closed the 10,000-square-foot park, formerly known as The Tank, several months ago, unable to turn a profit.

“The community has been supportive so far,” Johnson said, leaning over a counter covered with graffiti left by the park’s teen and pre-teen clientele. “We’ve had really good turnouts with no real advertising — just a few fliers. I’ve had parents say, ‘Thank you for keeping this place alive.'” The park had 125 paying customers its first Saturday, and interest appears steady, he added. His customers, the majority younger than 16, pay $7 to skate on weeknights and $11 all day Saturdays and Sundays.

Johnson requires skaters to wear a helmet and sign an insurance waiver saying they won’t sue the park — located at 4306 Naco Pass — if they’re injured in a spill.

Johnson said he expects to have better luck with S.A. Skatepark than its previous owner, who focused more on BMX bikers than on boarders. Bike sports, he explains, draw an older crowd — and one less likely to spend money at a place such as his.

“The under-15 age group is what we’re concentrating on,” Johnson said. “At that age, they’re still getting support and allowance from Mom and Dad. Once you get over 17 or so, that support goes away and you tend to be tighter with your money.” Although experience in the auto industry has helped Johnson with stocking inventory and managing the books, dealing with his teen and pre-teen clientele, he adds, is more akin to coaching baseball — which he did for about five years.

“The companionship and everything at the park reminds me of Little League,” he said. “It’s just that instead of managing 10 or 15 kids, now it’s triple that.” Johnson has no employees other than his family. His mother, D.J., and 15-year-old son Benjamin help out at the park. His 7-year-old son Charlie, also an avid skater, is there most days.

Thanks to a growing interest in skateboarding, places such as S.A. Skatepark are proliferating across the country, experts said.

Skateboarding has become a $5.2 billion industry. And there are now some 12 million U.S. skaters, almost six times the number of kids who play Little League baseball.

“Baseball just lasts during the summer, but kids are skateboarding year-round,” said John Bernards, executive director of the International Association of Skateboard Companies. “Skateboarding has become mainstream.” Although attendance at S.A. Skatepark has been good so far, Johnson said, the $11-a-day admission price alone isn’t going to keep the venture afloat.

“If I didn’t have the food and this,” Johnson said, motioning to a wall of colorfully painted skateboard decks for sale, “I would have to charge $18 to cover my expenses. I try to express to the kids that if they buy their cheeseburgers or Gatorade here, they’re helping the cause.” Johnson said he also knows he’ll need to make constant upgrades and changes to keep kids’ interest.

Professional skaters including Finland’s Arto Saari have dropped by the park to skate alongside the locals, and Johnson recently began offering lessons and formed a park-sponsored competitive team. He also plans to have concerts, movie nights and other promotions to keep things interesting.

“Moms don’t drop the kids off at the mall anymore,” said Damian Hebert, owner of Houston-based skateboard distribution company South Shore Distributing. “They drop them off at the skate park, and they stay all day. You have to keep changing little things to keep the kids interested and coming back through the door.” Even though Johnson thinks he’s making all the right moves, he’s still taking a wait-and-see approach.

He borrowed $10,000 from a bank to reopen the park — an amount he can pay off by selling his hot rod, a ’67 Chevy Nova — and he’s paying rent month-to-month until May, when he must decide whether to sign a long-term lease.

“Either I’m filing Chapter 11 in May or I’m signing a big lease,” he said, breaking into a smile. “But at this point, I’ve got to say it looks pretty good.”

—–

To see more of the San Antonio Express-News, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.mysanantonio.com.

(c) 2005, San Antonio Express-News. Distributed by Knight Ridder/Tribune Business News. For information on republishing this content, contact us at (800) 661-2511 (U.S.), (213) 237-4914 (worldwide), fax (213) 237-6515, or e-mail [email protected].

Is There Really No Cure for Vitiligo?

Q My daughter has the skin disease vitiligo.

Doctors have told her that there is no known cure. Can you recommend any creams, tablets or herbal treatments that may help?

A Vitiligo is a condition where the skin is patched with white the result of a lack of melanin, the compound that gives pigment to the skin. It’s also called leucoderma, (literally ‘white skin’). The patches, which grow bigger over time, usually appear on wrists, elbows and knees, over smaller joints such as those of the hands and feet, and around the eyes or mouth. They may also develop near the armpit, on the lower back and, occasionally, around the palms, soles of the feet and genitalia. They are more likely to be found on skin exposed to the sun. Vitiligo is not a cosmetic problem. White- skinned people generally find it easier to live with, but vitiligo can cause great social embarrassment for people whose natural skin tone is brown or black.

Often they are intensely anxious that it may spread all over the body.

Although tests on patients with vitiligo show nothing wrong, researchers have found that they are host to a type of antibody that attacks some of the melanocytes (melanin-containing cells) so that they can’t produce melanin.

Vitiligo has now been categorised as an autoimmune disease, meaning that the body’s immune system attacks its own cells. Vitiligo is also linked to a high incidence of endocrine (hormonal) diseases. Patients often suffer from a hyperthyroid disorder (where too much thyroxin is produced), a parathyroid problem (where the glands controlling calcium levels in the blood become unbalanced), Addison’s disease (where the adrenal gland doesn’t function efficiently), diabetes and anaemia. If these conditions are successfully treated, the vitiligo may sometimes be arrested.

In India, traditional doctors link vitiligo to combining fish or shellfish and milk products. So avoid this mixture. Many Indian families had secret remedies to help this autoimmune condition, which they dispensed free.

Research by the Council of Unani Medicine in India has found that some of these products do help regulate the autoimmune disorder and improve melanin production.

For more information, contact Dr Shakeel Tammana, who is attached to Hamdard University, New Delhi (email: [email protected]).

Here are tips that I learned from my family and have also gleaned over my years of experience Diet . Juice a large piece of peeled chopped fresh ginger root with a handful of fresh mint leaves and store in the fridge.

Take one tablespoonful with one teaspoonful of manuka honey every morning, after breakfast for two months, to support the immune system.

. Put seven or eight saffron strands in half a cup of organic whole milk, stir until the milk becomes deep orange, then strain and drink warm or cool.

Do this daily after breakfast for three months to help regulate the immune system.

. Strictly avoid acid and sour foods, including citrus fruits, pickles, chillies, vinegar, pineapple, mangoes, tomatoes, kiwi, rhubarb and canned products which have citric acid as a preservative. These harm digestion and sensitise the skin.

. Avoid alcohol, coffee and excess salt, which excite the nervous system.

. Haldi tablets (Biotique, Pounds 14 for 80): take two daily for three months.

. Kolonji oil (Amirs, Pounds 8 for 60ml): take one teaspoonful with honey after lunch or evening meal.

. Kadu (Top Op Foods, Pounds 4 for 50g) and kariatu (Top Op Foods, Pounds 4 for 100g): soak three kadu twigs and one third of a teaspoonful of kariatu in a cup of hot water overnight. Strain and drink in the morning on an empty stomach for three months.

. Zinc citrate (Biocare, Pounds 4.50 for 90 tablets): one daily for two months.

Supplements Massage Massage the neck and back weekly for 15 minutes, for three months, to improve blood flow to the pituitary gland, the main controller of the immune system. Once its functions are regulated, the autoimmune reaction will calm down. There are full details on my lifestyle DVD (Integrated Health Group, Pounds 19.95).

Sleep It is very important to get sufficient good-quality sleep, as stress often exacerbates vitiligo. To help you sleep, go for regular walks in the fresh air and do therapeutic iyengar yoga with a qualified local practitioner.

Also play a relaxation CD at bedtime and practise deep, rhythmic breathing in bed.

Hutterite Medicaid Suit Goes to Court

HELENA, Mont. – The 53 members of the King Colony Hutterite community live a communal, mostly self-sufficient life. They quietly farm the land, shun individual property ownership and shy away from most government aid.

But now the colony is at the center of a high-stakes battle coming before the state Supreme Court on Wednesday over whether members are eligible for Medicaid benefits.

The case began after seven women from the colony applied for and received Medicaid benefits despite the colony’s estimated $2.1 million net worth from farmland, crops and livestock.

The state cut off the benefits, prompting the women to sue. They claim the state was discriminating against them based on their religious beliefs.

The case poses a broader problem for the state. If the women win, the state could face similar requests for benefits from state’s 49 other Hutterite colonies, said Russ Cater, chief legal counsel for the state Department of Public Health and Human Services.

“I think it was simply a business judgment that health care costs are rising considerably and if they can get someone else to pay for their health care costs in the end it would benefit their colony, their business, their members,” Cater said.

A woman who answered the phone at the King Colony would not discuss the case, calling it a private matter. She would not identify herself.

The Hutterites have roots in the 16th-century Anabaptist religious movement in Europe – the same movement that gave rise to the Mennonites and Amish. They live in communal agricultural colonies where the men and women have traditional roles and wear traditional clothing.

Technology is embraced on the colony, as long as it helps advance the common good. Men use tractors and combines.

Kent Kasting, an attorney for the seven women, has said the community’s men make all financial decisions and the women have no access to the colony’s assets.

“They don’t own anything,” Kasting said. “They can’t – they come into the world with nothing.”

In 1992, the women applied for and were granted benefits through Medicaid, the government program that helps pay for medical care for the poor. Later, the state told them it didn’t believe they qualified for the benefits and planned to cut them off at the end of 2001.

The department argued that King Colony established a “trust relationship” through its founding documents that gives the women access to the colony’s assets.

A state district judge ruled in favor of the women in March, but the state appealed.

Cater said the colony could sell some of its resources to cover medical expenses.

According to the national Hutterite organization, there are about 40,000 Hutterites living on 458 colonies in the United States and Canada. Of those, about 4,000 Hutterites live in Montana.

“Right now not all colonies are sending their members to apply for Medicaid,” Cater said. “It’s only a few such as the King Colony, but we have received word from the other colonies that if the state loses this case they may have to re-evaluate their past practices and perhaps send their members to ask for Medicaid assistance.”

The Management of Obesity: the Role of the Specialist Nurse

Abstract

Obesity is a global problem, independent of age. The numbers of obese individuals are now reaching epidemic proportions around the world. This is contributing to the risk of inherent comorbidity. The pathophysiology of obesity, although widely debated, is still unclear with suggestions that multiple genetic mutations may have a key role in the development, but as yet no one genetic mutation is felt to be entirely responsible. Biochemical manifestations such as diabetes may play a role. The first goal of management of the obese patient will involve dietary and behavioural modification and a programme of physical exercise. In primary care settings, nurses are suitably placed to assess and manage obese patients (National Institute for Clinical Excellence (NICE), 2001a). The nursing profession needs to rise to the challenge and prepare nurses for a specialist role in obesity management.

Key words: * Health promotion * Nursing: role * Obesity * Screening

The aim of this article is to highlight the problems of obesity, pathogenesis and complications of obesity, -with exploration of the clinical assessment of the obese patient, treatment options available and the possible role of the nurse specialist in managing obese patients.

The World Health Organization (WHO, 2001) defines obesity as:

‘…a complex condition, one with serious social and psychological manifestations that affects virtually any age and socioeconomic groups and threatens to overtake developed and developing countries.’

Obesity is the commonest form of malnutrition and is reaching epidemic proportions in developed and underdeveloped countries around the world (Halsted, 1999; International Association for the Study of Obesity, 2000; Kanazawa et al, 2002; Wadden et al, 2002; Al- Sendi et al, 2003). According to Danielzik et al (2004), obesity appears to be related to family, economic and environmental determinants such as high birthweight, parental smoking, low socioeconomic status and single households. With the rise in single parent families, the upward trend in obesity may increase.

In obese and overweight individuals with a body mass index (BMI) greater than 30, the risk of developing disease which is often of a cardiac nature, such as hypertension and high triglycerides (a side- effect arising from familial hypercholesterolaemia, or administering hormone-replacement therapy), is approximately 30% (Manson et al, 1995; Wannamethee et al, 2004). In England, .9.5 million is spent treating obesity and a further .12.5 million is spent treating obesity-induced conditions such as cardiovascular disease and type 2 diabetes (Erens and Primatesta, 1998; National Audit Office, 1999; Alpert, 2004).There are also indirect costs such as sickness, absence and premature death which cost the National Audit Office (1999) in the region of 2.1 million per annum. The cumulative costs equate to 1.5% of the NHS expenditure (National Audit Office, 1999).

In England, over the last 18 years there has been an upward trend in the number of obese people. The most recent figures suggest that 17% of men and 21% of women are obese and 56% of men and 46% of women are overweight (Hall, 1996; Erens and Primatesta, 1998). Obesity is not restricted to adults and childhood obesity is on the increase (Rudolf et al, 2001). According to Danielzik et al (2004), 9.2% of girls and 11.2% of boys are obese in Sweden. A similar percentage of girls (9.6%) and boys (6.5%) are overweight (Hall, 1996). Weight problems in children appear to commence when the child is as young as 3 or 4 years (Bundred et al, 2001).

Overweight individuals have a BMI (kg/m^sup 2^) greater than 24.9 as estimated for the normal weight range. Obese individuals have a BMI (kg/m^sup 2^) greater than 30. Obesity and overweight is assessed using the BMI. This is a measurement of height and weight, calculated by weight in kg/height in m^sup 2^. Readings provided are used as an indicator of obesity. Individuals with a BMI of >30 kg/ m^sup 2^ are classified as obese (Table 1).

Central adiposity or fat that is localized around the abdomen is recognized as an indicator of obesity (Donahue and Abbott, 1987; McKeigue et al, 1991; Green et al, 2000). For this reason, the waist circumference is also used as an indicator of obesity and clinical risk of developing complications arising as a result of being obese. For example, males with a waist circumference greater than 102cm or 37.5 inches and females with a waist circumference greater than 88 cm or 31.5 inches will be classified as obese.

Waist circumference is used alone with the BMI as an indication of obesity, because in the obese individual fat disposition is centrally located around the waist line (centralized adiposity). A waist circumference of more than 35 inches is thought to be characteristic of upper body obesity (Wadden et al, 2002). These measurements are used as a guide in the assessment of the obese individual.

Suggested pathogenesis of obesity

Obesity is an abnormality of the feeding regulatory mechanism where the obese person will continue to eat beyond the daily nutritional requirements (Lemonc and Burke, 2004). This may be owing to the belief that eating three meals per day is a normal practice or eating may be a form of comfort that can relieve stressful situations (Labib, 2003). In addition to overeating, it has been suggested that obesity is caused by an abnormality of fat metabolism where inadequate quantities of lipase in adipose tissue contribute to reduced clearance of lipids, which then promotes fat storage (Havel, 2004).

The impact of surplus fat as a result of consumption of excessive high-energy foods cannot be ignored. Changes in eating habits and activity levels are thought to lie at the heart of obesity (Wadden et al, 2002). According to Labib (2003), obesity is reflected in the deposition of excess bodily fat caused by the ingestion of excessive food intake which cannot be used by the body as energy. In addition, there is an imbalance between the quantity of food consumed and the amount of exercise taken on a daily basis. Poods that are high in fat and glucose are used for energy – if excessive amounts of these foods are consumed, fat is stored in adipose tissue and carbohydrate is stored as glycogen in the liver and muscle (Labib, 2003).

The relationship between obesity and genetic influences is thought to exist but clear evidence supporting a definite link is lacking. Douchard and Pcrusse (1993) and Gouchard et al (1990) suggest that genetic factors are responsible for approximately 25- 70% of the variations in body weight. The search for an obesity gene continues, but two disease-causing mutations have been discovered: prohormone convertase 1 (PMO) and pro-opiomelanocortin (POMC). Research is being carried out to determine their role in common genetic variants of obesity.

PMO and POMC have both been associated with the onset of obesity. Jackson et al (1997) and Krude et al (1998) suggest that there is an association between POMC and phenotypical manifestations such as red hair, infertility and adrenal insufficiency. Although these phenotype characteristics may correlate with the onset of obesity, the related mechanism and trigger for the onset of obesity is unclear. Krude et al (1998) state that PMO may be linked to obesity, but as yet no further exploration has been undertaken.

Figure 1, The relationship between leptin and obesity. CNS- central nervous system.

Table 1. Classification of overweight and obesity in adults according to body mass index (BMI) and waist circumference

Leptin is a leading area of research in obesity. The protein leptin was discovered in 1994 in adipose tissue. It is proposed that leptin has many functions: it modifies the function of cerebral nerve cells (Friedman and Halaas, 1998), is involved with neurones specific to appetite-regulating neuropcptides (Montague et al, 1997) and regulates processes such as blood pressure, bone mass, adipocytes, muscle cells and immune function.

Leptin is also thought to be involved in the modulation of intracellular signalling processes such as Janus-activating kinase which has been associated with leptin resistance and obesity (Strobel et al, 1998; Ozata et al, 1999). By understanding the role of leptin in signal transduction, there is potential for new targets for anti-obesity drug development. More recently, obese individuals who exercised and lost 5% of their weight were found to have reduced levels of serum leptin (Miller et al, 2004) which implies that leptin levels can be modified by exercise-induced weight loss (Figure 1).

Table 2. Complications associated with obesity

Complications of obesity

The aim of treating obesity is to reduce comorbidity and reduce the twelve-fold risk of early mortality (WHO, 1998; Andres, 1999; Labib, 2003). Numerous complications are associated with obesity (Table 2). The rate at which the risk of health-related complications develops is related to the physical fitness of the individual (Wei et al, 1999). The health-related effects of being overweight or obese can continue until old age (WHO, 1998). Women who are non-smokers and have a BMI >32 kg/m^sup 2^ have a similar relative risk of cardiovascular mortality to a female smoker with a BMI

As the global problem of obesity continues, there is an ev\er- increasing need for the evolvement of a nursing role as an obesity nurse specialist. The recent NICE (2001b) guidelines and Green et al (2000) have illustrated how the practice nurse can be of benefit in the management of the obese patient. This role requires specific educational preparation in the epidemiology of obesity, the underlying pathology, and its manifestations, the effect of obesity on health, the role of dietary and behavioural management and the pharmacological management of the condition.

Table 3. Body systems that can be affected by obesity

Education and training for this role needs to be developed in collaboration with a consultant in obesity or a health education centre. The role could also involve supplementary prescribing practice. The nurse undertaking this role would act as health educator whether in the primary or secondary care settings. The increasing need for nurse involvement in the management of obesity is necessary if this evolving epidemic is to be managed.

Clinical assessment of the obese individual

Green et al (2000) identified the roles and benefits of using practice nurses as educators for patients who are obese. This is congruent with NICE guidelines (2001b) which suggest that the practice nurse can be a point of contact for the patient and provide advice and management for the obese person. The obese individual should be referred to a specialist obesity clinic which is equipped with appropriate-sized chairs for obese people, weighing scales that can measure -weights up to 31.5 stones or 200kg and large blood pressure cuffs. The obesity nvirse specialist should obtain a detailed history of the weight gain with exploration of the reason for the referral from a GP. A detailed history would explore the factors listed in Table 4.

It is also important to assess the individual’s perception of the problem. Kuchler and Variyam (2003) found that many obese people failed to recognize their overweight or obese status. People who arc obese or who are overweight often do not appreciate the severity of the problem and therefore may be hesitant to participate in a weight- reduction programme, or to explore their eating habits (Labib, 2003). Obese individuals often underestimate the quantity of the food they consume by as much as 50% (Wadden et al, 2002).Treatment history should also consider any pharmacological measures that have been used, e.g. sibutramine.

Table 4. Factors that need to be considered when taking a history

Psychological aspects of eating disorders should be reviewed for underlying psychological features such as loneliness, boredom or stress. Additional triggers that may promote weight gain include divorce, bereavement, stress related to employment or relationships, family concerns, illness or limited mobility (French et al, 1997). Family history of a parent or partner who is also obese may be an indicator of familial predisposition (Labib, 2003). The weight of the partner may be an indication of shared dietary habits and lifestyle; in particular, level of activity and exercise are key promoters in the development of obesity (Labib, 2003).

It is also important to undertake a dietary history of the individual and explore the consumption of high-energy foods and soft drinks, e.g. french fries, hamburgers and coca cola (Cronibie, 1999). High-energy foods are generally high in fat with a greater storage capacity than carbohydrate or protein.

Current medication history should be explored, particularly as many drugs can induce weight gain. Common examples include antidepressants, antipsychotics, insulin, sulphonylureas, thiazolidinediones, steroid hormones and anticonvulsants (Pijil and Meinders, 1996).

Physical examination is part of the overall health assessment and should include height, weight, waist circumference, blood pressure, and examination of manifestations of obesity such as varicose veins, peripheral oedema or hyper-pigmented plaques which resemble moles and are common in obese patients. It is also essential to be able to exclude genetic predisposition or medical conditions that predispose to obesity such as type 2 diabetes, Cushing’s disease or hypothyroidism. Further investigations for determining any underlying cause of obesity are outlined in Table 5.

Table 5. Investigations to determine underlying cause of obesity

Treatment

Obesity is a chronic health problem that requires long-term care involving dietary and behavioural modification with a plan of physical exercise. Table 6 identifies the modes of treatment that can be offered that are dependent on BMI (Wadden et al, 2002).The principal aim of oweight management is to ensure that there is a negative energy balance for a period of at least 3 months. This is to promote a weight reduction of at least 10-15%, followed by a period of long-term maintenance which can hopefully maintain weight loss (Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network, 1996). This can be achieved through diet, physical activity and behavioural treatment (Wadden et al, 2002).

Table 6. Obesity management plan

Dietary modification aims to ensure the individual maintains a healthy, balanced diet which is low in saturated fat and high in complex carbohydrate sufficient to allow for a deficit in energy balance of 500-600 kcal/day for males and females (Crombie, 1999). Such a deficit is sufficient to achieve a weight loss of 0.5-1.0 kg/ week.

According to Wadden (1998), the management programme should identify eating patterns and behaviours and thinking habits related to food that are essentially unhealthy. The goal in selecting treatment is to maximize improvements in weight and health while minimizing risks associated with therapy (Wadden et al, 2002).

Practice nurses are ideally placed to help instigate primary care prevention strategies for the obese individual (Crombie, 1999; NICE, 2001a). Opportunistic screening can be instigated as part of a primary prevention strategy, e.g. BMI and waist circumference measurements. Such a strategy can be managed by the practice nurse or obesity nurse specialist in obesity management (NICE, 2001a). This form of primary care prevention strategy should identify individuals who are keen to lose weight or require counselling in order to prevent additional weight gain (Crombie, 1999).

Obese individuals need support to help them accept that even 5 kg in weight loss can be beneficial, even if it means that the person continues to be overweight. A 10% weight loss is beneficial and a step in the right direction. Nurses need to support obese individuals by discussing the weight problem and the severity on the patients health. This -will enable the nurse to gain insight into the magnitude of the problem and to negotiate realistic goals in terms of weight loss and to support and provide dietary advice which is acceptable for the individual (Green et al, 2000).

Figure 2. Diagrammatic representation of Bariatric surgery.

A diet that is high in fat is a contributory factor to the development of obesity. Fat is a high-energy food that is rich in calories and stored in adipose tissue. Nurses should encourage obese individuals to reduce their fat intake by 30-35% and supplement their diet with carbohydrate up to 55%, as this will provide energy in the form of simple and complex sugars (Gibney, 1995).

Carbohydrate is a low-energy dense component of the diet which is able to reduce hunger, unlike high-energy dense components, such as fat, which is also stored as adipose tissue. Nurses can do this by discussing the types of foods the patients consume in terms of fat content and try to apportion the intake of fat in order to reduce the consumption.

In reality, a weight loss of 5-15% should be viewed as a successful outcome as it may improve a health complication such as hypertension, type 2 diabetes or hypercholesterolaemia (Wadden et al, 2002). Dietary modification should be promoted in conjunction with a weekly programme of exercise as weight gain can continue in individuals who remain inactive (Leiter et al, 1999). The maintenance/introduction of physical exercise is a major contributing factor to the success of any obesity management programme (Klem, 1997), evidenced by lower risk of weight gain (About Obesity, 2000). In developing an obesity management plan collaboratively with the patient, the nurse should consider the current level of fitness of the individual and social circumstances, e.g. whether he/she lives alone, is employed, has family support, children, social routine and financial concerns. Advice should be tailored in order to set mutually agreed targets and goals.

Children are also becoming increasingly obese and can develop into obese adults (Wilson et al, 2003). It is important, therefore, that school nurses are involved in school-based programmes that target young children aged 5-10 years, encourage them to eat healthily and educate children of the need to take part in physical exercise programmes (Wilson et al, 2003). With respect to both children and adults, the obesity epidemic is a cause for concern and should be a signal for the need for the development of obesity research units and the implementation of the obesity nurse specialist role (WHO, 2001).

Pharmacological management and surgery, such as bariatric surgery (Figure 2), which should only be undertaken for people with morbid obesity, are secondary options (NICE, 2001a). Pharmacological management should be considered as part of a comprehensive programme that involves dietary and behaviour modification and physical activity approved by NICE (2001a,b). Two anti-obesity products, sibutramine and orlistat, are approved by NICE (2001b).

Sibutramine is a serotonin-noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor (Ukai, 2004). Its anti-obesity effects relate to the exocytotic (controlled) release of dopamine within the limbic system and caudate nucleus of the brain. Dopamine is the precursor of the catecholamines, adrenaline and norad\renaline, which are released at nerve terminals in the brain – they act peripherally at the inhibitory synapse (presynaptic terminal), hence increasing the metabolic rate, inhibiting gastrointestinal motility and increasing the feelings of satiety (NICE, 2001b), as sibutramine acts by altering the chemical messages that control how a person thinks and feels about food.

Treatment with sibutramine has shown to reduce weight by 4.8kg which may relate to a 5%-1 0% reduction in body weight. This reduction in weight leads to reductions in the BMI (O’Meara et al, 2002).

Sibutramine is normally recommended for periods of up to 12 months with review after 3 months of actual -weight loss (Labib, 2003). The major side-effects are dose-related and are caused by sympathomimetic activity whereby the effects of the sympathetic nervous system are mimicked causing the release of adrenaline which acts via beta 1 adrenergic receptors leading to an increase in blood pressure and heart rate (Wadden et al, 2002). For this reason, sibutramine is not recommended for individuals with a history of congestive cardiac failure, cardiac arrhythmias, hypertension or stroke (NICE, 2001b). As there is a tendency to increase blood pressure, individuals who take sibutramine should have regular blood pressure monitoring every 2 weeks for the first 3 months, then monthly for 3 months, then at least every 3 months (British Medical Association and Royal Pharmaceutical Society, 2004). Minor sideeffects include dry mouth, constipation, headache and insomnia (Labib, 2003).

Owing to its mode of action, sibutramine should not be prescribed for individuals who are taking serotonin-selective reuptake inhibitors or monoamine oxidase (MAO) inhibitors (Labib, 2003). Sibutramine acts to inhibit the reuptake of noradrenaline and serotonin at the nerve ending. MAO inhibitors act as enzyme inhibitors for the MAO enzyme and in so doing they maintain the level of noradrenaline and serotonin by stopping the breakdown of the neurotransmitter when they have re-entered the nerve endings. These drugs have opposing actions. The coadministration of MAO inhibitors and sibutramine would lead to toxicity within the central nervous system.

The second medicine that is available for the treatment of obesity is orlistat. Orlistat is a pancreatic/intestinal lipase inhibitor which blocks the absorption of approximately 33% of fat contained in a meal (NICE, 2001b). Undigested fat is excreted in the stools. Orlistat is licensed for patients with a BMI >30kg/m^sup 2^ or a BMI >28kg/m^sup 2^ with evidence of risk factors (hypertension, type 2 diabetes or hyperlipidaemia). The following criteria need to be met to use orlistat (NICE, 2001b):

* Individuals must have attempted long-term control of body weight using lifestyle measures without success

* Individuals must have embarked on a new attempt to lose weight and have lost 2.5kg in the month before commencing treatment

* License for use for up to 24 months

* Individuals must be between 18 and 75 years of age.

To continue using orlistat, patients must show evidence of a 5% weight reduction in the first 3 months of treatment and a cumulative weight loss of at least 10% after the 6 months of therapy (NICE, 2001b).

By blocking the absorption of fat molecules in the intestinal tract and excreting roughly 30% of the fat that would have been absorbed, orlistat causes ‘fatty stools’, urgency, increased frequency of defaecation, often with anal leakage or oily spotting (faecal leakage of fat globules). These side-effects may encourage individuals to limit their fat intake (NICE, 2001b).

After 6 months of therapy, reductions in total cholesterol, ratio of cholesterol to high-density lipids, systolic and diastolic blood pressure can be expected. After several months of therapy 10% weight loss would be expected. The drug should lead to a reduction in comorbidity and an increase in patient wellbeing from the weight loss itself. Weight loss after cessation of treatment with an anti- obesity drug is typically regained over a period of 3 years, but at a slower pace (NICE, 2001b).

Conclusion

Obesity is a global disease which is independent of age and has major implications for healthcare costs. One of the reasons for the cost is the development of secondary conditions such as hypertension, type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular disease, cancer, depression, arthritis and sickness absence from employment. Treatment options include dietary and behavioural modification, and a programme of physical activity and pharmacological management to reduce weight.

One of the challenges of a prevention strategy is individualized education programmes that offer the necessary health education on lifestyle, nutrition and eating habits which targets single parents and individuals from low socioeconomic groups. In order to meet the challenge of the obesity epidemic, consideration should be given to the appropriate preparation of nurses for a specialist role in obesity management.

KEY POINTS

* Obesity is a health condition that is reaching global proportions.

* In order to combat the health problems that are attributed to obesity, a comprehensive health promotion programme is required.

* Screening procedures are needed that will target the obese or overweight individual.

* Nurses who have an interest in obesity management can be educated and trained to take on new roles as obesity nurse specialists.

About Obesity (2000) Obesity Causes and Facts. NCERx Ltd, Staines, Middlesex (www.about-obesity.co.uk) (accessed 27 January 2005)

Alpert M (2004) Obesity cardiomyopathy: pathophysiology and evolution of the clinical syndrome. Am J Med Set 321(4): 225-36

Al-Sendi A, Shetty P, Musaiger AO (2003) Prevalence of overweight and obesity among Bahraini adolescents: a comparison between three different sets of criteria. Eur J Clin Nutr 57(3): 471-4

Andres R (1999) Beautiful hypotheses and ugly fats. The BMI- mortality association. Obes Res 7: 417-19

Bouchard C, Perusse L (1993) Genetic aspects of obesity. Ann NY Acad Sci 699: 26-53

Bouchard C, Tremblay A, Despres J (1990) The response to long- term overfeeding in identical twins. New Engl J Med 322: 1477-82

British Medical Association and Royal Pharmaceutical Society (2004) British National Formulary. BMA/RPS, London

Bundred P, Kitchiner D, Buchan I (2001) Prevalence of overweight and obese children between 1989 and 1998: population-based series of cross-sectional studies. BMJ 322: 326-328

Crombie N (1999) Obesity management. MHS Stand 13(47): 43-6

Danielzik S, Czerwinski-Mast M, Langnase K, Dilba B, Muller MJ (2004) Parental overweight, socioeconomic status and high birth weight are the major determinants of overweight and obesity in 5-7- year-old children: baseline data of the Kiel Obesity Prevention Study (KOPS). Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 28: 1494-502

Denke M, Sempos C, Grundy S (1993) Excess body weight: an under- recognized contributor to high blood cholesterol levels in white American men. Arch Intern Med 98: 855-9

Donahue R, Abbott R (1987) Central obesity and coronary heart disease in men. Lancet 2: 1215

Erens B, Primatesta P (1998) Health Survey for England: Cardiovascular Disease. The Stationery Office, London

French S, Folsom A, Jeffrey R (1997) Weight variability and incident disease in older women: the Iowa women’s health study. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 21: 217-23

Friedman JM, Halaas JL (1998) Leptin and the regulation of body weight in mammals. Nature 395: 763-70

Gibney MJ (1995) Epidemiology of obesity in relation to nutrient intake. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 19(Suppl 5): 51-3

Green SM, McCoubrie M, Cullingham C (2000) Practice nurses’ and health visitors’ knowledge of obesity assessment and management. J Hum Nutr Diet 13(6): 413-23

Hall C (1996) Call for radical rethink on treatment of obesity. Daily Telegraph 13 March: 9

Halsted CH (1999) Obesity: effects on the liver and gastrointestinal tract. Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care 2(5): 425-9

Havel PJ (2004) Update on adipocyte hormones: regulation of energy balance and carbohydrate/lipid metabolism. Diabetes 53(Suppl 1): S143-51

International Association for the Study of Obesity (2000) About Obesity. Centre for Research on Energy Metabolism, Laval Hospital Research Centre (www. obesite.chaire. ulaval.ca/iotf.htm) (last accessed 11 January 2005)

Jackson R, Creemers J, Ohagi S (1997) Obesity and impaired prohormone processing associated with mutations in the human prohormone convertase 1 gene. Nat Genet 16: 303-6

Kanazawa M, Yoshiike N, Osaka T, Numba Y, Ziminet P, Inoue S (2002) Criteria and classification of obesity in Japan and Asia- Oceania. Asia Pac J Clin Nutr 11(Suppl 8): S732-7

Klem ML (1997) A descriptive study of individuals successful at long-term maintenance of substantial weight loss. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 239-46

Krude H, Bierbermann H, Luck W (1998) Severe early-onset obesity, adrenal insufficiency and red hair pigmentation caused by POMC mutations in humans. Nat Genet 19:155-7

Kuchler GFI, Variyam JNI (2003) Mistakes were made: misperception as a barrier to reducing overweight. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 27(7): 856-61

Labib M (2003) The investigation and management of obesity. J Clin Pathol 56: 17-25

Leiter L, Abbott D, Campbell N, Mendelson R, Ogilvie RI, Chockalingam A (1999) Recommendations on obesity and weight loss. CMAJ 160(Suppl 9): S7-12

Lemone P, Burke K (2004) Medical Surgical Nursing. Critical Thinking in Client Care. 3rd edn. Prentice Hall, New Jersey

McKeigue PM, Shah B, Marmot MG (1991) Relation of central obesity and insulin resistance with high diabetes prevalence and cardiovascular risk in South Asians. Lancet 337: 382-6

Manson J, Willett W, Stampfer M et al (1995) Body weight and mortality among women. N Engl J Med 333: 677-85

Miller GD, Nicklas BJ, Davis CC, Ambrosius WT, Loeser RF, Messier SP (2004) Is serum leptin related to physical function and is it modifiable through weight loss and exercise i\n older adults with knee osteoarthritis? Int J Obes 28: 1383-90

Montague C, Farooqui I, Whiteahead J (1997) Congential leptin deficiency is associated with severe early-onset obesity in humans. Nature 387: 903-8

National Audit Office (1999) Tackling Obesity in England. Report of the Comptroller and Auditor General (HC22). The Stationery Office, London

NICE (2001a) Obesity. NICE, London

NICE (200Ib) Orlistat forTreatment of Obesity in Adults. NICE, London (www.mce.org.uk/pdf/Orlistat_patient_leaflet_eng lish.pdf) (last accessed 14 January 2005)

O’Meara S, Riemsma R, Shirran L, Mather L, ter Riet G (2002) The Clinical Effectiveness and Cost-Effectiveness of Sibutramine in the Management of Obesity: A Technology Assessment. Health Technology Assessment Report Vol 6 No 6. York Publishing Services, York (Executive summary: www.hta.nhsweb.nhs.uk/fullmono/mon606.pdf) (last accessed 14 January 2005)

Ozata M, Ozdemir I, Licinio J (1999) Human leptin deficiency caused by a missense mutation: multiple endocrine defects, decreased sympathetic tone and immune system dysfunction indicate new targets for leptin action, greater central than peripheral resistance to the effects of leptin, and spontaneous correction of leptin-mediated defects. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 84: 3686-95 (Erratum in J Clin Endoriinol Metab 2000 85(1):416)

Pijil H, Meinders E (1996) Bodyweight change as an adverse effect of drug treatment: mechanisms and management. Drug Safe 14: 328-42

Rudolf M, Sahota P, Barth J (2001) Increasing prevalence of obesity in primary school children: cohort study. BMJ 322: 1094-5

Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network (1996) Obesity in Scotland: Integrating Prevention with Weight Management. A National Clinical Guideline Recommended for Use in Scotland. Pilot Edition. SIGN, Edinburgh

Stampfer M, Maclure K, Colditz G (1992) Risk of symptomatic gallstones in women with severe obesity. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 652-8

Strobel A, Issad T, Camoin L (1998) A leptin missense mutation associated with hypogonadism and morbid obesity. Nat Genet 18: 213- 5

Ukai K (2004) Sibutramine induces potential-dependent cxocytotic release not carrier mediated release of dopamine and 5- hydroxytryptamine. Eur J Pharmacol 484: 209-15

Wadden T (1998) New goals of obesity treatment: a healthier weight and other ideals. Primary Psychiatry 5: 45-54

Wadden TA, Brownell KD, Foster GD (2002) Obesity: responding to the global epidemic. J Consult Clin Psychol 70: 510-25

Wannamethee SG, Shaper AG, Whincup PH, Walker M (2004) Overweight, obesity and the burden of disease and disability in elderly men. Int J Obes 28(11):1374-1382

Wei M, Kampert J, Barlow C (1999) Relationship between low cardiorespiratory fitness and mortality in normalweight, overweight, and obese men. JAMA 282:1547-53

WHO (1998) Obesity: Preventing and Managing the Global Epidemic. Report of a World Health Organization Consultation on Obesity.WHO, Geneva

WHO (2001) Controlling the Global Obesity Epidemic. WHO, Geneva

Wilson P, O’Meara C, Summerbell C, Kelly S (2003) The prevention and treatment of childhood obesity. Qual Saf Health Care 12:65-74

Maggi Banning is Principal Lecturer, Canterbury Christ Church University College, Chatham Maritime, Kent

Accepted for publication: January 2005

Copyright Mark Allen Publishing Ltd. Feb 10-Feb 23, 2005

Comparative Efficacy of Olopatadine 0.1% Ophthalmic Solution Versus Levocabastine 0.05% Ophthalmic Suspension Using the Conjunctival Allergen Challenge Model

Key words: Conjunctival allergen challenge – Levocabastine – Ocular allergy – Olopatadine

SUMMARY

Objective: To compare the efficacy of olopatadine and levocabastine in reducing ocular allergic itching and vascular hyperemia (redness) induced by conjunctival allergen challenge.

Research design and methods: The study was a randomized, double- masked, contralateral study using the conjunctival allergen challenge (CAC) model. At Visit 1, subjects with a positive allergen skin test and a history of allergic conjunctivitis were administered increasing concentrations of allergen until at least a moderate grade 2 ocular itching and conjunctival redness response was obtained in both eyes. Allergic signs were graded on standardized 0- 4 scales. Subjects who reacted positively were re-challenged at Visit 2 with the pre-determined concentration of allergen. Subjects who again responded with at least a grade 2 bilateral ocular itching and conjunctival redness score at Visit 2 were eligible for drug evaluation. At Visit 3, subjects received olopatadine in one eye and levocabastine in the contralateral eye according to a computer- generated randomization scheme generated prior to commencement of the study. Ocular discomfort was then graded in both eyes. Subjects were bilaterally challenged with the predetermined concentration of allergen 27 min after topical drug administration, such that the first post-challenge assessment was made 30 min post-drug instillation. Allergic signs and symptoms were evaluated at 3 min, 10 min, and 20 min post-challenge and safety and efficacy analyses were performed.

Results: Sixty-eight subjects received study drug and were included in the safety and efficacy analyses. Ocular itching scores for olopatadine were significantly lower than levocabastine at 3 min and 10min post-challenge (p

Conclusion: Olopatadine treated eyes had significantly less itching and redness than levocabastine treated eyes after conjunctival allergen challenge. Olopatadine was also associated with less discomfort upon instillation than levocabastine.

Introduction

The signs and symptoms of allergic conjunctivitis can be inhibited by modulating the allergic process at various levels ranging from tear dilution, to local vascular constriction, to inhibition of mediator activity after release, and, ultimately, inhibiting the mast cell from reacting in the presence of a sensitizing agent. The most non-specific of these is washing and dilution of antigen and mediators from the eye with tear substitutes. The notable anti-allergic benefit received from topical placebo in clinical ocular allergic trials can be attributed to this cleansing effect. Pharmacologie agents used for allergy therapy can be topical alpha-adrenergic agonists, which act to locally constrict blood vessels in the conjunctiva and whiten the eye^sup 1-3^. However, these agents have a limited duration of action; considering their indicated dosing frequency, they may not provide all-day coverage for prevention of allergy signs and symptoms. These agents should also be used with caution since a rebound effect may be demonstrated with topical ocular use. Vasoconstrictors are usually used in association with topical H^sub 1^ histamine receptor antagonists that competitively block histamine receptors on nerve endings and vascular tissue, thus inhibiting ocular itching, as well as redness and swelling in the more powerful and newer agents. Histamine is known to be the quintessential mediator responsible for the signs and symptoms of seasonal and perennial allergic conjunctivitis4,5.

Levocabastine 0.05% (Livostin* 0.05% levocabastine hydrochloride ophthalmic suspension, Novartis Ophthalmics, East Hanover, NJ) is a topical ocular H^sub 1^ antihistamine indicated for the relief of the signs and symptoms of seasonal allergic conjunctivitis. Clinical studies have shown the duration of action to be at least four hours6,7 and the recommended dose is one drop instilled in each eye four times per day8.

Prevention of mast cell degranulation is the ultimate goal in the pharmacological intervention of allergy. Topical mast cell stabilizers available for use in the eye, such as cromolyn sodium, nedocromil, pemirolast, and lodoxamide tromethamine, act by inhibiting degranulation of the mast cell and release of pro- inflammatory mediators of allergic conjunctivitis. The mast cell is known to play a primary role in the pathogenesis of immediate hypersensitivity reactions9-13. Allergens bind to IgE antibodies on the mast cell surface, causing changes in membrane calcium transit that lead to disruption of the cell membrane and spilling of the mast cells’ contents into the extracellular space. Mast cell stabilizers are thought to interfere with this calcium step in cell membrane destabilization. Clinical benefit is derived from these agents if used prophylactically, so these agents should be used for a loading period prior to allergen exposure.

Olopatadine 0.1% (Patanol[dagger] olopatadine hydrochloride ophthalmic solution 0.1%, Alcon Laboratories, Fort Worth, TX) was the first topical ocular anti-allergy agent developed specifically for use in the eye. It confers a dual mechanism of action, acting as an H^sub 1^ receptor antagonist and stabilizer of conjunctival mast cells. Due to this unique dual activity, olopatadine can bind to conjunctival H^sub 1^ receptors, inhibiting histamine’s immediate vascular and neuronal activity and providing rapid relief of itching, redness, and swelling. Simultaneously, the molecule also stabilizes conjunctival mast cells to prevent further waves of mast cell activation and degranulation. Clinical data indicate that the duration of action of olopatadine 0.1% is at least 12 h^sup 14^. Product labeling recommends one drop two times per day, or every 6h- 8h8.

Evaluation of the clinical efficacy of ocular anti-allergy therapies can be a difficult process due to the variety of environmental factors that influence the ocular allergic response. Conjunctival allergen challenge (CAC) has been validated as a standard allergic conjunctivitis model15 that reliably produces the signs and symptoms of the disease in a consistent and reproducible manner for all subjects16-21. The strict grading system with photographic documentation mitigates the subjectivity of rating signs and symptoms. The CAC model is ideal for evaluating the onset and duration of action of anti-allergic drugs.

In the present study, the efficacy of olopatadine was compared to levocabastine in the treatment of ocular itching and redness elicited by conjunctival allergen challenge. Since levocabastine has a shorter duration of action6,7, only time points within one hour of medication dosing were evaluated, as both drugs should have been at peak activity at these times.

Subjects and methods

Subjects

This was a randomized, double-masked, single-center study. The investigators obtained Institutional Review Board (IRB) approval for both the protocol and informed consent before study initiation. Subjects with a history of seasonal allergic conjunctivitis and a positive diagnostic test for allergic disease (skin test) for grasses, trees, cat hair and dander, or ragweed within the previous 24 months were eligible for enrolment.

During the course of the study, and for appropriate wash-out periods, subjects were not allowed to use any other eye drops or systemic medications that could affect the outcome of the study (ie. topical or systemic antihistamines, mast cell stabilizers, or corticosteriods). Subjects were excluded if any systemic or ocular diseases were present that could have interfered with the conduct of the study. In addition, all subjects were at least 18 years of age and had no known sensitivity to any of the medications used in the study.

At the first study visit, subjects read and signed the IRB- approved consent form. Inclusion/exclusion criteria were verified for each subject and medical and medication history was collected onto the appropriate case report forms. Since pregnancy was an exclusion criterion, women of childbearing potential were given a pregnancy test. Clinical research staff were responsible for data collection on forms, and the same ophthalmologist was assigned to evaluate subjects at all three visits.

Each subject received a visual acuity evaluation, a fundus examination and a biomicroscopic slit-lamp examination of the ocular surface, cornea, anterior chamber, and iris. Gross and biomicroscopic examination allowed evaluation of baseline ocular redness in conjunctival, ciliary and episcleral vessel beds assessed separately on a standardized grading scale ranging from 0 (none) to 4 (extremely severe). Itching was graded by subjects on a scale of 0 (none) to 4 (severe).

Subjects who presented with any itching or with redness greater than grade 1 in either eye in any vessel bed at baseline were ineligible to continue in the study.

The threshold concentration of allergen needed to elicit a sufficient (bilateral grade 2 redness and itching) allergic reaction wa\s determined as previously described16 and confirmed at Visit 2. At the end of Visits 1 and 2, one or two drops of a commercially available antihistamine/decongestant combination (usually VasoconA) were instilled into each eye for relief of allergic signs and symptoms when necessary for relief of any temporary discomfort from allergen challenge.

After 14 3 days, subjects returned for the Visit 3 drug evaluation. Visual acuity was determined and the ocular surface, cornea, anterior chamber, and iris were evaluated as at previous visits. Subjects who presented with any itching or redness greater than grade 1 in either eye were ineligible for the study. Qualifying subjects were then randomly assigned to receive olopatadine 0.1% hydrochloride ophthalmic solution (Alcon Laboratories; Fort Worth, TX) in either the right or left eye and levocabastinc 0.05% hydrochloride ophthalmic suspension (Novartis; East Hanover, NJ) in the contralateral eye. Randomization schedules were computer generated by an independent technician. Two drops of masked study drug from a bottle labeled ‘Right Eye’ were instilled in the right eye and two drops of study drug from a bottle labeled ‘Left Eye’ were instilled in the left eye according to the randomization table. Immediately after drug instillation, ocular discomfort was recorded, if present, as an adverse event.

Twenty-seven minutes after drug instillation, subjects were challenged in each eye with the allergen concentration determined at Visit 1 and confirmed at Visit 2. This time point was chosen such that the post-allergen challenge evaluations 3 min, 10 min, and 20min after CAC occurred 30 min, 37 min, and 47 min after drug administration. This protocol assured that both drugs were assessed at their peak activity, ocular itching and redness were evaluated as at Visits 1 and 2. At the end of Visit 3, subjects received one or two drops of an antihistamine/decongestant for relief of allergic signs and symptoms if necessary.

Adverse events, both spontaneous and solicited, were recorded throughout the study. Adverse events were defined as any untoward changes from baseline in a subject’s ophthalmic or medical health, with the exception of the efficacy parameters (itching and redness). Specific safety parameters included visual acuity, ocular surface, cornea, anterior chamber, iris, and fundus evaluations.

Statistical Analysis

The primary efficacy variables evaluated in the study were itching and redness. While chemosis, lid swelling, and tearing are all signs and symptoms that significantly decrease with anti- allergy therapy, itching and redness are the sign and symptom of primary concern to patients and in previous studies have demonstrated the greatest significant change from control values. A sum redness score was calculated from the conjunctival, ciliary, and episcleral redness scores as previously described16. Statistically significant differences between the treatment arms were identified.

Analyses of variance were conducted with a 0.05 probability of a type 1 error. The software program, SAS v6.12, was used by an impartial external statistician for analyses of itching, conjunctival, ciliary, and episcleral redness, and sum redness scores. Descriptive statistics were provided for each of the variables. The demographic characteristics of subjects in each treatment group (i.e., age, sex, race, iris color) were tabulated.

Results

Sixty-eight (68) subjects completed the study: mean age was 37 years with a range of 18 years-67 years; 54.4% (37) subjects were male and 45.6% (31) were female. All subjects were Caucasian.

Olopatadine treated eyes had significantly less itching (analysis of variance, p

Similar results were obtained for redness. Conjunctival, episcleral and ciliary hyperemia were all significantly less (p ≤ 0.002) in olopatadine-treated eyes than in levocabastine- treated eyes at 3 min, 10 min, and 20min post-challenge (Table 1). The sum redness score was also significantly less at all three time points postchallenge (p

Adverse events related to olopatadine and levocabastine were mild and easily tolerable. No serious adverse events occurred during the study, and no subject was discontinued from the study due to an adverse event. Of the 68 subjects, one (1.5%) experienced ocular pruritis after drug administration. This was categorized as possibly related to the use of levocabastine. No ocular adverse events, other than discomfort, were noted. No clinically significant decrease in visual acuity or changes in ocular signs were observed.

A spontaneous complaint of burning or stinging was more frequent immediately after levocabastine versus olopatadine administration. Of the 68 subjects who were exposed to both drugs, three (4.41%) reported ocular discomfort in the olopatadine eye and 18 (26.5%) in the levocabastine treated eye. These data were not analyzed statistically.

Figure 1. Average itching score: olopatadine was significantly more effective than levocabastine in reducing ocular itching at 3 min and 10min after drug instillation (*p ≤ 0.001). The standardized scale on which subjects rated their ocular itching ranged from 0 (none) to 4 (severe)

Discussion

Conjunctival hyperemia and itching are the defining sign and symptom of ocular allergy. Itching, in particular, is the hallmark of ocular allergy; in the absence of all other signs, the presence of ocular itching is considered diagnostic for allergy. The results of this clinical trial demonstrate that olopatadine causes a greater reduction in peak ocular itching than levocabastine. Ocular redness, determined as the sum redness score, or in individual vascular beds (conjunctival, ciliary, episcleral) was also significantly less in olopatadine versus levocabastine treated eyes. Redness can be considered a more general outcome of mast cell degranulation, since vascular dilation and leakage is elicited not only by histamine but also through the contribution of a variety of inflammatory mediators. The greater efficacy of olopatadine in reducing redness in all quadrants and at all time points may be due to mast cell stabilization and histamine receptor blockage eliciting a greater impact on inhibition of the histamine-mediated allergic response.

Ophthalmic antihistamines have greatly evolved over the last 20years. Traditionally, first generation molecules such as antazoline and pheniramine were uncomfortable upon instillation, with weak and non-specific histamine receptor binding leading to ocular drying, little efficacy and a short (2h) duration of effect. Levocabastine was a welcome improvement to these molecules since it offered a more comfortable formulation and a longer-acting and more efficacious treatment. This pharmacological evolution continued with the introduction of olopatadine, shown in pre-clinical and clinical studies to be a highly selective, potent, and long acting H^sub 1^ antagonist as well as a stabilizer of mast cells22,23. Its clinical efficacy in preventing mast cell degranulation has been documented by significant decreases in tear histamine levels, neutrophils, eosinophils, lymphocytes, and ICAM 1 expression in olopatadine- treated eyes after allergen challenge24. In comparative CAC trials similar to the present study, olopatadine was shown to be more effective in reducing the signs and symptoms of allergy than systemic loratadine25, nedocromil (mast cell stabilizer)26, loteprednol (corticosteroid)27, azelastine28, ketotifen29 and epinastine30 (dual mechanism molecules).

Table 1. Mean ( standard deviation of the mean) ocular redness scores in olopatadine and levocabastine-treated eyes 3 min, 10 min, and 20 min after conjunctival allergen challenge of sensitized individuals (N = 68)

Figure 2. Average redness score: olopatadine was significantly more effective than levocabastine in reducing ocular redness 3 min, 10 min, and 20 min after drug instillation (*p

Levocabastine is widely used throughout the world, and yet a direct comparison of olopatadine with levocabastine had never been performed. In clinical allergic conjunctivitis trials, levocabastine has been shown to have comparable activity to azelastine31 and lodoxamide32 and to be not significantly different from epinastine33.

Subjects complained of ocular discomfort with less frequency in the olopatadine versus levocabastine treated eyes. This greater comfort may be a clinical advantage in children or other particularly sensitive individuals such as dry eye patients with allergy.

In summary, olopatadine and levocabastine were both safe and well tolerated. One drop of olopatadine was shown at time points within one hour of drug administration to be significantly more effective than levocabastine in reducing ocular itching and redness induced by conjunctival allergen challenge.

Acknowledgments

This study was supported by an unrestricted research grant from Alcon Laboratories, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas.

* Livostin is a registered tradename of Novartis Ophthalmics, East Hanover, NJ

[dagger] Patanol is a registered tradename of Alcon Laboratories, Fort Worth, TX

References

1. Gilman AG, Ral TW, Nies AS, Taylor P editors, Goodman and oilman’s the pharmacological basis of therapeutics. New York (NY): Pergamon Press, 1990

2. Christiansen SC. Evaluation and treatment of the allergic patient. Int Ophthalmol Clin 1998;28:282

3. Wiens JJ, Jackson WB. New directions in the therapy for ocular allergy. I\nt Ophthalmol Clin 1988;28:332

4. Abelson MB, Soter NA, Simon MA, Dohlman J, Allansmith MR. Histamine in human tears. Am J Ophthalmol 1977; 83(3):417-8

5. Udell IJ, Abelson MB. Animal and human ocular surface response to a topical nonimmune mast-cell degranulation agent (compound 48/ 80). Am J Ophthalmol 1981;91(2):226-30

6. Abelson MB, George MA, Schefer K Smith LM. Evaluation of the new ophthalmic antihistamine 0.05% levocabastine in the clinical allergen challenge model of allergic conjunctivitis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1994;94(3 pt 1):458-64

7. Abelson MB, George MA, Smith LW Evaluation of 0.05% levocabastine versus 4% sodium cromolyn in the allergen challenge model. Ophthalmology 1995; 102:310-6

8. Physicians desk reference for ophthalmic medicines, 32nd ed. Medical Economics: Thomson Healthcare, 2004 [p. 208-9; 289]

9. Weston JH, Udell IJ, Abelson MB. H^sub 1^ receptors in the human ocular surface. Invest Ophthalmol Vis Sci 1981;20(Suppl):32

10. Jonnings B. Mechanisms, diagnosis and management of common ocular allergies. J Am Optom Assoc 1990;61:s32

11. Trocme SD, Kephart GM, Allansmith MR, Bourne WM, Gleich GJ. Conjunctival deposition of eosinophil granule major protein in vernal keratoconjunctivitis and contact lens-associated giant papillary conjunctivitis. Am J Ophthalmol 1989;108:57

12. Clamam HN. The biology of the immune response. J Am Med Assoc 1987;258:2834

13. Allansmith MR, Ross RN. Ocular allergy and mast cell stabilizers. Survey Ophthalmol 1986;30:229

14. Berdy GJ, Spangler DL, Bensch SS, Berdy SS, Brusatti RC. A comparison of the relative efficacy and clinical performance of olopatadine hydrochloride 0.1% ophthalmic solution and ketotifen fumarate 0.025% ophthalmic solution in the conjunctival antigen challenge model. Clin Ther 2000:22:826-33

15. Abelson MB, Chambers WA, Smith L. Conjunctival allergen challenge. A clinical approach to studying allergic conjunctivitis. Arch Ophthalmol 1990;108:84-8

16. Abelson MB, Smith LM. The conjunctival provocation test: a new method for the evaluation of therapeutic agents. Invest Ophthalmol Vis Sci 1988 29(Suppl):45

17. Stegman R, Miller D. A human model of allergic conjunctivitis. Arch Ophthalmol 1975;93:1354

18. Proud D, Sweet J, Stein R Inflammatory mediator release on the conjunctival provocation of allergic subjects with allergen. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1990;85:896

19. Moeller C, Bjorksten B, Nisson G. The precision of the conjunctival provocation test. Allergy 1984;39:37

20. Bisgaard H, Ford-Hutchinson AW, Charleson S. Detection of leukotriene C4-like immunoreactivity in tear fluid from subjects challenged with specific allergen. Prostaglandins 1984;27:369

21. Kari O, Salo OP, Bjorksten F. Allergic conjunctivitis, total and specific lgE in the tear fluid. Acta Ophthalmol 1985;63:97

22. Sharif NA, Xu SX, Yanni JM. Olopatadine (AL-4943A) ligand binding and functional studies on a novel, long acting H1-selective histamine antagonist and anti-allergic agent for use in allergic conjunctivitis. J Ocul Pharmacol Ther 12(4):1996:401-7

23. Yanni JM, Stephens DJ, Miller ST, et al. The in vitro and in vivo ocular pharmacology of olopatadine (AL-4943A), an effective anti-allergic/antihistaminic agent. J Ocul Pharmacol Ther 1996;12:389-400

24. Leonardi AA, Abelson MB. Double masked, randomized, placebo controlled, clinical study of the mast cell stabilizing effects of treatment with olopatadine in the conjunctival allergen challenge. Clin Ther 2003;25:2539-52

25. Abelson MB, Welch DW An evaluation of onset and duration of action of patanol (olopatadine hydrochloride ophthalmic solution 0.1%) compared to Claritin (loratadine 10 mg) tablets in acute allergic conjunctivitis in the conjunctival allergen challenge model. Acta Ophthalmologica Scandinavica 2000; 230:60-3

26. Butrus S, Greiner JV, Discepola M, Finegold I. Comparison of the clinical efficacy and comfort of olopatadine hydrochloride 0.1% ophthalmic solution and nedocromil sodium 2% ophthalmic solution in the human conjunctival allergen challenge model. Clin Ther 2000;22:1462-72

27. Berdy GJ, Stoppel JO, Epstein AB. Comparison of the clinical efficacy and tolerability of olopatadine hydrochloride 0.1% ophthalmic solution and loteprednol etabonate 0.2% ophthalmic suspension in the conjunctival allergen challenge model. Clin Ther 2002;24:918-29

28. Spangler Dl, Bensch G, Berdy GJ. Evaluation of the efficacy of olopatadine hydrochloride 0.1% ophthalmic solution and azelastine hydrochloride 0.05% ophthalmic solution in the conjunctival allergen challenge model. Clin Ther 2001;23:1272-80

29. Berdy GJ, Spangler DL, Bensch G, et al. A comparison of the relative efficacy and clinical performance of olopatadine hydrochloride 0.1% ophthalmic solution and ketotifen fumarate 0.025% ophthalmic solution in the conjunctival antigen challenge model. Clin Ther 2000;22(7):826-33

30. Lanier BQ, Finegold I, D’Arienzo P, Granet D, Epstein AB, Ledgerwood GL. Clinical efficacy of olopatadine vs epinastine ophthalmic solution in the conjunctival allergen challenge model. Curr Med Res Opin 2004;20:1227-33

31. Giede C, Metzenauer P, Petzold U, Ellers-Lenz B. Comparison of azelastine eye drops with levocabastine eye drops in the treatment of seasonal allergic conjunctivitis. Curr Med Res Opin 2000;16:153-63

32. Richard C, Trinquand C, Bloch Michel E. Comparison of topical 0.05% levocabastine and 0.1% lodoxamide in patients with allergic conjunctivitis. Eur J Ophthalmol 1998;8:207-16

33. Whitcup SM, Bradford R, Lue J, et al. Efficacy and tolerability of ophthalmic epinastine: a randomized, double-masked, parallel group, active and vehicle controlled environmental trial in patients with seasonal allergic conjunctivitis. Clin Ther 2004:26:29- 34

CrossRef links are available in the online published version of this paper: http://www.cmrojournal.com

Paper CMRO-2707_4, Accepted for publication: 08 August 2004

Published Online: 16 November 2004

doi:10.1185/030079904X5724

Mark B. Abelson1,2,3 and Jack V. Greiner2,3

1 Ophthalmic Research Associates, North Andover, MA, USA

2 Schepens Eye Research Institute, Boston, MA, USA

3 Department of Ophthalmology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, USA

Address for correspondence: Dr Jack V. Greiner, Ophthalmic Research Associates, 863 Turnpike St., North Andover, MA 01845, USA

Copyright Librapharm Dec 2004

PAROTID ENLARGEMENT in Patient With HIV

Abstract

Patients with bilateral parotid swellings are seen in the dental office. The swellings may be initiated by HIV. Diagnosis demands a thorough clinical examination combined with imaging. Usually, multiple parotid cysts are present. However, the authors wish to call attention to those HIV patients whose swellings are caused by a lymphocytic infiltration. A case report is used to illustrate signs and symptoms.

MULTIPLE ORGAN INVOLVEMENT and symptomatology are the rule in patients with HIV. As can be expected, the oral cavity and its surrounding structures often are targeted by the virus. Head- and neck-related symptoms are seen in 41% of HIV-positive patients at their initial visit,1 with parotid salivary gland enlargement present in 5% to 10% of all HIV patients.23 The parotid involvement is usually bilateral and is associated with cervical lymphadenopathy.

The bilateral parotid swelling is most frequently a reflection of the presence of multiple lymphoepithelial cysts within the gland proper. Occasionally, it reflects an aggressive intraglandular lymphoproliferation. Both processes, the development of cysts and lymphoidal infiltration, are responses to active viral replication within the parotid.4 They probably represent different morphologic manifestations of an exuberant reactive lymphoid hyperplasia.5

Itescu4 et al. have noted that patients with bilateral parotid swelling and cervical lymphadenopathy also have an elevated and persistent circulating CD8 lymphocytosis and a diffuse visceral CD8 lymphocytic infiltration, which frequently cause an interstitial pneumonitis. This symptom complex has been defined as the diffuse infiltrative CD8 lymphocytosis syndrome (DILS),4 and it is considered a subset of HIV patients. DILS patients do not adhere to the standard CD4/CD8 cell depletion scenario. Surprisingly, they have a significant CD8 elevation. Additionally, they seem to have a more favorable prognosis, which appears to be a result of a genetically determined immune response to HIV.4

With the virus infecting increasing numbers of individuals, many positive patients will inevitably be seen in the dental office. It is the purpose of this paper to alert dental professionals to the need to closely scrutinize the parotid glands of their patients to ascertain the possible existence of parotid swelling. Such swellings mandate imaging procedures to determine their nature. In an HIV- positive patient, cysts are usually present, but as stated, the parotid enlargement can also be caused by an intense CD8 lymphocytic infiltration.6,7 This florid lymphoid response may originate from hyperplastic activity of intraparotid lymph nodes, from a proliferation of normally present intraglandular lymphocytes and/or from an extraglandular infiltration into salivary gland tissue.8 Although the salivary gland lymphoproliferation mostly consists of CD8 lymphocytes, 20% to 25% of these T cells are CD4 in lineage, and some are even B cells.9

Case Report

A 45-year-old HIV-positive female was referred to the Salivary Gland Center (SGC) of Columbia University School of Dental and Oral Surgery. In November 2003, she had sought medical care and was treated with antibiotics for a pulmonary infection. At that time, she was found to be HIV-positive. Upon subsidence of her pulmonary problem, she returned (December 2003) for a consultation regarding bilaterally swollen parotid glands. The infectious disease clinic ordered a CT scan, anticipating the presence of parotid lymphoepithelial cysts. No such cysts were seen. The CT scan report stated that both glands were enlarged with foci of increased density present (Figure 1). In addition, multiple enlarged lymph nodes were seen in the submandibular and cervical areas. Infiltrative changes in the lung were also reported.

The patient was tentatively diagnosed with the oilS variant of HIV after blood studies indicated a CD4 cell count of 445/MM^sup 3^ (normal 390-1770/MM^sup 3^) and an elevated CD8 cell count of 1630/ MM^sup 3^ (normal 240-1200/MM^sup 3^) . Because the CT scan did not visualize the expected pathognomonic cysts, further investigation of the parotid swellings was requested, and the patient was referred to the SGC.

When seen in the SGC (February 2004), the patient, as yet untreated for HIV, was in apparent good health. The patient voiced no complaints associated with her respiratory system. She was concerned about the cosmetic effect of the bilateral parotid swellings, which she said had been present for one year. Questioning indicated that the swellings caused little discomfort, and they did not fluctuate in size during meals.

Extraorally, parotid swellings were obvious with the right parotid larger than the left (Figure 2). Palpation revealed that both parotids were firmer than normal and essentially painless, with a bilateral lymphadenopathy present in both the submandibular triangle and the cervical area.

Intraorally, there were no signs of mucosal pathology. The mucosa was normally moist, with a free salivary flow evident from each parotid duct orifice.

A labial salivary gland biopsy was performed as an aid in ruling out a systemic pathologic process (Sjgreris syndrome, sarcoid) other than DILS. The histologie examination revealed the presence of a mixed chronic inflammatory infiltrate with a marked predominance of lymphocytes (Figure 3). A sialadenitis similar to that seen in Sjgren’s syndrome (SS) was noted. It was initially interpreted as a Chisholm grade 3.5, positive for SS.10 Subsequent immunocytochemical findings indicated that the lymphocytic infiltrate was dominated by CD8 cells, thus confirming a diagnosis of DILS. It now could be assumed from the serologic, imaging and histologie evidence that the parotid swellings were caused by a profound CD8 cell infiltration. With this definitive diagnosis, the patient was referred back to her physician for antiviral therapy and care.

Figure 1. CT scan, axial view. Enlarged parotid (P) glands. Most marked on right side.

Figure 2. Clinical view of bilateral parotid swellings (arrows).

Figure 3. Microscopic view of labial gland. Diffuse lymphocytic infiltration (L) replacing glandular mucous acini (A) (Hematoxylin- eosin stain x250).

Discussion

Clinically bilateral parotid swellings are seen in DILS. Even when the problem is clinically unilateral, imaging usually reveals bilateral involvement. The submandibular salivary gland is only occasionally involved. Our patient did not have the classic parotid cysts associated with HIV, and this created some doubt regarding a DILS diagnosis. Palpation did indicate firmness of both parotids, which probably was a reflection of the massive cellular lymphoidal infiltrate. In turn, the glandular infiltration mirrors and confirms the finding of the elevated circulating CD8 cell count.

Clinically, serology readily differentiates HIV from SS, but the parotid histologic pattern initially can be confused with SS. Differentiation rests in the fact that CD4 cells predominate in SS, while CD8 cells are the dominant feature in the salivary glands of the DILS variant of HIV. Serum counts in the classic HIV-positive untreated patient usually show a decrease in the CD4 cell count with a moderate lowering of the CD8 cells. Because our patient had DILS, a normal level of CD4 cells and an elevation of the CD8 cells were demonstrated. Furthermore, it can be assumed that the pneumonitis seen on the CT scan is representative of the visceral CDS infiltration associated with DILS.

DILS most commonly affects the salivary glands and lungs and, less frequently, the liver, kidney and gastrointestinal tract.4 The salivary glands and lungs contain abundant macrophage lineage cells. It is believed that the preferential CD8 cell infiltration into these locations reflects an immunologic response to the virus within the tissue macrophages.11 The minor salivary glands also have an extensive network of periacinar macrophages that have been shown to be infected with HIV in DILS patients.11 The increased presence of CD8 lymphocytes is likely to have originated in the expanded population of circulating CD8 lymphocytes responding to HIV-related antigens within salivary gland macrophages.11

In any systemic disease that implicates salivary gland tissue, the pathologic process can be expected to include both major and minor salivary glands. In this case, the labial gland histology served to mirror the existing parotid pathology. The accessibility and availability of labial salivary gland tissue make it a readily available diagnostic tool that can be used not only in the diagnosis of DILS, but also for the diagnosis of diverse conditions such as SS and sarcoid.

In the past, management of these parotid enlargements was accomplished by surgical gland removal.12 Today, a successful approach can be achieved with highly active antiretroviral therapy (HAART), a cocktail of viral inhibitors. Therapy with HAART results in cessation of viral replication, a consequent decrease in viral load and a return to more normal CD4/CD8 cell counts. It also has succeeded in eradicating parotid swellings and has become the therapeutic measure of choice.7,13,14 Unfortunately, treatment is lifelong because the immune system cannot totally clear residual virus, and viral rebound can be expected with interruption of therapy.

The natural history of the parotid lymphocytic hyperplasia seen i\n DILS is not fully known. Observation of these patients is mandatory because of the predisposition of HIV patients to develop malignant lymphomas.9,15 Fine-needle aspiration biopsy can serve as an effective diagnostic monitoring procedure.16 Because there were no clinical, radiologie or cytologic indications of malignancy in our patient, observation with periodic fine-needle aspiration biopsy was recommended5,17 in conjunction with HAART.

With the virus infecting increasing numbers of individuals, many positive patients will inevitably be seen in the dental office.

REFERENCES

1. Marcusen D, Sooy C. Otolaryngologic and head and neck manifestations of acquired immune defiency syndrome (AIDS). Laryngoscope 1988;95:401-5.

2. Schiodt M, Greenspan D, Daniels TE, Nelson J, Legott PJ, Warra DW, et al. Parotid gland involvement with xerostomia-associated labial sialadenitis in HIV-infected patients. J Autoimmun 1989;2:415- 25.

3. Soberman N, Leonidas JC, Berdon W, Bonagura V, Haller JO, Posner M, et al. Parotid enlargement in children seropositive for human immunodeficiency virus. AJR Am J Roentgenol 1991;157:553-6.

4. Itescu S, Brancato LJ, Buxbaum J, Gregersen PK, Rizk CC, Croxson TS, et al. A diffuse infiltralivc CD8 lymphocytosis syndrome in human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection: a host immune response associated with HLA-DR5. Ann Int Med 1990;112:3-10.

5. Casiano RR, Cooper JD, Gould E, Ruiz P, Uttamchandani R. Value of needle biopsy in directing management of parotid lesions in HIV- positivc patients. Head Neck 1991;13: 411-4.

6. Mandel L, Kim D, Uy C. Parotid gland swelling in HIV diffuse infiltrative CD8 lymphocytosis syndrome. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Palhol Oral Radiol Endod 1998:85:565-8.

7. Mandel L, Surattanont F. Regression of HIV parotid swellings after antiviral therapy: case reports with computed tomographic scan evidence. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Pathol Oral Radiol Endod 2002;94:454-9.

8. Schiodt M. HIV-associated salivary gland disease: a review. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Pathol 1992;73:164-7.

9. Itescu S, Winchester R. Diffuse infiltrative lymphocytosis syndrome: a disorder occurring in human immunodeficiency virus-1 infection that may present as a sicca syndrome. Rheum Dis Clin North Am 1992;18:683-97.

10. Chisholm DM, Mason DX. Labial salivary gland biopsy in Sjgren’s disease. J Clin Pathol 1968:21:656-60.

11. Itescu S, Dalton J, Zhang H, Winchester R. Tissue infiltration in a CD8 lymphocytosis syndrome associated HIV-1 infection has the phenotypic appearance of an antigenicalIy driven response. J Clin Invest 1993:91:2216-25.

12. Finfer MD, Schinella RA, Rothstein SG, Persky MS. Cystic parotid lesions in patients at risk for the acquired immunodeficiency syndrome. Arch Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg 1988:114:1290-4.

13. Craven DE, Duncan RA, Strain JR, O’Hara CJ, Steger KA, Jhamb K, et al. Response of lymphoepithelial parotid cysts to antiretroviral treatment of HIV-infected adults. Ann Intern Med 1998;128:455-9.

14. Uccini S, D’Offizi G, Angelici A, Prozzo A, Riva E, Antonelli G, et al. Cystic lymphoepithelial lesions of the parotid gland in HIV-1 infection. AIDS Patient Care STDS 2000:14:143-7.

15. Moulignier A, Authier FJ, Baudremont M, Pialoux G, Belec L, Polioka M, et al. Peripheral neuropathy in human immunodeficiency virus-infected patients with diffuse infiltrative lymphocytosis syndrome. Ann Neurol 1997;41:438-45.

16. Elliott JN, Oertel YC. Lymphoepithelial cysts of the salivary glands. Am J Clin Pathol 1990:93:39-43.

17. Huang RD, Pearlman S, Friedman VM, Loree T. Benign cystic vs. solid lesions of the parotid gland in HIV patients. Head Neck 1991;13:522-7.

Louis Mandel, D.D.S.; John Vakkas, D.D.S.

Copyright Dental Society of the State of New York Jan 2005

The Role of Glutamine in Intensive Care Unit Patients: Mechanisms of Action and Clinical Outcome

Patients in the intensive care unit are at high risk of glutamine depletion and subsequent complications. Several controlled studies and a meta-analysis have concluded that glutamine supplementation has beneficial effects on the clinical outcome of critically ill and surgical patients. These results may be explained by glutamine’s influences on the inflammatory response, oxidative stress, cell protection, and the gut barrier. In addition, glutamine may also improve glucose metabolism by reducing insulin resistance.

Keywords: glutamine, nutritional support, critical care, nosocomial infections, insulin resistance.

2005 International Life Sciences Institute

doi: 10.1301/nr.2005.feb.65-69

Introduction

Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in plasma and is involved in a wide variety of metabolic and biochemical processes. Although initially classified as a non-essential amino acid (since it can be synthesized de novo), glutamine has more recently been considered as conditionally essential in catabolic states.1 Glutamine contributes to the regulation of the redox status, is a precursor of glutathione2 and other amino acids, and also regulates protein synthesis.3 In addition, glutamine contributes to the synthesis of puric and pyrimidic bases and consequently of nucleic acids.3 Glutamine is also the preferential substrate of rapidly dividing cells such as enterocytes and immune cells, and thus can stimulate their proliferation.4,5 In hypercatabolic conditions, it has been reported that glutamine plasma levels are decreased, which is associated with a bad prognosis.6

Critically ill patients and patients after major surgery are at risk of malnutrition, bacterial translocation, and acquired infections. Up to 40% of patients in the intensive care unit (ICU) may acquire nosocomial infections.7 As a result, their lengths of stay and mortality risks, in addition to hospital costs, are increased.

Several studies have addressed the efficacy of parenteral or enteral supplementation with glutamine in reducing complication rates in critically ill and postoperative patients.8 Enteral supplementation with glutamine reduced infectious complications in critically ill patients9 and in trauma patients.10 Parenteral glutamine supplementation also reduced infectious complications in severely burned patients fed enterally11 and during secondary peritonitis.12 Glutamine supplementation has been associated with a decrease in mortality in some studies.11,13 Griffiths et al.15 reported that parenteral glutamine improved six-month outcome,14 and that the severity of complications and the associated in-ICU death rates were reduced in glutamine-treated patients.

In a randomized, controlled, double-blind multicenter trial, parenteral glutamine supplementation was evaluated in 114 critically ill patients admitted for multiple trauma, complicated surgery, pancreatitis, or sepsis.16 The patients did not differ at inclusion. Glutamine supplementation was associated with a lower incidence of complications: 41.4% compared with 60.7%, (p

The mechanisms possibly contributing to the beneficial effects of glutamine in ICU patients are summarized in Figure 1 and discussed below.

Glutamine and the Gut Barrier

The gut barrier plays a critical role in the defense of an organism, and alterations of this barrier may contribute to the incidence of infection. The gut barrier is regulated by a balance between cell proliferation and apoptosis and between protein synthesis and degradation. It has been reported that glutamine stimulates enterocyte proliferation4 and decreases human intestinal epithelial cell apoptosis.18 Glutamine also stimulates intestinal protein synthesis in epithelial cell lines,19 in animals,20 and in human duodenal mucosa.21 In addition, glutamine may decrease intestinal proteolysis by the inhibiting ubiquitin-ATP-dependent proteolytic pathway.21,22 Finally, van der Hulst et al.23 reported that glutamine limits the increase of intestinal permeability in critically ill patients.

Glutamine and Immune Function

Immune function is altered in critical illness, and decreases have been reported in trauma patients compared with healthy volunteers; D-related human leukocyte antigen (HLA-DR) expression plays a critical role in the induction of the cellular immune response.10 In trauma patients, parenteral glutamine supplementation restored HLA-DR expression in monocytes.10 Glutamine also stimulated lymphocyte proliferation in mice,5 and parenteral glutamine increased lymphocyte count during acute pancreatitis.24 Thus, glutamine may improve the cellular immune response during critical illness.

Glutamine and Glutathione

Glutamine provides the source of glutamate, an amino acid precursor of glutathione. The glutathione system is one of the major mechanisms protecting against oxidative stress in the cells. Reduced glutathione (GSH) content is decreased in the skeletal muscle of surgical patients25 and in the intestinal mucosa during inflammatory disease.26 Experimental data have reported that glutamine increases splanchnic GSH production,27 as well as tissue concentrations of GSH in catabolic animals.28 Glutamine also prevents GSH depletion of Peyer’s patch in endotoxemic mice.29 In surgical patients, glutamine maintains muscle and plasma GSH concentrations to the preoperative level.30

Figure 1: Potential mechanisms explaining the benefits of glutamine in critically ill and surgical patients.

Glutamine and Heat Shock Proteins

Glutamine has a protective effect on cells by inducing the production of heat shock proteins, which protect cells against toxic agents or pathologic insults.31 Indeed, experimental data have shown that glutamine enhances heat shock protein expression in human peripheral blood mononuclear cells,32 in intestinal epithelial cell lines,33,34 and in several organs in rats.35 We have previously reported that enteral glutamine increases hsp32 (or heme oxygenase- 1) expression in human duodenal mucosa.36 Heme oxygenase-1 induction is considered to be a protective response because of its anti- inflammatory, anti-apoptotic, and antioxidant effects. An enhancement of heat shock protein expression is usually associated with an attenuation of tissue lesions.35,37

Glutamine and Inflammatory Response

During acute pancreatitis, glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition decreases the inflammatory response, as shown by a decrease in IL-838 or CRP.24 Experimental data have also shown that glutamine influences the intestinal inflammatory response. Indeed, glutamine decreases IL-8 production by the intestinal epithelial cell line Caco-2,39 and IP-10 and ITAC chemokines by the intestinal epithelial cell line HCT-8.40 Using a model of cultured duodenal mucosa, we showed that enterai glutamine reduces IL-6 and IL-8 basal production,41 in a specific manner compared with isonitrogenous and isoosmolar controls.42 In inflammatory conditions, glutamine reduces IL-6 and IL-8 production but also increases anti-inflammatory cytokine IL-10 production.43 This result is in accordance with previous data in parenteral-fed rats.44 In this latter study, glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition maintained IL-4 and IL- 10 production by lamina propria mononuclear cells44 and also maintained intestinal and extra-intestinal IgA levels in rats.45 On the other hand, glutamine did not affect intestinal nitric oxide production.46,47

Glutamine and Glucose Metabolism

In addition to the regulation of the inflammatory response, pro- inflammatory cytokines such as IL-6 and IL-8 can play a major role in the mechanism of insulin resistance, since they are up-regulated in adipose cells from insulin-resistant individuals.48 Thus, modulation of the inflammatory response should influence insulin sensitivity. Indeed, glutamine supplementation reduces hyperglycemia episodes and insulin needs in critically ill patients.16 It has been reported that pronounced hyperglycemia may increase the risk of complications in such patients49 and in patients with diabetes,50 and that intensive insulin therapy with tight glycemic control decreases mortality and morbidity in ICU patients.51 Nevertheless, the mechanisms of action of this beneficial effect remain unclear; both insulin by itself and the reduction of hyperglycemia may contribute to the clinical effect.49 Therefore, modulation of glucose metabolism could improve outcome in severe illness.

Studies in healthy subjects have indicated that enteral infusion of glutamine increases the insulin level,21,52 but data on the effects of gl\utamine on insulin resistance are still limited. Supplementation of obese mice with glutamine resulted in persistent reductions in both plasma glucose and insulin levels.53 In dogs, glutamine infusion increased whole body glucose utilization (mainly muscular and hepatic) markedly and whole-body glucose production to some extent.54 In addition, parenteral alanine-glutamine administration attenuates insulin resistance in multiple trauma patients.55 Thus, glutamine may have potential benefits during clinical situations associated with insulin resistance.

Conclusion

Several clinical studies performed in critically ill and surgical patients have indicated that provision of supplemental glutamine reduces the rate of infectious complications and lengths of hospital stay. These beneficial effects may be explained by several mechanisms, including the modulation of inflammatory and oxidative responses, as well as the induction of heat shock proteins and the reduction of insulin resistance.

References

1. Souba WW. Nutritional support. N Engl J Med. 1997;336:41-48.

2. Hong RW, Rounds J, Helton WS, Robinson M, Wilmore DW. Glutamine preserves liver glutathione after lethal hepatic injury. Ann Surg. 1992;215:114-119.

3. Labow B, Souba WW. Glutamine. World J Surg. 2000;24:1503-13.

4. Rhoads JM, Argenzio R, Chen W, et al. L-glutamine stimulates intestinal cell proliferation and activates mitogen-activated protein kinases. Am J Physiol. 1997;272(5 part 1):G943-G953.

5. Calder PC, Yaqoob P. Glutamine and the immune system. Amino Acids. 1999;17:227-41.

6. Planas M, Schwartz S, Arbos MA, Farriol M. Plasma glutamine levels in septic patients. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1993;17:299- 300.

7. Vincent JL, Bihari DJ, Suter PM, et al. The prevalence of nosocomial infection in intensive care units in Europe. Results of the European Prevalence of Infection in Intensive Care (EPIC) study. EPIC International Advisory Committee. JAMA. 1995;274:639-644.

8. Novak F, Heyland DK, Avenell A, Drover JW, Su X. Glutamine supplementation in serious illness: a systematic review of the evidence. Crit Care Med. 2002:30:2022-2029.

9. Houdijk AP, Rijnsburger ER, Jansen J, et al. Randomised trial of glutamine-enriched enteral nutrition on infectious morbidity in patients with multiple trauma. Lancet. 1998;352:772-6.

10. Boelens PG, Houdijk AP, Fonk JC, et al. Glutamine-enriched enteral nutrition increases HLA-DR expression on monocytes of trauma patients. J Nutr. 2002:132:2580-2586.

11. Wischmeyer PE, Lynch J, Liedel J, et al. Glutamine administration reduces Gram-negative bacteremia in severely burned patients: a prospective, randomized, double-blind trial versus isonitrogenous control. Crit Care Med. 2001;29:2075-2080.

12. Fuentes-Orozco C, Anaya-Prado R, Gonzlez-Ojeda A, et al. L- Alanyl-glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition improves infectious morbidity in secondary peritonitis. Clin Nutr. 2004;23:13- 21.

13. Goeters C, Wenn A, Mertes N, et al. Parenteral L-alanyl-L- glutamine improves 6-month outcome in critically ill patients. Crit Care Med. 2002;30:2032-2037.

14. Griffiths RD, Jones C, Palmer TE. Six-month outcome of critically ill patients given glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition. Nutrition. 1997;13: 295-302.

15. Griffiths RD, Allen KD, Andrews FJ, Jones C. Infection, multiple organ failure, and survival in the intensive care unit: influence of glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition on acquired infection. Nutrition. 2002;18:546-552.

16. Dchelotte P, Bleichne G, Hasselmann M, et al. Improved clinical outcome in ICU patients receiving alanyl-L-glutamine (Dipeptiven)-supplemented total parenteral nutrition (TPN): a French double-blind multicenter study. Clin Nutr. 2004;21(suppl 1):1-2.

17. Tjader I, Rooyackers O, Forsberg AM, et al. Effects on skeletal muscle of intravenous glutamine supplementation to ICU patients. Intensive Care Med. 2004;30:266-275.

18. Evans M, Jones D, Ziegler TR. Glutamine prevents cytokine- induced apoptosis in human colonic epithelial cells. J Nutr. 2003;133:3065-3071.

19. Le Bacquer O, Nazih H, Blottiere H, et al. Effects of glutamine deprivation on protein synthesis in a model of human enterocytes in culture. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2001;281: G1340-G1347.

20. Higashiguchi T, Noguchi Y, Meyer T, Fisher J, Hasselgren PO. Protein synthesis in isolated enterocytes from septic or endotoxaemic rats: regulation by glutamine. Clin Sci (Lond). 1995;89:311-319.

21. Coffier M, Claeyssens S, Hecketsweiler B, et al. Enteral glutamine stimulates protein synthesis and decreases ubiquitin mRNA level in human gut mucosa. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2003; 285:G266-G273.

22. Adegoke OA, McBurney MI, Samuels SE, Baracos VE. Modulation of intestinal protein synthesis and protease mRNA by luminal and systemic nutrients. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2003;284: G1017-G1026.

23. van der Hulst RR, van Kreel BK, von Meyenfeldt MF, et al. Glutamine and the preservation of gut integrity. Lancet. 1993;341:1363-1365.

24. Ockenga J, Borchert K, Rifai K, Manns MP, Bischoff SC. Effect of glutamine-enriched total parenteral nutrition in patients with acute pancreatitis. Clin Nutr. 2002;21:409-416.

25. Luo JL, Hammarqvist F, Andersson K, Wernerman J. Skeletal muscle glutathione after surgical trauma. Ann Surg. 1996;223:420- 427.

26. Miralles-Barrachina O, Savoye G, Belmonte-Zalar L, et al. Low levels of glutathione in endoscopic biopsies of patients with Crohn’s colitis: the role of malnutrition. Clin Nutr. 1999;18:313- 317.

27. Cao Y, Feng Z, Hoos A, Klimberg VS. Glutamine enhances gut glutathione production. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1998;22:224- 227.

28. Hong RW, Rounds JD, Helton WS, Robinson MK, Wilmore DW. Glutamine preserves liver glutathione after lethal hepatic injury. Ann Surg. 1992;215:114-119.

29. Manhart N, Vierlinger K, Spittler A, et al. Oral feeding with glutamine prevents lymphocyte and glutathione depletion of Peyer’s patches in endotoxemic mice. Ann Surg. 2001;234:92-97.

30. Flaring UB, Rooyackers OE, Wernerman J, Hammarqvist F. Glutamine attenuates post-traumatic glutathione depletion in human muscle. Clin Sci (Lond). 2003 ;104:275-282

31. Wischmeyer PE. Glutamine and heat shock protein expression. Nutrition. 2002;18:225-228.

32. Wischmeyer PE. Riehm J, Singleton KD, et al. Glutamine attenuates tumor necrosis factor-alpha release and enhances heat shock protein 72 in human peripheral blood mononuclear cells. Nutrition. 2003; 19:1-6.

33. Chow A, Zhang R. Glutamine reduces heat shock-induced cell death in rat intestinal epithelial cells. J Nutr. 1998;128:1296- 1301.

34. Wischmeyer PE, Musch M, Madonna MB, Thisted R, Chang E. Glutamine protects intestinal epithelial cells: role of inducible HSP70. Am J Physiol. 1997; 272(4 part 1):G879-G884.

35. Wischmeyer PE, Kahana M, Wolfson R, et al. Glutamine induces heat shock protein and protects against endotoxin shock in the rat. J Appl Physiol. 2003;90:2403-2410.

36. Coffier M, Le Pessot F, Leplingard A, et al. Acute enteral glutamine infusion enhances heme oxygenase-1 expression in human duodenal mucosa. J Nutr. 2002:132:2570-2573.

37. Wang W, Guo X, Koo M, et al. Protective role of heme oxygenase-1 on trinitrobenzene sulfonic acid-induced colitis in rats. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2001;281:G586-G594.

38. De Beaux A, O’Riordain M, Ross J, Jodozi L, Carter D, Fearon K. Glutamine-supplemented total parenteral nutrition reduces blood mononuclear cell interleukin-8 release in severe acute pancreatitis. Nutrition. 1998;14:261-265.

39. Huang Y, Li N, Liboni K, Neu J. Glutamine decreases lipopolysaccharide-induced IL-8 production in Caco-2 cells through a non-NF-κB p50 mechanism. Cytokine. 2003;22:77-83.

40. Marion R, Coffier MM, Gargala G, Ducrott P, Dchelotte P. Glutamine and the CXC chemokines IL-8, Mig, IP-10 and ITAC in human intestinal epithelial cells. Clin Nutr. 2004;23:579-585.

41. Coffier M, Miralles-Barrachina O, Le Pessot F, et al. Influence of glutamine on cytokine production by human gut in vitro. Cytokine. 2001;13:148-154.

42. Coffier M, Marion R, Leplingard A, et al. Glutamine decreases interleukin-8 and interleukin-6 but not nitric oxide and prostaglandins E2 production by human gut in-vitro. Cytokine. 2002;18:92-97.

43. Coffier M, Marion R, Ducrott P, Dechelotte P. Modulating effect of glutamine on IL-1β-induced cytokine production by human gut. Clin Nutr. 2003; 22:407-413.

44. Fukatsu K, Kudsk KA, Zarzaur BL, et al. TPN decreases IL-4 and IL-10 mRNA expression in lipopolysaccharide stimulated intestinal lamina propria cells but glutamine supplementation preserves the expression. Shock. 2001;15:318-322.

45. Kudsk KA, Wu Y, Fukatsu K, et al. Glutamine-enriched total parenteral nutrition maintains intestinal interleukin-4 and mucosal immunoglobulin A levels. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 2000;24:270- 274.

46. Marion R, Coffier M, Leplingard A, et al. Cytokine- stimulated nitric oxide production and inducible NO-synthase mRNA level in human intestinal cells: lack of modulation by glutamine. Clin Nutr. 2003;22: 523-528.

47. Dilsiz A, Ciftci I, Aktan M, Grbilek M, Karagzglu E. Enteral glutamine supplementation and dexamethasone attenuate the local damage in rats with experimental necrotizing enterocolitis. Pediatr Surg Int. 2003;19:578-582.

48. Rotter V, Nagaev I, Smith U. Interleukin-6 (IL-6) induces insulin resistance in 3T3-L1 adipocytes and is, like II-8 and tumor necrosis factor-α, overexpressed in human fat cells from insulin-resistant subjects. J Biol Chem. 2003;278:45777-45784.

49. Preiser JC, Devos P, Van den Berghe G. Tight control of glycaemia in critically ill patients. Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care. 2002;5:533-537.

50. Mc Cowen KC, Malhotra A, Bistrian BR. Stress-induced hyperglycemia. Crit Care Clin. 2001;17: 107-124.

51. van den Berghe G, Wouters P, Weekers F, et al. Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients. N Engl J Med. 200\1;345:1359-1367.

52. Bouteloup-Demange C, Claeyssens S, Maillot C, et al. Effects of enteral glutamine on gut mucosal protein synthesis in healthy humans receiving glucocorticoids. Am J Physiol Gastrointest Liver Physiol. 2000;278:G677-G681.

53. Opara EC, Petro A, Tevrizian A, Feinglos MN, Surwit RS. L- glutamine supplementation of a high fat diet reduces body weight and attenuates hyperglycemia and hyperinsulinemia in C57BL/6J mice. J Nutr. 1996;126:273-279.

54. Borel MJ, Williams PE, Jabbour K, et al. Parenteral glutamine infusion alters insulin-mediated glucose metabolism. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1998;22: 280-285.

55. Bakalar B, Pachl J, Andel M, et al. Parenteral glutamine attenuates insulin resistance in multiple trauma patients. Intensive Care Med. 2003;19(suppl 1):388.

Drs. Coffier and Dchelotte are with Appareil Digestif Environnement Nutrition (ADEN EA 3234), IFR 23, Rouen, France.

Corresponding author: Prof. Pierre Dchelotte, Appareil Digestif Environnement Nutrition (ADEN EA 3234), IFR 23, Facult de Mdecine- Pharmacie, 22 Boulevard Gambetta, 76183 Rouen cedex, France; Phone: 02-32-88-64-65; Fax: 02-32-88-88-87; E-mail: pierre.dechelotte@chu- rouen.fr.

Copyright International Life Sciences Institute and Nutrition Foundation Feb 2005

Immobility: Geriatric Self-Learning Module

The Geriatric Resource Nurse Model is used at the University of Virginia to improve the competency of staff in caring for older adults. Eight self-learning educational modules were developed to address common concerns in hospitalized elders. The Immobility: Geriatric Self-Learning Module is published here, along with a post- test. This is the third in a four-part publication of self-learning modules.

The Geriatric Resource Nurses at the University of Virginia developed the Self-Learning Modules in Geriatric Care. The SPPICEES pneumonic addresses the eight distinct modules, each targeting a commonly encountered health concern of older adults across health care settings. These include:

S: Sleep

P: Problems with eating and nutrition

P: Pain

I: Immobility

C: Confusion

E: Elimination

E: Elder abuse

S: Skin

The modules were designed using a case study approach in order to encourage the learner to gain new knowledge as well as apply this knowledge. Each module includes two case studies, one applicable to the care of an older adult in the inpatient setting, and the other applicable to an older adult in the outpatient setting. Each module takes approximately 20 to 30 minutes to complete.

The completion of these self-study modules alone does not ensure the staff member is age-specific competent; this is determined through the observation and demonstration of behaviors while working directly with older adults. However, these modules will enhance the staff member’s knowledge as a foundational step in developing competent behaviors.

Purpose

The purpose of this module is to assist the health care professional in developing an increased awareness and sensitivity to the hazards of immobility in older adults. This module is also intended to enhance the reader’s repertoire of interventions to maximize mobility and prevent immobility.

Target Audience

This self-study module is directed toward health care professionals providing direct care to older adults in the inpatient or outpatient settings.

Objectives

At the conclusion of this module on immobility, the patient care staff will be able to:

1. Describe the vulnerability of older adults to the hazards of immobility.

2. Discuss the effects of immobility on specific body systems.

3. Identify specific interventions that might be taken in order to maximize mobility and minimize immobility in older adults.

Overview

Most individuals make the assumption that rest is an appropriate strategy to be taken when a person is ill or frail. This myth is of particular concern with older adults. Research has demonstrated the damaging effects of prolonged inactivity. Virtually every organ or body system promptly and progressively deteriorates when a person is inactive.

Immobility is of particular concern with hospitalized elders. In hospital settings the patient’s pneumonia may be successfully cured or his hip fracture fixed, but if activity is not encouraged aggressively, the patient may decline functionally during the hospital stay. Maintaining function is central to fostering health and independence in all older adults, regardless of the setting. Appropriate strategies for intervention include avoiding immobilization if at all possible, removing environmental deterrents to safe ambulation, developing an exercise program, and evaluating gait and endurance.

Case Study: Immobility in the Hospitalized Elder

H.H. is a 78-year-old male who has had an extensive cerebrovascular attack. He has limited weight-bearing ability on the left and is flaccid on the right. He is to be out of bed three times daily. The patient care attendant requests that the weight and lift team bring a Hoyer lift to facilitate a daily transfer because the patient is 6’4″ tall and weighs 260 lbs. The evening shift does not have this support available and staff believe they do not have enough assistance to get him out of bed. You express some concerns about this approach and review with the staff the physical and psychological hazards of immobility.

Discussion

By having this patient passively rather than actively participate in mobility, a progressive decline in his functional ability may occur secondary to disuse. It takes more nursing resources to care for a patient like this who is greatly (but not completely) dependent. Therefore, a concern exists that when less staff are available, patients like this quickly lose existing functional capacity.

The Physical Effects of Bedrest

Cardiovascular effects

* Progressive loss of fluid, primarily from the extracellular space

* Intravascular volume preferentially distributed in the upper body

* Loss of orthostatic competence (blood pressure drops positionally)

* Fall in stroke volume and cardiac output

* Increase in resting and submaximal heart rate

Musculoskeletal effects

* Loss of contractile force

* Shortening of muscle fibers and total muscle length

* Increase in calcium loss from the bone

Urinary tract effects

* Stagnation in calyces

* Incomplete bladder emptying

Pulmonary effects

* Cilia less effective

* Mucous pools

* Chest movement restricted in a supine position

Gastrointestinal effects

* Loss of appetite

* Decreased peristalsis

* Decreased ability to eat in a supine position

Skin effects

* Pressure ulcers

Psychological effects

* Anxiety

* Depression

* Disorientation

* Fostered dependency/learned helplessness

Did You Know?

* Pulmonary embolism is the most common cause of sudden unexpected death in the hospital.

* Recovery of orthostatic function in healthy young adults after prolonged bedrest can take several weeks; it may take considerably longer in elders.

* Daily loss of 1.3% to 3% of muscle strength occurs with immobility. A daily loss of 1.5% leg strength means a 10% loss in 1 week of bedrest.

* Contractures can begin to form after 8 hours of immobility. Active and/or passive range of motion can help prevent contractures.

* In a supine position, the vital capacity of the lungs is decreased by about 4%.

* The vulnerable older trauma patient on a backboard in the emergency room can show signs of skin breakdown within 3 hours of immobility.

* Bedrest itself appears to be a subtle form of sensory deprivation. At NASA, studies showed that normal, healthy young men kept in bed for several weeks experienced significant increases in anxiety, hostility, and depression, together with altered sleep pattern.

Case Study: An Outpatient AtRisk for Immobility

A.R. is an 82-year-old female who lives alone in low-income housing area for older adults. She is seen regularly in the outpatient medical clinic for hypertension and carotid stenosis. She has been instructed by her primary care provider to get more exercise and would like to do so, but is concerned about walking in what she considers an unsafe neighborhood. What advice do you give her?

Discussion

A.R. expresses an interest in beginning an exercise program and thus appears to be motivated. It is important to reinforce her willingness to exercise and emphasize the benefits of exercise. It is helpful to have a discussion about the types of exercises

that are important for helping older adults gain health benefits.

Types and Benefits of Exercises

* Endurance exercises increase breathing and heart rate.

* Strength exercises build muscle strength and increase metabolism.

* Balance exercises help prevent falls and the risk of loss of independence.

* Flexibility exercises help keep the body limber.

* In addition to physical benefits, regular exercise can improve mood and feelings of well-being.

Suggestions for designing a walking program when safety is an issue might include finding a walking partner and walking only in well-lit, easily observed areas; some communities have a “shopping mall walking program.”

“The good news…is that people can benefit from even moderate levels of physical activity.” Surgeon General of the United States

Immobility: Geriatric Self-Learning Module Post-Test

1. Hazards of immobility in hospitalized elders include:

a. Pressure ulcer,

b. Deep venous thrombosis.

c. Depression.

d. Pneumonia.

e. a and d.

f. All of the above.

2. The most important strategy in minimizing the risk of immobility is:

a. Avoiding hospitalization.

b. Getting the patient out of bed as soon as possible.

c. Medicating the patient to assure adequate rest at night.

d. Getting a physical therapy consult ordered.

3. The risk of skin breakdown in hospitalized elders is very high; therefore, it is essential to change position and alternate pressure hourly.

a. True

b. False

4. Older adult patients should be given maximal assistance with their activities of daily living because they may be weak and it is expected that hospital staff will provide this service.

a. True

b. False

5. Proper positioning is the most important strategy in preventing a contracture.

a. True

b. False

6. You are more likely to keep doing physical activity if:

a. You think that you will benefit from it.

b. Enjoy the activity.

c. Have access to the activity.

d. Can fit the activity into your daily schedule.

e. All of the above.

Post-Test Answers

1. f

2. a

3. a

4. b

5. b

6. e

Resources

Immobility

Corcoran, P. (1991). Use it or lose it – the hazards of bedrest and inactivity. Western Journal of Medicine, 154(5), 536-538.

Mobily, P.R., & Skemp, K. (1991). latrogenesis in the elderly: Factors of immobility. Journal of Gerontological Nursing, 17(9), 5- 11.

National Institutes of Health, (n.d.) Exercise: A guide from the National Institute on Aging. Retrieved January 6, 200\5, from http:/ /www.niapublic tions.org/exercisebook/index.asp

General Aging

Beers, M.H., & Berkow, R. (Ed.) (2000). Merck manual of geriatrics (3rd ed.). Whitehouse Station, NJ: Merck Research Laboratories.

Ebersole, P., & Hess, P.(Ed.) (1998). Toward healthy aging: Human needs and nursing response (5th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby.

Ham, R.J., & Sloane, P.D. (Eds.) (1997). Primary care geriatrics: A case-based approach (3rd ed.). St. Louis: Mosby.

Lueckenotte, A.G. (Ed.) (2000). Gerontologic nursing (2nd ed.). St. Louis: Mosby.

Kathy Fletcher, MSN, RN, APRN-BC, GNP, is Administrator, Senior Services, and Assistant Professor of Nursing, University of Virginia Health System, Charlottesville, VA.

Note: The Immobility: Geriatric Self-Learning Module is based on an earlier version written by Kathy Fletcher and Pat Hogan.

Copyright 2002 by the Rectors and Visitors of the University of Virginia. Reprinted here with permission.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Feb 2005

Focus on Levomepromazine

Key words: Antipsychotic – Anxiolytic – Mcthotrimeprazine – Phenothiazines – Schizoaffective disorder – Schizophrenia

SUMMARY

This is a review of the uses of levomepromazine in psychiatry, based upon MEDLINE, PSYCLIT and EMBASE literature searches.

The main indications for this drug in psychiatry are schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Levomepromazine’s sedative properties particularly fit it to use in psychiatric intensive care. There is also some evidence to suggest it has efficacy in drug-resistant psychosis, although this property of the drug does require further research.

In other areas of medicine levomepromazine has been used in: alleviating bronchoconstriction; as a preoperative sedative; in terminal pain control and postoperative analgesia; and in the control of nausea. Some antimycobacterial properties have been recorded.

The drug should not be prescribed to patients at high risk of accidental or suicidal overdose.

Introduction

In Canada, UK and most other European countries, levomepromazine (or methotrimeprazine) is marketed as Nozinan* (and in the US as Levoprome) and is available orally as levomepromazine maleate 25mg or as an intramuscular (IM) injection levomepromazine hydrochloride (a 2.5% isotonic solution in ampoules). The oral form of the drug is licensed for use in the UK for psychotic disorders, the intramuscular form is not. The intramuscular preparation is sometimes useful for rapid tranquillisation in severely disturbed patients with schizophrenia. Since the bioavailability of an intramuscular dose is higher than the bioavailability of an oral dose any initial IM dose should be in the order of 12.5 mg with a maximum IM dose of 50mg.

Levomepromazine was originally marketed by Rhne-Poulenc Rorer (Aventis) as an antipsychotic.

In psychiatry levomepromazine is used as a sedative and in the management of schizophrenia. Levomepromazine has been used in a variety of clinical areas – alleviating bronchoconstriction1, as a preoperative sedative2, in terminal pain control and postoperative analgesia3,4 and in the control of nausea5. Similar to some other phenothiazines, levomepromazine even has some antimycobacterial properties6.

This review considers the use of levomepromazine in psychiatry and is based on literature searches using MEDLINE, EMBASE and PSYCLIT.

Structure

Levomepromazine or methotrimeprazine is a phenothiazine aliphatic antipsychotic with the molecular formula C^sub 19^H^sub 25^N^sub 2^OS. Levomepromazine, therefore, belongs to the phenothiazine group of drugs, like chlorpromazine. Phenothiazines have a three-ring structure in which two benzene rings are linked by a sulphur and nitrogen atom. Levomepromazine’s chemical structure is (- )(dimethylamino-3 methyl-2 propyl)-10 methoxy-2 phenothiazine (Figure 1).

Pharmacokinetics and metabolism

Therapeutic levels of levomepromazine are achieved at serum concentrations between 0.02 mg/L and 0.14mg/L7.

Orally administered levomepromazine is subject to a first pass metabolism such that only 50% of the orally administered drug reaches the general circulation8. Plasma concentrations of levomepromazine reach their maximum levels 30 min-90 min after intramuscular injection, and 1 h-3 h after oral administration. The half-life of levomepromazine is 15 h-30 h. Levomepromazine has two major metabolites in man: the pharmacologically active N- monodesmethyl levomepromazine, which is almost as potent an antipsychotic as the parent drug; and levomepromazine sulphoxide, which is much less active. The metabolism is predominantly hepatic.

In different patients the half-life has been found to vary from 16.5 h to 77.8 h9. The individual variability in metabolising the drug may account for the variation in the therapeutic dose required in different individuals.

Pharmacology

The therapeutic actions of levomepromazine in schizophrenia and as an antipsychotic in general are largely ascribed to its dopamine blocking ability. However, it has been mooted that the drug may have some additional tendency to be useful in treatment-resistant schizophrenia and this has been linked to its receptor binding profile, which has been compared and contrasted to clozapine and chlorpromazine by Lal et al.10. In their study of the binding profile of levomepromazine in the human brain they found that levomepromazine showed significantly greater binding affinity for both alpha-1 and serotonin-2 binding sites than clozapine or chlorpromazine, which they thought significant. Levomepromazine has significantly greater binding to alpha-2 sites than chlorpromazine. The exact reasons why clozapine has a unique efficacy are perhaps more complex, however.

Figure 1. The molecular structure of levomepromazine

Early on in the literature, levomepromazine was referred to as an antidepressant neuroleptic. It seems to have acquired the term, antidepressant neuroleptic, because it is a potent serotonin 5-HT2 and alpha 1-adrenergic blocking agent and because it was noted that chronic administration affected the serotonin system in a manner similar to that produced by prolonged administration of antidepressants11. There is no substantial evidence to back the historical claims of antidepressant activity, and further research would be necessary in this regard.

The two major metabolites are N-monodesmethyl levomepromazine and levomepromazine sulphoxide. N-monodesmethyl levomepromazine may contribute to the antipsychotic effects of levomepromazine, but the sulphoxide metabolite lacks neuroleptic potency12. Both metabolites contribute to the autonomie side effects of the drug. N- monodesmethyl levomepromazine has a slightly higher potency than chlorpromazine on alpha-adrenergic binding, and a somewhat lower potency than chlorpromazine on dopamine receptor binding. Levomepromazine sulphoxide was relatively inactive in terms of dopamine receptor binding but seems much more active in the alpha- adrenergic receptor binding with a binding affinity similar to 7- hydroxy chlorpromazine.

Indications

The main indications in psychiatry are schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Its sedative properties particularly fit it to use in psychiatric intensive care.

Efficacy

The relatively elderly nature of the compound means that recent drug trials often see the drug used as a standard comparator for novel agents. The wealth of research data now used to launch novel drugs is just not apparent with levomepromazine. An example of a trial in recent years employing levomepromazine as comparator is one where risperidone was compared with haloperidol and levomepromazine in 62 patients with schizophrenia randomised to receive one of the three antipsychotic drugs13.

Risperidone and haloperidol appeared to produce a 20% reduction in PANSS symptoms in a higher frequency of patients than with levomepromazine13. The 20% reduction in PANSS symptoms occurred with 81% of the risperidone patients, 60% of the haloperidol patients, and 52% of the levomepromazine patients. In terms of the Psychotic Anxiety Scale, improvements were significantly greater in the risperidone patients than the levomepromazine patients; but the difference between haloperidol and levomepromazine was not significant. Extrapyramidal side effects were more severe in the haloperidol group than with levomepromazine or risperidone, but there was little difference between risperidone and levomepromazine treated patients.

The binding profile of levomepromazine has led to speculation about its potential usefulness in treatmentresistant schizophrenia11. There is some tentative clinical evidence that there may indeed be some potential in using levomepromazine in treatment resistant schizophrenia. LaI and Nair found improvement in 16 of 23 chronic treatment-resistant schizophrenic patients who were treated with levomepromazine14. They had previously been hospitalised, in most cases for at least 2 years and had problems with positive symptoms, irritability, restlessness, hostility, uncooperativeness, poor concentration and aggressive behaviour. Discharge to less restrictive environments was possible in seven, placement on a waiting list for a foster home in four and improved behaviour and autonomy in five patients. There were, however, untoward adverse effects in a high proportion – five subjects developed seizures and one agranulocytosis.

A Norwegian study of elderly residents of nursing homes in 1992 found that levomepromazine with haloperidol was as effective as zuclopenthixol in managing elderly patients with symptoms of agitation and hostility/aggressiveness15.

Its use for agitation associated with acquired brain injury was described in a retrospective chart review of over 100 patients discharged from an acquired brain injury unit over a course of 2 years16.

Adverse effects

Table 1 lists the adverse reactions notified to the UK Medicine Control Agency from 1963 to 2004.

Table 1. Adverse reactions notified to UK Medicines Control Agency

Acute dystonias (spasms of eye, face, neck and back muscles), akathisia (motor restlessness), Parkinsonism-like syndrome (rigidity and tremor) can all occur. Levomepromazine’s potential to cause extrapyramidal side effects is less than haloperidol and similar to risperidone13. Levomepromazine is linked with tardive dyskinesia.

Other noted side effects include cholinergically mediated ones such as dry mouth, nasal stuffiness, difficulty in micturition, constipation a\nd blurring of vision.

Other adverse effects include tachycardia, hypotension, weight gain, impotence, galactorrhoea, hypothermia (a problem in the elderly), gynaecomastia, amenorrhoea, benign obstructive jaundice and dermatitis, ECG irregularities, drowsiness, lethargy, fatigue, epileptiform seizures.

Blood dyscrasias such as agranulocytosis and pancytopenia have been recognized as adverse effects for some time14,17,18.

Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) has been linked to levomepromazine used with olanzapine in one patient in a recent report19.

Phototoxicity is a noted problem with phenothiazines. Levomepromazine may have a reduced propensity to cause this problem compared to chlorpromazine20.

Fatal overdoses with levomepromazine are rare, but have been reported7. In the latter case report the blood drug concentration recorded was 4.1 mg/L, (whereas therapeutic levels are 0.02mg/L- 0.14mg/L).

The relative toxicities of different neuroleptics have been compared using f-values. The f-value is calculated by dividing the number of deaths caused by a specific neuroleptic into the number of defined daily doses prescribed in the observation period. The highest f-values for neuroleptics have been linked with low- potency, such as prothipendyl, chlorprothixene and levomepromazine21. The Schreinzer et al. study incorporated 85 fatal intoxications with neuroleptics in Vienna from 1991 to 199721. The authors concluded that careless use of low-potency neuroleptics should be avoided in patients with a potential risk of accidental or suicidal overdose. A Finnish study by Koski et al. looked at the interaction of alcohol and drugs in fatal poisonings. The study sounded a note of caution finding that some drugs seemed to be especially problematic in overdose with alcohol. They also found a relatively high fatal toxicity index (FTI) for levomepromazine (FTI = 47.3), similar to propoxyphene (FTI = 32.0) and amitriptyline (FTI = 12.2), but not as severe as promazine (FTI = 120.8)22.

Since levomepromazine has been noted to have analgesic properties a propensity for abuse could be predicted to be a potential problem. Levomepromazine’s analgesic effects have been studied in comparison to morphine. Levomepromazine does not compete with naloxone for binding sites in the brain and its analgesic effects are not antagonized by naloxone. Unlike morphine, tolerance does not develop to the analgesic effect of levomepromazine, in the short term anyway.

Interactions

Out of all the phenothiazines, levomepromazine exerts the most potent effects on cytochrome P-450 activity (as measured by caffeine oxidation in rat liver microsomes)23.

Levomepromazine inhibits CYP1A2, CYP3A2, CYP2D6 and other CYP isoenzymes. This would have implications for the metabolism of other drugs, which are metabolised by these isoenzymes, if co administered with levomepromazine.

Levomepromazine may interact with citalopram causing a 10%-20% increase from the initial steady-state levels of the primary citalopram metabolite, desmethylcitalopram24.

Cautions and contraindications

Contraindications include comatose states and bone marrow depression (except where levomepromazine is used in terminal care).

Cautions include cardiovascular disease, hepatic impairment, Parkinsonism, epilepsy, pregnancy and lactation.

Conclusions

The main indications for use of this drug in psychiatry are schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. The drug appears to be effective in psychosis and there is also some evidence to suggest it has efficacy in drug-resistant psychosis, although this property of the drug does require further research. Levomepromazine’s sedative properties particularly fit it to use in psychiatric intensive care. The drug should be avoided in patients at high risk of accidental or suicidal overdose.

A definitive formal controlled study of levomepromazine in treatment-resistant schizophrenia is warranted.

* Nozinan is a registered tradename of Rhne-Poulenc Rorer (Aventis Pharma)

References

1. Madsen F, Faurschou P, Banning AM, Engel AM, Sjogren P, Rosetzsky A. The protective effect of inhaled levomepromazine (Nozinan) on histamine-induced bronchial constriction. PuIm Pharmacol 1993;6(2): 129-36 [erratum appears in Pulm Pharmacol 1993;(4):287]

2. Costantini D, Trifogli R, Fiaschetti T. On the use of Nozinan (levomepromazine) in preanesthetic medication [Italian]. Acta Anaesthesiologica 1968:Suppl 8:277 and Dahl SG, Hall H. Binding affinity of levomepromazine and two of its major metabolites of central dopamine and alpha-adrenergic receptors in the rat. Psychopharmacology 1981;74(2):101-4

3. McGee JL, Alexander MR. Phenothiazine analgesia – fact or fantasy? [review; 56 refs]. Am J Hosp Pharm 1979;36(5):633-40

4. Fazio AN. Control of postoperative pain: a comparison of the efficacy and safety of pentazocine, methotrimeprazine, meperidine, and a placebo. Curr Ther Res Clin Exp 1070;12(2):73-7

5. Skinner J, Skinner A. Levomepromazine for nausea and vomiting in advanced cancer [review; 10 refs]. Hosp Med (Lond) 1999;60(8):568- 70

6. Molnar J, Beladi I, Foldes I. Studies on antituberculotic action of some phenothiazine derivatives in vitro. Zentralblatt fur Bakteriologie, Parasitenkunde, Infektionskrankheiten und Hygiene – Erste Abteilung Originale – Reihe A: Medizinische Mikrobiologie und Parasitologie 1977;239(4):521-6

7. Avis SP, Holzbecher MD. A fatal case of methotrimeprazine overdose. J Forensic Sci 1996;41(6):1080-1

8. Dahl SG. Pharmacokinetics of methotrimeprazine after single and multiple doses. Clin Pharmacol Ther 1976;19(4):435-42

9. Dahl SG, Strandjord RE, Sigfusson S. Pharmacokinetics and relative bioavailability of levomepromazine after repeated administration of tablets and syrup. Eur J Clin Pharmacol 1977;11(4):305-10

10. Lal S, Nair NP, Cecyre D, Quirion R. Levomepromazine receptor binding profile in human brain-implications for treatment-resistant schizophrenia. Acta Psychiatr Scand 1993;87(6):380-3

11. Antkiewicz-Michaluk L. The influence of chronic treatment with antidepressant neuroleptics on the central serotonin system. Pol J Pharmacol Pharm 1986;38(4):359-70

12. Dahl SG, Hall H. Binding affinity of levomepromazine and two of its major metabolites of central dopamine and alpha-adrenergic receptors in the rat. Psychopharmacology 1981;74(2):101-4

13. Blin O, Azorin JM, Bouhours P. Antipsychotic and anxiolytic properties of risperidone, haloperidol, and methotrimeprazine in schizophrenic patients. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1996; 16(1):38-44

14. Lal S, Nair NP. Is levomepromazine a useful drug in treatment- resistant schizophrenia? Acta Psychiatr Scand 1992;85(3):243-5

15. Nygaard HA, Fuglum E, Eigen K. Zuclopenthixol, melperone and haloperidol/levomepromazine in the elderly. Meta-analysis of two double-blind trials at 15 nursing homes in Norway. Curr Med Res Opin 1992;12(10):615-22

16. Maryniak O, Manchanda R, Velani A. Methotrimeprazine in the treatment of agitation in acquired brain injury patients. Brain Injury 2001;15(2):167-74

17. Garzotto N, Burti L, Tansella M. A fatal case of pancytopenia due to levomepromazine. Br J Psychiatry 1976; 129:443-5

18. Ananth JY Lehmann HE, Ban TA. Agranulocytosis associated with methotrimeprazine (Nozinan) administration: a report of three cases. Can Med Assoc J 1970;102(12):1286-7

19. Jarventausta K, Leinonen E. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome during olanzapine and levomepromazine treatment. Acta Psychiatr Scand 2000;102(3):231-3

20. Eberlein-Konig B, Bindl A, Przybilla B. Phototoxic properties of neuroleptic drugs. Dermatology 1997; 194(2):131-5

21. Schreinzer D, Frey R, Stimpfl T, Vycudilik W Berzlanovich A, Kasper S. Different fatal toxicity of neuroleptics identified by autopsy. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2001;11(2): 117-24

22. Koski, A, Ojanpera I, Vuori E. Interaction of alcohol and drugs in fatal poisonings. Hum Experimental Toxicol 2003;22(5):281- 7

23. Daniel WA, Syrek M, Rylko Z, Kot M. Effects of phenothiazine neuroleptics on the rate of caffeine demethylation and hydroxylation in the rat liver. Pol J Pharmacol 2001;53(6):61 5-21

24. Gram LF, Hansen MG, Sindrup SH, et al. Citalopram: interaction studies with levomepromazine, imipramine, and lithium. Ther Drug Monit 1993;15(1):18-24

Further Reading

St John AB, Born CK. Characterization of analgesic and activity effects of methotrimeprazine and morphine. Res Commun Chem Pathol Pharmacol 1979;26(1):25-34

Margat P, Broussot T, Pouly JP. Trial of G. 35020 in 52 cases of depression [French, journal article]. Annales Medico-Psychologiques 1968; 1(1): 126-32

Anon. Controlled clinical comparison of 6 neuroleptic drugs. Team of Project “Asprum” [clinical trial, journal article]. Activitas Nervosa Superior 1965;7(3):241-2

CrossRef links are available in the online published version of this paper: http://www.cmrojournal.com

Paper CMRO-2716_2, Accepted for publication: 08 October 2004

Published Online: 28 October 2004

doi: 10.1185/030079904X12708

Ben Green1, Tor Pettit2, Lesley Faith2 and Kristof Seaton3

1 Consultant Psychiatrist, Cheadle Royal Hospital and Honorary Senior Lecturer, Department of Psychiatry, University of Liverpool, UK

2 Consultant Psychiatrist, Cheadle Royal Hospital, Cheadle, UK

3 Pharmacist, Mental Health Division, Stepping Hill Hospital, Stockport, UK

Address for correspondence: Dr Ben Green, Cheadle Royal Hospital, 100 Wilmslow Road, Cheadle, Cheshire, SK8 3DG, UK. Tel.: +44-0161- 428-9511; Fax: +44-0161-428-1870; email: [email protected]

Copyright Librapharm Dec 2004

Fashion & Style: Who’s a Pretty Boy?

There is a new mega-industry dedicated solely to the exfoliation, depilation, hydration and upkeep of men’s skin. It’s called “men’s grooming” (the word beauty is a no-no). And those who bottle the secret of eternal handsomeness can’t keep up with demand.

Everyone from Clinique (who were the first premium skincare brand to realise that no-nonsense grey packaging wouldn’t scare off the punters) to Nivea (the UK’s best-selling men’s skincare range) has created a “for men” collection, then sat back and listened as the cash registers rang like music to the ears. Even Head & Shoulders, that most practical, asexual and un-sexual of anti-dandruff shampoos, has felt the need to launch a version specifically for men.

“Men want to feel good and look good, and companies are now catering to that demand. They realise that men want their own products and don’t want to have to sneak bits of moisturiser from their partner,” says Linda Windsor, a market research analyst.

“But they also know that there is still a certain stigma attached to men and beauty products, so some are being re-launched and re- packaged so that men can feel comfortable about using them both at home and in the locker room. After all, most men now go to the gym and are interested in fashion and style, so this explosion in the men’s grooming industry is just a natural progression.”

The phenomenon also seems to have shaped an entire younger generation of good-looking, well-groomed, style-hungry, gym-defined lads who are quickly creating another phenomenon – fear and self- loathing amid us thirty- something non-groomers. Fear, because there’s no match for the allure of twentysomething youth; and self- loathing, because they are a cruel reminder that all there is to look forward to is a lifetime of nasal hair and wrinkles. (Still, you could always give in and embrace the future with www.nosetrimmers.com and regular injections of botulism.)

Seriously, though, judging by the number of bronzed men with facial-hair topiary (the R&B singer Craig David’s one lasting legacy), modern man looks as if he’s just stepped out from an episode of Queer Eye for the Straight Guy. Because in the strange, contrary dance between heterosexual and homosexual men (where, generally, style conscious straight men take the lead from their more “sophisticated” gay brothers, and gay men, in turn, may revert to a more “macho” stereotype), mirror-conscious straight men are buying into everything from expensive moisture-replenishing potions to hair-removal procedures.

Such is the anti-hirsute revolution that on 4 February the news broke that the entire Chelsea football squad had had their chests waxed before a match against Blackburn. Why? Does chest waxing (which, according to Windsor, is the most popular men’s treatment) make them more aerodynamic, more like David Beckham? Or is it just a case of Chelsea’s owner, the billionaire Roman Abramovitch, treating his players so that they look the part on the pitch? Even at my gym (working class in Rotherham, not club class in Soho) it’s difficult not to notice a distinct lack of pubic hair and a very un-Yorkshire increase in shorn chests and waxed eyebrows that could have given Marlene Dietrich a run for her money.

It follows, then, that with this renaissance of male narcissism comes the arrival of the male beauty parlour. If you can’t be bothered to do it yourself, why not let somebody else do it for you? Somewhere in between Jermyn Street’s traditional wet-shave and Soho’s “back, crack and sack” sugaring sessions, there’s The Refinery, London’s first one-stop grooming and spa experience exclusively for men.

Situated in Brook Street, Mayfair, directly opposite Claridge’s, the five-storey townhouse offers barbering, skincare, bodycare and spa treatments in a private “lifestyle” retreat that combines the comfort and the atmosphere of a gentleman’s club with the vitality and well-being of a health spa. In short, it’s posh enough to make you feel really special but modern enough so as not to be stuffy.

“At The Refinery, we aim to create an environment where men can feel comfortable and unwind,” say the co-owners Laith Waines and Omar Fadli. “In general, our clients are cosmopolitan, professional men who are aware of the importance of grooming and like to look their best all the time.”

Indeed, it has everything that you could possibly want. There’s a shop where you can buy products (including The Refinery’s own product range); The Pit Stop, where you choose from a selection of 15-minute treatments if you’re in a rush; the barbers; the skincare and body-therapy rooms; muscle-toning machines; a sunbed room; the club lounge (where there’s a computer so that you can work between treatments); a dry flotation tank; and valeting services.

Thirtysomethings Waines and Fadli met while working together at an investment boutique in Mayfair, and went on to co-found their own investment company before establishing The Refinery five years ago. Now, with further branches in the City of London and in Harrods, The Refinery has three distinct treatment philosophies, each using a different line of products: North American (Dermalogica); European (Ionithermie/ Phytomer); and British (Refinery and Aromatherapy Associates). And the “Menu of Refinements” is amazing, if a little overwhelming: should I go for the De-stress Body Booster, the Travel Fatigue Body Booster, the Ionithermie Ultimate Lifting Facial, the Emperor’s Acupuncture, or the spray-on tan, eyebrow shaping and leg waxing?

After much deliberation, I go for The Refinery Premier Face and Body Treatment, described so: “Refine the skin and de-stress the body by starting with a back and shoulder exfoliation and massage. This is followed by our Ayurvedic scalp massage, which is designed to help the whole body relax. To conclude, a deep cleansing facial is performed using a blend of the finest essential oils that are unique to the Refinery product range (90 minutes, pounds 110).” Oh, and not forgetting a manicure and The Refinery Haircut and Finish (pounds 48).

First up is the spa therapist Annerine McGeer, who starts by massaging out the tension and knotted muscles in my back, exfoliating my congested skin and steaming the stress out of it. Then McGeer, who has the touch of a loving mother fused with the sensual manipulation of a seductress (and no, it’s not that kind of place), works her magic on my face, massaging, cleansing, exfoliating and steaming it back to life.

This is bliss! As I lie half-asleep on the bed, limp and elated, McGeer massages my hands and buffs my nails into shape. “Pleeease, can I just stay here and go to sleep?” I ask pathetically. “Everybody asks me that,” answers McGeer, rolling her eyes. “But I’m sorry, I have another client to attend to.”

The wicked McGeer sends me downstairs to the barbers, where the senior barber Shen Hasan awaits. Hasan is a Turk, and as anybody who has had their hair cut by a Turk will tell you, they are the best. (It was, after all, the Turks who mastered the art of the steam room and ancient grooming rituals that included the use of hot pokers to singe nasal hair.) A shampoo, conditioning treatment and short back and sides later, and I think I’ve scrubbed up well.

“If you don’t mind me saying so, sir, you look a lot better,” Hasan says. “You look like a different man.”

Case and Grounded Theory As Qualitative Research Methods

Case and grounded theory are two methods of qualitative research. Both methods have their roots in sociology and are focused on understanding, explaining, and/or predicting human behavior. They are ideal methods for nursing research, as they are useful for exploring human responses to health problems. The theoretical underpinnings, methodologies, strategies for data collection, requirements for trustworthiness, and examples of research using case and grounded theory are described.

Two methods of qualitative inquiry axe case method and grounded theory. The two methods will be discussed together because although they have different goals, their roots are in sociology and they employ several of the same strategies for data collection. The goal of case method is to describe a contemporary situation within its real-life context (Stake, 1995; Yin, 2003). The goal of grounded theory is to develop theories that describe or explain particular situations and accurately perceive and present another’s world (Hutchinson, 1993). Both case and grounded theory research methods will be presented and examples provided for use of each in relation to urologic nursing.

Case Method

Case studies are familiar to most nurses. Nurses learned the nursing process using case studies, and you have probably read or heard case presentations at clinical conferences. That familiar case study is similar to, but not the same as, the case research method presented here. Case, as a research method, is an effective research strategy for answering questions that begin with words such as “how” and “why” (Yin, 2003). It is the method of choice when the data to be collected about a situation will come from many sources including people, observation, records, etc. (Yin, 2003). Case method is most useful when the research is focused on a “specific, unique, bounded system” (Stake, 1998, p. 88), and often employs a combination of qualitative and quantitative data collection techniques (Yin, 2003). The focus of the case can be an individual, an event, a family, an organization, or even a place (Mariano, 1995). The uniqueness of case method lies in the focus of the study on the case (Stake, 1998).

A research study can be designed to study a single case, or multiple cases. A single case may be a typical case or it may be something that is unique (Mariano, 1995). For an example of a unique case, consider a client the first author had the opportunity to care for many years ago. An elderly, single male patient had a severe, unrepaired hypospadias. His anatomy was such that the urinary meatus was at the scrotal-penal junction. Although he was near the end of life and unable to communicate at the time, exploring the effect of this problem on his life would have made an interesting case study in which the unit of analysis was the individual with hypospadias.

Multiple cases are used when the researcher is interested in the same issue in different situations, or to understand a particular situation from different perspectives. To use the example of hypospadias again, a researcher might design a multiple case study to understand the decisions parents make surrounding repair of hypospadias in infants with differing severity and in different societies and religions.

Case method is a research design that is often guided by a framework and is useful to investigate a complex contemporary phenomenon using multiple data sources (Yin, 2003). Consider the possibility of studying the process of care for clients who are directly admitted to an inpatient unit for management of kidney stones. The research question for a case study might be, “How do the nurse and patient manage the pain of kidney stones?” The unit of analysis would be pain management for kidney stones. A theoretical framework could provide guidance for data collection. Consider using the Quality Health Outcomes Model (Mitchell, Ferketich, & Jennings, 1998) to guide the research. In this model, the relationship between nursing interventions and patient outcomes is mediated by the client and the health care system. In a case study with the above research question using this model as a framework, the researcher would collect data about each area of the model. Asking the following questions, the researcher would explore the phenomenon of interest according to the model. What nursing interventions were used? How did the client and/or the health care system affect those interventions? Were the interventions effective? It would be important to collect data over time for several patients admitted with similar diagnoses. Eventually the researcher would construct the ideal case, a case study constructed using the data from several cases to describe the pain management strategies used in the particular setting of interest. The product of case research is usually a description of the object of interest. An excellent example of case research in nursing can be found in Zucker (2003).

Grounded Theory

Grounded theory grew out of the theoretical framework of symbolic interaction (Blumer, 1969; Bowers, 1988). This framework can be thought of as the lens or the glasses through which one views the world. In the case of symbolic interaction, the framework arises from sociology and proposes that individuals interpret their experience and create meaning out of those experiences (Bogdan & Biklen, 2003).

For example, suppose a nurse was talking to a group of older women about incontinence. Two of the women seemed quite distressed at the mere mention of the word incontinence. The third woman appeared embarrassed, but had several questions. The fourth woman in the group did not appear to be the least bit uncomfortable and was very willing to share her experience of effectively managing her incontinence with the others. They all agreed that incontinence was not a normal part of aging and that a woman experiencing incontinence should discuss the problem with a health care provider.

Within the group there were both individual and shared meanings in relation to incontinence. Each woman in the group responded to the topic of incontinence in a unique way. This is representative of the individual meanings each woman ascribed to the prospect of experiencing incontinence. Although each woman responded individually, they also had shared meanings about incontinence. These shared meanings provide the basis for interaction between people.

Grounded theory is a qualitative research methodology in which substantive theory is derived through an ongoing process of continually reviewing the data, refining questions, and re- evaluating these changes. The resulting substantive theory is a theory that is applicable to a specific situation. Grounded theory involves a process where “…data collection, analysis, and theory stand in close relationship to each other…One begins with an area of study and what is relevant to that area is allowed to emerge” (Strauss & Corbin, 1998, p. 12). The goal of the developed theory is to illustrate the basic social processes engaged in by the participants in a particular setting. “People sharing common circumstances… experience shared meanings and behaviors that constitute the substance of grounded theory” (fliuchinson, 1993). Strauss and Corbin (1998, p. 12) comment, “grounded theories… are likely to offer insight, enhance understanding, and provide a meaningful guide to action.” Unlike other forms of qualitative research, where the researcher may not want to develop preconceptions through extensive preparatory literature review, grounded theory methodology requires that the researcher enter the field familiar with the literature pertaining to the subject and related ideas (Glaser, 1978). The emergence of themes and a sharper focus occur over time as the participants identify their experiences to the researchers (Stern, 1994). The resulting theory “emerges as an entirely new way of understanding the observations from which it is generated. It is this understanding that permits the development of relevant interventions in the social environment under consideration” (Hutchinson, 1993, p. 182).

The researcher “tries to make the theory flexible enough to make a wide variety of changing situations understandable…[and] general enough to be applicable to the whole picture” (Glaser & Strauss, 1967, p. 242). The researcher’s goal is to inductively develop an “…inclusive, general theory through the analysis of specific social phenomenon” (Hutchinson, 1993, p. 183).

A grounded theory must be accessible and understandable to the people working in the area of the research. For example, suppose a researcher conducted a grounded theory study exploring the process engaged in by women who are not more than 50 years old to manage chronic urge incontinence. The theory should be useful to health care providers who are working with these women. The women themselves should also be able to understand the theory so that they may be better able to understand how to manage their incontinence.

A well-developed grounded theory can be used to assist the user to “understand and analyze ongoing situational realities, to produce and predict change in them, and predict and control consequences both for the object of change and for other parts of the total situation that will be affected” (Glaser & Strauss, 1967, p. 245). The theory should help the user to predict changes in the a\rea of interest based upon the propositions of the theory. For a recent grounded theory nursing research study see Jacelon (2004).

Strategies for Data Collection

In both case and grounded theory methods, the data may come from many sources. In all qualitative research, the researcher does not profess to be an expert about the phenomena of interest. The researcher does not develop hypotheses about the phenomena; rather, he or she observes and questions and then makes sense out of those observations. Common sources for data in clinical case and grounded theory research include interviews, observation, and documents such as client records and system records on staffing, etc.

Interviews. Open-ended, qualitative interviews are conducted with all participants. In the previous example regarding pain management for clients with kidney stones, the researcher may wish to interview the client, the nurse, family members who were with the patient at the onset of pain, nurse aides regarding identification of pain in patients on the unit, physicians, etc. Interviews are unstructured and provide a forum for exploring the phenomena that might be difficult to capture in more structured situations (Fultz & Herzog, 1996).

Participant observation. Participant observation (PO) is a data collection technique in which the members of the research team immerse themselves in the world of the participants (Bowers, 1988). While trying to become immersed in the world of the participants, the team member will simultaneously attempt to maintain a position of questioning those things that the participants take for granted (Bowers, 1988). The plan of observation is dictated by the research questions (Stake, 1995). In the example, the purpose of PO would be to observe the process of care (direct and indirect interventions) and the response to that care in relation to kidney pain. Data gathered through PO would be recorded in descriptive field notes (Bogdan & Biklen, 2003).

Documents. Documents can provide a wealth of information about the topic of study. They are most useful when used as supporting evidence for other sources of data (Yin, 2003). Sources of written data in the example of nursing intervention for kidney pain may include client records such as the medical record including operating room records, flow sheets recording input and output, the client Kardex, etc. Documents of interest regarding system include characteristics such as staffing plans for the nursing floor upon which the study will be based, minutes of floor meetings, records of client acuity, and agency policies and procedures relevant to the focus of the study.

Strategies to Enhance Trustworthiness

Trustworthiness in qualitative research is the equivalent of validity in a quantitative study. It is established through ensuring rigor in the process of data collection and analysis. The following techniques are often used.

Bracketing is the process of the researcher becoming self-aware and reflecting on the research process and her own assumptions. For the researcher to become immersed in the experience of the participants, it is vital that she become aware of her own preconceptions, values, and beliefs, temporarily relinquishing her own perspective so as to enter the participant’s world (Bowers, 1988; Hutchinson, 1993). “It is necessary to state clearly our conscious assumptions about that which we are investigating” (Swanson-Kaufman & Schonwald, 1988, p. 99). The purpose of bracketing is to avoid the possibility that the data and the data analysis simply become a reflection of the researcher’s preconceived ideas and values (Mariano, 1995).

Prolonged engagement and persistent observation. The research design provides for prolonged engagement and persistent observation (Ely, Anzul, Friedman, & Gardner, 1991). “The purpose of persistent observation is to identify those characteristics and elements in the setting that are most relevant to the object being studied and focusing on them in detail (Lincoln & Guba, 1985, p. 304). As prolonged engagement provides scope, persistent observation provides depth to the study (Lincoln & Cuba, 1985).

Multiple data sources. A major strength of case study design is the use of multiple data sources (Yin, 2003). The purpose of using multiple data sources is to maximize the range of data that might contribute to the researcher’s understanding of the case (Knafl & Breitmayer, 1991). Multiple sources of evidence will provide opportunities for comparison of data among and between participants as well as between different types of data sources (Stake, 1998).

Participant checking. Participant checking is a process of seeking feedback from the study participants. It is a method of checking the accuracy of the researcher’s interpretations of the experience of the participant. It is part of the process of establishing credibility (Ely et al., 1991). The researcher’s interpretation of the participants’ hospital stay will be discussed at the followup interview 3 months after discharge from the hospital.

Peer researcher support group. A peer researcher support group (Ely et al., 1991) is a valuable strategy for enhancing the quality of qualitative research. Throughout the research process, support group members review and comment on transcripts of participant observation and interviews, discuss memos written by the researcher, and provide a forum for discussing the researcher’s ideas.

The qualitative researcher’s responsibility toward trustworthiness also includes confirmability and dependability of the results. A detailed database should be maintained, and include rich descriptions so that others would be able to comprehend the researcher’s conclusions and the linkages made between the raw data and the findings (Mariano, 1995). The ability to transfer findings defends upon adequate description of the context for the research to allow others to compare their settings to that of the research. Data analysis will be discussed in a future article in this series.

Conclusions

The depth of understanding provided through qualitative research can supply an important source of knowledge to inform the care provided by urologie nurses. Case is particularly appropriate for indepth exploration of real clinical situations. Grounded theory is an excellent tool for understanding the social processes at work as patients learn to manage new or chronic health conditions. Both methods provide insight to answer challenging and complex clinical questions. Practicing nurses are encouraged to seek out experienced qualitative researchers to mentor the rigorous process of bringing forth trustworthy, insightful findings. Guidance through the journey of selecting a design, collecting rich data, completing the appropriate depth of analysis, and preparing an interesting and informative manuscript, can provide practicing nurses with opportunities to use case or grounded theory methods to add the spark of a new dimension of challenge, insight, and illumination to their professional work.

Note: The writing of this article was partially funded by the Center for Self and Family Management for Vulnerable Populations (T32NR008346).

References

Blumer, H. (1969). Symbolic interactionism. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Bogdan, R.C., & Biklen, S.K. (2003). Qualitative research for education: An introduction to theory and methods (4th ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon.

Bowers, B. (1988). Groundod theory. In B. Sartor (Ed.), Paths to knowledge: (pp. 33-60). Now York: National League for Nursing.

Ely, M., Anzul, M., Friedman, T., & Gardner, D. (1991). Doing qualitative research: Circles within circles. Bristol, PA: The Falmer Press.

Fultz, N.H., & Herzog, A.R. (1996). Epidemiology of urinary symptoms in the geriatric population. Urologic Clinics of North America, 23(1), 1-10.

Glaser, B. (1978). Theoretical sensitivity. Mill Valley, CA: The Sociology Press.

Glaser, B.C., & Strauss, A.L. (1967). The discovery of grounded theory: Strategies for qualitative research. Chicago: Aldine Publishing Company.

Hutchinson, S.A. (1993). Grounded theory: The method. In P.L. Munhall & C.O. Boyd (Eds.), Nursing research: A qualitative perspective (pp. 180-212). New York: National League for Nursing.

Jacelon, C. (2004). Managing personal integrity: The process of hnspitalization for elders. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 46(5), 549- 557.

Knafl, K.A., & Breitmayer, B.J. (1991). Triangulation in qualitative research: Issues of conceptual clarity and purpose. In J.M. Morse (Ed.), Qualitative nursing research: A contemporary dialogue (pp. 226-239). London: Sage Publishers.

Lincoln, Y.S., & Guba, E.G. (1985). Naturalistic inquiry. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.

Mariano, C. (1995). The qualitative research process. In L.A. Talbot (Ed.), Principles and practice of nursing research (pp. 463- 491). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.

Mitchell, P.H., Ferketich, S., & Jennings, B.M. (1998). Quality health outcomes model. Image: Journal of Nursing Scholarship, 30(1), 43-46.

Stake, K. (1998). Case studios. In N. Denzin & Y. Lincoln (Eds.), Strategies of qualitative inquiry (pp. 86-109). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Stake, R.E. (1995). The art of case study research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Stern, P.N. (1994). Eroding grounded theory. In J.M. Morse (Ed.), Critical issues in qualitative research methods (pp. 212-223). Thousand Oaks: CA: Sago Publications.

Strauss, A., & Corbin, J. (1998). Basics of qualitative research: Techniques and procedures for developing grounded theory (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Swanson-Kaufman, K., & Schonwald, E. (Eds.). (1988). Phenomenology. New York: National League for Nursing.

Yin, R.K. (2003). Case study research design and methods (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Zucker, D.M. (2003). Relapse in hepatitis C: A case study. Clinical Excellence for Nurse Practitioners, 7(3), 53-59.

Cynthia S. Jacelon, PhD, RN, CRRN-A, is an Assistant Professor, School for Nursin\g, University of Massachusetts, Amherst, MA, and a Postdoctoral Fellow, Center for Self and Family Management for Vulnerable Populations, Yale School of Nursing, New Haven, CT.

Katharine K. O’Dell, MSN, CNM, is a Clinical Instructor, Urogynecology Division, University of Massachusetts Memorial Medical Center, Worcester, MA.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Feb 2005

Cocaine Eyedrops Used to Detect Parkinson’s

Researchers say they could be diagnostic tool in future

HealthDay News — Doctors might someday use cocaine to diagnose Parkinson’s disease in a rather unconventional way: via drops to the eye.

By comparing the amount of pupil dilation caused by an eye drop used in ophthalmology offices to dilation from a cocaine eye drop, researchers in Japan said they could accurately identify people with Parkinson’s.

At present, there is no specific diagnostic test for Parkinson’s disease, which is caused by the gradual death of brain cells producing the neurotransmitter dopamine. Symptoms of this motor system disorder include tremor, trembling, rigidity or stiffness, slowness of movement and imbalance.

“Unfortunately, there is no clear way to diagnose Parkinson’s,” said Dr. Spriridon Papapetropoulos, an assistant professor of neurology at the University of Miami School of Medicine.

“As we speak, the diagnosis remains clinical,” which means the physician must use various criteria to figure it out. Some tests are available, including a smell test, but they are unreliable and rarely used, he said.

The current findings are far from definitive, however.

“This eye drop test is a potential diagnostic tool for Parkinson’s disease,” said Dr. Shun Shimohama, senior author of a research letter published in the Feb. 23 issue of the Journal of the American Medical Association. However, he pointed out that autonomic neuropathy — damage to the nerves that regulate the involuntary part of the nervous system — may affect the results. Also, the size of the study was small, he added.

“We need to have the correct diagnosis, and if there is a simple test that can give us the correct diagnosis we might as well use it,” Papapetropoulos said. But, he had reservations.

“This research letter was a very interesting research idea, and it’s potentially useful,” Papapetropoulos said. “However, this is just a research letter with very limited information about the clinical characteristics of the patients involved, about the methods that they used, about patient selection. And the scientific community should do a larger clinical study on this topic.”

“We must collect more data for practical use,” added Shimohama, of the department of neurology at Kyoto University Graduate School of Medicine in Kyoto, Japan.

The trial involved 38 patients with Parkinson’s Disease, 20 controls and 10 individuals with multiple system atrophy (MSA), a neurodegenerative disease with various symptoms involving movement, blood pressure and more.

Researchers recorded a baseline pupil diameter for all participants using an infrared videocamera in fixed daylight brightness.

Each participant was then giving phenylephrine solution (commonly used in eye exams and before and after eye surgery) in both eyes. Their pupil diameter was recorded 60 minutes later.

After a minimum of 72 hours, the same amount of a five-percent cocaine solution was placed in each participant’s eyes, with the pupil diameter recorded one hour later.

The researchers then calculated the difference between dilation caused by phenylephrine and that caused by the cocaine.

There was no statistically significant difference in phenylephrine dilation between people with Parkinson’s and people with MSA. However, cocaine-induced dilation was significantly less in the Parkinson’s group than in the other two groups, with little difference between the controls and those with MSA. And the difference between phenylephrine-induced and cocaine-induced dilation was greater in the Parkinson’s group than in the control or MSA groups.

What is the biology behind this finding?

According to Shimohama, cocaine blocks the uptake of the neurotransmitter norepinephrine. The build-up of norepinephrine at the nerve receptors causes dilation. Less cocaine-induced dilation means that sympathetic nerve terminals have been lost, he explained.

The side effects of the procedure appear to be minimal. “Phenylephrine and cocaine eye drop tests can cause conjunctivitis rarely,” Shimohama said. “Some patients felt slight brightness after the eye drop test for about 30 to 60 minutes.”

But if something in the illicit drug can help Parkinson’s, then something in a Parkinson’s drug might lead to a treatment for those addicted to cocaine, another study suggests.

In an odd reversal, scientists reporting in Feb. 23 issue of Neuroscience have found that a substance similar to a drug used to treat Parkinson’s disease blocks the stimulating effects of cocaine and might one day become a therapy for addiction.

When mice were given a substance similar to benztropine, a drug used to treat Parkinson’s symptoms, then injected with cocaine, they did not manifest any of the hyperactive behavior typically associated with cocaine.

More information

Kyoto University Graduate School of Medicine

University of Miami School of Medicine

The National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke has more on Parkinson’s.

Adolescent Urology

Medical issues in adolescence offer special challenges. Adolescents are not children, but they can present with childhood problems. Additionally, although are not adults, they can develop conditions more often encountered in the older population. Therefore, management algorithms need to be tailored to consider not only the diagnosis but also the age of the patient, as the latter may be the most important factor.

These special-considerations clearly apply to urological conditions. In this article, the commonly encountered and sometimes controversial urological problems in adolescents are discussed.

Undescended testicles

Cryptorchidism is one on the most common congenital abnormalities in male infants. In utero, the testes develop intra-abdominally and spontaneously descend through the inguinal canal into the scrotum. Up to 3% of full-term boys and 30% of premature males, however, may have undescended testicles at birth [1]. There is a relatively high rate of spontaneous testicular descent in the first 3 to 6 months of life, such that the overall incidence of cryptorchidism is approximately 1% at 1 year of age. Because this number stays constant through adulthood, it is believed that if a testicle has not descended by 1 year of age, then it is unlikely to do so.

It has been known that the delayed consequences of cryptorchidism include an increased risk infertility and malignant degeneration. Over the past several years, many long-term studies have been published suggesting that the potential for infertility is greater with bilateral undescended testes when compared unilateral cryptorchidism. Paternity rates are similar in men with a history of unilateral cryptorchidism and normal controls, whereas men with bilateral cryptorchidism had significant decreased rates (75% versus 53%, respectively) [2,3]. Furthermore, the age of surgical correction may not be a factor in the development of infertility [4].

A history of cryptorchidism increases the relative risk of developing a testicular neoplasm by a factor of 40. When they develop, tumors usually occur in the third or fourth decade of life. Approximately 25% of these tumors arise in the normally descended testis. Seminoma is the most common subtype and, there has been no conclusive evidence that early orchidopexy is protective.

Ideally, cryptorchidism should be treated by 1 year of age. After this time, it is unlikely that the testicle will descend spontaneously. Additionally, there is good evidence that irreversible histologic damage may occur to the cryptorchid testicle by 3 years of age. Regardless, a significant number of children still present in late childhood and adolescence with undescended testes. This may occur for one of several reasons. The most common scenario is that children are not referred for definitive treatment, because either the parents or physician observe the child for years, hoping that the testicle will descend spontaneously. Secondly, a testicle may be present in the scrotum early in childhood but subsequently ascends into a cryptorchid position. This specific cause for testicular ascent is unclear, but it may be related to the vertical growth of a child who has a testicle fixed in place because of a patent process vaginalis [5]. Lastly, a small number of boys with retractile testes early in childhood will present in later childhood with true cryptorchidism.

The management of a prepubertal child with a palpable undescended testicle is straightforward. Surgical orchidopexy is the standard of care. Much has been written on the use of hormonal therapy, usually injections of human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) as a means of medical management of cryptorchidism. The success rates of hCG are low in comparison to orchidopexy, however [1]. The greatest utility of hCG therapy may be to differentiate between retractile testes and true undescended testes. This situation is encountered commonly in an overweight child whose testis is floating in the peri-pubic fat pad. A course of hCG therapy (500 to 1000 IU intramuscularly twice weekly for 5 weeks) may lead to descent of the testes into the scrotum, thus obviating the need for surgery. Human chorionic gonadotropin therapy is not indicated in boys with true undescended testes. Hormonal therapy has no role after puberty, simply because the child produces endogenous androgens to affect testicular descent.

Undescended testes in children with nonpalpable testes represent a more complex situation. Several clinical possibilities exist. First, a testicle may not be present. Second, a testis may exist, but it may be small and nonviable. Third, there may be a viable testis located in the abdomen. In differentiating among these three possibilities, imaging studies have a limited role. Many patients undergo ultrasonography, but this is of little benefit. Detection of a testis on ultrasonography mandates a surgical exploration for orchidopexy. Failure to visualize a testis on ultrasound, however, does not mean that a testis is not present. In this instance, the testis may be intra-abdominal. Thus, a negative ultrasound does not obviate surgical exploration. MRI of the abdomen is a promising technique that may allow noninvasive determination of whether a testis is present and also determine the location of the organ [6]. The standard of care for a nonpalpable testis, however, remains surgical exploration.

There is no difference in the management of prepubertal boys with cryptorchidism from infants with the same condition. Postpubertal boys have different clinical and physiologic issues to consider. A postpubertal cryptorchid testis will have varying degrees of abnormal histology. Although hormonal function probably is maintained, spermatogenesis will be impaired markedly [7]. Furthermore, whether late orchidopexy will be protective against malignant degeneration is unknown. A postpubertal cryptorchid testis is often much smaller than the descended testis, as the latter has been able to develop and grow normally during pubertal hormonal simulation. Therefore, in a postpubertal male with cryptorchidism, the safest course of action may be to consider orchiectomy if a normal contralateral testicle is present. The role of testicular biopsy in the decision-making has not been clarified.

Varicocele

The term varicocele refers to dilated varicose veins draining the testicle. Although relatively uncommon in early childhood, varicoceles may be found in 15% of teenagers [1]. This number is similar to the incidence of varicoceles in adults. Varicoceles represent a soft fleshy mass superior and distinct from the testis that usually disappears when the patient is recumbent. They are detected most often during routine examinations. Large varicoceles have been described as having the appearance and consistency of a bag of worms.

The etiology of varicoceles is unclear. Varicoceles nearly always develop on the left side. The reason for this may be related to the anatomical and embryological differences between the two sides. The right spermatic vein drains directly into the inferior vena cava, and the left spermatic vein drains directly into the left renal vein, which has a slightly higher pressure than the vena cava. Additionally, there is partial compression of the left renal vein as it passes between the aorta and superior mesenteric artery. The right spermatic vein drains tangentially into the vena cava, unlike the acute 90 drainage of the left spermatic vein into the renal vein. Some authors feel that this predisposes the left spermatic vein to turbulent flow. The sudden development of a large varicocele, especially in a younger child, may be a sign of spermatic vein obstruction caused by the presence of a retroperitoneal mass.

The clinical and physiologic sequelae of varicoceles vary. Varicoceles can cause scrotal discomfort. This pain typically is described as a dull ache. Often, this discomfort is aggravated by activity or episodes of increased intra-abdominal pressure. Presumably, the inciting cause is the engorgement and distention of the veins within the scrotum related to increased intra-abdominal pressure.

Another problem associated with varicoceles is subfertility. Indeed, varicoceles represent the most common surgically- correctable cause of infertility. The reasons for this subfertility are unclear. Proposed theories include scrotal hyperthermia with secondary testicular injury, reflux of injurious metabolites, testicular hypoxia, and primary bilateral testicular dysfunction.

It is important to remember that although the presence of a varicocele increases the risk of having male-factor infertility, most men with varicoceles have normal fertility.

The dilemma associated with the management of adolescents with varicoceles relates to the evaluation and endpoints of therapy. Most teenagers with varicoceles are diagnosed as part of a routine school or sports physical examination. It is relatively uncommon for teenagers to present with associated pain or discomfort. Most teenagers are not concerned about fertility, which is the other potential physiologic consequence of varicoceles. The best way to assess for fertility potential would be to perform semen analyses. This rarely is performed in adolescents, however. A more practical and but less precise method is to evaluate testicular volume. If both testicles are equal in size, then a clinician assumes that the varicocele has not affected testicular health and that obs\ervation is appropriate. If, however, on serial evaluation, there is evidence that the left testicle is not developing, it would suggest that the varicocele may be affecting testicular health and that treatment is required. Testicular volume is assessed most easily with the use of a hand-held orchidometer. Routine ultrasonographic measurements are not necessary. A size difference of greater than 2 cc on serial examinations is considered significant. Studies have shown that when surgery is performed because of documented and progressive testicular volume loss, there often is catch-up growth of the involved testicle.

There are two main therapeutic options: surgical ligation of the veins or embolization of the veins by interventional radiologists. The latter has the potential advantage of avoiding an incision and general anesthesia, and a faster recovery. Success rates, however, are not as high with embolization as with surgical ligation [8]. Furthermore, unlike adults who simply may require local anesthesia for embolization, adolescents often require general surgery, precluding this potential advantage. In the United States, transvenous embolization of varicoceles is not performed commonly in adolescents.

Open surgical repair of varicoceles can be performed in several different ways. The main principle is to divide as many veins as possible. Although the varicocele is most evident in the scrotum, a trans-scrotal approach is ill advised because of the large number of veins present at that level and also the potential for injury to the testicular artery. Most pediatric urologists advocate approaching the varicocele through the groin or through a retroperitoneal approach. Recently, laparoscopic approaches also have been described [9]. Regardless of the technique, success rates with surgical repair are greater than 90% [8]. The main complications include recurrence of the varicocele and secondary development of hydrocele.

The acute scrotum

The term acute scrotum refers to severe pain within the scrotum that may mandate immediate surgical exploration for testicular salvage. Any physician caring for a boy with a painful scrotum must consider the possibility of testicular torsion. This refers to spontaneous twisting of the testicle with subsequent vascular compromise. The specific reason why a testicle may twist is unknown. There is a well-described anatomical abnormality known as the bell clapper deformity, however, which permits such a twist to occur. In the normal situation, the testicle and epididymis are fixed within the scrotum posteriorly. When a bell clapper deformity is present, there are no points of fixation circumferentially, allowing the testicle to twist within the scrotum. In this situation, the testicle hangs within the scrotum by means of its vascular pedicle analogous to the pendulum of a bell.

When complete testicular torsion occurs, there is a limited amount of time available when the testicle is still viable and salvageable. Studies have shown that after 6 hours of twist, about 90% of testicles will be necrotic. After 24 hours, this rate approaches 100%. Thus, in any boy with testicular pain, timely diagnosis and treatment are of utmost importance.

Most boys with testicular pain do not have testicular torsion. Indeed, true testicular torsion is a relatively uncommon occurrence. A more common cause of scrotal pain is torsion of the appendix testis. The appendix testes are small tissues attached to the testicle and epididymis, which represent embryological remnants with no known function. These appendages can twist spontaneously, leading to inflammation and necrosis, which cause significant pain and discomfort. The torsion of these appendages has no long-term significance.

Another cause of scrotal discomfort is epididymitis. True epididymitis is rare in the otherwise healthy prepubertal population. Teenagers who may be sexually active may develop it as a sexually transmitted disease. Some boys may develop epididymitis as a result of voiding dysfunction. In general, bacterial epididymitis usually occurs in boys with anatomical or functional abnormalities of the urinary system. When it occurs in an otherwise healthy male, it mandates a complete evaluation of the urinary tract.

The most important aspect of the evaluation of a boy with testicular pain is the history and physical examination. Typically boys with testicular torsion will relate sudden onset of severe testicular pain. Often there is associated abdominal or inguinal discomfort and nausea and vomiting. These boys may have difficulty ambulating. Because of the sensitive nature of the organ involved, there often is a delay before teenager tells an adult about the problem. This delay in presentation represents the most common reason why boys with testicular torsion often present with necrotic nonsalvageable testicles.

The physical examination will vary depending on when the child presents. If a boy presents soon after onset of pain when the testicle is still viable, the classic findings will include a high riding testicle whose longitudinal length is located in the horizontal plane (horizontal lie). The testicle will be diffusely tender. There may also be abdominal and inguinal tenderness. Early in the process, the scrotal wall will be normal with no thickening or swelling and only minimal redness. Usually, a cremasteric reflex is not present. Indeed, the presence of a cremasteric reflex may be less suggestive of testicular torsion. If the boy presents late, the physical findings are related to testicular necrosis. There may be diffuse scrotal wall thickening, erythema, and edema. There often is so much swelling that the testicle is not palpable; early signs such as the horizontal lie are not appreciable.

Some boys will have intermittent testicular torsion. These boys will present with occasional episodes of sudden and severe testicular pain that will resolve spontaneously. By the time these children are seen by medical personnel, the testicle has untwisted. Physical findings and radiographic studies will be normal. If the history is suggestive of this entity, elective testicular fixation is advisable for these boys.

Boys with a torsed appendix testis have a different history and examination. The pain typically is more gradual in onset and is usually not quite as severe as that associated with true testicular torsion. Most of the time, these boys present a day or so after onset of pain. The severity of the pain is typically not as great as compared with those with testicular torsion. Systemic signs such as nausea and vomiting or associated abdominal pain are often not present. Boys with appendix testis torsion also tend to be slightly younger than boys with testicular torsion. The physical examination in these boys can be quite varied. The classic blue dot sign is pathognomonic for appendix testis torsion, but is also relatively uncommon. This sign refers to visualization of the ischemic or necrotic appendix testis through the scrotal wall on the superior aspect of the testicle. The most common finding in patients with appendix testis torsion is diffuse scrotal wall thickening, erythema, and tenderness. The cremasteric reflex may be present. Duplex ultrasonography in these boys shows marked reactive hyperemia of the epididymis that often leads to the mistaken diagnosis of epididymitis.

Boys with epididymitis usually have pain and swelling that gradually worsen over time. They may have associated urethral discharge and abnormal urine sediment. The patient also may be febrile. The diagnosis of epididymitis always should be confirmed with a duplex ultrasound study demonstrating increased blood flow to the involved testis and epididymis. A common clinical mistake is to assume that the firm, twisted spermatic cord palpable posterior to the testis seen in early torsion is an inflamed epididymis.

The fundamental question that needs to be answered in boys with testicular pain is determining whether testicular torsion is present. If testicular torsion is present, emergent surgical exploration is necessary. If a boy does not have testicular torsion, then medical management with observation, analgesics, or antibiotics is required.

Because there is a direct relationship between duration of pain and salvageability of the testicle in boys with testicular torsion, the duration of time from the onset testicular pain determines the management. For example, if a boy presents within 6 hours of onset of pain, the time associated with performing ultrasonography may contribute to increased ischemic time and, ultimately, testicular necrosis. This patient may be best served with prompt surgical exploration without any diagnostic studies. If a boy presents with 12 hours of pain, however, the likelihood of testicular salvage in the face of prolonged testicular torsion is very low. In this instance, imaging studies may be helpful. The study of choice is a color flow Doppler ultrasound, which demonstrates the presence or lack of blood flow within the testicle. The reliability and accuracy of the study depends on the experience of the ultrasonographer. Falsely normal Doppler ultrasound studies (ie, testicle has Doppler signals, but is actually ischemic) have been reported [10]. Therefore, if there is strong clinical suspicion, surgical exploration should be pursued.

Scrotal masses

Scrotal masses are encountered commonly by primary care providers when educating the patient on the importance of self-examination and also as part of routine physical examinations for sports programs. Scrotal examination should be approached by carefully palpating and identifying the intrascrotal contents. The examiner should palpate the testicle and the epididymis, located behind and superior to the testicle. Furthermore, the spermatic cord, consisting of the testicular vessels and vas deferens, should be assessed.

When evaluating scrotal masses, one need\s to classify them based on whether they are extratesticular or intratesticular, solid or cystic, and painless or painful. Masses truly arising from the testicle are more likely to represent malignancies, whereas extratesticular masses are more likely to be benign. Although a carefully performed physical examination may be diagnostic, confirmation using scrotal ultrasonography is recommended, not only to confirm location of the mass but also to differentiate between solid and cystic lesions.

Solid masses are much more likely to represent neoplastic conditions, especially when painless. Transillumination using a hand- held light source may differentiate between solid and cystic structures. Although testicular cancer is more common in men in the third and fourth decades of life, adult testicular cancers may develop in any boy after the onset of puberty. The types of tumors that may develop in adolescents and teenagers are similar to those encountered in adult males and require the same diagnostic and therapeutic algorithms. Solid extratesticular masses are less common but also must be considered possible neoplastic conditions. Extratesticular tumors that may be found in teenage boys include para-testicular rhabdomyosarcoma or ademomatoid tumors of the epididymis.

Cystic lesions of the scrotum are much more common than solid lesions. A cystic mass within the epididymis is usually a spermatocele, which is a cystic dilation of the epididymal tubule. Spermatoceles require intervention only if the progressive enlargement causes pain. A cyst within the spermatic cord most likely represents a hydrocele of the cord. A cystic mass that surrounds the entire testicle such that the testicle itself is hard to feel represents a hydrocele. Small asymptomatic hydroceles may be observed, but larger ones that fluctuate in size or cause pain or discomfort should be corrected surgically.

Testicular microlithiasis

Testicular microlithiasis is an ultrasonographic finding of unclear significance. Boys with testicular microlithiasis usually have this detected at the time of scrotal ultrasonography performed for either scrotal pain or a scrotal mass. The microlithiasis itself is actually not palpable clinically and does not cause any symptoms. On ultrasound, small punctate, echogenic areas of calcification may be found throughout the testicle. The degree of calcification can vary from having only a few lesions to innumerable ones leading to a snowstorm appearance. There have been reports suggesting an association of testicular cancer in men with testicular microlithiasis [11]. It is unknown whether testicular microlithiasis is a preneoplastic condition, is simply associated with an increased risk of cancer development, or is of no significance at all. Although many case reports document the simultaneous existence of testicular microlithiasis and testicular cancer, there has been no study that shows that testicular microlithiasis is a risk for developing testicular cancer. It is possible that the same underlying abnormality that predisposes to germ cell tumors also may predispose to microlithiasis and that the microlithiasis itself may not be an independent risk factor. Regardless, the implications for and management of teenagers diagnosed as having testicular microlithiasis are unclear. The best course of action may be to address the uncertainties of the condition with the families and to emphasize the importance of monthly self-examination, which is something that all postpubertal males should perform anyway [12].

Urinary tract infections

Urinary tract infections (UTIs) are a relatively common problem in children. Indeed, 5% of febrile children will have a UTI as the source of the fever. Although there is a greater likelihood of structural or congenital abnormalities in children with UTIs, most children will still be anatomically normal. An initial evaluation to help differentiate between lower tract infection (cystitis) and upper tract infection (pyelonephritis) is useful. In general, cystitis is characterized more by symptoms such as urgency, frequency, incontinence, suprapubic pain, and dysuria. High-grade fever is less common. Pyelonephritis is a more systemic illness characterized by fever, malaise, and flank pain. Differentiation based on signs and symptoms is not perfectly accurate; however, it remains useful clinically, at least in older children. A UTI can be diagnosed only in the presence of a positive urine culture. The presence of dysuria, microscopic hematuria, urgency or frequency in the absence of a positive culture is not an infection. Ultimately, the main reason to prevent UTIs is that recurrent upper tract infections may lead to renal parenchymal scarring. Such scarring subsequently increases the risk of hypertension and even renal failure.

Although renal scarring may be the greatest consequence of UTIs in children, the development of renal injury after a single infection is uncommon in older children [13]. Progressive renal injury usually is the result of repeated, inappropriately-treated infections, especially in the face of underlying congenital dysplasia.

Older children do not necessarily need any formal evaluation after an initial episode of lower UTI. A careful history in these children often will identify underlying dysfunctional bladder or bowel habits that most often lead to the infection. Parents often are surprised to note that the bacteria leading to infection are nearly always enteric in origin. The prevention of UTIs must include normalizing voiding habits and ensuring proper hygiene.

Recurrent lower UTIs and even a single upper UTI require a radiographic evaluation. At a minimum, this includes imaging of the kidneys, preferably with a renal ultrasound. Renal ultrasonography is easy to perform, noninvasive, and obviates any concern for contrast reactions. Intravenous pyelography has no role in the routine evaluation of children with recurrent UTIs.

Dimercaptosuccinic (DMSA) scanning is very accurate at defining renal parenchymal involvement or injury. It has little role in the routine evaluation of children with infections, however. Some have argued that invasive studies such as cystography should be performed only in patients who have evidence of renal parenchymal involvement with a positive DMSA scan. A normal DMSA study may suggest that an infection may be clinically insignificant, as renal injury is unlikely from that specific infection.

The need for voiding cystourcthrography (VCUG) is controversial. Not all children with recurrent infections need to have a VCUG. VCUG should be performed only if one is concerned that vesicoureteral reflux may be present. Thus an adolescent with lower tract UTIs and not pyelonephritis does not need a VCUG. On the other hand, a child with recurrent pyelonephritis requires a VCUG. It is rather arbitrary whether to perform nuclear cystography or fluoroscopic cystography, because the radiation doses to the gonads are similar using either technique. Standard VCUG has the advantage that associated anatomic abnormalities such as bladder diverticulae, urethral abnormalities, and constipation can be assessed. Nuclear cystography has the advantage of being slightly more sensitive at the detection of reflux.

Boys with UTIs always require a formal evaluation, because infections are so uncommon in males. This evaluation entails kidney ultrasound and usually a VCUG. Infections in anatomically normal boys usually are related to dysfunctional bladder/bowel habits or being uncircumcised. The latter factor becomes less important beyond a year of age.

Vesicoureteral reflux in the adolescent population

The management of vesicoureteral reflux in young children is well- established. The mainstay of therapy is daily prophylactic antibiotics, treatment of any underlying dysfunctional bladder and bowel habits, and observation. Over the course of time, most children will have resolution of reflux. Surgical intervention is reserved for those with persistent infections despite prophylaxis, evidence of progressive renal injury, or persistence of reflux after a period of observation.

Decision-making is more difficult in older children whose reflux is less likely to resolve. The clinical management always has been to ensure eradication of reflux before the onset of puberty because of concern over the potential impact of febrile infections during pregnancy. There is very little information available on the risks posed by persistent reflux in women who are pregnant, however. There are significant data, however, showing that pre-existing renal scarring or reflux nephropathy may complicate pregnancy, especially if there is associated hypertension or renal insufficiency [14]. There is no information on the significance of persisting reflux into normal kidneys in pregnant women.

The traditional management for prepubertal girls with persistent reflux is standard open surgical correction. Surgical correction can be performed readily with minimal morbidity and with a 99% chance for cure. Surgical correction is designed to prevent recurrent upper tract infection. Children may continue to have lower tract infection despite successful eradication of reflux.

Two other management options for persistence of reflux are available and should be considered. One may consider simply discontinuing prophylactic antibiotics. Because renal injury usually only occurs in children younger than 4 to 5 years old, parenchymal damage is very unlikely in older children with pyelonephritis. A clinician may consider discontinuing prophylactic antibiotics and offering surgical correction reserved to those who continue to have infections. There are few reports of this approach, but in selected situations, observation may be appropriate. In one study, only 12% of children who had antibiotics discontinued developed recurrent infection [15]. Appropriate candidates for observational management incl\ude older children with low-grade reflux, no evidence of renal injury, and no definable bladder or bowel dysfunction.

Another option is the use of injection therapy. Cystoscopic injection of material into the submucosal space adjacent to the ureteral orifice has been used for nearly 20 years. The injected material creates a functional valve mechanism, correcting reflux with relatively high success rates [16-18]. This minimally invasive approach has been used extensively in Europe, but widespread use in the United States has been limited by the lack of a US Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-approved injectable substance.

Deflux (Q-Med, Uppsala, Sweden), a dextranomer/hyaluronic acid copolymer is a newer substance that has received FDA approval. This material is nonallergenic, stable, and does not migrate to distant organs. It is easy to inject. Short-term success rates of greater than 85% have been demonstrated. Success rates are higher in children with lower grades of reflux. The long-term efficacy of this method is unknown. The role of Deflux in the management of vesicoureteral reflux remains to be defined, and its greatest role may be in older children with low-grade reflux that persists after a period of observation.

Urinary incontinence

Urinary incontinence can be a devastating problem for an adolescent. The history is the most important part of the evaluation. To understand the pathophysiology of the incontinence, questions with regard to the nature of the wetting and the child’s general voiding habits should be asked. Specific questions include whether the child voids before going to school or during the school day (determine presence of infrequent voiding habits), whether the child feels like he needs to void more often than his friends, and whether he always has to look for a restroom in new environments (suggesting an overactive bladder). Additionally, specific details regarding the degree and timing of incontinence, the presence of urgency or frequency, and the coexistence of any dysfunctional bowel habits should be pursued. By asking very pointed questions with regard to the nature, timing, and situations associated with leakage, the underlying etiology often can be deduced. Invasive studies rarely are required. Specifically, VCUGs are not helpful, because vesicoureteral reflux never causes incontinence.

Incontinence in adolescents is usually dysfunctional in nature. It is rare for incontinence in this age group to be related to anatomic abnormalities. Progressively worsening incontinence or an inability to void may be a sign of an underlying spinal cord abnormality such as occult spinal dysraphism. Although rare, these spinal cord abnormalities need to be considered in any child who does not respond to therapy or if there are associated neurological symptoms or signs.

Urinary incontinence can be classified into one of several subtypes. Incontinence most often occurs because of bladder instability, infrequent voiding patterns, sphincter dysfunction, or vaginal reflux. A separate subcategory is the entity known as giggle incontinence. In general, patients with bladder instability will present with severe urgency and frequency. Vincent’s curtsy, whereby a girl will squat on her heel compressing her perineum and urethra shut, is a classic sign of bladder instability in young children; it is quite uncommon in older children and adolescents. Older children may relate significant urgency and frequency, often leading to the mistaken notion that the child has a bladder with a small capacity. Usually, these children have anatomically normal bladder capacities, but have low functional capacity because of the underlying bladder instability. The etiology of this unstable bladder may be related to associated bowel dysfunction and fecal retention. Often, episodes of cystitis and subsequent bladder inflammation may precipitate the development of an unstable bladder. These children may be treated with anticholinergics with gratifying results. Equally important is the treatment of any associated fecal retention. Indeed, studies have shown that treatment of bowel dysfunction alone may lead to significant improvement in incontinence [19].

On the opposite end of the spectrum are children with infrequent voiding habits. These children often are mislabeled as being lazy. They have developed the habit of only voiding once or twice during the course of the day. As result of this, they can have episodes of urgency with leakage of small amounts of urine. Occasionally, children with a history of infrequent voiding will develop UTIs and may develop an unstable bladder as described previously. Management of infrequent voiding patterns usually requires education and bladder retraining. A timed voiding program in conjunction with a bowel regimen is often successful. Severe cases of infrequent bladder emptying that may lead to bladder decompensation and hydronephrosis (the so-called non-neurogenic neurogenic bladder) require aggressive treatment with intermittent catheterization to prevent renal injury.

Some children can have urinary incontinence and infections because of incomplete emptying. This usually is detected only by noting an elevated postvoid residual on a screening renal ultrasound. Incomplete emptying may be caused by incomplete sphincter relaxation or inappropriate sphincter contraction during voiding. Sphincter dysfunction can be very hard to objectively assess, but treatment usually involves behavioral modification in the form of double and frequent voiding programs. Biofeedback techniques also may be used to try to teach the child sphincter relaxation. These methods are quite labor-intensive, however, and long-term efficacy is not known.

Reflux of urine into the vagina during voiding may occur in girls, especially those who are overweight, whose labia do not separate when seated on the toilet. The labia then act as a barrier, forcing a small amount of urine back into the introitus and vagina. This urine then can trickle into the underpants upon arising. The key to diagnosing this form of leakage is that the child notices the wetting after voiding. These children usually do not have any associated urgency, frequency, or any definable dysfunctional voiding habits. Treatment involves having the child manually separate the labia when seated to ensure that the introitus is unobstructed during voiding.

A special form of urinary incontinence is the so-called giggle incontinence. This form of incontinence often is misinterpreted as being stress incontinence, a condition that is nonexistent in an otherwise healthy adolescent population. A careful history in such children will elicit the fact that urinary incontinence only occurs during episodes of laughter. Such children are often very athletic, and urinary incontinence rarely occurs during physical activity. This is a surprisingly common condition that is understood poorly. There is evidence that it may be an inheritable disorder [20,21]. The etiology of this condition may be related to the cataplexy- narcolepsy complex, and, thus, may be a central nervous system (CNS) disorder. Usually, the history is all that is required to make the diagnosis. These patients typically have totally normal voiding habits outside of incontinence that is related strictly to laughter. Invasive studies such as VCUG or urodynamics are unnecessary. Often behavioral modifications such as frequent voiding or voiding before events or situations that may lead to wetting are adequate. Anecdotally, anticholinergic medications or Kegel exercises have shown improvement, but these are usually unsuccessful. The most successful pharmacological therapy for giggle incontinence appears to be the use of CNS stimulants such as methylphenidate. These medications may be used on a daily basis or on an as-needed basis before situations where leakage may occur.

Summary

There are several urologic conditions in the adolescent male and female that require medical attention. The conditions discussed in this article represent some of the most common concerns in adolescents.

References

[1] Schneck F, Bellinger MF. Abnormalities of the testes and scrotum and their surgical management. In: Walsh P, editor. Campbell’s urology. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders; 2002. p. 2353-94.

[2] Lee PA, O’Leary LA, Songer NJ, Coughlin MT, Bellinger MF, Laporte RE. Paternity after unilateral cryptorchidism: a controlled study. Pediatrics 1996;98:676-9.

[3] Lee PA, O’Leary LA, Songer NJ, Coughlin MT, Bellinger MF, Laporte RE. Paternity after bilateral cryptorchidism. A controlled study. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 1997;151(3):260-3.

[4] Lee PA, O’Leary LA, Songer NJ, Bellinger MF, Laporte RE. Paternity after cryptorchidism: lack of correlation with age at orchidopexy. Br J Urol 1995;75(6):704-7.

[5] Rabinowitz R, Hulbert WCJ. Late presentation of cryptorchidism: the etiology of testicular reascent. J Urol 1997;157(5):1892-4.

[6] Yeung CK, Tam YH, Chan YL, Lee KM, Metreweli C. A new management algorithm for impalpable undescended testis with gadolinium enhanced magnetic resonance angiography. J Urol 1999; 162(3 Pt 2):998-1002.

[7] Rogers E, Teahan S, Gallagher H, Butler MR, Grainger R, McDermott TE, et al. The role of orchiectomy in the management of postpubertal cryptorchidism. J Urol 1998;159(3):851-4.

[8] Kass EJ, Reitelman C. Adolescent varicocele. Urol Clin North Am 1995;22(1):151-9.

[9] Ugazzi M, Chiriboga A, Proano L. Laparoscopic treatment for varicocele. J Laparoendosc Surg 1996;6(Suppl 1):S9-13.

[10] Steinhardt GF, Boyarsky S, Mackey R. Testicular torsion: pitfalls of color Doppler sonography. J Urol 1993;150:461-2.

[11] Berger A, Brabrand K. Testicular microlithiasis-a possibly premalignant condition. Report of five cases and a review of the literature. Acta Radiol 1998;39(5):583-6.

[12] Furness III PD, Husmann DA, Brock III JW, Steinhardt GF, Bukowski TP, Freedman AL. Multi-institutional study oftesticular microlithiasis in childhood: a benign or premalignant condition? J Urol 1998;160:1151 -4 [discussion 1178].

[13] Smellie JM, Ransley PG, Normand IC, Prescod N, Edwards D. Development of new renal scars: a collaborative study. BMJ 1985;290(6486): 1957-60.

[14] Jungers P. Reflux nephropathy and pregnancy. Baillieres Clin Obstet Gynaecol 1994;8(2): 425-42.

[15] Cooper CS, Chung BI, Kirsch AJ, Canning DA, Snyder III HM. The outcome of stopping prophylactic antibiotics in older children with vesicoureteral reflux. J Urol 2000;163(1):269-72 [discussion 272-3].

[16] Caione P, Capozza N. Endoscopic treatment of urinary incontinence in pediatric patients: 2-year experience with dextranomer/hyaluronic acid copolymer. J Urol 2002;168:1868-71.

[17] Lackgren G, Wahlin N, Skoldenberg E, Stenberg A. Long-term follow-up of children treated with dextranomer/hyaluronic acid copolymer for vesicoureteral reflux. J Urol 2001;166(5): 1887-92.

[18] Puri P, Chertin B, Velayudham M, Dass L, Colhoven E. Treatment of vesicoureteral reflux by endoscopic injection of dextranomer/hyaluronic Acid copolymer: preliminary results. J Urol 2003;170:1541-4 [discussion 1544].

[19] O’Regan S, Yazbeck S, Schick E. Constipation, bladder instability, urinary tract infection syndrome. Clin Nephrol 1985;23:152-4.

[20] Sher PK. Successful treatment of giggle incontinence with methylphenidate. Pediatr Neurol 1994;10(1):81.

[21] Sher PK, Reinberg Y. Successful treatment of giggle incontinence with methylphenidate. J Urol 1996;156:656-8.

Venkata R. Jayanthi, MDa,b,*

a Section of Pediatric Urology, Division of Urology, Department of Surgery, Children’s Hospital, 700 Children s Drive, Columbus, OH 43205, USA

b The Ohio State University, Columbus, OH 43210

* Children’s Hospital, 700 Children’s Drive, Columbus, OH 43205.

E-mail address: [email protected]

Copyright Hanley & Belfus, Inc. Oct 2004

Breast Disorders in the Adolescent Patient

The mammary glands develop as solid extensions of the ectoderm into the underlying mesenchyme. These extensions occur along two thickened strips of ectoderm, which start at the axilla and extend to the inguinal region. Later in fetal life, the mammary ridges disappear except in the pectoral area. The breast bud, the pectoral remnant of the mammary ridge, consists of primary ducts and loose stroma. Secondary lactiferous ducts arise from the primary ducts. Each ductal system drains independently into the nipple. At a gestational age of about 40 weeks, the nipples are poorly formed and often depressed. Around the perinatal period, connective tissue grows under the breast bud to form the nipple/ areola complex [1].

During the prepubertal period, the breast tissue hardly undergoes any changes. Breast development is usually the first sign of puberty. The average age for onset of thelarche is 11.2 years, with a range of 9.0 to 13.4 years [2]. The primary hormones influencing breast development is estradiol, which primarily controls ductal development, and progesterone, which promotes lobular development. Corticosteroids and thyroid hormones are implicated in breast development also. The duration of breast maturation can range from 18 months to 9 years. Tanner staging is an accepted and uniform way to describe the pubertal development of the breast (Table 1).

After puberty, changes continue to occur within the female breast. Lobular and stromal units develop between adolescence and pregnancy. This period is characterized by the cyclic activity of hormones related to ovulation. During pregnancy, the breast enlarges to accommodate milk production and lactation; the size involutes after breastfeeding is finished. After age 35, the breast stroma becomes less fibrous and is replaced by fat. The mature breast is softer and less lobular.

Table 1

Tanner stages of breast development [47]

Developmental anomalies of the breast

The absence of nipples (athclia) and the absence of breast tissue (amastia) may occur bilaterally or unilaterally. This rare condition results when the mammary ridges fail to develop or completely disappear. Athelia or amastia may be associated with Poland syndrome, which may include absent chest wall muscles, absence of ribs 2 to 5, webbed fingers, vertebral anomalies, radial nerve palsy, and pectus excavatum. Amastia in girls may be treated with an augmentation mammoplasty using traditional implants or an expander implant [3]. In the latter technique, an expander implant is placed, and the volume of the implant is adjusted with time to match the volume of the contralateral breast tissue. The patient receives a permanent implant after full breast maturity is reached.

An extra breast (polymastia) or extra nipple (polythelia) occurs in approximately 1% of the population. It may be an inheritable condition [4]. Supernumerary nipples are slightly more common in males than in females. Extra breasts or nipples most commonly occur along the milk line, usually just underneath the normally located breasts or nipples. They also have been noted in ectopic sites such as the back or the buttock [5,6]. Accessory or ectopic breast tissue responds to hormonal stimulation and may cause discomfort during menstrual cycles and in the postpartum period. Some authors have reported that these tissues may undergo benign [7] or malignant [8,9] transformation and that resection of ectopic breast tissue should be performed in childhood or early adolescence.

During puberty, breast asymmetry may occur when one breast develops before or more rapidly than the other. The physical examination usually shows homogenous enlargement of one breast with no discrete masses or discharge. Accompanying breast tenderness may be present. If a mass is not present on physical examination or ultrasonography, the patient and parents may be reassured that the asymmetry will become less noticeable with age. If, however, significant asymmetry persists after full breast development, then augmentation or reduction mammoplasty of one side may be considered.

Breast atrophy may occur in the pubertal period. It is usually caused by loss of fat and supportive tissues around the breasts secondary to poor eating habits.

Tuberous breast deformity results from breast hypoplasia, deficient diameter of the mammary base at the horizontal and vertical levels, and the presence of a constricting ring that herniates the nipple areolar complex, causing an overlying protuberant areola [10]. The entity is benign, but it can be of significant cosmetic concern to the patient and her family. In some cases, treatment is reassurance, while reconstructive surgery is indicated for severe tuberous breast deformity.

Macromastia, or enlarged breasts, are often evident during adolescence. Enlarged breasts are associated with complaints of breast pain, back pain, poor posture, shoulder grooving, and problems with self-image. Approximately two-thirds of patients with macromastia are obese. Conservative measures such as weight loss, improved posture, physical therapy, supportive brassieres and nonsteroidal analgesic medications may be recommended first. Reduction mammoplasty, however, significantly improves the symptoms and quality of life for patients [11,12]. Generally, the procedure should be deferred until breast maturation is completed.

Juvenile hypertrophy is an extreme form of macromastia that is usually symmetric and occurs at the time of menarche. Both breasts diffusely enlarge. Because the hormonal levels of estradiol and progesterone are normal, it is thought that this condition is caused by an abnormal response of the breast during thelarche [13]. Histologically, the breast shows an increase in connective tissue with moderate ductal proliferation. Although this lesion is benign, adolescents with juvenile breast hypertrophy experience significant discomfort to their neck, shoulders, and back. Hormonal treatment has been tried but, often, surgical intervention such as reduction mammoplasty or subcutaneous mastectomy with placement of an implant is necessary. Recent literature has shown that women who had undergone reduction mammoplasty in adolescence are still able to breastfeed successfully [14].

Breast disorders in prepubertal children

In about 60% of normal newborns, maternal hormones may cause unilateral or bilateral enlargement. Some secretion of an opaque liquid (“witches’ milk”) may accompany these changes. Both of these findings resolve spontaneously and do not require treatment.

Benign premature thelarche is defined as isolated breast development in females between the ages of 6 months and 9 years. Signs of precocious puberty such as presence of pubic hair and accelerated bone growth should be sought carefully during examination, as they may indicate ovarian or adrenal tumors. If thelarche is isolated, treatment is reassurance and re-evaluation every 6 to 12 months. If breast development is progressive or does not regress within 1 to 2 years, an endocrine work-up is recommended. Additionally, if other signs of puberty are present, precocious puberty should be ruled out. Precocious puberty may be central or gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH)- dependent, peripheral (GnRH-independent), or incomplete.

Early onset of puberty is more common in females and often is activated centrally by the premature activation of the hypothalamic- pituitary-gonadal axis. Hypothalamic hamartomas, trauma, and central nervous system (CNS) lesions may cause central precocious puberty; however, it is most commonly idiopathic. The diagnosis is made by giving exogenous GnRH, which results in a dramatic rise in serum follicular stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH). Treatment involves surgical removal of the responsible lesion or the continuous administration of exogenous GnRH to suppress FSH and LH release. Peripheral precocious puberty is caused by sex steroid secretion independent of GnRH release. Causes include McCune- Albright syndrome, administration of exogenous steroids, or circulation of endogenous steroids from an ovarian or an adrenal tumor. Serum FSH and LH levels are usually normal or low.

Breast infections may occur in the newborn period or in the prepubertal patient. In infants, mastitis neonatorum presents as cellulitis with or without an abscess in the second or third week of life. Antibiotics, and, if a significant abscess is present, drainage, are used to treat the infection. In a child or an adolescent, needle aspiration is preferable to incisional drainage to minimize the risk of damage to the breast bud. The infectious agent is usually Streptococcus or Staphylococcus. Recently, it has been recognized that breast abscesses can occur as a sequela of nipple piercing [15]. Infections may occur on the average of 7 months after initial instrumentation in 10% to 20% of people. Healing of the tract takes up to 6 to 12 months after drainage and removal of the foreign body.

Gynecomastia is a benign and usually self-limited condition that occurs in 50% to 60% of boys during early adolescence. This entity is uncommon in prepubertal boys, and often it is associated with endocrine syndromes or tumors. In adolescent boys, it usually occurs about 1 year after the onset of puberty. On examination, gynecomastia presents as discrete, mobile subareolar masses or diffusely enlarged painful breasts. If the mass is large or fixed, or if a d\ischarge is present, further evaluation is necessary. The physical examination in an adolescent with gynecomastia should include a testicular examination. Although simple pubertal gynecomastia is most common, the differential diagnosis for gynecomastia includes Klinefelter’s syndrome, testicular feminization, hormone-secreting tumors, hyperthyroidism, hypothyroidism, cirrhosis, drug use (eg, cimetidine or marijuana), and familial predisposition. Obese young males may present with pseudogynecomastia; weight loss usually is recommended. Patients with mild-to-moderate gynecomastia should be reassured that the condition is self-limited. Breast enlargement of greater than 4 cm rarely resolves spontaneously, however. If the breast enlargement is such that it causes pain, discomfort, or psychological trauma, subcutaneous mastectomies should be performed. The mastectomy is performed through a subareolar incision with or without the use of liposuction.

Breast masses

Neinstein summarized 15 reviews of breast lesions in adolescents and young adults (N = 179) from 1960 to 1999 [13]. Fibroadenomas accounted for 68% of breast masses. Proliferative lesions with fibrocystic changes were second in frequency (19%). Less than 1% of the breast masses were malignant; about a third of these arose from breast tissue, and the remainder consisted of Hodgkin’s lymphomas, lymphosarcoma, angiosarcoma, and other metastatic tumor deposits.

Benign breast masses

In the literature, distinction is made among three types of fibroadenomas: (1) simple fibroadenomas, (2) giant or juvenile fibroadenomas, and (3) phyllodes tumors. Simple fibroadenomas are the most common breast lesion in adolescent females. The patient often finds these lesions by self-examination. Although usually painless and asymptomatic, fibroadenomas may be slightly uncomfortable for a few days before the patient’s menstrual period. Most fibroadenomas occur singly, but up to 25% of patients with fibroadenomas may have more than one lesion. On examination, fibroadenomas are rubbery, well circumscribed, and not fixed to surrounding tissue. Simple fibroadenomas do not distort the patient’s breast configuration. Histologically, simple fibroadenomas consist of proliferating stroma around collections of elongated ducts (Fig. 1).

There have been anecdotal reports of carcinoma arising within a breast fibroadenoma [16]. The average age of occurrence of malignancy is 42 years, however. In 1999, a retrospective study of 1835 patients reported that the risk of invasive cancer was 2.17- fold higher in patients with fibroadenomas [17]. The study did not show an increased risk in patients with no family history of breast cancer or with simple fibroadenomas without associated lesional risk factors (eg, epithelial calcifications, papillary apocrine changes, cysts greater than 3 cm, or sclerosing adenosis). In adolescents and young adults, there had been no documented malignancies occurring within a pre-existing fibroadenoma.

Fig. 1. Histologic findings of a breast fibroadenoma (10 magnification, H&E stain). There are elongated ducts within a fibrous stroma.

The diagnosis of a fibroadenoma usually is made by history and physical examination. Ultrasonography is a reliable and nonpainful confirmatory test. The ultrasonographic findings are of a solid, well-circumscribed, avascular mass. In an adolescent with a fibroadenoma who has no family history of breast cancer, serial monitoring of the lesion every 2 to 3 months may be performed. Alternatively, if the patient and her family wish to have the mass removed, an excisional biopsy is also acceptable. In select patients, the biopsy may be done with intravenous sedation and local anesthesia. General anesthesia may be necessary in patients who are overly anxious, or if the lesions are deep or multiple. If possible, a circumareolar incision should be used to optimize the cosmetic results.

Most longitudinal studies on fibroadenomas show that most lesions may get smaller in size and even completely resolve. Over a 5-year period, Carty followed 25 fibroadenomas and found that 52% became smaller; 16% remained the same size, and 32% enlarged [20]. Similarly, Cant followed 65 lesions and found an actuarial probability of disappearance of 46% of the lesions at 5 years and 69% at 9 years [21]. He found that women younger than 20 had a higher probability of resolution of the fibroadenoma. Size or multiplicity of lesions did not affect the probability of resolution.

Juvenile or giant fibroadenomas are usually large, painless masses greater than 5 cm. The masses may compress adjacent breast tissue and cause considerable distortion. Histologically, giant fibroadenomas are encapsulated with more cellular elements in the stroma surrounding distorted ducts. Excision of the lesion is curative.

Cystosarcoma phyllodes tumors usually present with bulky breast masses that may reach 20 cm in size. These masses are firm and mobile, and the overlying skin may be thin and shiny, with increased vascularity. There is no associated skin dimpling, nipple retraction, or nipple discharge. Patients may present with a rapidly growing, nontender breast mass [18], or with accelerated growth of a previously stable mass.

Phyllodes tumors represent 0.4% of all adolescent breast masses [18]. Rajan reviewed 45 female adolescents with phyllodes tumors; 75% were benign and 25% were malignant. Ultrasonography cannot distinguish between a fibroadenoma and a phyllodes tumor [19]. Microscopically, benign phyllodes tumors have a hyperplastic and cellular stromal component compared with fibroadenomas. Phyllodes tumors are not fully encapsulated, often extending into surrounding normal breast tissue. Malignant phyllodes tumors are defined by the presence cellular atypia, anaplasia, and high mitotic activity in the cells within the stroma.

Phyllodes tumors should be excised completely with a surrounding rim of normal tissue. Incomplete excision results in recurrence. Adjunct chemotherapy or radiation has no role in the treatment of nonmetastatic disease. Unlike in adults, where a mastectomy is recommended, breast conservation is recommended in adolescents.

Physiologic breast changes

Breast pain (mastalgia)

Cystic mastalgia is defined as breast pain or discomfort, which occurs about 1 week before a menstrual period and subsides after menses. The pain is usually diffuse and bilateral and may involve the upper arms and axillae. This is more common in women in their 20s and 30s. In contrast, noncyclic mastalgia is more common in women in their 40s and often involves a specific region of the breast.

Adolescents with breast pain usually are treated with reassurance, local heat, and analgesics. Good breast support is achieved with an appropriately fitted brassiere that should be worn during the day and at night. Medications such as diuretics, vitamin B, vitamin B6, or vitamin E, have not been shown to be beneficial in several clinical trials [22]. Although abstinence from caffeine often is recommended, its benefit is unsubstantiated. In Europe, evening primrose oil has been used for mastalgia with a reported response rate of 44% [23]. The recommended dose is 1000 mg orally taken three times a day for at least 3 months. This medication is available without prescription in pharmacies and herbal supplement stores. There are no reported adverse effects. In adult females, danazol, tamoxifen, and bromocriptine have been effective [24], although there are no reports for adolescent patients.

Proliferative breast changes (“fibrocystic disease”)

Nodular changes in the breast are present in as many as 85% of women. Adolescent breasts are typically fibrous with small lumps (

For adult patients, fibrocystic changes are classified into three histologic categories: nonproliferative changes, proliferative changes without atypia, and proliferative changes with atypia. Adults with proliferative changes or atypia have a higher risk of future malignancies. Proliferative changes such as moderate-to- florid hyperplasia, sclerosing adenomas, or papilloma with a fibrovascular core, have been associated with a 1.5- twofold increased risk of malignancy. Patients with atypical or lobular hyperplasia have a 4.4-fold increase in cancer risk, which increases to ninefold with a positive family history of breast cancer[26]. Screening guidelines for adults with a history of atypia on breast biopsy include monthly breast self-examinations (BSE), physician examinations every 6 to 12 months, and a yearly mammogram. These recommendations should be followed in adolescents. As will be describe subsequently, however, breast ultrasonography may be more useful than mammograms in evaluating adolescent breast tissue.

Nipple discharge

When an adolescent presents with nipple discharge, the characteristics of the fluid provide clues to the underlying pathology. A milky discharge or galactorrhea often is caused by an increase in prolactin. In adolescents, the causes are varied and include prolactinomas, hypothyroidism, pregnancy, and postpartum st\ates. Exogenous medications such as oral contraceptives, phenothiazones, estrogens, androgens, and spironolactone may cause galactorrhea.

Thin, brown discharge that occurs episodically may come from Montgomery’s tubercles [13]. These are small papules arising from sebaceous glands associated with lactiferous ducts. There may be an accompanying mass underneath the areola. The discharge usually disappears after 4 to 6 weeks.

Purulent discharge is associated with an infection of the breast. An accompanying abscess may be present. Treatment includes antibiotics that are effective against Streptococcus or Staphylococcus species. Warm compresses and analgesics may alleviate associated discomfort.

Intraductal papillomas are the most common cause of bloody nipple discharge in women. They are rare in adolescents, occurring in 1.2% of biopsied lesions in this age group [13]. Intraductal papillomas are outgrowths of the epithelial lining within a lactiferous duct. Trauma can break off the stalk of the papilloma, creating a bloody discharge. Papillomas may be associated with a soft mass in the ipsilateral breast. Treatment involves excision.

Serosanguineous discharge may be associated with cystic proliferative changes, trauma, or less likely, a malignancy. Patients should be evaluated with a careful breast examination and close follow-up. There are no studies supporting use of cytologic evaluation of nipple discharge in the adolescent population.

Malignant disease of the breast

Malignant breast disease is distinctly uncommon in adolescents. In this age group, only one-third of malignancies involving the breast arise from primary breast tissue; the rest arise from nonbreast tissue (eg, rhabdomyosarcoma) or metastatic disease [27- 30].

In children and adolescents, the most common finding of breast cancer is a hard and irregularly shaped mass, which may be fixed to the surrounding tissues [31]. Nodal involvement, skin changes, and nipple retraction are uncommon in this age group. A third of these patients have a positive family history of breast cancer. Although premenopausal women seem to have a more aggressive disease histologically [32], there are no data on whether this finding is seen in adolescents.

An American female has an 11% lifetime risk of developing breast cancer. The first-degree relative (mother, sister, or daughter) of a breast cancer patient has a 22% to 33% risk of developing breast cancer in her lifetime [33,34]. This risk increases to ninefold when the relative had bilateral premenopausal breast cancer.

About 5% of all breast cancer is classified as hereditary breast cancer. Hereditary breast cancer syndromes have the following characteristics: onset of breast cancer before age 50, autosomal dominant inheritance, and the presence of other multiple primary cancers. Members of these families should undergo screening for breast cancer susceptibility genes.

About eight breast cancer susceptibility genes have been mapped. BRCA-1 and BRCA-2 mutations account for about 80% of hereditary breast cancer. Mutations of the BRCA-1 gene located on chromosome 17 have linkage with breast, ovarian and prostate cancers. BRCA-1 is highly penetrant, conferring an 83% breast cancer risk and a 63% ovarian cancer risk by age 70. BRCA-2 mutations, located on chromosome 13, have linkage with male and female breast cancer. A BRCA-1 mutation may occur in about 1% of women of Ashkenazi heritage [35]. A cumulative breast cancer risk of 60% to 80% exists for women with BRCA-1 or BRCA-2 mutations over their lifetime [36,37].

There are other groups known to have an increased susceptibility to breast cancer. Families with Li-Fraumeni Syndrome have p53 mutations causing an increased risk for sarcomas, breast cancer, lung cancer, laryngeal cancer, leukemia, and adrenal cortical carcinoma [38]. The pattern of transmission is autosomal dominant. Three-quarters of women with Li-Fraumeni syndrome develop breast cancer between the ages of 22 and 45 years. Rarely, breast tumors may develop in adolescence.

Recommendations for screening for families with hereditary breast cancer include twice-a-year physical examination. Screening mammograms are performed once or twice yearly, beginning at an age 10 years younger than the youngest affected relative and no later than 35 years. Adolescents who carry BRCA1 or BRCA2 gene mutations should begin breast self-examination at ages 18 to 21 years [39].

Exposure to ionizing radiation is a definite risk for breast cancer. The patient’s age during exposure is correlated directly with the risk, with younger patients having the greatest predisposition. A 20% rate of bilateral tumors also has been reported [40]. There is a long latency period for development of neoplasms. Women who were exposed to ionizing radiation before age 30 (ie, mantle irradiation for Hodgkin’s, thymic irradiation for enlargement, radiation from nuclear fall-out or radiation for mastitis or tuberculosis) are advised to have monthly BSEs and twice yearly physician examinations. Yearly mammography is recommended after 25 years of age. Ultrasonography is recommended before this age, because breast denseness in younger women makes mammographic evaluation of limited value.

Diagnostic modalities

History

Evaluation of breast complaints in adolescents should start with a detailed history. Questions should be asked about the duration of the mass, associated discomfort or discharge, changes temporally related to menstrual periods, age of menarche, and pregnancy history. A risk assessment for breast malignancy is determined by a family history of breast cancer, history of previous malignancies, and history of previous irradiation.

Examination

When performing a breast examination in an adolescent, it is important to keep in mind that she may have physical and emotional discomfort associated with the office visit. It is valuable to discuss with the patient what the examination will entail before performing it. The patient should be provided a gown to minimize exposure. A chaperone, preferably a parent, should be present. It is recommended that a male physician should have a female office staff member in attendance during the examination.

Inspection is performed with the patient sitting with her hands along her sides or with both hands on her hips. Skin dimpling, nipple retraction, and breast asymmetry are noted.

Palpation is performed with the patient in the supine position. The patient should place the ipsilateral arm behind her head and the other arm along her side. Although many techniques are described in the literature (ie, concentric circles, spokes of a wheel, and others), the important point is to palpate every part of the breast including the subareolar area and the axillary tail. The nipple then is pressed gently to see if a discharge is present. Make certain to warn the patient before performing this last maneuver. If a mass is present, characterize its size, contour, regularity, and adherence to surrounding tissue. The examination is repeated on the other breast.

Nodal basins in the axillary, supraclavicular, and infraclavicular areas are examined bilaterally to check for enlarged lymph nodes.

An important part of the breast examination is teaching the patient how to perform breast self-examination. It is helpful to provide the patient with an explanatory brochure on breast self- examination.

Radiologic evaluation

The dense adolescent breast is not evaluated well by mammography. In this age group, ultrasonography is used to characterize the nature of the lesions [41-44]. Color Doppler may enhance the diagnosis further. Because cysts are avascular; fibroadenomas are solid and hypovascular, and abscesses have increased blood flow.

Other modalities such as contrast-enhanced MRI, positron emission scanning, and CT may be helpful, especially in patients with malignancies that are not from primary breast tissue [45,46].

Fine needle aspiration (FNA) is used in a limited fashion in children and adolescents [45]. If a mass is cystic, complete aspiration of the mass may be diagnostic and therapeutic. Although the experience in the adult population shows that FNA has a high sensitivity and specificity for diagnosing solid lesions, the use of fine needle aspiration is limited in the pediatric population. The physical and emotional discomfort associated with FNA in younger patients may preclude its performance. Most patients and their parents come to the surgeon’s office with the expectation that the mass requires removal. In the appropriate patient, a physical examination, FNA, and follow-up may be an appropriate course of action for a benign mass, such as a fibroadenoma.

Core needle breast biopsies performed under sonographic and stereotactic guidance have been used with increasing frequency in the adult population. This modality has not been studied in adolescents.

Surgical considerations in the young patient

In very young and preadolescent children, a biopsy should be considered with extreme caution, because the developing breast bud may be harmed irreparably, even with a needle aspirate. When an excisional biopsy is performed in a postpubertal patient, a circumareolar incision is preferred for better cosmetic results. If the mass is distant from the areola, however, an incision directly overlying the mass may be performed.

Simple mastectomy for gynecomastia is performed using a circumarealoar incision. Obese patients may benefit from concomitant liposuction.

Summary

Although breast cancer is rare in childhood and adolescence, breast concerns among patients in this age group are common. Benign proliferative changes and benign masses such as fibroadenomas are the most common entities encountered in the adolescent patient. Evaluation of breast complaints includes a careful history and physical examination. Ultrasonography is the best adjunctive radiologic modality to assess the adolescent breast. Surgical interven\tion usually is contraindicated in prepubertal patients. In the postpubertal patient, discrete breast masses, which are not suspicious on clinical examination, may be observed. Additionally, FNA and surgical removal are also safe diagnostic and therapeutic alternatives in this patient population.

References

[1] Moore KL. The integumentary system. In: Moore KL, Persaud TVN, editors. The developing human-clinically oriented embryology. 5th edition. Philadelphia: WB Saunders; 1993. p. 448-50.

[2] Neinstein LS. Adolescent health care: a practical guide. 3rd edition. Baltimore (MD): Williams & Wilkins; 1996.

[3] Weislander JB. Congenital breast deformity is a serious handicap. An important indication for breast reconstruction with silicone implants. Lakartidningen 1999;96(14):1703-5.

[4] Haagensen CD. Breasts. In: Rubin A, editor. Handbook of congenital malformation. Philadelphia: WB Saunders; 1967. p. 15-8.

[5] Leung W, Heaton JPW, Morales A. An uncommon urologic presentation of a supernumerary breast. Urology 1997;50(1):122-4.

[6] Boivin S, Segard M, Delaporte E, Cotton H, Pielle F, Thomas P. Complete supernumerary breast on the thigh in a patient. Ann Dermatol Venereol 2001;128(2):144-6.

[7] Aughsteen AA, Almagad JK, Al-Muhtaseb MH. Fibroadenoma of the supernumerary breast of the axilla. Saudi Med J 2000;6:587-9.

[8] Cheong JH, Lee BC, Lee KS. Carcinoma of the axillary breast. Yonsei Med J 1999;40(3):290-3.

[9] Martin VG, Pelleteiere EV, Gress D, Miller AW. Paget’s disease in an adolescent arising in a supernumerary nipple. J Cutan Pathol 1994;21(3):283.

[10] Ribero L, Canzi W, Bass A, Accorisi A. Tuberous breast: a new approach. Plast Reconstr Surg 1998;101(1):42-50.

[11] Collins ED, Kerrigan CL, Kim M, Lowery JC, Striplin DT, Cunningham B, et al. The effectiveness of surgical and nonsurgical interventions in relieving the symptoms of macromastia. Plast Reconstr Surg 2002;109(5):1556-66.

[12] Sood R, Mount DL, Coleman III JJ, Ranieri J, Sauter S, Mathur P, et al. Effects of reduction mammoplasty on pulmonary function and symptoms of macromastia. Plast Reconstr Surg 2003;111(2):688-94.

[13] Neinstein LS. Breast disease in adolescents and young women. Pediatr Clin N Am 1999; 46(3):607-29.

[14] Aillet S, Waitier E, Jarno P, Chevrier S, Pailheret JP. Juvenile breast hypertrophy: analysis of long-term results of reductive mammoplasty. Annales de Chururgie Plasticque et Esthetique 2001;46(6):585-94.

[15] Jacobs VR, Golombeck K, Jonat W, Kiechle W. Three case reports of breast abscess after nipple piercing: underestimated health problems of a fashion phenomenon. Zentralbl Gynekol 2002; 124(7):378-85.

[16] Pick PW, Iossifides IA. Occurrence of breast carcinoma within a fibroadenoma-a review. Arch Path Lab Med 1984;108(7):590- 4.

[17] Dupont WD, Page DL, Parl FF, Vnencak-Jones CL, Plummer WD, Rados MS, et al. Long-term risk of breast cancer in women with fibroadenoma. N Engl J Med 1994;331(1):10-5.

[18] Briggs RM, Walter M, Rosenthal D. Cystosarcoma phyllodes in adolescent female patients. Am J Surg 1983;146(6):712-4.

[19] Rajan PB, Cranor ML, Rosen PP. Cystosarcoma phyllodes in adolescent girls and young women: a study of 45 patients. Am J Surg Pathol 1998;22(1):64-9.

[20] Carty NJ, Carter C, Rubin C, Ravichandran D, Royle GT, Taylor I. Management of fibroadenoma of the breast. Ann R Coll Surg Engl 1995;77(2):127-30.

[21] Cant PJ, Madden MV, Coleman MG, Dent DM. Nonoperative management of breast masses diagnosed as fibroadeoma. Br J Surg 1995;82(6):792-4.

[22] Maddox PR, Mansel RE. Management of breast pain and nodularity. World J Surg 1989;13(6): 699-705.

[23] Gately CA, Miers M, Mansel RE, Hughes LE. Drug treatments for mastalgia: 17 years experience in the Cardiff Mastalgia Clinic. J R Soc Med 1992;85(1):12-5.

[24] Pye JK, Mansel RE, Hughes LE. Clinical experience of drug treatments for mastalgia. Lancet 1985;2(8451):373-7.

[25] Norlock FE. Benign breast pain in women: a practical approach to evaluation and treatment. J Am Med Womens Assoc 2002;57(2):85-90.

[26] Dupont WD, Page DL. Risk factors for breast cancer in women with proliferative breast disease. N Engl J Med 1985;312(3):146-51.

[27] Corpron CA, Black CT, Singletary SE, Andrassy R. Breast cancer in adolescent females. J Pediatr Surg 1995;30(2):322-4.

[28] Davidoff AM, Hill DA. Molecular genetic aspects of solid tumors in childhood. Semin Pediatr Surg 2001;10(3):106-18.

[29] Hays DM, Donaldson SS, Shimada H, et al. Primary and metastatic rhabdomyosarcoma in the breast: neoplasms of adolescent females, a report from the Intergroup Rhabdomyosarcoma Study. Med Pediatr Oncol 1997;29(3):181-9.

[30] Rogers DA, Lobe TE, Rao BN, et al. Breast malignancy in children. J Pediatr Surg 1994;29(1): 48-51.

[31] Schydlower M. Breast masses in adolescents. Am Fam Physician 1982;25(2):141-5.

[32] Crowe Jr JP, Gordon NH, Shenk RR, Zollinger Jr RM, Brumber DJ, Shuck JM. Age does not predict breast cancer outcome. Arch Surg 1994;129(5):483-7.

[33] Ottman R, King M, Pike M. Practical guide for estimating risk for familial breast cancer. Lancet 1998;353:1451-67.

[34] Anderson DE. Genetic study of breast cancer: identification of a high-risk group. Cancer 1974; 34(4):1090-7.

[35] Fitzgerald MG, MacDonald DJ, Krainer M. Germ-line BRCA1 mutations in Jewish and non-Jewish women with early-onset breast cancer. N Engl J Med 1996;334(3):143-9.

[36] Claus EB, Schildkraut J, Iversen Jr ES. Effect of BRCA1 and BRCA2 on the association between breast cancer risk and family history. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998;90(23):1824-9.

[37] Brody LC, Biesecker BB. Breast cancer susceptibility genes: BRCA1 and BRCA2. Medicine 1998;77(3):208-26.

[38] Li FP, Fraumeni Jr JF. Soft-tissue sarcomas, breast cancer, and other neoplasms. A familial syndrome? Ann Intern Med 1969;71(4):747-52.

[39] Templeman C, Hartweck SP. Breast disorders in pediatric and adolescent patients. Obstet Gynecol Clin North Am 2000;27(2):19-34.

[40] Bhatia S, Robison LL, Oberlin O, Greenberg M, Bunin G, Fossati-Bellani F, et al. Breast cancer and other second neoplasms after childhood Hodgkin’s disease. N Engl J Med 1996;334(12): 745- 51.

[41] Weinstein SP, Conant EF, Orel SG, Zuckerman JA, Bellan R. Spectrum of US findings in pediatric and adolescent patients with palpable breast masses. Radiographies 2000;20(6):1613-21.

[42] Kronemer KA, Rhee K, Siegel MJ, Sievert L, Hildebolt CF. Gray scale sonography of breast masses in adolescent girls. J Ultrasound Med 2001;20(5):491-6.

[43] Garcia CJ, Espinoza A, Dinamarca V, Navarro O, Daneman A, Garcia H, et al. Breast US in children and adolescents. Radiographics 2000;20(6):1605-12.

[44] Chateil JF, Arboucalot F, Perel Y, Brun M, Boisseire- Lacroix M, Diard F. Breast metastases in adolescent girls: US findings. Pediatr Radiol 1998;28(11):832-5.

[45] Pacinda SJ, Ramzy I. Fine-needle aspiration of breast masses. A review of its role in diagnosis and management of adolescent patients. J Adolesc Health 1998;23(1):3-6.

[46] Cecil KM, Schnall MD, Sigelman ES, Lenkinski RE. The evaluation of human breast lesions with magnetic resonance imaging and proton magnetic resonance spectroscopy. Breast Cancer Res Treat 2002;68(1):45-54.

[47] Oski FA, Dangelis DC, Felgin RD, Warshaw JB. Principles and practice of pediatrics. Philadelphia: JB Lippincott; 1994.

Marjorie J. Area MD(a,b,*), Donna A. Caniano MD(c,d)

a Medical College of Wisconsin, 8701 Watertown Plank Road, Milwaukee, Wl 53226, USA

b Children ‘s Hospital of Wisconsin, 9000 West Wisconsin Avenue, Milwaukee, Wl 53226, USA

c The Ohio State University College of Medicine and Public Health, 410 West 10th Avenue, Columbus, OH 43210, USA

d Children’s Hospital, Division of Pediatric Surgery, ED 379, 700 Children’s Drive, Columbus, OH 43205, USA

* Corresponding author. Children’s Hospital of Wisconsin, 9000 West Wisconsin Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53226.

E-mail address: [email protected] (M.J. Area).

Copyright Hanley & Belfus, Inc. Oct 2004

Laboring for the Right Words ; Zeek Green is a Longshoreman and Poet Who Works Tacoma’s Waterfront for Meaning.

Ten years ago, Zeek Green – like nearly every teenage boy in America – fancied himself an aspiring rapper.

Newly graduated from Stadium High School in Tacoma, he tried community college “for a hot second.” But, unable to focus, he dropped out and was left with student loans that he couldn’t pay off.

That’s when a couple of his uncles suggested he try working as a longshoreman. His uncles were already part of Local 23, Tacoma’s unit of the International Longshore and Warehouse Union.

“I was 18 and had no job,” Green said. “And they were like – hey, come on down.”

Initially, Green worked the waterfront as a way to pay for studio time.

But he found the work rewarding – the starting wage for union members is in the $20-an-hour neighborhood. And he also found inspiration for his art in the union’s history of progressive politics.

“The ILWU and what I was writing about just synced up,” he said.

Green calls himself a spoken-word artist, who writes and records his take on politics, AIDS, women, the environment and economics.

He’s also proud to call himself a full-time longshoreman.

On Tuesday, he’ll read some of his poetry at an ILWU-sponsored event in Tacoma called “A Call to Conscience: A Celebration of Black History, Women and Labor.” Green, a regional semifinalist in the 2004 Seattle Poetry Slam, will share the stage with black luminaries and activists including actor Danny Glover; rapper Chuck D, the co- founder of Public Enemy; and Naomi Tutu, daughter of South African Nobel Peace Prize winner Archbishop Desmond Tutu.

Although black workers have a long history on Tacoma’s waterfront, their experiences haven’t always been positive. But Green is proud to be a part of what’s evolving there today. He claims the bad old waterfront ways so familiar from Hollywood movies have been “litigated and lost through attrition.”

“The waterfront has changed so much in the last 15 to 20 years,” he said.

But in the wake of change, the heart and soul of the ILWU has remained intact, Green insists.

“We have always been those militant progressives,” he said. “We’ve always been in the forefront of the fight for social justice.”

Green’s passion for those kinds of causes comes through in his writing, including the work on his latest demo CD called “9 1/2 Pieces of My Mind.”

His “Cut Gut” is a lament for hard workers who live paycheck to paycheck: “Do you cross your fingers when a clerk scans your card? Can’t feel the texture of life because the calluses are too hard.”

The piece ends with a biting summary of his mission: “I sharpen popular opinions and slip them into other peoples’ hands, like prisoners pass a shank. So when the system gets a cut gut, they’ll have the entire general population to thank.”

Green makes no secret of his left-leaning politics.

His “3 of 11 of 4” is a post-election day rant against the president: “Doesn’t Bush see that every terrorist he has killed he just provokes and produces more?

“We can never combat terrorism until we acknowledge what it is they terrorize us for.

“A war plan this pitiful will inevitably backfire.

“This is Viet Nam Part 2, ‘Return of the Quagmire.’ “

In a track titled “Offshore Plantations,” he rails against American corporations: “They are swallowing the Ma and Pa stores, making every town look the same. Choking out competition with their conglomerates and retail chains. . . .

“Tax breaks are given to slave owners with offshore plantations. And part of my income goes to compensate these legal loopholes I call American living wage evasions.”

Green is aware of the irony that his “living wage” job consists of moving the fruits of many of those “offshore plantations” through the Port of Tacoma.

“People will always trade,” he said. “I just wish we exported more finished products. America is losing its self-sufficiency.”

Hanging out in Tacoma coffee shops, Green has written at least five new poems in recent months. He draws inspiration from a broad palette: his truck-driving Teamster father; visits to family in New Orleans and Alabama, where he was able to immerse himself in black culture; music as diverse as the Pharcyde and Charley Pride; his wife and 17-month-old daughter; his work.

His job is different every day. One day may find him perched in the 40-foot-high driver’s seat of a “straddle carrier” capable of lifting two shipping containers, and on another day he might supervise the work of others to make sure cargo gets from Point A to Point B. While there are still jobs that require physical strength – like tying down cargo containers on a ship’s deck – many more waterfront jobs depend on technology and worker training, Green says.

He wears his heart on his sleeve – or at least his sweatshirt, emblazoned with the ILWU logo.

But as much as he loves the union, Green doesn’t spare it from criticism. In his poem “Wharf Rats to Fat Cats,” he warns his union brothers and sisters against the complacency that can grow from the prosperity and success they have enjoyed.

“We have a beautiful inheritance,” he said. “We shouldn’t take it for granted like a bunch of trust fund babies.”

He also believes those who benefit from a successful union like the ILWU have an obligation to help other workers. Green has been to Utah to support the union efforts of immigrant miners.

“People think the union is a big green beast that lives in the hillside and only comes out when you need it,” he said. “They don’t realize that it’s them – it’s what they do.”

He’s aware that public perception paints ILWU members as high- wage workers who don’t care about those struggling to earn a living. But he suggests that, rather than seeing longshore workers as overpaid, others might try looking at themselves as underpaid.

“It comes down to how much someone works,” he said. “Being able to have a single-income family does not mean you’re overpaid.”

He agrees that it’s sometimes hard for people of different backgrounds to find common cause. And he blames public inertia on the fact that “people are being pacified by television and media.”

Green wants his work to be able to blast through the meaningless static he hears in so much of popular entertainment.

“I feel like I have no choice but to speak up,” he said. “If I did not speak up, I would burst.”

– – –

Debbie Cafazzo: 253-597-8635

[email protected]

What: “A Call to Conscience: A Celebration of Black History, Women and Labor”

When: 11 a.m. Tuesday

Where: Pantages Theater, 901 Broadway, Tacoma

Cost: $14 adults; $7 students; $7 seniors

Information: 253-591-5894 or www.broadwaycenter.org or Ticketmaster

What: Jazz concert and premiere screening of documentary “The Black Composers”

When: Today; reception, 5:30 p.m.; concert, 6:30 p.m.; screening, 7:45 p.m.

Where: Pantages Theater, 901 Broadway, Tacoma

Cost: Free

– – –

From Wharf Rats to Fat Cats

ZEEK GREEN

We have gone from wharf rats throwing sacks heavy enough to break backs

to fat cats operating equipment that rides smoother than our Cadillacs

So now some of us have heads too big to fit into our hard hats

Handpicking our jobs and when denied our first choice, we throw hissy fits like spoiled brats

We are revolutionaries and dissidents, progressives and militants so it doesn’t make any sense

How some can take our beautiful inheritance and use it to fuel their despicable arrogance

How dare longshoremen mutate into blue-collar elitists?

We have to get off of our high horses, there are millions of workers out there that need us

Get out of your comfort zones and plush cubbyholes

Don’t be pigeonholed, we need to help with other peoples’ struggles

We are able to picket with them, support them and even feed them

First because they’re human beings, and second because the day will come when we need them

We must continue to be the standard, the pillar of the working class

We are the nearest to perfect example of a union, yet we can lose it all so fast

Don’t be that idiot bragging and boasting in a bar, remain humble

Believe it or not, even our majestic castle can crumble

Yes, this union is strong, but it is also fragile

A chain is only as strong as its weakest link, so just think, what if we are only as strong as our weakest casual

Scary, isn’t it, but one day that casual will become a link in this union’s chain

So don’t just sit up in your crane and complain, you’d better put something in that casual’s brain and prepare them for the strain

Because the P.M.A. will always pull and tug and test our strength

We must stay awake, aware, and alert and ready to go to any length

Because this is what it’s going to take to keep our union alive

If you’re not here to keep this heart pumping, please go find another nine to five

Get the hell off the dock and go punch someone else’s time clock

We need to stay solid as rock, not allow the dead weight to sink us like a rock

We have old timers to answer to and a future to plan for

We have a job to do, even at the expense of a four and four

If you, too, love this union, our current condition should trouble you

But we must keep faith and keep on striving, because after all, we are the ILWU

Exploring the Conditions Leading to Stoma-Forming Surgery

Abstract

The most common disease leading to the formation of a stoma is cancer. However, there are many other diseases that affect the gastrointestinal or urinary system that may also require either a temporary or permanent stoma to be formed (a colostomy, ileostomy or urostomy). Stoma-forming surgery may be undertaken for a number of reasons, such as to eradicate a disease or improve the patient’s quality of life. Cancer, inflammatory bowel disease and diverticular disease are the most common conditions that lead to stoma formation. However, faecal incontinence, familial adenomatous polyposis, Hirschsprung’s disease, spina bifida and Ehlers-Danlos syndrome may also require a stoma to be formed. The nurse’s role in caring for these patients at a potentially traumatic period of their life is discussed.

Key words: Stoma care * Nursing: role

A stoma is a Greek word for mouth or opening (Williams and Ebanks, 2003) and is in this context used to describe a colostomy, ileostomy or urostomy (Figure 1To form the stoma a segment of bowel is brought out of the abdomen through a surgical incision. A colostomy is formed using colon to divert flatus and faeces from the body. A colostomy may be temporary or permanent and is usually formed from the sigmoid, descending or transverse colon (Black, 2000). An ileostomy passes faeces via the ileum.The faeces contain potentially corrosive enzymes so the stoma is formed with a 2 cm spout to keep the loose faeces away from the body (Nicholls, 1996). A urostomy diverts urine from the ureters and kidneys to a segment of bowel, usually the ileum, to which they are anastomosed (joined). The bowel (conduit) is then brought out through the abdomen and can also be known as an ileal conduit (Burch and Sica, 2004).

This article explores the common diseases resulting in stoma formation, such as colorectal cancer (CRC), through to hereditary bowel disease, such as familial adenomatous polyposis (FAP). Also discussed is diverticular disease that may result in emergency surgery if perforation of the colon occurs.

Cancer

CRC predominantly affects people aged 50-70 years (Ward and Stanford, 2003).The aetiology is not fully understood but CRC may be related to low-fibre and high-fat diets with associated lack of exercise (Black, 2000).There is also a major genetic influence (Finlay, 1997). Symptoms for CRC often include altered bowel habit with or without rectal bleeding (Northover et al, 2002).The type of surgery and therefore the resultant stoma depends upon the position and extent of the cancer. Any type of stoma may be formed, with some stomas being permanent and others reversible. If the cancer is very low in the gastrointestinal tract, such as the anal canal, a permanent colostomy would be performed if surgery was indicated as part of the procedure of an abdominoperineal excision of the rectum. If there was a high rectal cancer, the surgery could be an anterior resection with a temporary ileostomy (Nicholls, 1996).

Survival from cancer is directly related to the severity of the disease and diagnosis. Thus, nurses have an important role to play to encourage early consultation with doctors if symptoms appear (Nattress, 1999). A patient may in passing mention symptoms to the nurse when being seen for other reasons. This is particularly important for those nurses working in the community who may have cared for a patient long term, building good rapport and trust – with the patient; thus, the opportunity for the patient to discuss other health concerns may arise.

Inflammatory bowel disease

Inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) is an umbrella term for ulcerative colitis (UC) and Crohn’s disease (CD). UC is a disease of the whole or part of the colon (large bowel), affecting the mucosa, causing diarrhoea with blood and mucus (Kamm, 1999).The incidence is about 7 in 100 000 of the population (Forbes, 2001). Aetiology may be related to genetics and/or the environment (Ward and Stanford, 2003).The treatment may be medication, such as steroids (Kamm, 1999) or surgery. Surgery may be elective or emergency. Elective surgery often entails the removal of the rectum and colon. There may also be the formation of an ileo-anal pouch (Williams, 2002), where the terminal ileum is formed into a pouch (neo-rectum) and anastomosed to the anus. An ileo-anal pouch retains intestinal continuity, usually requiring a temporary ileostomy to protect the healing pouch. A panproctocolectomy is the removal of the anus, rectum and colon resulting in a permanent ileostomy. If the surgery is an emergency then it is likely to be only a subtotal colectomy (removal of the colon, but retention of the rectum) resulting in a temporary ileostomy.

The nurse can assist patients in their choice of surgery by providing them with information or making appropriate referrals as required. There is still the risk of pouchitis (inflammation of the pouch) or pouch dysfunction (Nicholls and Williams, 2002). Nursing support is essential both pre- and postoperatively to assist patients to adjust to their surgery. The nurse can inform the patient that often pouchitis quickly resolves with antibiotic therapy, and evacuation problems from the pouch can resolve with biofeedback training of the bowel.

Figure 1. Different types ofstoma.

CD is a chronic, inflammatory disorder that affects any part of the alimentary tract from the mouth to the anus (Ward and Stanford, 2003). CD causes similar symptoms to UC but there may also be associated weight loss and anorexia (Kamm, 1999). The incidence is greater than 5 in 10O 000 of the population and appears to be increasing (Forbes, 2001). The aetiology is unknown but may be related to genetics, diet and/or environment components (Black, 2000). Treatment for CD may involve surgery. Surgery may include resection of the affected bowel, although recurrence of the disease is common. Surgery may result in a permanent stoma, either colostomy or ileostomy, depending on the affected bowel. However, it is possible for a temporary stoma to be formed to allow the bowel to rest (Black, 2000).

The nurse can prepare the patient for surgery and a stoma by providing accurate, relevant and up-to-date information about the operation. This can be in the form of written or oral information. The outpatient nurse may be the first point of contact and he/she needs to make the appropriate nursing referral. The IBD or stoma care nurse specialist may be useful for counselling and information giving. When the patient is admitted to the ward for surgery the admitting nurse can further assist the patient, by answering his/ her questions and alleviating anxiety by giving advice and reassurance. Nurses are invaluable in this situation, providing the patient with simplified explanations of complicated surgery.

Diverticular disease

Diverticular disease is a condition where small pockets (diverticulae) form on, and protrude from, the bowel. These pockets may become inflamed (diverticulitis) (Figure 2). Diverticular disease is common in older people, with one-third of people over 60 years of age being affected (White, 1997). The cause of diverticular disease may be related to a poor diet, lacking in dietary fibre (Blackley, 1998). This is thought to reduce the transit time, producing small hard faecal pellets. These pellets require more contractions to pass them out of the body and thus increase the pressure on the bowel 1WaIl and may lead to the formation of diverticulae (Ward and Stanford, 2003).The nurse can assist the patient with diverticular disease by providing advice on increasing fibre to 3Og (Emmanuel, 2004) and fluids to 1-2 litres a day (Blackley, 1998), to prevent constipation and straining to pass a bowel motion.

The usual symptoms reported for diverticular disease range from no symptoms to abdominal pain, distension and constipation (Ward and Stanford, 2003). Treatment usually consists of dietary fibre and/or bulk laxatives (Emmanuel, 2004). Surgical options may be planned for repeated bouts of divcrticulitis or abscess formation. However, in the emergency situation, if the diverticulae perforate, surgery may be unplanned. A defunctioning stoma may be required or a Hartmann’s procedure (removal of the sigmoid colon +/- part of the rectum) with a resultant temporary colostomy usually performed (Williams and Ebanks, 2003).

Incontinence

Faecal incontinence affects about 1% of the population in the UK (Norton and Kamm, 1999). Faecal incontinence can be seen as the involuntary loss of flatus or faeces (Stuchfield and Eccersley 1999). This may be as a result of obstetric injury or congenital abnormalities. Sphincter repair or artificial sphincters may be of benefit to some patients to improve their continence (Ward and Stanford, 2003). Although repair is often successful, the long-term results are unknown (Malouf, 2004), but if surgery is unsuccessful a colostomy formation can greatly increase the quality of life for the patient.

People often consider that faecal incontinence is socially unacceptable and those that choose a stoma in preference to faecal incontinence often state that a stoma gives them back some control (Williams, 2004). This may be owing to the colostomy output being contained in a stoma appliance, so there is no odour and more security compared to the potential risk of anal incontinence. Thus, a stoma may give a patient the confidence to leave the house without the f\ear of soiling his/her clothes.

However, there is a risk of periodic mucus leakage from the rectum (“which is usually retained) and the patient needs to be informed of this potential problem by the nurse. Anecdotally, treatment for mucus leakage can include trying to pass the mucus into the toilet or, with the aid of a glycerine suppository, at a planned time each day, or each week, depending on the frequency of the passage of mucus.

Patients tend to cope with incontinence or a stoma better with nursing support and advice; thus, empathy can assist this group of people with a potentially embarrassing condition. The nurse should advise the patient that although a colostomy is generally an improvement on faecal incontinence, it is not without its drawbacks, as discussed.

Urinary incontinence, if treated unsuccessfully with either medication, such as oxybutynin, or surgical repair, may be resolved with the formation of a urostomy (Ward and Stanford, 2003); however, this is a very uncommon reason to have a urostomy (ileal conduit) formed.

Familial adenomatous polyposis (FAP)

FAP was previously known as polyposis coli (or, if extra colonie manifestations are present, Gardners syndrome). FAP can be seen as 100 or more tubovillous adenomas in the colon and there may be other manifestations. Any polyps left untreated will inevitably become malignant. Diagnosis is usually made in the teenage years and thus cancer will usually develop by the age of 35 years (Ward and Stanford, 2003). However, FAP accounts for less than 1% of all CRC with an incidence of 1 in 10000 of the population in the UK (Neale, 1996). FAP is an autosomal dominant disorder, meaning that for every child born to a parent with FAP there is a 50% chance of inheriting FAP (Neale and Phillips, 2002).

The treatment for FAP is usually a subtotal colectomy with an ileo-rectal anastomosis (IPvA), a restorative proctocolectomy (RPC) with an ileo-anal pouch or a panproctocolectomy with a permanent ileostomy. With an IRA the patient still retains the rectum. An ileo- anal pouch with a temporary ileostomy is a useful alternative; this allows removal of the rectum and maintenance of intestinal continuity (Ward and Stanford, 2003). Finally, there is the option of a permanent ileostomy, allowing the removal of the diseased colon. This option is advisable if anal sphincters are weak and thus there is a risk of faecal incontinence. Many patients prefer to have a sphincter-saving procedure, i.e. an IRA or RPC, but they need to have education, by the nurse, to ensure that they fully understand the implications of this choice. With an IRA, regular surveillance of the retained rectum is required, to detect for polyps. A RPC usually involves between one and three operations.

Hirschsprung’s disease

Hirschsprung’s disease is rare affecting only 1 in 5000 (Hanneman et al, 2001) with a 4:1 male:female ratio (Telander and Brennom, 1997). Hirschsprung’s disease is congenital and affects the colon. In Hirschsprung’s disease the nerves are incomplete and ineffectual, caused by the absence of ganglion cells, usually in the rectum (Ward and Stanford, 2003).There may be a large (5% of cases) or small section of the bowel affected, with 25% of cases affecting the rectum and 50% affecting the sigmoid colon (Fitzpatrick, 1996). The symptoms of the disease are constipation, abdominal distension or intestinal obstruction from birth, leading to megacolon (Keighley and Williams, 1993). The abdominal distension is owing to the inability of the infant/child to pass flatus or faeces, which differs from a child with simply constipation, who would not be distended. The precise aetiology remains unknown, but is likely to involve abnormal development or genetic factors, but there may also be environmental factors involved (Keighley and Williams, 1993).

The surgical options include a Soave or a Duhamel’s procedure (both procedures are also known as a pull through). The surgery involves the removal of the affected bowel and the bowel is pulled through to rejoin continuity. A temporary colostomy can be made to relieve intestinal obstruction, or an ileostomy if there is a long segment of colon affected (Fitzpatrick, 1996). A stoma may need to be formed and is usually reversible (Anderson, 1998). Some surgeons consider that the treatment should be a colostomy and then a pull through at 6 months old or simply a pull through. Other surgeons consider a colostomy unnecessary at any stage of the procedure (de Lagausie et al, 1998). The nurse -will need to support the child’s parents/carers at this difficult time by providing information.

Figure 2, Diverticular disease.

Figure 3. Spina bifida caused by a gap in the spinal column during foetal development.

With any surgery there are potential risks and the ones that this patient group are more prone to are anastomotic strictures and faecal incontinence (Telander and Brennom, 1997). Incontinence appears to be a long-term problem with many patients, and the extent of the aganglionosis in relation to incontinence appears irrelevant (Ludman et al, 2002). This is something that nurses need to be aware of in order to provide advice and support to the patient and his/ her parents. The author has met several adult patients who have chosen a permanent stoma over faecal incontinence in later life.

Spina bifida

Spina bifida is an abnormality of the central nervous system, which affects about 1.5 in 1000 births in the UK (Ward and Stanford, 2003). When the foetus develops there is a gap in the spinal column and the spinal canal may protrude through it (Figure 3). For some people spina bifida causes problems of neurogenic bladder (where the nervous control of the bladder is defective), leading to urinary incontinence (Black, 2000).

One option is intermittent catheterization if nerve damage causes the patient to have urinary retention. Intermittent catheterization differs from a normal urinary catheter in that the bladder is emptied using the catheter as required (see Figure 1). However, if the patient remains incontinent the formation of a urostomy (ileal conduit) may be necessary (Ward and Stanford, 2003). This is where a segment of bowel (usually the ileum) is used to make a conduit (passage) for the urine to pass out of the body. This is achieved by anatomising the ureters onto the bowel and the bowel onto the abdominal wall as a stoma. The nurse can assist the patient by providing support and advice to enable an informed choice to be made.

Ehlers-Danlos syndrome (EDS)

EDS is a hereditary disorder of the connective tissue, more particularly defective collagen (Barabas, 2000). EDS has a prevalence of 1 in 5000 (Carley and SchafFer, 2000). Failure to recognize the disease is common owing to the phenotypical variances of the syndrome (Maltz et al, 2001). Diagnosis is often difficult and only made after a catastrophic complication (Pepin et al, 2000).There are 10 types of EDS with most associated with skin hyperflexibility joint hypermobility and tissue fragility (Rowe et al, 1999). However, type IV EDS has, for example, the unique complications of arterial, colonie and uterine rupture.

There is currently no medical treatment available for EDS and patients are encouraged to minimize the risk of trauma by avoiding surgery, if possible (Maltz et al, 2001). Ruptured bowel, often in the sigmoid colon, may be secondary to megacolon (Sentongo et al, 1998) caused by constipation. Bowel rupture accounts for a quarter of all complications (Pepin et al, 2000), but this rarely leads to death (Pepin et al, 2000). Rupture may result in the formation of a colostomy after a partial colectomy or an ileostomy after a total colectomy. It is usually possible for stomas to be closed.

Complications associated with this patient group include death from arterial rupture (Pyeritz, 2000) or excessive bleeding during surgery (Giunta et al, 1999). Postoperative complications may also occur owing to the tissue fragility and poor wound healing. Problems may include dehisced wounds and fistulae. Pregnancy and childbirth is often a risk for people with EDS owing to the risk of womb rupture and bleeding. Patients are also prone to prolapsed bladders or wombs and urinary incontinence as a result of weak collagen (Carley and Schaffer, 2000). Thus, the nurse needs to be aware of these unusual complications and observe for them. The author has met only one patient with EDS who had an ileostomy for slow transit, which was complicated by bleeding during surgery.

Conclusion

There can be a variety of different reasons that stomas are formed and this article by no means covers them all. Greater understanding of the disorders requiring stoma formation will improve nursing care given to patients who require stomas. Some diseases require other considerations, e.g. CD may recur despite surgery. EDS requires thought and discussion with the patient before surgery is even considered and careful nursing observations afterwards. Hirschsprung’s disease may lead to faecal incontinence into adult life and patients or parents need to be made aware of this fact. Nurses are in a position to help and support patients using their skills and empathy. Nurses’ knowledge is a powerful tool that nurses need to continually improve upon as this leads to improved patient care.

KEY POINTS

* Cancer is the most common cause of stoma formation.

* Inflammatory bowel disease, e.g. Crohn’s disease and ulcerative colitis, may also lead to a stoma, although sphincter-saving procedures may be suitable, if preferred.

* Diverticular disease may lead to perforation or abscess formation and this may require the removal of the affected colon and a temporary stoma.

Andersen KN (1998) Mosby’s Medical Dictionary. 5th edn. Mosby, London

Barabas AP (2000) Ehlers-Danlos syndrome type IV N Engl J Med 343(5): 366-3

Black P (2000) Holistic Sterne Care. Baillire Tindall, London

Blackley P (1998) Practial Stoma, Wound and C\ontinence Management. Research Publications, Victoria, Australia

Burch J, Sica J (2004) Urostomy products: an update of recent developments. Dr J Community Nurs 9(11): 482-86

Carley ME, Schaffer J (2000) Urinary incontinence and pelvic prolapse in women with Marian or Ehlers-Danlos syndrome. AmJ Obstet Gynecol 182(5): 1021-3

de Lagausie P, Bruneau B, Bernard M,Jaby O,AigrainY (1998) Definitive treatment of Hirschsprungs disease with a laparoscopic Duhamel pull-through procedure in childhood. Surg Laparosc Endosc 8(1): 55-7

Emmanuel A (2004) Constipation. In: Norton C, Chelvanayagam S, eds. Bowel Continence Nursing. Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsficld, Bucks: 238-50

Finlay T (1997) Malignancies of the gastrointestinal tract. In: Bruce L, Finlay TMD, eds. Nursing in Gastroenterohgy. Churchill Livingstone, London: 161-90

Fitzpatrick G (1996) The child with a stoma. In: Myers C, ed. Stoma Care Nursing. A Patient-centred Approach. Arnold, London: 180- 202

Forbes A (2001) Inflammatory Bowel Disease – A Clinicians’ Guide. 2nd edn. Arnold, London

Giunta C, Superti-Furga A, Sprangler S, William G, Steinmann B (1999) EhlersDanlos syndrome type VII: clinical features and molecular defects. J Bone Joint Surg 81-A(2): 225-38

Hanneman MJG, Sprengers MAG, De Mik EL et al (2001) Quality of life in patients with anorectal malformation or Hirschsprung’s disease: development of a disease-specific questionnaire. Dis Colon Rectum 44(11): 1650-60

Kamm MA (1999) Inflammatory Bowel Disease. 2nd edn. Martin Duntiz, London

Keighley M R13, Williams NS (1993) Surgery of the Anus, Rectum and Colon. WB Saunders Company London

Ludman L, Spitz L.Tsuji H, Pierro A (2002) Hirschsprung’s disease: functional and psychological follow up comparing total colonie and rectosigmoid aganglionosis. Arch Dis Child 86(5): 348- 51

Malouf A (2004) Surgical treatment of faecal incontinence. In: Norton C, Chelvanayagam S, eds. Bowel Continence Nursing. Beaconsficld Publishers, Beaconsfield, Bucks: 150-64

Maltz SB, Fantus RJ, Mellett MM, Kirby JP (2001) Surgical complications of Ehlers-Danlos syndrome type IV: case report and review of the literature. J ‘trauma 51(2): 387-90

Nattress K (1999) Understanding colorectal cancer. Prof Nurse 14(12): 817

Neale KF (1996) Polyposis and the work of the St Mark’s Hospital Polyposis Registry. In: Myers C, ed. Stoma Care Nursing – A Patient- Centred Approach. Arnold, London: 1-13

Neale K, Phillips R (2002) Familial aderiomatous polyposis. In:Williams J, ed. The Essentials of Pouch Care Nursing. Whurr Publishers, London: 27-42

Nicholls RJ (1996) Surgical procedures. In: Myers C, ed. Stoma Care Nursing: a Patient-Centred Approach. Arnold, London: 90-122

Nicholls RJ, Williams J (2002) The ileo-anal pouch. In: Williams J, ed. The Essentials of Pouch Care Nursing. Whurr Publishers, London: 68-98

Northover J, Taylor C, Gold D (2002) Carcinoma of the rectum. In: Williams J, ed. The Essentials of Pouch Care Nursing. Whurr Publishers, London: 43-67

Norton C, Kamm MA (1999) Bowel Control. Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsfield, Bucks

Pepin M, Schwarze U, Superti-Furga A, Byers PH (2000) Clinical and genetic features of Ehlers-Danlos syndrome type IV: the vascular type. N EnglJ Med 342(10): 673-80

Pyeritz RE (2000) Ehlers-Danlos syndrome. N EnglJ Med 342(10): 730-2

Rowe PC, Barron DF, Calkins H, Maumenee IH.Tong PY, Geraghty MT (1999) Ehlers-Danlos syndrome.J Paediatr 135(4): 513

SentongoTAS, Lichtenstein G, Nathanson K, Kaplan P, Maller E (1998) Intestinal perforation in Ehlers-Danlos syndrome after enema for treatment for constipationj Petliatr Gastroenteml Nutr 27(5): 599-602

Stuchfield B, Eccersley AJP (1999) The modern management of faecal incontinence. In: Porrett T, Daniel N, eds. Essential Colopmctology for Nurses. Whurr Publishers, London: 292-317

Telander RL, Brennom WS (1997) Congenital anomalies. In: Nicholls RJ, Dozois RR, eds. Surgery of the Colon and Rectum. Churchill Livingstone, London

Ward J, Stanford E (2003) Conditions that may involve surgery requiring a stoma. In: Elcoat C, ed. Stoma Care Nursing. Hollister, London: 13-28

White CA (1997) Living with a Stoma. Sheldon Press, London

Williams J, ed (2002) The Essentials of Pouch Care Nursing. Whurr Publishers, London

Williams J (2004) A stoma for incontinence? In: Norton C, Chelvanayagam S, eds. Bowel Continence Nursing. Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsfield: 165-73

Williams J, Ebanks A (2003) Types of stoma and associated surgical procedures. In: Elcoat C, ed. Stoma Care Nursing. Hollister, London: 29-44

Jennie Durch is Clinical Nurse Specialist – Stoma Care, St Mark’s Hospital, Harrow, Middlesex

Accepted for publication: December 2004

Copyright Mark Allen Publishing Ltd. Jan 27-Feb 9, 2005

Health & Beauty: Do Detox Diets Actually Work?

WHEN television presenter Carol Vorderman first embarked on a short-term detox diet she famously went from frump to fab in just a few weeks.

Now the new-look Carol is constantly turning heads and has launched her own range of detox books.

But can a quick detox help shake off winter sluggishness and boost energy levels?

We test out six different detox plans to find out.

Bio-Light 3-Day Detox

The big downside is the drink is absolutely disgusting

Price: pounds 13.50

AFTER a week-long skiing holiday where, although I was healthy in terms of plenty of alpine air and daily exercise, I filled myself with large amounts of stodgy food washed down with generous helpings of alcohol, I thought a three-day detox upon myreturn home would be a great idea.

The Bio-Light detox claims it works as an internal cleanser containing 23 natural ingredients which help to curb hunger pangs and promote weight loss and digestion.

It comes in four flavours and a third of the bottle is diluted in 1 1/2 litres of water each day and sipped regularly.

The detox also recommends following a healthy low-fat/high-fibre eating plan.

It sounded easy as I already follow a healthy eating plan, don’t drink caffeine and make sure I get in my five portions of fruit and vegetables a day.

But the big downside is that the drink is absolutely disgusting.

Sure it helps to curb hunger pangs – because just a whiff of the liquid puts you off eating for hours.

Perhaps it was my taste buds that were the problem because I made my boyfriend try it and he said it wasn’t the nicest liquid he’d ever tasted but it was okay.

I, on the other hand, had real trouble drinking the stuff and, rather than sip, I opted for the ‘hold the nose and get it all down as quickly as possible’ strategy.

Verdict: The taste of the detox drink meant I only managed one litre on the first day and a mere 500ml on the next two days.

I did drink plenty of water and continued to eat healthily but by day four I had lost no weight and I felt pretty much exactly the same.

Maybe I should have opted for the citrus or Island fruits flavour instead.

Score: 3/10 Helena Markovic

Ortis Pure Plan 10-Day Detox Plan

Amazingly, I lost 7lb over 10 days

Price: pounds 13.25 (10-day supply)

I RATHER grandly announced I’d eat my hat if a bottle of something which smelt suspiciously like syrup of figs could help kickstart my new year, new me pledges.

Okay, pass the trilby – I’m a convert.

I have to confess the swaying factor when it came to choosing what kind of detox I did was that PurePlan’s apple and green tea plan – containing plant extracts like dandelion and artichoke – demanded no special diet, just to cut down on the obviousnasties like booze, caffeine, fatty and sugary foods, and increase fruit, veg and water.

So far, so sensible – but amazingly I lost 7lb over the 10 days, even after falling off the wagon and into the pub at the weekend.

After I got over the headaches of the first two days (probably from cutting down on my zillion cups of tea in the office) I felt full of energy and my skin looked and felt more hydrated.

My only gripe would be that the syrup, which you dilute in a litre of water and drink through the day, does not taste like the “pleasant apple juice” as its makers claim. Admittedly, it tastes nowhere near as bad as it smells, but you’re never going tothink ‘ooh, I fancy a glass of detox juice’ in the same way you would a G&T.

But the litre of juice on your desk at work is a good reminder of your good intentions.

Verdict: I will definitely do this again in time for the summer.

Score: 9/10 (10 if they could only make it taste like a fabulous cocktail). Hayley Cuthbertson

HealthAid Weekend Detox Plan

The smell is enough to put you off, but …

Price: pounds 7.99

THIS detox promises to eliminate or neutralise toxins in the body and leave you feeling clean and healthy in just two days.

It is, so the packaging says, the perfect antidote to excessive alcohol intake and consumption of fatty foods.

The mixture (prune juice, milk thistle, liquorice root and Swedish bitters) has to be diluted in water and taken three times the first day and twice the second.

The smell is enough to put you off but I found that if you hold your nose it makes it much easier to take.

The rest is up to you, but it does recommend staying away from excessively fatty and sugary foods, alcohol and caffeine.

My weekend diet consisted of lots of fruit and salads and plenty of water.

The sense of self restraint felt good and it provided a good kick start to a healthier new year.

Come Monday I didn’t feel any different and it had no noticeable physical effects.

But I trust it has done some good. From what I have read the detox process usually lasts for a period of seven to 14 days.

Verdict: This is an ideal product for the novice detoxer.

Plus I am not sure I could cope with it for much longer than two days.

Score: 5/10 Jonathan Goode

Holland & Barratt Bio-Cleanse

Difficult to swallow – and they taste foul

Price: pounds 17.95

THIS product claims it “may help to firm the body and have a draining effect”.

Quite how these tablets are supposed to detox you is unclear but after Christmas we are willing to try anything.

There’s some interesting stuff in here: chicory root, artichoke, dandelion and asparagus – but no obvious vitamin or mineral boost.

You are directed to take two tablets with a glass of water three times a day for a minimum of two weeks.

I found this very hard to stick to – especially at work or when I was out for the day.

I’m used to taking vitamins and capsules but even for me I found these very difficult to swallow – they tasted very unpleasant.

The packet even warns that “taking this product without adequate fluid may cause it to swell and block your throat” – yikes.

They have to be used in conjunction with the usual detox methods by cutting out alcohol, red meat, fatty foods, sugary snacks and caffeine. But I found this impossible!

I indulged in many of the above ‘sins’ and as a result neither saw or felt any benefit from taking Bio-Cleanse.

Verdict: One for the hardened detox junkies only.

Score: 3/10 Helen Cotterill

HealthAid Detox Kit

I was quite cynical the detox would have no effect

Price: pounds 19.99

THIS kit comes in a smart box which contains three items; herbal tea, herbal detox tincture and capsules of triphala with psyllium fibre.

The details on the box claim that “internal cleanses have been part of the human ritual since almost the beginning of time … it has long been recognised that enhancing elimination of waste products from the body enhances the feeling of well-being”.

It says the cleansing process should be seen as a ritual – users are meant to consider their own lifestyle while sipping the tea. I must admit as I drank it at work I didn’t have much time to do that.

It’s claimed the kit will help eliminate toxins from the body, and give a natural glow.

But I was surprised it didn’t suggest changing anything else – no instructions to drink less alcohol, eat better, spend less time in smoky pubs or get more sleep.

The tea (dandelion leaf, marigold flower, burdock root, angelica root, fennel seed, orange peel, clove, green tea and peppermint) was fairly gently flavoured, and not unpleasant to drink, though you need a tea strainer if you are not using a teapot, orthere are too many bits of leaves and peel floating around the cup.

The tincture (aqua, milk thistle, angelica root, prune juice concentrate, oregon grape root, red clover, liquorice root, cardamon and ethanol) I had to drip into warm water and drink – it had a pleasant alcohol-type smell and was also fairly enjoyable.

I had to take three capsules after my evening meal. I was worried that as the emphasis is on cleansing the body it might have explosive consequences – but I didn’t get any sort of upset stomach which was a relief.

I was highly cynical the detox would have any affect at all as I hadn’t changed anything else about my lifestyle – but after three weeks I had lost 2lb and was feeling generally quite healthy.

Whether this was down to the detox herbs or just getting back into the swing of normal life after Christmas was hard to say.

Verdict: Difficult to determine whether it worked, but no negative affects.

Score: 4/10 Julie Chamberlain

Koyatakara Easy Nite Detox

This trial meant sticking teabags to my feet – definitely the one for me!

Price: pounds 24.99 for 12 sachets Available from www.koyotakara.com or phone 020 8427 9978

WHEN I was asked to take part in a detox trial, I thought no way, I’m too lazy and hungry to do the fruit and water thing.

But this trial meant sticking teabags to my feet – definitely the one for me!

This is an overnight treatment created to make you feel energetic, relax your muscles and improve sleep.

The natural preparation may relieve localised pain, activate body cells and enhance the immune system.

Ingredients included wood vinegar, chitin and loquet leaf, designed to draw out toxins by stimulating the pressure points of the feet.

A six-day course is provided – 12 sachets plus adhesive patches.

Before going to bed I applied the sachet to the adhesive sticker and put the whole thing on the soles of both feet.

Ideally you have to leave it on for eight to12 hours.

The process was easy and I soon got used to sticking teabags to my feet, but when I peeled off the patch on the first morning I was horrified to see a particularly unpleasant, brown, sticky residue, not dissimilar to my niece’s dirty nappy!

I was rather sceptical that the residue was really just the ingredients reacting to the sweat in my feet, but as each day passed the residue got less and less, proving to me that the detox process was really working.

I found I slept much better and woke refreshed and with a sense of massaged feet.

My energy levels were increased – I presume as a result of being less toxic.

Verdict: This really is ideal for the lazy detoxer.

The patches are easy to apply and with natural ingredients, produce results you really can experience day by day.

Score: 10/10 Suzanne Jackson

Health & Beauty: Do Detox Diets Actually Work?

WHEN television presenter Carol Vorderman first embarked on a short-term detox diet she famously went from frump to fab in just a few weeks.

Now the new-look Carol is constantly turning heads and has launched her own range of detox books.

But can a quick detox help shake off winter sluggishness and boost energy levels?

We test out six different detox plans to find out.

Bio-Light 3-Day Detox

The big downside is the drink is absolutely disgusting

Price: pounds 13.50

AFTER a week-long skiing holiday where, although I was healthy in terms of plenty of alpine air and daily exercise, I filled myself with large amounts of stodgy food washed down with generous helpings of alcohol, I thought a three-day detox upon myreturn home would be a great idea.

The Bio-Light detox claims it works as an internal cleanser containing 23 natural ingredients which help to curb hunger pangs and promote weight loss and digestion.

It comes in four flavours and a third of the bottle is diluted in 1 1/2 litres of water each day and sipped regularly.

The detox also recommends following a healthy low-fat/high-fibre eating plan.

It sounded easy as I already follow a healthy eating plan, don’t drink caffeine and make sure I get in my five portions of fruit and vegetables a day.

But the big downside is that the drink is absolutely disgusting.

Sure it helps to curb hunger pangs – because just a whiff of the liquid puts you off eating for hours.

Perhaps it was my taste buds that were the problem because I made my boyfriend try it and he said it wasn’t the nicest liquid he’d ever tasted but it was okay.

I, on the other hand, had real trouble drinking the stuff and, rather than sip, I opted for the ‘hold the nose and get it all down as quickly as possible’ strategy.

Verdict: The taste of the detox drink meant I only managed one litre on the first day and a mere 500ml on the next two days.

I did drink plenty of water and continued to eat healthily but by day four I had lost no weight and I felt pretty much exactly the same.

Maybe I should have opted for the citrus or Island fruits flavour instead.

Score: 3/10 Helena Markovic

Ortis Pure Plan 10-Day Detox Plan

Amazingly, I lost 7lb over 10 days

Price: pounds 13.25 (10-day supply)

I RATHER grandly announced I’d eat my hat if a bottle of something which smelt suspiciously like syrup of figs could help kickstart my new year, new me pledges.

Okay, pass the trilby – I’m a convert.

I have to confess the swaying factor when it came to choosing what kind of detox I did was that PurePlan’s apple and green tea plan – containing plant extracts like dandelion and artichoke – demanded no special diet, just to cut down on the obviousnasties like booze, caffeine, fatty and sugary foods, and increase fruit, veg and water.

So far, so sensible – but amazingly I lost 7lb over the 10 days, even after falling off the wagon and into the pub at the weekend.

After I got over the headaches of the first two days (probably from cutting down on my zillion cups of tea in the office) I felt full of energy and my skin looked and felt more hydrated.

My only gripe would be that the syrup, which you dilute in a litre of water and drink through the day, does not taste like the “pleasant apple juice” as its makers claim. Admittedly, it tastes nowhere near as bad as it smells, but you’re never going tothink ‘ooh, I fancy a glass of detox juice’ in the same way you would a G&T.

But the litre of juice on your desk at work is a good reminder of your good intentions.

Verdict: I will definitely do this again in time for the summer.

Score: 9/10 (10 if they could only make it taste like a fabulous cocktail). Hayley Cuthbertson

HealthAid Weekend Detox Plan

The smell is enough to put you off, but …

Price: pounds 7.99

THIS detox promises to eliminate or neutralise toxins in the body and leave you feeling clean and healthy in just two days.

It is, so the packaging says, the perfect antidote to excessive alcohol intake and consumption of fatty foods.

The mixture (prune juice, milk thistle, liquorice root and Swedish bitters) has to be diluted in water and taken three times the first day and twice the second.

The smell is enough to put you off but I found that if you hold your nose it makes it much easier to take.

The rest is up to you, but it does recommend staying away from excessively fatty and sugary foods, alcohol and caffeine.

My weekend diet consisted of lots of fruit and salads and plenty of water.

The sense of self restraint felt good and it provided a good kick start to a healthier new year.

Come Monday I didn’t feel any different and it had no noticeable physical effects.

But I trust it has done some good. From what I have read the detox process usually lasts for a period of seven to 14 days.

Verdict: This is an ideal product for the novice detoxer.

Plus I am not sure I could cope with it for much longer than two days.

Score: 5/10 Jonathan Goode

Holland & Barratt Bio-Cleanse

Difficult to swallow – and they taste foul

Price: pounds 17.95

THIS product claims it “may help to firm the body and have a draining effect”.

Quite how these tablets are supposed to detox you is unclear but after Christmas we are willing to try anything.

There’s some interesting stuff in here: chicory root, artichoke, dandelion and asparagus – but no obvious vitamin or mineral boost.

You are directed to take two tablets with a glass of water three times a day for a minimum of two weeks.

I found this very hard to stick to – especially at work or when I was out for the day.

I’m used to taking vitamins and capsules but even for me I found these very difficult to swallow – they tasted very unpleasant.

The packet even warns that “taking this product without adequate fluid may cause it to swell and block your throat” – yikes.

They have to be used in conjunction with the usual detox methods by cutting out alcohol, red meat, fatty foods, sugary snacks and caffeine. But I found this impossible!

I indulged in many of the above ‘sins’ and as a result neither saw or felt any benefit from taking Bio-Cleanse.

Verdict: One for the hardened detox junkies only.

Score: 3/10 Helen Cotterill

HealthAid Detox Kit

I was quite cynical the detox would have no effect

Price: pounds 19.99

THIS kit comes in a smart box which contains three items; herbal tea, herbal detox tincture and capsules of triphala with psyllium fibre.

The details on the box claim that “internal cleanses have been part of the human ritual since almost the beginning of time … it has long been recognised that enhancing elimination of waste products from the body enhances the feeling of well-being”.

It says the cleansing process should be seen as a ritual – users are meant to consider their own lifestyle while sipping the tea. I must admit as I drank it at work I didn’t have much time to do that.

It’s claimed the kit will help eliminate toxins from the body, and give a natural glow.

But I was surprised it didn’t suggest changing anything else – no instructions to drink less alcohol, eat better, spend less time in smoky pubs or get more sleep.

The tea (dandelion leaf, marigold flower, burdock root, angelica root, fennel seed, orange peel, clove, green tea and peppermint) was fairly gently flavoured, and not unpleasant to drink, though you need a tea strainer if you are not using a teapot, orthere are too many bits of leaves and peel floating around the cup.

The tincture (aqua, milk thistle, angelica root, prune juice concentrate, oregon grape root, red clover, liquorice root, cardamon and ethanol) I had to drip into warm water and drink – it had a pleasant alcohol-type smell and was also fairly enjoyable.

I had to take three capsules after my evening meal. I was worried that as the emphasis is on cleansing the body it might have explosive consequences – but I didn’t get any sort of upset stomach which was a relief.

I was highly cynical the detox would have any affect at all as I hadn’t changed anything else about my lifestyle – but after three weeks I had lost 2lb and was feeling generally quite healthy.

Whether this was down to the detox herbs or just getting back into the swing of normal life after Christmas was hard to say.

Verdict: Difficult to determine whether it worked, but no negative affects.

Score: 4/10 Julie Chamberlain

Koyatakara Easy Nite Detox

This trial meant sticking teabags to my feet – definitely the one for me!

Price: pounds 24.99 for 12 sachets Available from www.koyotakara.com or phone 020 8427 9978

WHEN I was asked to take part in a detox trial, I thought no way, I’m too lazy and hungry to do the fruit and water thing.

But this trial meant sticking teabags to my feet – definitely the one for me!

This is an overnight treatment created to make you feel energetic, relax your muscles and improve sleep.

The natural preparation may relieve localised pain, activate body cells and enhance the immune system.

Ingredients included wood vinegar, chitin and loquet leaf, designed to draw out toxins by stimulating the pressure points of the feet.

A six-day course is provided – 12 sachets plus adhesive patches.

Before going to bed I applied the sachet to the adhesive sticker and put the whole thing on the soles of both feet.

Ideally you have to leave it on for eight to12 hours.

The process was easy and I soon got used to sticking teabags to my feet, but when I peeled off the patch on the first morning I was horrified to see a particularly unpleasant, brown, sticky residue, not dissimilar to my niece’s dirty nappy!

I was rather sceptical that the residue was really just the ingredients reacting to the sweat in my feet, but as each day passed the residue got less and less, proving to me that the detox process was really working.

I found I slept much better and woke refreshed and with a sense of massaged feet.

My energy levels were increased – I presume as a result of being less toxic.

Verdict: This really is ideal for the lazy detoxer.

The patches are easy to apply and with natural ingredients, produce results you really can experience day by day.

Score: 10/10 Suzanne Jackson

Massage Classes Teach Couples to Rub Each Other the Right Way

You know those nights. You’re hanging out with your better half – – watching a movie, drinking wine, cuddling on the couch — then they pop the question.

“Honey, can you rub my back? Just a little? It was a hard day at work. …”

The wine makes you agreeable, so you try your best. You dutifully rub, squeeze and try to work out those knots. But in a few minutes, your arms are tired, your back is sore and your cuddly other just isn’t satisfied.

So how do you learn to give a massage without causing yourself pain?

“You start with demystifying the whole process … recognizing the body as an electromagnetic field,” said Phillip Kessler, a couples massage instructor at the New Mexico Academy of Healing Arts, who has taught couples how to rub each other the right way for two years. “When someone touches us it feels better than us touching ourselves — it’s because their electromagnetic field is caressing us.”

Learning basic massage techniques for both clothed and unclothed occasions benefits couples because once they learn the correct techniques — which maximizes benefits for the recipient and minimizes stress on the masseuse — they can give each other “mini- massages” throughout the day, Kessler said. He added couples who know some massage techniques can give each other relief for minor injuries, daily stress and “just to be nice.”

He said he teaches people to focus on how to release tension in their partner’s arms, legs, hands and feet and to use compression and percussion techniques on the torso.

Learning about body and hand position, hand-strengthening techniques, oils or massage creams and creating a soothing environment can make giving and getting a massage a more relaxing experience.

Nodia Brent-Lux, a yoga teacher at Body spa, said couples massage is important because many people forget to use nonsexual touch.

“Touch releases growth hormone. It keeps us young. But later in a relationship, the only time people touch each other is when they’re involved in sex,” said Brent-Lux, who organized a one-day couples workshop at the spa that includes yoga, a couples massage lesson by Kessler and a “compassionate communication” session with Richard Fiske, a couples counselor.

Kessler, who has about five couples per semester in his class, said partners who used to be self-conscious about touching each other’s bodies learn confidence in his class, which can rekindle their sensuality and mutual trust.

Most of Kessler’s clients are people in their 40s and 50s.

“Learning massage extends one’s repertoire and range leading to the sexual field,” he said. “But learning massage is also a function of maturity. As we age we have more aches and pains. This is a way to deal with it.”

Couples massage — where two people have a massage simultaneously by trained therapists in the same room — is available at several local spas. Couples massage lessons are also available at area spas but are harder to find.

To learn more about couples massage or to take a lesson, call Kessler at 982-3457.

After Dinner Drink Proves Beneficial to Some

CHEVY CHASE, Md., Feb. 15 /PRNewswire/ — Researchers have discovered that a small amount of alcohol after dinner reduces the health risk of insulin and glucose related diseases in postmenopausal women. Published in the February issue of The Journal of Clinical Endocrinology & Metabolism, these findings may explain the decreased risk of heart disease, diabetes and obesity, in people who drink alcohol in moderation.

Previous studies have shown that healthy people who drink small amounts of alcohol regularly have a smaller risk of developing heart disease and diabetes compared to people who either don’t drink or drink in excess. Although significant research has been conducted to discover why alcohol in moderation may have these benefits, most previous studies have measured fat levels in the blood when people are fasting, many hours after their last drink. Unlike earlier methods, where fasting was required and since alcohol is more likely to be consumed socially, this study examines how alcohol could work in reducing heart disease by improving risk factors following a meal.

The researchers from the Garvan Institute in Sydney, Australia studied 20 postmenopausal women who were given a small amount of alcohol (15 grams) after their meals. They found that when alcohol was consumed with a meal low in carbohydrate but high in fat, the increase in glucose levels after the meal was lessened, particularly in those with lower body fat and lower insulin levels. This benefit was not seen when alcohol was consumed with a meal high in carbohydrate and fat.

“We found that artery stiffness, a strong predictor of increased heart disease risk, was improved when alcohol was consumed with the low carbohydrate meal but this benefit was not seen following the high carbohydrate meal,” says Dr. Lesley Campbell, lead author of the study.

The researchers also found that alcohol increased the number of calories burned after both meals, which may account for their previous finding that moderate drinkers have less body fat than non-drinkers.

JCE&M is one of four journals published by The Endocrine Society. Founded in 1916, The Endocrine Society is the world’s oldest, largest, and most active organization devoted to research on hormones, and the clinical practice of endocrinology. Endocrinologists are specially trained doctors who diagnose, treat and conduct basic and clinical research on complex hormonal disorders such as diabetes, thyroid disease, osteoporosis, obesity, hypertension, cholesterol and reproductive disorders. Today, The Endocrine Society’s membership consists of over 12,000 scientists, physicians, educators, nurses and students, in more than 80 countries. Together, these members represent all basic, applied, and clinical interests in endocrinology. The Endocrine Society is based in Chevy Chase, Maryland. To learn more about the Society, and the field of endocrinology, visit the Society’s web site at http://www.endo-/ society.org

Endocrine Society

CONTACT: Tadu Yimam of the Endocrine Society, +1-301-941-0251, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.endo-society.org/

Hematuria in Adolescents

case 1: Microscopic hematuria (5-10 red blood cells [RBC] per high power field [hpf]) was discovered during a physical examination for participation in team sports in an asymptomatic 14-year-old girl. No proteinuria or pyuria was found, and the physical examination was entirely normal. No family history of renal disease existed. Microscopic hematuria (5-10 RBC/hpf) persisted in a subsequent urinalysis. After a renal ultrasound examination was normal, the girl was referred for a consultation with a pediatrie nephrologist.

case 2: A 13-year-old male came to the emergency room with his first episode of gross hematuria. His urine was described as bright red in color. He had been afebrile and denied any pain. His past medical history was significant for an arteriovenous malformation of his right carotid artery. His physical examination was remarkable for an extensive nevus flamus on the right side of his trunk and hemihypertrophy of his right hand. He had normal blood pressure, blood urea nitrogen, creatinine, coagulation, complete blood count, and renal ultrasound with doppler examination. He had trace urine protein on dipstick and eumorphic RBC too numerous to count on his urine microscopy. On the grounds that urgent glomerular or urologie sources of his blood had been excluded, he was discharged with a nephrology clinic follow-up in 1 week. His urine cleared of gross blood after three voids. One week later, in nephrology clinic, the microscopic examination revealed no hematuria on urine dipstick or microscopy.

case 3: A 16-year-old Hispanic male, who had recently immigrated to the United States and had had no routine health care, came to a pediatrician for the first time. His school nurse referred him for an evaluation because of complaints of joint pain, which had been present for the past 2 months. His urine had been brown for 2 weeks. His blood pressure was 150/92 mm Hg, and he had mild pretibial edema, bilateral knee tenderness, and a malar rash. Urine dipstick had 3+ proteinuria and hematuria. Urine analysis revealed more than 100 dysmorphic RBC per hpf, as well as RBC and hyalin casts.

As these three cases indicate, hematuria in an adolescent can be due to a variety of causes with a wide range of severity. Adolescence is a time of transition from childhood to adulthood, and patients in this age range can develop medical problems that are more commonly anticipated earlier in childhood or, conversely, later during adulthood. Therefore, as with other medical issues in the adolescent years, the intervening clinician must consider an appropriate range of pediatrie and adult medical conditions when evaluating the adolescent with hematuria. In this article, the authors present an approach for the generalist clinician when encountering an adolescent with hematuria.

Definitions

In the initial work-up of an individual with changes in urine color, a urine microscopic examination is required to determine whether the change is due to the presence of blood. Some pigments and crystals, when present at a significant concentration, will cause color changes in the urine that can be misinterpreted as hematuria. Such discoloration can be derived from rhabdomyolysis, intravascular hemolysis, and a number of foods, drugs, and metabolic disorders. For a partial list of substances that can cause red- brown urine discolorations, see Table 1 [1-3].

Table 1

Causes of urinary discoloration potentially misinterpreted as gross hematuria in adolescents

Finding RBC during urine microscopic evaluation is the first step in the diagnosis of hematuria. The amount of blood required for the diagnosis of microscopic hematuria has varied. Some investigators have used a definition of greater than two RBC per hpf in 12 mL of a midstream urine specimen spun at 1500 RPM for 5 min [4]. Others have used a criterion of greater than five RBC per hpf in a fresh, unspun midstream specimen [5]. To further complicate the picture, others have used a definition of 10 RBC per hpf in a midstream urine collection [6]. A study using more stringent criteria has greater positive predictive value with regard to presence of disease but loses some negative predictive power. Regardless of the specific criterion used by the clinician, important cofactors to consider when a patient has hematuria include urinary casts, the presence of proteinuria, a family history of renal or urologie disease, hypertension, and other clinical or laboratory findings suggestive of kidney or urinary tract disease. Whether the hematuria is visible (gross hematuria), is associated with symptoms, or is discovered incidentally in microscopy of the urine will dictate the urgency and scope of the evaluation.

Incidence and prevalence

Screening studies in children of all ages have found that microscopic hematuria varies in prevalence from 0.5% to 2.0%, depending on the population screened and (as already discussed) on the criterion used to make the diagnosis [5-7]. In adolescents, up to 6% may have hematuria on a single urinalysis; however, the prevalence falls substantially when urinalysis is repeated [6]. Vehaskari et al [5] performed urinalyses in 8954 school-aged children, aged 8 to 15 years, and found that 1.1% of the children had hematuria in two or more specimens. In these Finnish children, the prevalence of hematuria was neither age- nor sex-dependent. Dodge [6] performed a large longitudinal screening study in children aged 6 through 12 years. In this study, hematuria was two to three times more prevalent in girls, particularly in adolescent girls. From 1974 to 1986, a national Japanese urinary screening program evaluated 380,000 elementary school children and 180,000 junior high students (12-14 years of age) [7]. The prevalence of hematuria in junior high students was 5.13% in the first urine screening and fell to 0.94% on repeat urinalyses. Hematuria was more common in Japanese girls at all ages.

Gross hematuria in children is less common and accounts for only 1 of eveiy 1000 outpatient pediatrie visits [8]. Among 153 children evaluated for gross hematuria in a general practice, the mean age was 7.4 years, the median age was 8 to 9 years, and the peak was 3 to 4 years. Gross hematuria was more likely because of urinary infection in girls at all ages.

In the screening study by Dodge [6], renal disease was not discovered among the adolescent children with hematuria. In the Finnish study, two children older than 10 years had renal disease (IgA nephropathy and hereditary nephritis). Diagnoses did not differ between the groups of adolescents and younger children in this study [5], In the Japanese screening study, the prevalence of nephritis was 0.004% in junior-high children [7]. Incidental hematuria in adults has also been shown to be benign. Fewer than 2% of adults with hematuria have a serious and treatable urinary tract disease [9].

The lack of important diagnoses uncovered in adolescents examined in these screening studies, together with the costs of evaluating microscopic hematuria, indicates that routine screening has little value [1O]. Currently, screening for hematuria among adolescents is not recommended.

Differential diagnoses of hematuria in adolescents

Entities that cause hematuria in adolescents may be divided into three groups: late emergence of childhood conditions, adolescent conditions, and early presentation of adult diseases.

Late emergence of childhood conditions

Conditions that are usually encountered in younger children but may emerge in adolescents include structural malformations of the genitourinary tract. In particular, abdominal trauma may lead to hematuria in a previously unsuspected obstructed urinary tract. Genetic conditions, such as cystinuria, occasionally escape detection until adolescence. Hypercalciuria without urolithiasis is another cause of hematuria in younger children but has been initially identified in some adolescents as well [U]. Acute glomerular and vascular diseases, such as poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis and hemolytic uremie syndrome, may present during adolescence. Some chronic nephropathies, such as Alport’s disease and thin basement membrane disease, may manifest in adolescence as well as earlier during childhood.

Diagnoses typical of adolescence

Urinary tract infections, both bacterial and viral, may be associated with hematuria at any age but emerge as an important diagnosis during adolescence. In sexually active teenagers, cystitis and urethritis should be considered when evaluating hematuria, and specific symptoms should be questioned. Urinary infections may present with either gross or microscopic hematuria and are the most common cause of gross hematuria in girls in a pediatrie office setting [8]. However, the diagnosis of urinary infection requires a positive culture and should not be based only on the presence of urinary RBC.

Adolescents may present with various glomerular disorders. In a study of 56 adolescents aged 13 to 19 years who underwent renal biopsy for gross hematuria without nephrotic syndrome, 29 patients had IgA nephropathy and 20 had non-IgA mesangial lesions [12]. Lupus nephritis should be considered in adolescents, especially when systematic symptoms are present. Interstitial nephritis may also occur in adolescents. Analgesic nephropathy and papillary necrosis should be considered in adolescents, who may be experimenting with a number of drugs, herbs, or potential nephrotoxins.

Hypercal\ciuria may produce hematuria without urolithiasis; moreover, urinary calculi are seen more commonly in adolescents than in younger children [U]. Exercise, especially long-distance running or other jarring physical activity, may produce hematuria in adolescents. Vascular malformations and coagulopathies are uncommon causes. Factitious hematuria should be considered if the history does not fit the clinical situation.

Conditions more commonly seen in adults

Occasionally, conditions more commonly seen in adults become clinically active in adolescents. Examples of such conditions are gout, autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease, medullary sponge kidney, and renal cell carcinoma [13]. Hematuria without symptoms is extremely uncommon as a presenting sign of malignancy in children. In large population screening studies, occult malignancies have not been reported in asymptomatic children with hematuria.

Evaluation of the adolescent with hematuria

When a patient is found to have hematuria, either as a presenting symptom or by screening evaluation, obtaining a careful history and physical examination is a crucial first step in the diagnostic process. The clinician should consider the list of causative factors in the previous discussion. A history of family members with hematuria or a history of marathon running, for instance, might direct the clinician to the diagnosis of familial hematuria or exercise-induced hematuria. Such clues from the history and specific findings during the physical examination occasionally make possible a more targeted evaluation. In most instances of minimal microscopic hematuria, the patient is asymptomatic and has a normal physical examination.

When considering the presenting complaint of gross urinary blood, it is helpful to ascertain both the timing of the urinary changes in terms of days or hours and the associated symptoms. Questions should specifically deal with recent trauma, passage of urinary stones or gravel, and recent respiratory or systemic infections. Fevers, dysuria, urinary frequency, or back pain raise the possibility of a urinary infection. Patients should be asked about their energy level, weight changes, night sweats, face and leg swelling, skin rashes, joint symptoms, headaches, cough or chest pain, and diarrhea. It is also important to inquire whether the patient has had previous urinalyses to determine the chronicity of the hematuria.

Medication history needs to include not only medications prescribed by physicians but also homeopathic and over-the-counter medications. Sometimes these medications are considered by families to be insignificant dietary supplements, when they may in fact be the source of renal pathology. For example, excessive vitamin D or calcium supplementation could trigger hypercalciuria, and high doses of ascorbic acid can produce crystalluria. Some herbs taken for appetite suppression have triggered interstitial nephritis [12], Past medical history should include questions about hearing, vision, and growth concerns.

Family history should search for documented hematuria, hypertension, recurrent urinary tract infections, kidney abnormalities (including cystic disease), kidney stones, kidney failure, glomerulonephritis, deafness, and autoimmune diseases. Social history should take account of any recent sexual activity and any known exposure to sexually transmitted diseases.

The physical examination should focus on blood pressure, growth measures, rashes or cutaneous manifestations of tuberous sclerosis or neurofibromatosis, retinal lesions, hearing, cardiac findings, the abdominal organs, pelvic organs, and genitalia, and edema (ie, facial, pretibial). For example, the finding of hemihypertrophy in a previously unsuspected case of Beckwith Wiedemann syndrome might lead to the diagnosis of medullary sponge kidney [14].

The urinalysis with microscopic examination often directs the evaluation. When hematuria is present, the key additional components of the dipstick urinalysis are the presence or absence of protein, leukocytes, and glucose. Proteinuria in an adolescent with hematuria suggest glomerular or interstitial disease. Leukocytes suggest the possibility of a urinary infection. Glycosuria might suggest diabetes mellitus, renal tubular disorders, or focal segmental glomerular sclerosis.

Microscopic examination of the urine sediment is important in evaluating hematuria. When urinary RBC are present in the urine, the clinician can evaluate the shape of the cells to delineate the site of bleeding within the urinary tract. In a fresh sample, RBC that are more than 90% to 95% eumorphic (ie, of normal size and shape) are most commonly from the lower urinary tract; cells that are dysmorphic (ie, acanthocytes of various sizes) are more likely to be of glomerular origin [15]. When white blood cells (WBC) are found, the presence of infection and interstitial or glomerular inflammatory disorders should be considered. Interstitial nephritis is even more likely if Wright stain of the urine shows the presence of eosinophils. Infections and poststreptococcal nephritis often have neutrophils in the urinalysis. The presence or absence of cellular casts is very important. RBC casts suggest glomerulonephritis, WBC casts are seen with pyelonephritis and renal inflammatory disorders, and casts of tubular cells are often seen in individuals with acute tubular necrosis. Fatty and broad casts are most often found in individuals with a more chronic disease state.

When crystals are visible in the urine and the patient has other findings suggestive of nephrolithiasis, knowledge of the pH of the urine and shape of the crystals can help elucidate the chemical nature of the offending stone. Calcium oxalate crystals may point to hypercalciuria.

Laboratory and radiologie evaluation

When microscopic hematuria without proteinuria is discovered in an otherwise normal adolescent, additional early-morning urines should be tested over a period of 6 to 12 weeks to verify that RBC are consistently present (Fig. 1). At present, there is little evidence that evaluation of incidental hematuria is of value [16]. Nonetheless, current practice is to obtain a urine culture, urine calcium-tocreatinine ratio, and renal ultrasound examination. In a group of 115 teenagers with microscopic hematuria, 16% had a family history of hematuria [16]. Hence screening family members for hematuria may be worthwhile.

If urinary calcium oxalate crystals are present, then urine calcium excretion should be assessed with a urine calcium-to- creatinine ratio (normal

* 24-hour urine calcium excretion

* Serum calcium, phosphorus, sodium, potassium, chloride, bicarbonate, magnesium, creatinine

* Renal ultrasound examination

If the urinary dipstick is also positive for protein, protein excretion should be assessed by a urine protein-to-creatinine ratio (normal

* Quantity of urine protein excretion

* Serum creatinine (estimate glomerular filtration rate)

* Blood urea nitrogen

* Serum albumin

* Antistreptococcal antibodies

* Serum complement concentrations (if hypocomplementimia, obtain anti-nuclear antibody, hepatitis profile)

* Antinuclear antibody if symptoms suggest lupus

When gross hematuria occurs, more emphasis is given to the evaluation, although no diagnosis results in 9% to 33% of such patients [8], see Fig. 1 for a framework for evaluating gross hematuria. When a urinary stone is identified, a complete assessment of stone-risk urinary constituents is needed [17].

Fig. 1. Evaluation of hematuria. (History or physical examination may supersede.) Ca/Cr, calcium-to-creatinine ratio.

Referral to a pediatric nephrologist or urologist is seldom required for microscopic hematuria. Gross hematuria often leads to a consultation, depending on its cause. Renal biopsy is reserved for those with hematuria and proteinuria not associated with poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis, hypocomplementemia, persistent gross hematuria, and hematuria with unexplained azotemia.

Case discussions

The three cases presented in the introduction to this paper demonstrate that blood in the urine can derive from a wide range of medical problems of various degrees of severity. Hematuria may result from a focal urogenital process or from a more complex, systemic disease state. When approaching these adolescent patients, we can now apply the considerations discussed earlier with regard to history, physical examination, and laboratory findings.

Case 1 : Microscopic hematuria without proteinuria in this asymptomatic girl persisted. The urinalysis demonstrated 5 to 10 eumorphic RBC per hpf. No family history of urinary stones existed and no crystals were observed in the urine. A renal ultrasound obtained by the primary care physician was normal. An extensive history revealed no sports activities, bicycle riding, or other trauma. As the patient was leaving the consultation, she mentioned that she was going skiing with her family the next day. When this information was explored further, the authors learned that she was a competitive snowboarder and routinely did jumps. They re-examined her during the summer and found no hematuria. She had “exercise- induced” hematuria. No laboratory studies were obtained.

Case 2: An asymptomatic, normotensive teenager with short-lived gross hematuria had many findings on physical examination that were suggestive of a vascular source of blood. His mucous membrane varicosities, extensive cutaneous nevus flamus, hemihypertrophy of the third phalanx, and history of arteriovenous malformation in his neck were all unusual findings; he had received no unifying diagnosis before presenting to the emergency room with gross hematuria. The blood in his urine was gross and painless, and wi\thin days his urine was clear of even microscopic blood. The cells were eumorphic, and his renal function was completely normal. The constellation of his history and physical examination findings is explained by a syndrome resulting in multiple, systemic vascular anomalies, the Klippel-Trenaunay Weber syndrome [18]. The source of blood in the urine of these individuals can be from vascular malformations anywhere along the urogenital tract. Recurrent or recalcitrant bleeds can require surgical intervention. Fortunately, the authors’ patient has never had a recurrence.

Case 3: This 16-year-old male had systemic history and physical examination findings consistent with an active inflammatory process. His elevated blood pressure, leg edema, brown urine, and urinalysis examination revealing dysmorphic RBC and RBC casts suggested a glomerular source of hematuria. His joint involvement and skin rash were findings consistent with systemic lupus erythematosus. His blood work revealed a positive antinuclear antibody and antidouble- stranded DNA, and his renal biopsy revealed diffuse, proliferative glomerulonephritis. He is currently being treated with monthly cytoxan and prednisone therapy, and his disease is in remission.

Summary

Hematuria is not a rare finding during adolescence. The high prevalence of microscopic hematuria is not surprising when one considers the vast number of ways in which RBC can end up in the urine. The adolescent presenting with gross hematuria, proteinuria, or microscopic hematuria in combination with other symptoms of genitourinary disease is more likely to require a therapeutic intervention than is the individual found incidentally to have microscopic hematuria. Screening for hematuria is not supported by current evidence. When it is discovered as the result of a screening examination, persistent microscopic hematuria in an otherwise asymptomatic individual may not require further investigation; however, the renal ultrasound examination has little risk and is helpful in diagnosing many of the conditions amenable to intervention. Serum studies offer little useful information in the evaluation of microscopic hematuria. Addressing isolated hematuria in a systematic, evidence-based fashion can help avoid untoward patient and parental worry and excessive health care costs, without missing treatable or progressive disease entities.

References

[1] Kaplan MR, Matthew R. Hematuria in childhood. Pediatr Rev 1983;5(4):99-105.

[2] Roy III S. Hematuria. Pediatr Ann 1996;25:284-7.

[3] Liao JC, Churchill BM. Pediatric urine testing. Pediatr Clin North Am 2001;48(6):1425-40.

[4] Shaw Jr ST, Poon SY, Wong ET. Routine urinalysis: is the dipstick enough? JAMA 1985; 253(11):1596-600.

[5] Vehaskari VM, Rapola J, Koskimies O, et al. Microscopic hematuria in schoolchildren: epidemiology and clinicopathologic evaluation. J Pediatr 1979;95(5):676-84.

[6] Dodge WF. Cost effectiveness of renal disease screening. Am J Dis Child 1977;131:1274-80.

[7] Murakami M, Yamamoto H, Ueda Y, et al. Urinary screening of elementary and junior high school children over a 13 year period in Tokyo. Pediatr Nephrol 1991;5:50-3.

[8] Ingelfmger JR, Davis AE, Grupe WE. Frequency and etiology of gross hematuria in a general pediatrie setting. Pediatrics 1977;59(4):557-61.

[9] Woolhandler S, Pels RJ, Bor DH, et al. Dipstick urinalysis screening of asymptomatic adults for urinary tract disorders. JAMA 1989;262(9):1215-9.

[10] Kaplan RE, Springdale JE, Feld LG. Screening dipstick urinalysis: a time to change. Pediatrics 1997; 100:919-21.

[11] Stapleton FB, Roy S, Noe HN, et al. Hypercalciuria in children with hematuria. N Engl J Med 1984;310:737-8.

[12] Hogg RJ, Suva FG, Berry PL, et al. Glomerular lesions in adolescents with gross hematuria or the nephritic syndrome. Report of the Southwest Pediatrie Nephrology Study Group. Pediatr Nephrol 1993;7:27-32.

[13] Indolfi P, Terenziani M, Casale F, et al. Renal cell carcinoma in children: a clinicopathologic study. J Clin Oncol 2003;21:530-5.

[14] Chesney RW, Stapleton FB, Kaufman PA, et al. Associated undcrappreciatcd: medullary sponge kidney related to medullary dysplasia in Beckwith-Wiedemann Syndrome. J Pediatr 1989; 115:761- 5.

[15] Stapleton FB. Morphology of urinary red blood cells: a simple guide in localizing the site of hematuria. Pediatr CHn North Am 1987;34:561-9.

[16] Feld LG, Meyers KEC, Kaplan BS, et al. Limited evaluation of microscopic hematuria in pediatrics. Pediatrics 1998;102(42):965-8.

[17] Gillespie RS, Stapleton FB. Nephrolithiasis in children. Pediatr Rev 2004;25:131-8.

[18] Azouz EM. Hematuria, rectal bleeding and pelvic phlebolithiasis in children with KlippelTrenaunay Syndrome. Pediatr Radiol 1983;13:82-8.

Carrie Gordon, MDa, F. Bruder Stapleton, MDb’*

a Division of Pediatrie Nephrology, University of Vermont College of Medicine, Barbara Bush Children s Hospital, Maine Medical Center, 887 Congress Street, Suite 320, Portland, ME 04102, USA

b Children’s Hospital and Regional Medical Center, Department of Pediatrics T-0211, University of Washington, 4800 Sand Point Way NE, Seattle, WA 98105, USA

* Corresponding author.

E-mail address: [email protected] (F.B. Stapleton).

Copyright Hanley & Belfus, Inc. Feb 2005

Cardiomyopathy

A big-hearted problem

Leonard Simmons suffered from cardiomyopathy – an enlarged heart. The condition can be fatal, but Simmons recovered after weeks of rest.

“It, started with a cough,” recalls Leonard Siminons, a fixture in Now Orleans city government for years. Simmons grow up in the French Quarter, graduated from Tulane University and now enjoys retirement, lie is a softer spoken and less hyperactive version of his exercise-guru brother Richard kSimmons.

“After a few weeks of coughing and a little lever, I saw my physician, who suspected bronchitis. He prescribed sonic antibiotics, and after a day or two I felt well enough to attend a meeting in Lafayette. Then a week later, I was feeling bad again. I became short of breath doing some yard work. That night I could not lie flat and breathe. I slept sitting up.

“The next day I had a chest X-ray. A few hours later, my doctor called with the results. I had an enlarged heart with fluid in my lungs. lie came to my house, picked me up and took me to the, hospital.”

In an effort to pump more blood, a. failing heart often increasis in size. But being bigger is not better. Having a big heart can be dangerous to your health.

There are more than 200 medical conditions that can cause eardiomyopathy or cardiac enlargement. The most common cause of heart failure in Louisiana is coronary artery disease. And some eardiomyopathy – ischemic eardiomyopathy, the most common kind – begins with blocked coronary arteries.

But the term primary cardiomyopathy refers to a large group of diseases whose initial problem actually begins in the heart muscle colls, rather than stemming from corenary artery obstructions, untreated hypertension and damaged heart valves that lead to congestive heart failure.

Of persons with congestive heart failure, perhaps one in 10 has primary cardiomyopathy. Like Gaul, these cardiomyopathies are divided into three types -dilated, hypertrophie and restrictive.

DILATED CARDIOMYOPATHY

As the heart expands in size, the muscular wall becomes thinner and weaker. Pumping is less efficient. Impaired circulation leads to a common condition caused by many heart problems – congestive heart failure. The initial symptom is often shortness ofbreath or a cough that persists.

In Simmons’ situation, an angiogram showed normal coronary arteries and excellent cardiac output. However, his left ventricle was dilated and enlarged. lie had a dilated eardiomyopathy, the most common of the three types.

Simmons recovered after seven weeks of rest and no exorcise. This occurred 10 years ago.

“I have had no subsequent problems, but I do try to watch my diet,” he says.

“And he will never have a broken heart as long UK he is married to me.” chimes in his wile, Cathy.

VIRUSES

Simmons’ doctors diagnosed his illness as a viral cardiomyopathy. Viruses an; often the. culprit when a person with no underlying coronary or valvular heart disease develops cardiac: symptoms alter some sort of antecedent febrile illness or upper respiratory tract infection.

It is a rare condition, and most of the research on viral cardiomyopathies comes from animal studies. More than 40 years ago Dr. George Burch, chair of the Department of Medicine at Tulane, linked certain viruses to card iomyopathy.

Recent technology has detected coxsackievirus and adenovirus In biopsies from people with suspected viral myocarditis. These were the samt? viruses Burch studied in mice.

Treatment is symptomatic and includes a, close watch for irregular heart rhythms. The good news Is that people with viral myocarditis, such as Simmons, usually recover with a simple restriction of heart-strcssful physical activity for several months. The enlarged heart can return to normal or near normal size.

The patient who does not eventually improve may need a cardiac muscle biopsy to look for other problems, which might call for different specific therapy.

Another virus that can cause cardiomyopathy is HIV. The actual role of the virus Is unclear, and secondary factors including certain medications and related opportunistic infections may play a role.

ALCOHOL AND ENLARGED HEARTS

In the United Stilles, the leading cause of primary cardiomyopathy is alcohol consumption. Several studies have compared heart size among heavy drinkers, social drinkers and teetotalers.

The cardiac enlargement in alcoholic cardiomyopathy begins slowly and without symptoms. The left ventricle gradually dilates and becomes larger. An echocardiogram can show these changes belbre UIP, drinker becomes symptomatic.

As alcohol-poisoned heart-muscle cells die or become less functional, cardiac output falls, and the left ventricle fries to compensate for loss of pump pressure by increasing in size. With continued drinking over years, the left ventricle dilates and the wall thins.

The typical patient with alcoholic cardiomyopathy has consumed 90 to 200 grams of alcohol daily for 15 or more years. If you assume that a drink contains 12 grams of alcohol, this works out to eight to 21 drinks a day, an amount more, common around Mardi Gras but hardly the intake of most readers of this magazine.

OTHER CAUSES

At least 75 other specific heart muscle diseases can cause dilated cardiomyopathy. These include certain drugs, genetics and immune-system shenanigans.

Several drills, including cocaine, are cardiotoxic. Chronic and long-term cocaine abuse can cause a cardiomyopalhy, which can reverse when cocaine use stops. Occasional cocaine use is unlikely to c.iiuHe a cardiomyojiathy. However, even a single use can cause lethal cardiac arrhythmias.

Sometimes the individual cardiac muscle cells become pumped up just like the arms of a weight, lifter. The heart chambers shrink in size and hold less blood. Circulation suffers. This kind of hypertrophie cardiomyopathy can be caused by a genetically determined abnormal protein, which causes enlargement of individual cardiac muscle cells. Multiple family members might have the same enlarged and deformed hearts.

Restrictive cardiomyopafhv is the rarest of the three types. It is usually related to some serious systemic illness. For example, some patients with cancer produce amyloid, an abnormal protein thiit chokes out the normal heart muscle cells. The heart muscle becomes stiff, impairing circulation.

Most patients with dilated cardiomyopathies such as Simmons do well, but it is difficult to predict which patient will have jmigressive problems. A small number of patients bacome more and more symptomatic, and some eventually need heart transplants.

Treating cardiomyopathy

* Symptoms – Cough, fatigue and weakness are nonspecific symptoms. Palpitations and unexplained shortness of breath are more specific symptoms. Chest pain can occur.

* Diagnosis – First an echocardiogram measures the size of the four cardiac chambers and the thickness of their walls. In rare situations, a biopsy of the cardiac muscle is needed to make a specific diagnosis.

Dr. John Walsh: Cardiomyopathy and the New Orleans Connection

“At one time the wards at Charity Hospital always had some beds filled with women who developed a cardiomyopathy during the last month of their pregnancy or within five months of delivery.

“[Tulane cardiac researcher] Dr. George Burch became interested in this condition called peripartum cardiomyopathy in the 1950s, as no conventional therapy seemed to help. Burch had an idea that longtime bed rest would help heal their ailing hearts.

“We hospitalized dozens of women and kept them in bed for months and months in a special unit at the old United States Public Health Hospital. Their heart sizes reduced; most improved. This was the first treatment shown to benefit those with cardiomyopathy. At the time there were glimmers of suspicions that malnutrition and alcohol were co-factors, but the recognition of a unique alcoholic cardiomyopathy came a few years later.

“Africa also had some unusual cardiomyopathies. Based on our work here in New Orleans, we secured a grant to go to Uganda. After we began publishing our findings, their minister of health became upset. He did not think it was good for their economy to admit that Ugandans were susceptible to heart disease. Since we were almost through our five-year grant, we stopped early and pulled out.”

-Dr. John Walsh, retired chancellor of Tulane Medical Center, speaking of experiences during his cardiology fellowship

BY BROBSON LUTZ, M.D.

Copyright New Orleans Publishing Group Inc. Feb 2005

Adolescents With Proteinuria and/or the Nephrotic Syndrome

Although there is little information in the literature regarding adolescents with persistent proteinuria or the nephrotic syndrome (NS) [1-6], patients in this age group appear to demonstrate a variety of histopathologic lesions that are not typical for young children or mature adults. This article comments in detail on the evaluation of adolescents with normal and abnormal levels of proteinuria, including those with nephrotic ranges of proteinuria. Specific attention is given to determining which adolescents with proteinuria need to be sent to a specialist for consultation.

Protein handling by the kidneys in normal adolescents and those with kidney disease

Under normal circumstances, the glomeruli restrict the passage of large serum proteins, such as albumin. Relatively low-molecular- weight (LMW) proteins may be filtered by the glomeruli but are reabsorbed in the proximal tubules. The normal rate of protein excretion is considered to be less than 4 mg/m^sup 2^/h or less than 100 mg/m^sup 2^/d throughout adolescence. This rate equates to a urine protein-to-creatinine ratio of approximately 0.2 mg/mg, or urine albumin-to-creatinine ratio of 30 mg/g creatinine.

Excess urinary protein losses may be caused by increased passage of large serum proteins across the glomeruli or decreased reabsorption of LMW proteins by the renal tubules. The finding of increased urinary protein excretion on routine screening of adolescents is fairly common. A recent report describing a high prevalence was based on the findings of the Third National Health and Nutritional Examination Study [6]. The study included 4088 children aged 8 to 18 years, who were evaluated as part of a nationally representative cross-sectional sample of apparently healthy individuals in the United States between 1988 and 1994. The method used to define abnormal proteinuria was an albumin-to- creatinine ratio (>30 mg/g) on a random urine specimen. The authors reported that 12% of the population sampled had albumin excretion of greater than 30 mg/g creatinine. Notably, the highest rates were found in adolescents in the later stages of puberty, with the highest level occurring in Tanner Stage 4 individuals, particularly girls, and in those who had a low or normal body mass index. However, it is likely that many of the subjects had transient or orthostatic proteinuria, as described in the next two sections. This caveat significantly decreases the potential health consequences of the high rates of proteinuria in adolescents that were described by Mueller et al [6].

When abnormal levels of proteinuria are found, the first step is to determine whether it is transient, orthostatic, or persistent in type. Transient proteinuria, which may be defined as proteinuria that is noted on one or two occasions but is not present on subsequent testing, is not considered to be indicative of underlying renal disease. Large-scale studies reporting the prevalence of proteinuria in groups of children describe much lower rates when the positive cases are defined as children with three or more consecutive urines showing proteinuria. Therefore, the finding of abnormal proteinuria in an adolescent should be confirmed on at least one additional urine, preferably a first morning urine, before additional studies are ordered.

Orthostatic proteinuria, which may be defined as protein excretion that is elevated when the subject is upright but resolves during recumbency, occurs most commonly in adolescents and young adults. This proteinuria may result in 3+ to 4+ protein on a random dipstick but rarely exceeds 1 g/m^sup 2^/d in a 24-hour urine specimen. Long-term follow-up studies have shown that this condition is benign in most affected individuals.

Persistent proteinuria, defined as proteinuria of 1+ or greater by dipstick or a urine protein-to-creatinine ratio of more than 0.2 on multiple first morning urine samples, is of more concern, especially if the urinalysis shows other abnormalities, such as hematuria (not associated with menses in adolescent females), glycosuria, or casts in the urinary sediment.

Methods of testing for proteinuria

The most frequently used screening method for proteinuria is the urinary dipstick. It is important to note that false-positive results may occur when the dipstick is used to assess proteinuria in very alkaline urine (pH ≥8), in concentrated urine specimens (specific gravity (SG) >1.025), or after the administration of radiographic dyes. Although protein excretion in adolescents has been measured traditionally using 24-hour urine collections, accurately timed urine collections of any duration are often difficult to obtain (particularly in this age group). As a result, the protein-to-creatinine (UP/C) ratio of an untimed (“spot”) urine specimen (preferably a first morning specimen) is recommended to estimate protein excretion in adolescents. The normal UP/C in adolescents is less than 0.2. This approach has been endorsed by a panel of pediatric nephrologists assembled by the National Kidney Foundation, as described in detail in a recent publication in Pediatrics [7]. An alternative approach is to measure the urine albumin-to-creatinine ratio, although this will not detect LMW globulins.

Fig. 1. Evaluation of proteinuria in adolescents. ANA, antinuclear antibody; Hep, hepatitis; P/C, protein/creatininc; U/A, urine albumin; U/S, ultrasonography.

Evaluating adolescents with proteinuria

The first step in the evaluation of an adolescent with persistent dipstick proteinuria (≥1+) is to obtain a complete urinalysis and a first morning “spot” urine for UP/C ratio (Fig. 1). The physician should stress the importance of the patient’s voiding just before going to bed and remaining recumbent until just before obtaining this specimen. If the urinalysis is normal and the UP/C ratio on the first morning urine sample is less than 0.2, a diagnosis of orthostatic proteinuria may be made, and no additional studies are necessary. However, if the urinalysis shows other abnormalities or the first morning UP/C ratio is greater than 0.2, blood should be sent for total serum protein, albumin, creatinine, cholesterol, and electrolytes. In addition, measurement of serum C3 complement, antinuclear antibody, and serologies for hepatitis B and C and HIV should be considered. These last studies are particularly appropriate if patients have hematuria, hypertension, a decrease in renal function, or symptoms or signs of extrarenal disease.

Association between proteinuria and cardiovascular disease

Severe persistent proteinuria is almost certainly a long-term risk factor for cardiovascular disease in adolescents with persistent NS. As proteinuria becomes more severe, it induces a variety of disturbances that contribute to cardiovascular disease, such as hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and hypercoagulability [8]. In some patients, other factors such as hypertension, renal insufficiency, and steroid therapy may also contribute to the risk for cardiovascular disease.

Proteinuria in adolescents with insulin-deficient or insulin- resistant conditions

Although good glycemic control is the first line of defense against renal injury in patients with Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus (IDDM), it has been recognized in recent years that adolescents with long-standing IDDM who have persistent microalbuminuria are at high risk for progressive kidney disease and probably at increased risk for cardiovascular disease [9]. In this patient population, it is appropriate to monitor the urinary albumin excretion rather than total protein excretion [10]. Normal albumin excretion is usually defined as less than 20 g/min/1.73m^sup 2^, microalbuminuria as 20 to 200 g/min/1.73 m^sup 2^, and overt proteinuria as greater than 200 g/min/1.73m^sup 2^. Alternatively, micro-albuminuria may be defined as 30 to 300 mg albumin per gram creatinine on a first morning urine specimen.

Recent years have also seen the recognition that patients with other insulin-resistant states, often associated with obesity, may develop significant levels of proteinuria. The long-term consequences in this population, including cardiovascular disease, have not yet been elucidated, but there is concern that these patients are at high risk. Obesity per se has been associated with proteinuria and glomerulosclerosis with increasing frequency in recent years. Although most of the patients with this condition are adults and most do not develop NS, they are at risk for progressive disease, and some patients have been diagnosed as young as 8 years of age [11].

Treatment options for persistent proteinuria in the nonnephrotic range

Dietary recommendations

Although dietary protein restriction has not been shown by controlled studies to be beneficial in adolescents with chronic proteinuric renal disease, it seems reasonable to avoid an excess of dietary protein in such patients, because high dietary protein intake may actually worsen proteinuria and does not result in a higher serum albumin.

Blood pressure control

Better preservation of renal function is often seen in patients with renal disease when lower systolic blood pressures are achieved. Certain classes of antihypertensive agents (eg, the angiotensin- converting enzyme inhibitors [ACEi] and the angiotensin II receptor blockers) may, in addition to reducing systemic blood pressure, offer other beneficial effects. Because of these possible \benefits, which include reducing urinary protein excretion and decreasing the risk for renal fibrosis, these agents may be preferred in adolescents with chronic kidney disease associated with persistent proteinuria [12]. However, the long-term benefit of ACEi in such patients remains to be defined.

Spectrum of adolescent-onset nephrotic syndrome

So far there have been only five published studies [1-5] containing specific information about adolescent patients with NS. All of these were retrospective studies, and most included only those patients who underwent kidney biopsy. In the report of the Southwest Pediatric Nephrology Study Group, 31 % of 65 patients had minimal change disease (MCD), 18.5% each had Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis (FSGS) and membranous glomerulonephritis (MGN), and 12% had membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN) [3]. The investigators observed a significantly higher frequency of MPGN among adolescents than in younger children.

In a recent study by Gulati et al [4], 63 Indian adolescents with NS were described. FSGS was the most common cause (46.3%) in these adolescent patients. The authors also observed a significantly higher frequency of MPGN (27.5%) among adolescents compared with younger children. In this racially homogeneous Indian population, only 16.3% of the adolescents had MCD. Gulati et al concluded that adolescent-onset NS differs from the childhood variety in having a significantly higher frequency of histopathology other than MCD, especially MPGN.

In another recent report, McKinney et al [5] reported that 7 of 34 patients (20%) in Yorkshire, United Kingdom who presented with NS between 10 and 15 years of age had steroid-resistant disease; by contrast, only 17 of 160 patients (10%) with NS aged less than 9 years who presented over the same period of study were steroid- resistant. The older children in this study represented 29% of all steroid-resistant cases, but only 16% of the steroid-responsive patients. The overall incidence of NS was lower in the older children (1.1 case per 100,000 persons per year in the 10-15-year age group versus 4.6 cases and 1.9 cases per 100,000 persons per year in the patients aged 1-4 and 5-9 years, respectively).

It is evident from these published reports that more serious forms of glomerular disease (ie, MGN and FSGS) are present more frequently in adolescents with NS than in younger patients with this condition. For example, the frequency of MGN and FSGS in young children with NS is only 2% and 8%, respectively [2].

Treatment options for children and adolescents with nephrotic syndrome

When to obtain a biopsy and what to expect

The decision to perform a biopsy in all adolescents with NS is not entirely clarified by the reported series. It is necessary to evaluate all aspects of a patient’s clinical presentation-in addition to age-before deciding whether a biopsy should be performed before a trial of therapy. Some pediatric nephrologists believe that many adolescents with NS may be treated without a kidney biopsy, because some will have steroid-responsive minimal-lesion NS and will thus be spared the trauma of a biopsy. However, consideration should be given to performing a pretreatment biopsy in adolescents with NS if they have signs compatible with a diagnosis other than minimal- lesion disease. Both sides of this issue have previously been discussed in detail [13,14] and are beyond the scope of this discussion. This review does not discuss the various therapeutic options that may be selected after the specific diagnosis has been established by the renal biopsy, because most of these are still being evaluated by clinical trials; hence, definitive advice is not available.

In general, a renal biopsy should be strongly considered in the evaluation of adolescents with NS under the following circumstances:

Before therapy

* Persistent gross hematuria (in the absence of infection)

* Persistent hypertension

* Low serum complement levels (C3 or CH50)

* Renal failure not explicable by hypovolemia and prerenal causes After therapy

* Steroid resistance

* Frequent relapses before “third-line” medications such as cyclosporine A, tacrolimus, and levamisole.

The final recommendation regarding the need for a diagnostic renal biopsy should be made by a pediatric nephrologist after reviewing the advantages and disadvantages of “biopsy first” or “trial of therapy first” with the patient and his or her parents.

Treatment options

This section briefly considers the therapy that is usually prescribed for adolescents who are found to have minimal-change NS or in whom the “trial of therapy first” approach is adopted.

Prednisone

Glucocorticoids, usually in the form of prednisone, have been and continue to be the mainstay of treatment in adolescents with idiopathic NS. Several protocols are in current use. A typical treatment course is prednisone, 2 mg/kg/d or 60 mg/m^sup 2^/d (maximum 80 mg/d) in one to three divided doses, for initial treatment. This treatment is continued until the patient becomes free of proteinuriaor, more commonly, for periods of up to 4 to 6 weeks. The patient is then converted to alternate-day treatment (ie, 2 mg/kg or 40 mg/m^sup 2^ [maximum 60 mg] given as a single dose every other morning) [15]. The optimum duration of the course of alternate-day treatment is somewhat controversial and may range from 4 to 12 weeks, depending on the pediatric nephrologist who is involved in the case. Most patients are given 4 to 6 weeks of alternate-day therapy.

Side effects of corticosteroids

Glucocorticoids have many side effects, and it is crucial to discuss these at length with the patient and his or her parents. These medications are often associated with short-term side effects that may result in significant physical and psychological problems for adolescent patients. These include increase in appetite, acne, cushingoid facies, behavioral and psychological changes (eg, mood lability and depression), gastric irritation, and hypertension. Steroid psychosis is rare but can be an extremely serious side effect. Long-term treatment with glucocorticoids can lead to bone demineralization, growth failure, and diabetes mellitus.

Cytotoxic drugs and other immunosuppressive regimens

When serious steroid side effects develop or when there is failure to respond to steroid therapy, other strategies should be considered in patients with minimal-change NS. Cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan) and chlorambucil (Leukeran), each given over a period of 8 to 12 weeks, may be associated with a long-term remission in adolescents with frequently relapsing or steroid-dependent NS [15]. However, these drugs may be associated with a variety of side effects (eg, bone marrow suppression, possibility of future malignancy, oligospermia or azoospermia, ovarian fibrosis); the risk is highest in patients who are close to or in puberty. The cumulative dose of Cyclophosphamide should be restricted to less than 170 mg/kg body weight. In addition to these general side effects, hemorrhagic cystitis may occur with Cyclophosphamide. Seizures occur only-and rarely-with chlorambucil.

A treatment option to be considered in adolescents with steroid- resistant (SR) or steroid-dependent (SD) NS is cyclosporine A (CsA) [16,17]. Unfortunately, many of the patients who respond to CsA tend to relapse once the medication is withdrawn. This relapse is a concern because long-term use of CsA is potentially nephrotoxic. In addition, CsA may cause increases in blood pressure or aggravate pre- existing hypertension. Hypertrichosis and gingival hyperplasia are other common side effects that are particularly troubling for teenagers and often lead to nonadherence with the prescribed therapy. More recently, mycophenolate mofetil has also been reported to be useful in patients with SDNS or SRNS. However, the results of studies using this medication are preliminary.

Adjunctive therapy with angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors

ACEi have been used in a variety of renal diseases to reduce proteinuria and thereby lessen the secondary consequences of NS. Available evidence suggests that ACEi may decrease the rate of protein loss by as much as 50%. Hence, it is common for pediatric nephrologists to prescribe an ACEi if an adolescent has nephrotic- range proteinuria that is resistant to specific therapy [12].

Nonspecific management of nephrotic syndrome in adolescents

Numerous other practical aspects of managing adolescents with NS are important to address with the patients and parents. It is helpful to educate school personnel about nephrotic syndrome and its therapy. Each patient should have an individual assessment for any changes that might be needed in schooling, activities, and diet. Recommendations about sports participation while on high-dose steroids should be approached on an individual basis.

Nutritional counseling about a nutritious, “relatively” junk- food-free diet is important (although it has variable levels of response!). The adoption of a nutritious, relatively low-calorie diet will help patients avoid large weight gains. Salt intake should be limited to control edema and decrease risk of hypertension. In addition, setting a fluid-intake limit of about twice insensible water loss may be helpful in an already edematous patient. Diuretics should be discouraged in most adolescent patients with NS. However, judicious use of diuretics, such as furosemide 1 to 2 mg/kg/d, may be considered if severe edema is present (eg, edema associated with severe scrotal/vulvar swelling, gastrointestinal symptoms, and so on). No indication exists for using diuretics in adolescents with mild edema.

Summary

Persistent proteinuria of various degrees of severity in adolescents should be regarded seriously, because recent evidence points to this abnormality’s being associated with chronic kidney disease [1O]. However, it is also important for primary care physicians to be aware that most adole\scents who are found to have proteinuria on a screening urinalysis do not have renal disease, and the proteinuria will usually resolve on repeat testing [18]. Appropriate measures to determine whether the proteinuria is fixed and not orthostatic can and should be conducted expeditiously, because they will allay stress for most patients. For the minority of patients in whom more serious forms of proteinuria exist, timely consultation with a pediatric nephrologist is recommended.

References

[1] Cornfeld D. Nephrosis in childhood. Hosp Med 1978;98-111.

[2] International Study of Kidney Disease in Adolescents. Nephrotic syndrome in adolescents: prediction of histopathology from clinical and laboratory characteristics at time of diagnosis. Kidney Int 1978;13:159-65.

[3] Hogg RJ, Silva FG, Berry PL, et al. Glomerular lesions in adolescents with gross hematuria or the nephrotic syndrome. Report of the Southwest Pediatric Nephrology Study Group. Pediatr Nephrol 1993;7:27-31.

[4] Gulati S, Sural S, Sharma RK, et al. Spectrum of adolescent- onset nephrotic syndrome in Indian adolescents. Pediatr Nephrol 2001;16:1045-8.

[5] McKinney PA, Feltbower RG, Brocklebank JT, et al. Time trends and ethnic patterns of childhood nephrotic syndrome in Yorkshire, UK. Pediatr Nephrol 200l;16:l040-4.

[6] Mueller PW, Caudill SP. Urinary albumin excretion in children: factors related to elevated excretion in the United States population. Ren Fail 1999;21:293-302.

[7] Hogg RJ, Portman RJ, Milliner D, et al. Evaluation and management of proteinuria and nephrotic syndrome in children: recommendations from a pediatric nephrology panel established at the National Kidney Foundation Conference on Proteinuria, Albuminuria, Risk, Assessment, Detection, and Elimination (PARADE). Pediatrics 2000;105:1242-9.

[8] Schlege HW. Thromboembolic risks and complications in nephrotic children. Semin Thromb Hemost 1997;23:271-80.

[9] Mogensen CE, Keane WF, Bennett PH, et al. Prevention of diabetic renal disease with special reference to microalbuminuria. Lancet 1995;346:1080-4.

[10] Hogg RJ, Furth S, Lemley KV, et al. National Kidney Foundation’s Kidney Disease Outcomes Quality Initiative clinical practice guidelines for chronic kidney disease in children and adolescents: evaluation, classification, and stratification. Pediatrics 2003;111:1416-21.

[11] Kambham N, Markowitz GS, Valeri AM, ct al. Obesity-related glomerulopathy. Kidney Int 2001 ; 59:1498-509.

[12] Proesmans W, Van Wambeke I, Van Dyck M. Long-term therapy with enalapril in patients with nephrotic-range proteinuria. Pediatr Nephrol 1996;10:587-9.

[13] Moxey-Mims M, Stapleton FB, Feld LG. Applying decision analysis to management of adolescent idiopathic nephrotic syndrome. Pediatr Nephrol 1994;8:660-4.

[14] Hogg RJ. Deciding on decision analysis. Pediatr Nephrol 1994;8:665-6.

[15] Hogg RJ, Portman RJ, Milliner D, et al. Recognizing and treating the nephrotic syndrome: avoid unnecessary delays. Contemp Pediatr 2000;17(11):84-93.

[16] Kaplan RE, Springate JE, Feld LG. Screening dipstick urinalysis: a time to change. Pediatrics 1997;100:919-21.

[17] Lieberman KV, Tejani A. A randomized double-blind placebo controlled trial of cyclosporine in steroid-resistant idiopathic focal segmental glomerulosclcrosis in children. J Am Soc Nephrol 1996;7:56-63.

[18] Vehaskari VM, Rapola J. Isolated proteimiria: analysis of a school-age population. J Pediatr 1982;101:661-8.

Ronald J. Hogg, MD

Division of Pediatric Nephrology St. Joseph’s Hospital and Medical Center, 2346 North Central Avenue, Phoenix, AZ 85004, USA

E-mail address: [email protected]

Copyright Hanley & Belfus, Inc. Feb 2005

False Alarms Plague Pacific Tsunami System

KOBE, Japan (AP) — Hawaii is among the most tsunami-ready places in the world. When an alert is issued, beachside sirens go off and urgent messages are flashed on television and broadcast on radio. Evacuation maps on telephone book covers point people to higher ground. But most of the time, no damaging tsunami hits the shore.

The Pacific Ocean early warning system’s high false alarm rate – estimated at 75 percent – is getting more attention these days as experts and nations work to extend similar protection to the Indian Ocean following the tsunami disaster in southern Asia.

“It’s definitely one of our biggest challenges,” said Charles McCreery, director of the Pacific Tsunami Warning System in Honolulu, which sends seismic data and tsunami bulletins to 26 nations around the Pacific. The network was begun in 1965.

In addition to the problem of false alarms, experts say there is a dearth of information on landslides that trigger tsunamis and a wide disparity in the ability of Pacific nations to respond to alerts. Much work remains to upgrade the system with new technology.

“You have to take that model and update it,” said Eddie N. Bernard, director of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s Pacific Marine Environmental Laboratory in Seattle.

Accuracy is an important element. Officials say a mega-tsunami in the Pacific won’t be missed by the sensors, and point out that monitors can get seismic information much more quickly than they used to. But the high false alarm rate undermines public confidence and dilutes the impact of alerts. Another issue is money: An unnecessary evacuation in Hawaii in 1994 cost an estimated $30 million in business disruptions and other costs.

Tsunami warnings are compiled using a variety of information. The most immediate data come from seismic readings: Monitors can alert nations within minutes of a large earthquake, and can then update the magnitude from subsequent readings within an hour.

But only a tiny percentage of undersea earthquakes cause dangerous tsunami, meaning subsequent readings from sea level monitors are crucial to forecasting big waves. And that data can take hours to arrive.

“It depends on the network,” said Michel Jarraud, secretary-general of the World Meteorological Organization. “In some cases, we expect it to take two hours.”

A major advance has come with Deep-ocean Assessment and Reporting of Tsunami buoys – known as DART – deployed by the United States in the Pacific in October 2002. There are now seven in operation, six operated by the United States and one by Chile.

The system consists of an ocean-floor sensor and an acoustic cable linking it to a buoy. The sensor measures any tsunami, and the buoy quickly transmits data to a monitoring station via satellite. The system was successful in November 2003, when it allowed authorities to withdraw a false tsunami bulletin within an hour of a 7.8-magnitude quake in Alaska’s Aleutian islands.

“It worked – we were actually able to cancel a warning,” said Bernard. The tsunami that later hit Hawaii was a mere one-inch high. The avoidance of an unnecessary evacuation saved the island state an estimated $68 million.

The buoy system won a major boost with Washington’s recent announcement of a dramatic expansion of its tsunami warning network to the Atlantic and Caribbean Sea. Under the $37.5 million plan, the number of the buoys under U.S. control will be increased from six to 38, Bernard said.

Quakes with magnitudes of more than 9 – such as the Dec. 26 temblor off Sumatra – virtually guarantee tsunami. But the ability to predict tsunami from smaller quake depends on part on the type of tremor, with those that vertically displace water being the most dangerous.

Attention has focused on new technologies that allow scientists to measure the deformation of the earth along dangerous faults with satellites, using Interferometric Synthetic Aperture Radar. Seismologists and others hope someday to use those measurements to monitor the pressure building between plates as a way of predicting when a devastating quake will occur.

“It allows engineers to concentrate their resources on places where hazard is the highest,” said James H. Whitcomb, deputy director of the Division of Earth Sciences at the National Science Foundation in Arlington, Va.

Any warning system, however, starts to break down when the tsunami-generating quake is so close to a coastline that there is very little time to get an alert to residents – meaning the education and preparation of local communities to recognize the warning signs and evacuate are crucial.

“Education saves lives,” Bernard said. “No system is going to get to you in five minutes.”

Effect of Jejunal Long-Term Feeding in Chronic Pancreatitis

ABSTRACT. Background: In the late course of chronic pancreatitis (CP), weight loss is often seen because of reduced caloric intake and a reduction of pancreatic enzyme secretion, resulting in maldigestion. Most of these patients can be managed by dietary recommendations and pancreatic enzyme supplementation. However, approximately 5% of these patients are reported to be candidates for enteral nutrition support during their course of CP. Although small bowel access for enteral feeding can be easily obtained by percutaneous endoscopic gastrojejunostomy (PEG/J) or direct percutaneous endoscopic jejunostomy (DPEJ), to date there are no data regarding clinical outcome and safety of long-term jejunal feeding in CP. Methods: From January 1999 to October 2002, 57 patients receiving enteral nutrition by PEG/J or DPEJ were retrospectively analyzed during a follow-up period of 6 months. There were 38 females and 19 males, with an average age of 46.6 years. Results: Small-bowel access was obtained by PEG/J in 53 patients and by DPEJ in 4. Duration of enteral feeding was 113 days. Average body weight significantly increased from 64.8 kg at day 1 to 69.1 kg at day 180 (p

Chronic pancreatitis (CP) causes many digestive and metabolic disturbances and a progressive degradation of a patient’s nutritional state. The relationship between nutrition and CP is bilateral: nutrition is one of the factors involved in the onset of CP, whereas poor food intake is one of its consequences and is one of the major predictors of poor outcome. The onset of malnutrition in CP is late in the disease course. Only after 80% to 90% loss of exocrine function will signs of malabsorption occur.1 The principal mechanisms of malnutrition in CP are a reduction in nutrient intake, a reduction in nutrient absorption, and an increased metabolic activity.

Pain of varying severity and duration is a leading clinical symptom in up to 90% of patients with CP.^sup 2^ Because of food intake-related abdominal pain, patients often eat too little.3

Gastroparesis, reported in up to 44% of patients with small-duct CP, may lead to nausea and vomiting and therefore further contribute to poor oral food intake and clinical decline.4 Patients with CP often display an elevated basal metabolic rate of approximately 110% of baseline (35 kcal/kg/24 hours) as a result of the chronic inflammation.5 This, in combination with poor oral food intake, accounts for the initial 10% to 20% loss of body weight.6

The onset of diabetes mellitus is reported in 60% to 70% of CP patients, and the probability of endocrine insufficiency progressively increases within 10 years after the diagnosis of CP.7 Steatorrhea is observed in about 30% of all cases, resulting in further weight loss.8-10 In this stage, the nutritional status of the patient can be greatly disturbed.

Before the initiation of nutrition support, nutritional risk should be assessed. Many nutrition screening tools exist. Kondrup et al11 developed a screening tool that includes measurements of undernutrition and disease severity in order to evaluate if a patient is at risk for malnutrition. In addition, patients may be evaluated using the subjective global assessment of Detsky et al.12 This approach classifies patients subjectively according to data obtained from their history and physical examination.

Nutrition support in CP patients is an ongoing challenge for clinicians. Although most of these patients can be managed by dietary recommendations and pancreatic enzyme supplementation, approximately 5% had severe and ongoing malnutrition and maldigestion. In these patients, enteral nutrition should be recommended. Enteral feeding beyond the ligament of Treitz is preferred over parenteral nutrition because enteral nutrition is less costly and has the advantages of reduced infectious and metabolic complications.13 In addition, enteral feeding maintains gut integrity and is fundamental in supporting the gut immune system, important for the at-risk patient.14 Further, enteral feeding beyond the ligament of Treitz allows the pancreatic gland to rest and minimizes pancreatic secretion, which may result in a reduction of abdominal pain.15 Additionally, jejunal feeding during acute flares of CP can reduce the incidence of nosocomial infections and the duration of systemic inflammatory response and severity.16,17

Endoscopie small-bowel access may be obtained by 2 methods. The first method, percutaneous endoscopic gastrojejunostomy (PEG/J), has been reported with a 100% success rate and no major complications.18 In this method, a PEG tube is used as a conduit to place a jejunal feeding tube with an over-the-guidewire method. The second method, direct percutaneous endoscopie jejunostomy (DPEJ), directly places a jejunal tube into the small bowel by using an enteroscope or pediatric colonoscope to reach the puncture site beyond the ligament of Treitz. Good results with only minor complications have been reported by Shike et al.19

Patients with a severe course of CP who have recurrent flares with abdominal pain, poor oral food intake, and whose illness cannot be controlled by oral dietary recommendations may benefit from long- term nutrition support by jejunal feeding. Unfortunately, there are no controlled data available from patients with CP using enterai feeding protocols. Current outcome data are based solely on case reports.

The aim of this current study was to analyze the safety and clinical outcome in patients receiving longterm nutrition support by PEG/J or DPEJ feeding during their course of CP.

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Patients

From January 1999 to October 2002, 57 patients with CP referred to the nutrition service of the Medical University of South Carolina were retrospectively evaluated. All patients were hospitalized at the time of tube placement because of an acute flare-up of CP. Nutritional status in all patients was assessed by using the Subjective Global Assessment (SGA) score. Nutrition support was delivered either by PEG/J or DPEJ.

Endoscopic Procedures

Endoscopic placement of a percutaneous tube system (DPEJ or PEG/ J) was usually performed under the use of conscious sedation and local anesthesia at the skin puncture site. Procedures were performed either in the intensive care units, at the bedside, or in the endoscopy suite. All patients were given cefazolin 1 g IV as single dose prophylaxis against infection before the endoscopie procedure.

PEG/J

A Wilson-Cook 24 Fr tulip-tip PEG or Boston Scientific (Natrick, MA) 24 Fr PEG was inserted with the standard push or pull technique. The endoscope was then reinserted and the internal bumper of the PEG tube located. A grasping forceps was placed through the endoscope and the PEG tube was cannulated by pushing the grasping forceps through the PEG to the outside of the patient. A flexible, 0.035 guidewire is grasped by the forceps and pulled back through the PEG into the stomach and advanced under direct endoscopie visualization into the fourth portion of the duodenum. The grasping forceps and guidewire were then advanced another 8-10 cm beyond the tip of the endoscope under direct visualization. A 12 Fr J-tube was then threaded over the guidewire and advanced to the proximal jejunum. The guidewire and forceps are removed and the endoscope was then withdrawn by gently rotation. If a large loop of J-tube was visualized within the stomach, the J-tube placement was repeated.18

Direct Percutaneous Endoscopic Jejunostomy

A standard, commercially available, pull-type 20 Fr PEG kit (Microinvasive Endoscopy; Boston Scientific Corp) was used for the DPEJ procedure. After insertion of the endoscope to the jejunum, a skin puncture site was determined by using abdominal wall transillumination and abdominal wall finger palpation with endoscopie gastric mucosal visualization. A 19-gauge needle was passed into the bowel through the abdominal wall. To fix the small bowel wall against the abdominal wall, the 19-gauge needle was grasped with a snare passed through the endoscope. An incision of 1 cm at the skin puncture site of the needle was made. An introducer cannula with a plastic outer sheath was then passed through the abdominal wall into the jejunum just adjacent to the 19-gauge needle. The snare was released from the 19-gauge needle and placed \around the cannula to stabilize it within the small bowel. The guidewire was passed through the plastic sheath, grasped with the snare and pulled with the endoscope out through the patient’s mouth. A standard PEG tube was attached to the guidewire and then pulled through the skin incision site in the abdominal wall. The final position of the DPEJ was confirmed endoscopically.20

Feeding

All patients were able to begin tube feeding within 12 hours after enterai access was obtained. A standard polypeptide diet (SD) was administrated by initially using a continuous 24-hour feeding regimen. The volume and rate of jejunal feeding were adjusted, depending on individual tolerance of the feeding formula. The feeding rate was increased with the goal of reaching the full caloric requirement on day 3. The total daily caloric requirement was calculated using the HarrisBenedict formula, individually adjusted to the patient’s clinical course and physical activity. An elemental diet (ED) was only administrated in patients with suspected intolerance to the SD. In addition, patients were allowed to consume clear liquids orally if tolerated. Patients took their medications orally. Patients were converted routinely to an overnight cyclic feeding regimen. The characteristics of the enteral feeding formulas are summarized in Table I.

TABLE I

Type and composition of tube feeding

Data Collection and Statistical Analysis

Institutional review board approval for the research project was obtained before the data collection. Data were collected retrospectively from the patient’s hospital and clinic medical records. Abdominal pain and gastrointestinal symptoms (nausea, vomiting, diarrhea) were evaluated by questioning patients during their hospitalization for enterai tube placement (day 0) and again during their regular follow-up consultations at days 90 and 180. All hospitalizations and not routinely planned physician visits related to CP were further recorded. The type and amount of narcotic drug intake were also analyzed. Follow-up data that were not documented in the medical records are indicated as not reported. Statistical analysis was performed using Intercooled STATA 8.0 for Windows (2003, STATA Corporation, College Station, TX). Because some continuous variables within the dataset were not normally distributed, we performed a nonparametric test for matched pairs of observations, using the Wilcoxon matched-pairs signed-ranks test. The null hypothesis (H0) is that both observation groups come from the same distribution; the alternative (H1) is that 2 groups do not come from the same distribution. Test results with p values of ≤0.05 were considered significant.

RESULTS

The etiologies for CP in our patient group were secondary to alcohol consumption (n = 16; 28%), papillary stenosis (n = 10; 17%), pancreas divisum (n = 9; 16%), papillary dysfunction (n = 5; 9%), gallstones (n = 5; 9%), metabolic disorders (n = 2; 4%), and idiopathic pancreatitis (n = 10; 17%). The majority of patients had ongoing weight loss with moderate to severe malnutrition. All patients had previously received dietary recommendations, attempts at oral nutritional supplementation, analgesia, enzyme supplementation, and insulin if required. Eight patients (17%) with moderate to severe malnutrition (SGA category: 4 patients B and 4 patients C) who were candidates for elective pancreatic surgery and who failed to thrive with an adequate dietary regimen also received long-term enteral feeding before surgery. The characteristics of the 57 patients are shown in Table II.

Small bowel access was obtained by PEG/J in 53 patients (93%) and by DPEJ in the remaining 4 patients (7%). Twenty-three patients (40%) had an average weight loss of 13.5 kg (range, 4-35) during the previous 6 months before small bowel feeding was initiated. The average enteral feeding time was 113 days (range, 3-180). In 1 patient, tube removal at day 3 was related to a colon mesentery injury after DPEJ-tube placement, necessitating emergency laparotomy. Elective pancreatic surgery was undertaken in 8 patients: there were 6 distal pancreatectomies, 1 lateral pancreaticojejunostomy (Partington-Rochelle) and 1 pancreaticoduodenectomy (Whipple). Before patients underwent elective surgery, enterai feeding was provided for an average of 76.8 days (range, 46-111). All patients who underwent either emergency or elective surgery were excluded from further data collection and analysis.

Body Weight

The patient’s average weight before initiation of enterai feeding was 64.8 kg (range, 36-108.5). After 90 days of follow-up, the overall mean body weight significantly increased to 67.7 kg (range, 39.5-113.5; p

TABLE II

Patient characteristics (n = 57)

FIG. 1. Patient’s average body weight over 6 months (kg).

SGA

SGA is a tool to determine nutritional status, thus predicting the degree of malnutrition. The SGA data before and after treatment initiation are shown in Table III.

Pain, Pain Medication, and Gastrointestinal Symptoms

Initially, 55 patients (96%) presented with abdominal pain. Pain medication consisted of regular intake of nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAID) in 3 patients (5.3%), opiate derivatives in 23 patients (44%), and a combination of opiate derivatives with NSAID or antidepressants in 26 (45.6%) cases. Further, 51 patients (90%) had gastrointestinal symptoms such as vomiting or nausea (n = 38; 74.5%), diarrhea and vomiting (n = 10; 19.6%), and diarrhea (n = 3; 5.9%). After 90 days, only 27 patients (48%; p

TABLE III

Subjective Global Assessment (SGA)

Laboratory Analysis, Physician Visits, and Rehospitalizations

Albumin levels increased from 2.9 g/dL at initiation to 3.2 g/dL (p .05), although a continuous decline was observed (Figs. 3-5).

On average, patients required 3.6 physician visits (range, 1-12) and underwent 1.8 rehospitalizations (range, 0-5) over the next 6 months (Table VI).

Feeding

In all patients, tube feeding with a SD was introduced within 12 hours after tube placement. The full nutritional goal was reached after 5 days in 84% of patients. One patient underwent emergency laparotomy because of a colon mesentery injury at day 3, and intolerance to enterai feeding was observed in another 8 patients (14%). A switch to an ED in these 8 patients was beneficial in 4 of them (7%), allowing their full caloric needs to be delivered by enterai feeding. The 4 remaining patients had intolerance to jejunal feeding, with no clinical progress and ongoing abdominal pain, abdominal cramps, and diarrhea. In these patients, the feeding devices were removed after an average feeding period of 81 days (range, 30-148).

Complications

Ten patients had complications related to the tube or tube feeding. These complications include tube dislodgement (6 patients), tube obstruction (2 patients), and wound infection (1 patient). Whereas the wound infection was treated conservatively, tube dislodgement and obstruction required ambulatory endoscopic reintervention. One patient (1.7%) had a major complication: 3 days after DPEJ-tube placement, emergency laparotomy was required because of a colon mesentery injury (Table VII).

Abdominal Pain, GI-Symptoms and Narcotic Use

FIG. 2. Abdominal pain, GI symptoms, and narcotic use over 6 months (% of patients).

TABLE IV

Abdominal pain, GI symptoms, and narcotic use

TABLE V

Type of GI symptoms, type of narcotics

DISCUSSION

Approximately 75% of patients with a chronic underlying gastroenterological disease are reported to have protein-energy malnutrition.21 This number may be higher in patients with CP. In CP, approximately 80% of patients can be managed through dietary recommendations, but approximately 5% to 10% are reported to need parenteral nutrition (PN) or enterai tube feeding during their course of CP.22 In the past, nutrition support in CP was synonymous with PN. However, increased cost, the high rate of septic complications, and other associated morbidities with this route of therapy have led to questions about the overall appropriateness of parenteral nutrition support in CP.23

A favorable impact on patient outcomes with enterai tube feeding compared with PN has been shown in several prospective, randomized controlled trials in a variety of disease processes ranging from trauma and head injury to acute pancreatitis.2 Unfortunately, there are little captured data available regarding the utility of enterai feeding into the jejunum in patients with CP. Currently, the literature is established solely according to case reports.

In our series, small-bowel feeding delivered by PEG/J or DPEJ over an average feeding \time of 113 days (range, 3-180) resulted in a statistically significant (p

FIG. 3. Average patient albumin level over 6 months (G/DL).

It is evident from these data that long-term jejunal feeding in CP significantly increases a patient’s weight and improves their nutritional status. Therefore, this therapy may help to minimize malnutrition-related morbidity and mortality.31 In addition, analysis of plasma albumin levels after 6 months also showed significant improvement from 2.6 g/dL to 3.4 g/dL (p

FIG. 4. Average patient serum amylase over 6 months (IU/L).

Pain in CP is by far the most common and recalcitrant indication for medical treatment. However, pain is difficult to quantify. The assessment of its significance may be clouded by a patient’s addiction to alcohol and narcotic analgesics. The mechanism of pain in CP is incompletely understood and perhaps multifactorial. The view that chronic pain will subside as the disease progresses to the point of organ failure (burnout) has been widely accepted.34 However, that process may take an unpredictable number of years or may never occur. Some studies suggest that the likelihood of spontaneous pain relief is low.35 In addition, our data also suggest that jejunal feeding provides a clinical benefit in terms of reducing abdominal pain and gastrointestinal side effects. Although 96% of patients initially had abdominal pain and 90% had gastrointestinal side effects such as nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea, only 23% reported ongoing abdominal pain after 6 months. Also, the percentage of patients regularly using narcotic drugs dropped to 27%, and the percentage of patients with gastrointestinal side effects declined continuously to 14.6%.

FIG. 5. Average patient serum lipase over 6 months (IU/L).

There are several theories about the etiology of pain in CP. The one likely etiology may be elevated cholecystokinin levels secondary to pancreatic protease deficiency.36,37 Feeding low in the gastrointestinal tract invokes a degree of pancreatic gland stimulation that differs little from parenteral nutrients.38 Decreasing pancreatic stimulation to subclinical levels of secretion is thought to relieve abdominal pain and might explain the reduction in abdominal pain observed during longterm jejunal feeding in our study.39 The benefit of jejunal feeding on gastrointestinal side effects might be further explained by the fact that gastroparesis in small duct pancreatitis is seen in up to 44% of patients, with associated symptoms such as nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain.4

Patients with CP frequently undergo diagnostic or therapeutic endoscopy of the upper gastrointestinal tract. Small-bowel access for feeding can be easily obtained in almost all cases during such interventions without requiring additional endoscopic interventions. CP often presents with intermittent inflammatory flares, often requiring hospitalization for pain management and rehydration. PEG/ J and DPEJ tubes can also be used as small-bowel decompression devices to reduce abdominal distention, nausea, and vomiting during such acute episodes. NPO periods can therefore be shortened, and oral feeding can often be reinstated earlier, without the need for temporary or long-term TPN.

TABLE VI

Physician visits, rehospitalizations

The answer to the question of whether efficacy of jejunal feeding in CP is affected by the cause of the CP remains speculative. However, in our series all patients (n = 4; 8%) with ongoing weight loss (3.7 kg; range, 2-5.5) had nonalcoholic pancreatitis. The failure of treatment in this group of patients is further underlined by the fact that they also needed a higher number of physician visits (7; range, 1-12) because of abdominal pain and gastrointestinal side effects. The switch to an ED did not influence their poor clinical course.

All patients were initially fed with a SD, which was well tolerated in 86%. Only 4 patients (7%) of 8 (14%) receiving an ED tolerated the ED better than the SD. Therefore, we conclude that small-bowel feeding in CP with a SD is safe, cost efficient, and, in most cases, well tolerated.

According to the literature, between 58% and 67% of patients need surgery during their course of CP.40 In our series with a follow-up period of 180 days, elective surgery was undertaken in 8 patients (14%) with moderate to severe malnutrition (SGA category: 4 patients B and 4 patients C) resistant to dietary recommendations. Before undergoing elective surgery, they received jejunal feeding for an average of 76.8 days (range, 46-111), resulting in an average weight gain of 3.1 kg (range, 2-10). According to our findings, moderately or severely malnourished patients scheduled for major pancreatic surgery may be candidates for longterm jejunal feeding delivered before their operative procedure to reduce malnutrition-associated perioperative risks.41

During the follow-up, the mean number of CP-related emergency physician visits (3.6) and rehospitalizations (1.8) was low compared with our clinical experience with this difficult patient group. The patients treated in this study represent a subgroup of patients with severe CP who had ongoing weight loss or severe malnutrition in spite of the best standard of supportive medical care.

TABLE VII

Complications

In our series, complications related to jejunal feeding were managed by upper gastrointestinal endoscopy (n = 8), conservatively by local wound infection (n = 1), or by emergency laparotomy in a case of abdominal pain with colon mesentery injury (n = 1).

We feel that jejunal access and jejunal feeding in CP can be considered safe, with a major complication rate of approximately around 1.8% and zero mortality in experienced hands.

CONCLUSIONS

After reviewing the findings in this retrospective study, we are convinced that the use of jejunal feeding in patients with chronic, recurrent pancreatitis is an important interventional approach, with evidence for decreasing stimulation and inflammation of the pancreas. There was clear evidence in our study of a decrease in associated clinical symptoms, including weight loss, abdominal pain, nausea, and vomiting. Indirectly, those results are confirmed by the reduction in our patients’ use of narcotics and by the favorable nutrition therapy outcomes, including weight gain, malnutrition rate, and increases in serum albumin levels. In addition, jejunal feeding significantly improves nutritional outcomes in malnourished CP patients.

There are limitations to this study. The major limitations are the retrospective nature of the study and the lack of a control group. A further limitation is the fact that there was no follow-up of the gastrointestinal symptoms, abdominal pain, or anthropomtrie parameters after the feeding tubes were removed. In addition, we have only assessed the abdominal pain as subjective specification and not according to a standardized questionnaire or a systematic objective method such as the visual analog scale.

We are planning to conduct a prospective study that is designed to address these limitations and to define the extent to which long- term enterai tube feeding enhances nutritional status, reduces abdominal pain, gastrointestinal symptoms, and other health care resource use in patients with chronic, recurrent pancreatitis.

REFERENCES

1. Del Prato S, Tiengo A. Pancreatic diabetes. Diabetes Rev. 1993; 1:260-285.

2. Ammann RW, Muellhaupt B. The natural history of pain in alcoholic chronic pancreatitis. Gastroenterology. 1999;116:11321140.

3. Shea JC, Hopper IK, Blanco PG, Freedman SD. Advances in nutritional management of chronic pancreatitis. Curr Gastroenterol Rep. 2000;2:232-236.

4. Chowdhury RS, Forsmark CE, Davis RH, Toskes PP, Verne GN. Prevalence of gastroparesis in patients with small duct chronic pancreatitis. Pancreas. 2003;26:235-238.

5. Hebuterne X, Hastier P, Peroux JL, Zeboudj N, Delmont JP, Rampal P. Resting energy expenditure in patients with alcoholic chronic pancreatitis. Dig Dis Sci. 1996;41:533-539.

6. Twersky Y, Bank S. Nutritional deficiencies in chronic pancreatitis. Gastroenterol Clin North Am. 1989;18:543-565.

7. Prato SD, Tileng A. Diabetes secondary to acquired disease of the pancreas. In: Alberti KGMM, Zimmet P, Defronzo RA, eds. International Textbook of Diabetes Mellitus. 2nd ed. Chichester: John Wiley & Son; 1999:189-212.

8. Scolapio JS, Malhi-Chowla N, Ukleja A. Nutrition supplementation in patients with acute and chronic pancreatitis. Gastroenterol Clin North Am. 1999;28:695-707.

9. Nakamura T, Tando Y, Yamada N, et al. Study on pancreatic insufficiency (chronic pancreatitis) and steatorrhea in Japanese patients with low fat intake. Digestion. 1999;60:93-96.

10. Apte MV, Keogh GW, Wilson JS. Chronic pancreatitis: complications and management. J Clin Gastroenterol. 1999;29:225240.

11. Kondrup J, Rasmussen HH, Hamberg O, Stan\ga Z. Nutritional risk screening (NRS 2002): a new method based on an analysis of controlled clinical trials. Clin Nutr. 2003;22:321-336.

12. Detsky AS, Mc Laughlin JR, Baker JP. What is subjective global assessment of nutritional status? JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1987;11:8-13.

13. Kudsk KA, Croce MA, Fabian TC, et al. Enteral versus parenteral feeding: effects on septic morbidity after blunt and penetrating abdominal trauma. Ann Surg. 1992;215:503-511.

14. DeWitt RC, Kudsk KA. The gut’s role in metabolism, mucosal barrier function, and gut immunology. Infect Dis Clin North Am. 1999;13:465-481.

15. Bodoky G, Harsanyi L, Pap A, Tihanyi T, Flautner L. Effect of enteral nutrition on exocrine pancreatic function. Am J Surg. 1991;161:144-148.

16. McClave SA, Greene LM, Snider HL, et al. Comparison of the safety of early enteral vs parenteral nutrition in mild acute pancreatitis. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1997;21:14-20.

17. Hamvas J, Schwab R, Pap A. Jejunal feeding in chronic pancreatitis with severe necrosis. J Pancreas. 2001;2:112-116.

18. DeLegge MH, Patrick P, Gibbs R. Percutaneous endoscopic gastrojejunostomy with a tapered tip, nonweighted jejunal feeding tube: improved placement success. Am J Gastroenterol. 1996;91: 1130- 1134.

19. Shike M, Berner YN, Gerdes H, et al. Percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy and jejunostomy for long-term feeding in patients with cancer of the head and neck. Otolaryngol Head Neck Surg. 1989;101:549-554.

20. Varadarajulu S, Delegge MH. Use of a 19-gauge injection needle as a guide for direct percutaneous endoscopic jejunostomy tube placement. Gastrointest Endosc. 2003;57:942-945.

21. Papini-Berto SJ, Dichi JB, Dichi I, Victoria CR, Burini RC. Protein-energy malnutrition as a consequence of the hospitalization of gastroenterologic patients. Arq Gastroenterol. 1997;34: 13-21.

22. Meier R. Nutrition in chronic pancreatitis. In: Buechler M, Friess H, Uhl W, Malfertheiner P, eds. Chronic Pancreatitis. Berlin: Blackwell Science; 2002:421-427.

23. Koretz RL. Nutritional supplementation in the ICU: how critical is nutrition for the critically ill? Am J Respir Crit Care Med. 1995;151:570-573.

24. Charash WE, Kearney PA, Annus KA, et al. Early enteral feeding is associated with attenuation of the acute phase/cytokine response and improved outcome following multiple trauma. J Trauma. 1994;37:1015-1018.

25. Moore FA, Moore EE, Jones TN, McCroskey BL, Peterson VM. TEN versus TPN following major abdominal trauma: reduced septic morbidity. J Trauma. 1989;29:916-923.

26. Moore EE, Jones TN. Benefits of immediate jejunostomy feeding after major abdominal trauma: a prospective, randomized study. J Trauma. 1986;26:874-881.

27. Suchner U, Senftleben U, Eckart T, et al. Enteral versus parenteral nutrition: effects on gastrointestinal function and metabolism. Nutrition. 1996;12:13-22.

28. Young B, Ott L, Twyman D, et al. The effect of nutritional support on outcome from severe head injury. J Neurosurg. 1987; 67:668-676.

29. Windsor AC, Kenwar S, Li AG, et al. Compared with parenteral nutrition, enterai feeding attenuates the acute phase response and improves disease severity in acute pancreatitis. Gut. 1998; 42:431- 435.

30. Kalfarentzos F, Kehagias J, Mead N, Kokkinis K, Gogos CA. Enterai nutrition is superior to parenteral nutrition in severe acute pancreatitis: results of a randomized prospective trial. Br J Surg. 1997;84:1665-1696.

31. Klein S, Kinney J, Jeejeebhoy KJ, et al. Nutrition support in clinical practice: review of published data and recommendations for future research directions: National Institutes of Health, American Society for Parenteral and Enteral Nutrition, and American Society for Clinical Nutrition. JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr. 1997;21:133- 156.

32. Grant JR. Nutritional assessment in clinical practice. Nutr Clin Pract. 1986;1:3-11.

33. Fleck A. Acute phase response: implications for nutrition and recovery. Nutrition. 1988;4:109-117.

34. Ammann RW, Akovbiantz A, Largiader F, Schueler G. Course and outcome of chronic pancreatitis. Gastroenterology. 1984;86: 820- 888.

35. Lankisch PG, Seidensticker F, Lohr-Happe A, Otto J, Creutzfeldt W. The course of pain is the same in alcohol- and non alcohol-induced chronic pancreatitis. Pancreas. 1995;10: 338-341.

36. AGA technical review: treatment of pain in chronic pancreatitis. Gastroenterology. 1998;115:765-776.

37. Toskes PP. Update on diagnosis and management of chronic pancreatitis. Curr Gastroenterol Rep. 1999;1:145-153.

38. Corcoy R, Martin-Sanchez J, Domingo P, et al. Nutrition in the patient with severe acute pancreatitis. Nutrition. 1988; 4:269- 275.

39. Helton WS. Intravenous nutrition in patients with acute pancreatitis. In: Rombeau JL, ed. Clinical Nutrition: Parenteral Nutrition. Philadelphia, PA: WB Saunders; 1990:442-461.

40. Levy P, Milan C, Pignon JP, Baetz A, Bernades P. Mortality factors associated with chronic pancreatitis: unidimensional and multidimensional analysis of a medical-surgical series of 240 patients. Gastroenterology. 1989;96:1165-1172.

41. McClave SA, Schnider HL, Spain DA. Preoperative issues in clinical nutrition. Chest. 1999;115(Suppl):64S-70S.

Zeno Stanga, MD*[double dagger]; Urs Giger, MD*[dagger]; Arthur Marx, MD; and Mark H. DeLegge, MD, FACG, CNSP*

From the * Section of Nutrition, Digestive Disease Center, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, South Carolina; [dagger] Department of General Surgery, Kantonsspital Fribourg, Fribourg, Switzerland; [double dagger] Division of Endocrinology and Diabetes, University Hospital Bern, Bern, Switzerland; and the Department of Internal Medicine and Social and Preventive Medicine, University of Bern, Bern, Switzerland

Received for publication February 18, 2004.

Accepted for publication October 1, 2004.

Correspondence: Mark H. DeLegge, MD, FACG, CNSP, Section of Nutrition, Digestive Disease Center, Medical University of South Carolina (MUSC), 96 Jonathan Lucas St, Ste 210, Charleston, SC 29425. Electronic mail may be sent to [email protected].

Copyright American Society for Parenteral and Enteral Nutrition Jan/ Feb 2005

Advertising Images of Females in Seventeen: Positions of Power or Powerless Positions?

The teen population is projected to reach 34 million by 2010, and magazine publishers are fighting to be relevant, fresh and advertising rich in the age of the Internet and interactive media consumption (Merrill, 1999). Teens are particularly vulnerable to the powerful cultural influence of advertising because they’re at the identity-forming stage in life. According to Berger (2000), “the momentous changes that occur during the teen years-growth spurt, sexual awakening, less personal schools, more intimate friendships and risk taking-all challenge the adolescent to find his or her identity, his or her unique and consistent self definition” (p. 501).

Teen girls are especially vulnerable to the influence of magazine ads in terms of their place in society (Baldwin, 1999; Kilbourne, 1987; Wiseman, 2002). Recent trends in both feminism and pop culture have encouraged young women to equate beauty and sexuality with power (Drake, 2002; Kilbourne, 1999; Wolf, 1992). Young women view sexualized images as role models and their own sexuality as their primary tool for self-efficacy (Baldwin, 1999). It is necessary to understand what messages teen girls are consuming and how these messages impact their societal roles. This study seeks to determine whether women are portrayed more often as independent or subordinate and whether female sexuality is represented as symbolizing power.

A semiotic analysis of one year, 12 issues, of Seventeen magazine will provide the framework for discovering what messages are sent to young girls through magazine ads. This study analyzes the subtle visual signs used in advertising imagery that cue the reader into the expected roles and meanings associated with the women portrayed. The literature, coupled with feminist theory, allows for a discussion of what these images really mean to the self-images of teens, their femininity and place in society.

Literature Review

Teens and Magazines

Handelman (2001) describes teens as needing a magazine more than anyone because adolescents seek out magazines for answers and guidance during the confusing teen years. The identity-forming influence is especially salient for teen girls because they seem to bond with their magazines, thinking of them as a sister or friend (Merrill, 1999).

Teen girls use magazine images to construct their definitions of femininity by comparing the images to themselves, others and the ideals of their peers. They choose those images or stories of femininity they can most relate to and find desirable (McRobbie, 1989). The following sections review concepts of feminist theory and literature on women’s representation in advertising, leading to the analysis of images contained in Seventeen magazine.

Feminist Approaches to the Media

Feminist theory is a useful tool for analyzing advertising images because women still do not have control over the meanings of their images (Rakow, 1992). One element of third-wave feminism is “power feminism.” As second-wave feminism de-emphasized women’s appearance as a marker of their worth, power feminism told women it is OK to be sexy and beautiful. Critics question this concept by asking who defines the concepts of “sexy” and “beautiful” for women.

Wolf (1992) finds that the media’s preoccupation with idealized, sexual females distracts third-wave feminists from true personal empowerment and steers them toward a false sense of power gained only by following the sexualized ideal. Overall, feminists agree that changes in advertising are connected to changes in women’s social position (Rakow, 1992). As third-wave feminism divides itself on the issue of embracing or shunning beauty, women’s positions in advertising need to be analyzed to understand women’s inequality in society.

Female Depictions in Advertising

Women are often stereotyped to fit certain myths or combinations of qualities that depict a traditional stereotype of femininity, such as brains or beauty. Countless cultural examples have told women they can either have a mind or a body, but not both (Wolf, 1991). Female models are more likely than males to be portrayed in submissive, stereotypical sex roles, to be sexually displayed and the subjects of violent imagery (Kilbourne, 1987; Rudman & Verdi, 1993). The following sections will review myths of femininity portrayed by women in magazine ads, specifically their depiction as subordinate vs. independent and as possessing sexual power.

Female as subordinate vs. independent. A classic female advertising image is one of subordination, when a woman physically lowers herself, averts her eyes, or holds her body or head in an insecure fashion, rather than posing in an erect and superior fashion (Goffman, 1976). Childlike depictions of women also signify subordination. Children hold subordinate positions in society, and positioning women as childlike encourages valuing them with the same status (Goffman, 1976).

Sexuality as power. Teen magazines’ message of gaining self worth through emphasized femininity has been shown to resonate with teen girls regardless of class and race (Kaplan & Cole, 2003). Baldwin (1999) found teen girls to define this sexualized power as self- efficacy, or the ability to control one’s own life. According to McRobbie and Garber (1975), teen girls often use exaggerated sexuality to resist outside control of their lives. Teen girls take what they have been shown by magazine ads as an empowering characteristic, their sexuality, and exaggerate it (Baldwin, 1999). As teens struggle to gain power in their lives, sexualized female depictions perpetuate the idea that all women are powerless to control their lives without relying on their sexuality.

Pop culture’s obsession with teen celebrities such as Britney Spears reinforces the concept of powerful sexuality. Spears is the only female artist to have four albums debut at No. 1 and the search engine Google named her the most-researched person on their site in 2003 (Peterson, 2004). As Spears’ cultural power increases, so does her sexual exhibitionism. Despite this, she would like people to “focus on her music, not her midriff,” (Hall, 2003). Pop culture values Spears’ body and actions more than her voice, reinforcing the idea in young girls’ minds that beauty and overt sexuality are primary sources of power in their lives.

The sexual objectification of the bare female midriff by pop culture was developed as a marketing tool to target teen girls and encourage their preoccupation with appearance and sex. Young women are taught to flaunt their sexuality even if they do not understand it, and they are told that their body is their best asset (Goodman, 2001).

Women and teens are vulnerable to the influence of advertising because their images are used as primary tools for selling everything from cars to clothing. Teen girls are particularly susceptible to this influence due to their identity-forming stage in life and reliance on magazines for both recreation and role models. Third-wave feminism and its issues of beauty and power have led to the association of self-efficacy with sexuality. The images of teen magazines and their myths of femininity are important to decode in order to understand the future roles and values these girls will hold as women in society.

Based on these previous findings, I propose to answer the following research questions using a semiotic visual analysis of Seventeen magazine:

RQ1: Are females represented more often as subordinate or independent?

RQ2: Is female sexuality represented as symbolizing power?

Method

Semiotic Analysis and Advertisements

A basic step of feminist analysis is isolating specific examples from their context, and viewing separate images as subjects worth individual study (Lazarus, 2001). This is accomplished through semiotic analyses of individual images that deconstruct their signifying structures. Semiotics allows the researcher to identify the meaning of magazine content behind the images, gaining an understanding of the signifying structures as a whole (McRobbie, 1989).

Semiotic analysis is a more prominent method for questioning visual images than either compositional interpretation or content analysis (Rose, 2001). It is especially relevant for studying visual images because, unlike speech, visual images are always pre- meditated and their symbolic significance is often planned with a particular message in mind (Rose, 2001). Photographic visuals are successful tools for manipulation in ads because photography is often thought of as picturing reality, instead of presenting premeditated messages.

Sample

I use semiotics in this study to analyze the visual imagery of ads from 12 issues of Seventeen magazine from 2003. All commercial ads containing photographic imagery of females, in color or black and white, with or without males and covering at least one page were analyzed. Ads containing photographs taken for a primary purpose other than the ad and duplicate ads were not included. The sample included 495 total ads featuring photographic imagery, 331 of which were unique and were analyzed according to my coding matrix.

Seventeen magazine was chosen because of its position as the leading magazine for teen readers, reaching 14.45 million read\ers every month, serving as an important force in defining, socializing and empowering teen girls. One in every two American female teens reads Seventeen magazine (Seventeen editorial statement, 2003). Seventeen magazine is tailoring its message to the current prototype of the empowered, consumer-minded modern teen reader (Carr, 2003).

Categories of Analysis

The signs and their components for this study are largely based on Goffman’s categories of frame analysis (1979). Researchers have successfully used his analysis to decipher the subtler content of visual ad imagery (Goffman, 1979; Klassen et. al, 1993; Kang, 1997). As explained by Gornick (1979), “Instead of looking at clutched detergents and half-naked bodies, Goffman concentrates on hands, eyes, knees; facial expressions, head postures…head-eye aversion, finger biting and sucking” (p. viii). These subtle visual clues give much information about the position and role of women in advertising and society.

Signifieds and Signifiers. The following three concepts were established as signifieds for this study: subordination, independence/self-assurance and body display. Corresponding physical images, or signifiers, operationalize the eight concepts or signifieds of this study. Subordination is operationalized by physical postures of females identified by Goffman as projecting subordination, including female lowering herself, bashful knee bend, head/body cant, lying/sitting on a bed or floor, childlike behavior or dress and childlike posture. Depictions of females as independent signify independence/self assurance. Complete or partial nudity signifies body display.

Signs/Myths. Women are often stereotyped to fit certain myths, or combinations of qualities that depict a traditional stereotype of femininity. Myths are created using second-level semiotics to attach signs to the ideologies or stories they represent in our culture. Three categories of myths of femininity or signs were developed for this study based on the relationship between the signifiers and signifieds. They include: Female as Subordinate, Female as Independent and Sexuality as Power. Combining signifiers and signifieds, as well as referencing literature on issues of teens and magazine ads formed these categories.

Analysis

Each unique ad served as one unit of analysis, with a total of 331 ads analyzed. Ads were analyzed separately according to a coding matrix containing signifier, signified and sign categories and key questions to ask when analyzing ads for myths of femininity. First, each ad was labeled according to date of issue, page number and sponsor. Next, each ad was analyzed according to the identified signifier and signified variables and then evaluated according to the identified signs/myths. All observations were recorded as notes on the coding matrix, including comments about the ad that did not fit into any of the pre-determined categories. Observations are discussed using selected ads from the sample as examples. Finally, I will discuss the meanings behind the images contained in Seventeen advertising, as well as their effect on the present and future lives of teen girls.

Results

The vast majority of the ads in the sample depicted at least one of the signs and accompanying signifiers of this analysis. The visual sign or myth of femininity most displayed in this sample was “female as subordinate.”

The most frequently observed signifier variables were female depicted as confident (60%), head/body cant (51%) and complete/ partial nudity (37%) (see Table A). Females were depicted as fitting the visual signs “female as subordinate” (56%), “sexuality as power” (22%) and “female as independent” (22%) (see Table A). Percentage totals for the sample across signifier and sign categories exceeded 100% because one ad typically displayed more than one category.

Table A. Results of Semiotic Substance Variables

Subordination/independence

RQ1, “Are females represented more often as subordinate or independent?” was analyzed according to signs of subordination and independence/selfassurance. Signifiers of subordination included: female lowering herself, bashful knee bend, head/body cant, lying/ sitting on bed/floor and childlike behavior, dress or posture. Independence/self-assurance was assessed according to whether the female model signified confidence by directly looking into the camera lens.

Subordination was depicted in 56% of the ads and 22% depicted independent/self-confident women. The following sections outline the signifiers of each variable.

Signifiers and examples of subordination. Models displayed subordination by physically lowering themselves in relation to the camera or others in the ad. Females were pictured lying across the ground or furniture or with their head on the lap of a seated male in 16% of the ads. Seventeen percent of the ads featured a woman bent at the waist or crouched down on the floor.

The bashful knee bend was signified by models who bent one knee, balancing their weight in a flirtatious, insecure posture. The bashful knee bend was displayed in 18% of all ads.

Models in my sample displayed the head cant signifier by lowering their chin or angling their head to one side and giving the camera a position of authority. Body cants included models shifting their weight to one side and angling their body in an insecure rather than natural posture. Head and/or body cant was the second most prevalent signifier in this analysis, with 51% of the ads including at least one female who displayed a head or body cant.

Women were pictured in Seventeen biting their finger, sticking out their tongue, jumping on beds and dressing in “school girl” socks, skirts and pony tails. Of the total ads, 4% depicted models displaying childlike behaviors and 7% depicted women in childlike dress or postures.

Signifiers and examples of independence. The second part of RQ1 required analyzing whether female models displayed signifiers of independence/self-assurance. Models in Seventeen looked directly into the camera with confidence, holding their heads and bodies in a strong and erect position. This was the most common signifier category found in this study. A models’ direct gaze was often presented alongside signifiers of subordination in her pose or posture, associating their confident gaze with their submissiveness. Sixty percent of the ads featured a female who signified independence/self-assurance, and only 22% of the ads featured a model whose overall image symbolized “female as independent,” free of any signifiers of subordination or childlike behaviors.

When analyzing the overall meaning of my sample, more ads were found to feature subordination rather than independence and self- assurance of the model. This finding addresses RQ1 in that models in Seventeen ads are pictured more often as subordinate than independent.

Sexuality as Power

To answer RQ2, “Is female sexuality represented as symbolizing power?” ads were analyzed according to the signifiers of body display coupled with independence/self-assurance. Ads in Seventeen sometimes featured models who confidently confront the viewer with their gaze while displaying themselves in an overtly sexual manner or dress, representing their sexuality as powerful. Of the sample, 22% included a female signifying powerful sexuality.

Complete or partial nudity of the female signifies body display. Models in Seventeen are pictured wearing bathing suits, scantily clad or appearing to be nude. Women were photographed from the shoulders up wearing no visible sign of clothing. Females pictured in a group wore bathing suits while other male and female models were fully dressed. Thirtyseven percent of the ads in my study included images of the female as completely or partially nude.

Signifiers of body display and independence combined to create images of “sexuality as power.” Models displayed their sexuality as power through their bare shoulders, noticeable nipples, seductive poses and confronting gazes. Twenty-two percent of the ads displayed confidence through the model’s sexuality, confirming RQ2, that female sexuality is represented as symbolizing power in Seventeen..

Discussion

The literature has found ads to sell the concept of femininity and its underlying ideology, that of a passive female and active male. Studies have indicated that magazine ads typically portray women as subordinate and/or as sexual objects. My results confirm that traditional displays of femininity continue to be produced in magazine ads targeted at teen girls. The current emphasis on the images of females over their substance has created a toxic cultural environment for teens.

Of the visual signs studied, “female as subordinate” was the most prevalent visual sign displayed. Although 60 percent of the ads pictured a woman looking directly into the camera lens, signifiers of body display or subordination usually negated this confidence.

Female subordination was most commonly signified by the model’s head and/or body cant, appearing in over 50% of the ads. My results show that the advertising industry is still relying on this technique to subordinate the women in their ads. Photographers typically take dozens of shots in preparation for print ads. The frequent selection of ad images depicting females in subordinate postures further propagates the underlying message that women are subordinate objects rather than active human beings.

The visual dismemberment and/or highly sexualized depiction of the female body sends the message to teens that their developing bodies are sexual objects. Complete or partial nudity was found in 37% of the ads. Females continue to be represented as sexual objects in modern advertising because these images have become naturally accepted by our culture.

The popular culture phenomenon of “the midriff” was widely observed in the ads of my sample. Such sexual objectification of the female body and midriff conveys the messa\ge to teens that they should flaunt their sexuality even if they do not yet understand it.

Popular culture’s emphasis on the bodies and beauty of young girls and women has led teens to associate their sexuality with power and a sense of self- efficacy. The results of my study show that women are slightly more likely to display their sexuality as power than to convey a sense of independence (see Table B). The most notable finding, however, is that 56% of the ads display subordinate females and only 22% depict independent females. Women’s sexuality is still being portrayed in a passive rather than active or independent way. Teens are consuming the message that women should be beautiful sex objects, not necessarily beautiful and empowered.

The results of this study show that ads in Seventeen continue to promote the stereotypical definitions of femininity that have been observed in adult women’s magazines for years. The ads in Seventeen display women as subordinate and sexualized. Many ads contained mixed messages, with a model signifying confidence through her direct gaze and subordination through her body posture. Women’s bodies continue to be displayed and emphasized as objects, either through photographic cropping or subordinate postures paired with body display. Teens are consuming the same messages as their mothers, with a variety of new trends mixed in, which serve as nothing more than updated versions of the same gender-stereotyped myths of femininity.

Table B. Results of Semiotic Signs/Myths of Femininity

While most ads in my sample featured women depicted as subordinate, some ads depicted confident females free of the male gaze. In addition, about 10% of the ads featuring a woman looking directly at the camera included only one signifier of subordination or body display, making the image one step closer to portraying an active and self-assured human being. Magazine ads have the potential to evolve if audiences value images of independent and confident models rather than the traditional myths of female subordination and objectification.

The quantity and variety of advertising messages provide teens today with opportunities for media literacy and education leading to choice. Teens have the capability to choose how they would like to be represented through their purchasing behaviors. Advertisers want to create ads that will make teens buy their products, and if teens become media literate, they are less vulnerable to the insecurities promoted by ads. If teen girls reinforce the most empowering images of women in ads with their purchase decisions, advertisers may stop relying on traditional stereotypes to sell their products. Ads are not the only influence on consumerism, but their multi-media presence makes them ubiquitous in society. If our purchase decisions reflect our values gained through media literacy, the images and content of ads will follow this change.

While every effort was made to consistently analyze the ads according to the matrix developed for this study, my results represent the qualitative work of one person. Future studies should analyze the ad imagery across teen titles and over the course of a few years to provide a wider range of applicability for the results.

A semiotic study such as this concerns itself with separating visual images into a series of signifiers, signifieds and signs. Through the process of dissecting images rather than analyzing them as a whole, they may lose some of the context of the original intention. While this separation of images for analysis is done to be as consistent and thorough as possible, images are left open to a certain degree of interpretation by the researcher. Future studies could increase the range and number of categories of signifiers to better describe and detail the components of the signs and myths of femininity analyzed.

Semiotics assumes that revealing the ideologies behind images sheds light on the social effects of meaning. In order to truly study how these images are being interpreted by teens, future research would have to directly observe these girls through ethnographic studies, interviews, focus groups and empirical research. The relationship between teens and their magazines is a worthy topic of future exploration and research. Women’s appearance in advertising targeted at the teen audience is important to analyze to better understand women’s inequality in society, because the hope for social change lies with the younger generation.

References

Baldwin, C. (1999). Sexualized imagery as power in advertising: the development of self-efficacy in young women. News Photographer, 54, VCQ4-8.

Berger, K. (2000). The developing person: Through childhood and adolescence. New York: Worth Publishers (pp. 501-507).

Carr, D. (2003, July 27). A new editor for the new teenage girl. The New York Times, section 4, pg. 2.

Goffman, E. (1979). Gender Advertisements. New York: Harper Colophon Books.

Goodman, B. (Director). The Merchants of Cool [Film]. (2001). (Available from PBS Video, Alexandria, Virginia)

Gornick, V. (1979). “Introduction.” In Gender Advertisements. E. Goffman (Ed.) New York: Harper Colophon Books.

Hall, R. (2003, November 22). Britney sexes up the music. Billboard. Retrieved March 9, 2004 from LexisNexis database.

Handelman, D. (2001). Fresh faces: Several new editors battle for the title of queen of the feisty teen magazine market. Mediaweek, 10, 22.

Kang, M. (1997). The portrayal of women’s images in magazine advertisements: Goffman’s gender analysis revisited. Sex Roles: A Journal of Research, 37, 979-98.

Kaplan, E., & Cole, L. (2003). “I want to read stuff on boys:” white, Latina, and black girls reading Seventeen magazine and encountering adolescence. Adolescence, 38, 141-160.

Kilbourne, J. (Author). (1987). Killing Us Softly 3: Advertising’s Image of Women. [Film]. (Available from The Media Education Foundation, Northampton, Massachusetts)

Kilbourne, J. (1999). Deadly persuasion: why women and girls must fight the addictive power of advertising. New York: The Free Press.

Klassen, M., Jasper, C., & Schwartz, A. (1993). Men and women: images of their relationships in magazine advertisements. Journal of Advertising Research, 33, 30-40.

McRobbie, A., & Garber, J. (1975). Girls in subcultures. In S. Hall & T. Jefferson (Eds.), Resistance through rituals. London: Hutchinson.

McRobbie, A. (1991). Feminism and youth culture: From ‘Jackie’ to ‘fust Seventeen.’ Boston: Unwin Hyman.

Merrill, C. (1999). Keeping up with teens. American Demographics, 10, 27-28.

Peterson, K. (2004, February 26). With all this wow, who needs a ‘why’? The San Diego Union-Tribune, pg. 4. Retrieved March 9, 2004 from LexisNexis database.

Rakow, L. (1992). Don’t hate me because I’m beautiful: Feminist resistance to advertising’s irresistible meanings. The Southern Communication Journal, 132-142.

Rose, G. (2001). Visual methodologies. London: Sage.

Seventeen Editorial Statement. Retrieved October 15, 2003 from www.hearst.com/magazines/property/ mag_prop_seventeen.html

Williamson, J. (1978). Decoding advertisements. London: Marion Boyars.

Wiseman, R. (2002). Queen Bees and wannabees: Helping your daughter survive cliques, gossip, boyfriends and other realities of adolescence. New York: Crown.

Wolf, N. (1991). The beauty myth. New York: Doubleday.

Wolf, N. (1992). “Preface.” In The beauty myth. New York: Doubleday.

This paper was presented to the Commission on the Status of Women of the Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication, August 4, 2004, Toronto, Ontario, Canada.

Frances Gorman received her M.S. in journalism, specializing in strategic communications, from the University of Kansas in May 2004. She currently serves as the communications director for the Kansas Democratic Party, where she is responsible for the state web site, voter file and membership communications.

Copyright Communication Research Associates, Inc. Winter 2005

The Construction of Readership in Ebony, Essence and O, The Oprah Magazine

The birth and rebirth of definitive black culture

The earliest African-American-specific lifestyle publications were born in the wake of a burgeoning Freedom Movement. The need was intrinsic: In the mainstream press there was an innate invisibility of black people and black life. Historically, images depicting black culture were littered with racial stereotypes grounded in slave culture and were further accepted by society as “the way things were” or “common sense.”

The founders of both Ebony and Essence magazine in 1945 and 1970, respectively, recognized the need for a media source that accurately constructed the black race in a racist society and gave voice to black aspirations. American culture was replete with racial and cultural ideology that circumscribed for them what “black” was and even more so, what blacks were not. Black publishing entrepreneurs believed that readers would appreciate a resource for definitive black culture. The news vehicles would not only highlight the intelligence and achievement of black Americans; in this renewed sense of racism and oppression called the Civil Rights Movement, the magazines were also viewed as a medium for the onset of African- American discourse.

The rebirth of African-American-specific publications is less motivated by politics and racial ideology and more driven by the demands of popular culture and gender self-affirmation. Current examples include Today’s Black Woman, Savoy, Honey, Black Hair and O, The Oprah Magazine. The most successful magazine launch in American magazine history, O appears as a major competitor with Essence and, according to an interview with Oprah by Essence contributing writer Audrey Edwards (2003), Oprah’s monthly cover image is positively changing the world’s perception of African- American women. Along with Essence and Ebony’s longstanding and successful run of black faces on their covers, O magazine joins them to deconstruct the belief among magazine publishers that “blacks on covers don’t sell.”

Self-identity, self-respect and “somebodiness”

This research study examines the construction of readership in three prominent African-American owned and/or operated lifestyle magazines: Ebony, Essence, and O, The Oprah Magazine. The authors argue that Ebony, Essence and O profess to set a social and political agenda for their target audience to privilege them and their ways of experiencing a patriarchal and disconnected world by invoking self-definition and a heightened idea of “somebodiness.” The self-awareness/self-respect doctrine is principally defined in the individual mission statements and fuels the magazines’ content, thereby demonstrating how mainstream publications encompass the ability to start a revolution, be it political, racial or spiritual.

In an effort to articulate the specifics of black culture and the black family in relation to American society, Ebony, “founded to project all dimensions of Black personality in a world saturated with stereotypes,” (Ebony, 1995, p. 80) builds a bridge linking history – from slavery to the appointment of an African-American in the White House – with present-day accomplishments and black intellectual thought. The crux of self-definition, according to Essence editors, is the discovery of one’s spiritual self in reference to definitive black culture and ancestry. By befriending the reader and providing testimonial shared experiences, Essence intends “to give Black women what they need to make them feel whole” (Essence Editorial Objectives, 2001, p. 1). The uncertain post-9/11 era propels O magazine readers to consume the relatively new monthly committed to intimately addressing the epistemology and “unshakeable” belief system of each reader (Granastein, 2000).

In addition to publishing, production and mission similarities and an ethnic bond, Ebony, Essence and O were created in response to a social and political urgency, according to the respective founders. The post-WWII political atmosphere and racial tension inspired the founding of Ebony magazine. American society overlooked African-American life, directly criticized African-Americans’ employment capabilities and further ignited racial stereotypes. Ebony sought to define black culture and polarize the depth of the black personality and intellect (Ebony, 1995). Now the longest- running African-American magazine, Ebony is published by the Johnson Publishing Company under the direction of John H. Johnson, an early magazine entrepreneur and one of the most important names in African American publishing.

Essence magazine will soon be wholly owned by media giant Time Inc., which announced in January 2005 its plans to purchase the 51 % of the shares of Essence it did not own from Essence Communications Partners Inc. The black power movement, fused with a feminist movement that marginalized black women, motivated the launch of Essence magazine in May 1970. The initial goal was to differentiate this publication from traditional magazines by illuminating the black woman and addressing her cultural, social and political needs. Essence, which is the first AfricanAmerican publication to make Advertising Age’s “AList,” ranked seventh among top 10 magazines in 2003 (Essence.com, 2004).

Oprah Winfrey (Harpo Productions), the celebrity phenomenon who energizes O magazine, co-owns the publication with Hearst Corporation’s magazine division. Though not as demographically specific as its counterparts, O purports to intimately connect with all women on a level beyond the superficiality of weight loss and elevated sexual pleasure. The O editors seek to guide their readers in a spiritual exploration of their lives, to encourage her to explore what she wants as opposed to what is wanted of her (The Magazine Guys.com, 2004). According to Winfrey, the events of September 11, 2001, in line with the cultural, social and economic divide, all paint a picture of societal disconnect. “What this magazine does is reconnect people to what deserves priority and to bring meaning to their lives” (O’Leary, 2001, p.53). Ironically, Oprah’s magazine has a predominately white female readership (95% women and 86.6% white) with a median age of 38 and nearly two times the median household income of Essence and Ebony readers ($61,204) (Carr, 2002).

This research is grounded in cultural materialism, Raymond Williams’ theory of the “specificities of material cultural and literary production within historical materialism” (Williams, 1977/ 88, p. 55). From this perspective all cultural practices are forms of material production that exist as explicit practical communication found in a historically specific society, that is produced under particular social, economic, and political conditions. Specifically, this essay draws on Antonio Gramsci’s concept of hegemony to recognize the completeness of the entire social process, including the dominant ideas, meanings, and values.

In contemporary society, the hegemonic process does not attempt to brainwash “the masses” but instead focuses on the ability of public discourse to “make some forms of experience available to the consciousness while ignoring or suppressing others” (Lears, 1985, p. 577). Williams suggests that hegemonic forces deeply saturate the consciousness of society, as a highly complex combination of internal structures that must be continually renewed, recreated, and defended. From a cultural materialist perspective it is possible to evaluate cultural practices to see how a dominant hegemonic position is constructed as well as to see how oppositional forces may arise to challenge the dominant worldview.

In his seminal article “Encoding/Decoding,” Stuart Hall rejects the traditional mass communication sender/message/receiver model that envisions a passive audience absorbing ideologically dominant messages. Instead Hall conceptualizes an active audience that decodes messages in a variety of ways: audiences may align themselves with the dominant hegemonic position; however, they may also decode messages from a negotiated understanding, or even from an oppositional stance (Hall, 2001). Hall also sees as problematic the encoding or production process suggesting that, within the creation of cultural products, producers construct an intended audience based on professional ideologies, images, assumptions, and past knowledge about the audience. It is the construction of an intended audience within the hegemonic process that we seek to understand in our evaluation of Ebony, Essence and O magazines.

In an effort to discern how an intended audience is constructed in the magazines we employ a critical literary method of analysis in which we examine the January 2004, February 2004 and March 2004 issues of Ebony, Essence and O, The Oprah Magazine in their entirety. Hall suggests that because critical literary methods of analysis focus on the complexity of language, they are particularly useful in delving the latent meanings of a text. A critical literary analysis provides relevant contextual evidence to situate the analysis, identifies key themes and concepts, and offers strategies for understanding a particular emphasis in a text. Such strategies focus on the placement, positionin\g, and style of the elements of a text, the tone and emphasis of the material, word choice, mode of address, as well as the use of visual elements. Yet Hall suggests that the most “significant item may not be the one which continually recurs, but the one which stands out as an exception from the general pattern – but which is also given, in its exceptional context, the greatest weight” (Hall, 1975). A consideration of the absences found in a text would focus on the avoidances that are the aspects of the text that one would normally expect to see but which are missing. Absence is often crucial to a text’s ideological structure and can be a critical aspect of a literary analysis. “It virtually becomes the raison d’etre of the text, that which is constructed to avoid (rather like a bypass – a road built specifically to a void a place but which only exists because of that place” (Cormack, 1995, p. 31).

Channeling spirituality

Black culture is grounded in religion, mostly structured aspects of Christianity. However, spirituality, not formal religion, is the new feel-good trend in women’s and lifestyle publications. This new “holistic genre” has branded itself and substantially motivates magazine sales and reader’s attitudes toward, and acceptance of, magazines.

The media define O as a no-nonsense feel-good emotional energizer free of product materialism but high on spiritual worthiness. The publication brings solace to its readers in a time of international political unrest and instability, according to critics (Mediaweek, January 2001/ October 2000/2001; Newsweek, January 2001; Mediaweek April 2000/January 2001; Folio, February 2003; Spring Magazines, 2001). Oprah’s humanitarianism, in accordance with the fact that “people just like her,” garners a global readership that includes and considers every woman, from the Fifth Avenue socialite to an impoverished mother in a South African village. The magazine uses spirituality to set trends in the media industry and in the lives of its readers. According to media critics, O elegantly weaves its way around common magazine themes so that it can focus wholly on self- acceptance, selfaffirmation, emotional stability, and a balanced home life through spiritual enlightenment. Says Amy Gross, O’s editor-in-chief, “We’re speaking to a set of values, not a set of demographics. We try to create a very intimate conversation with readers” (O’Leary, 2001, p. 53).

A direct linkage to her ancestors spiritually motivates the Essence reader, along with sharing the intimate details of the physical, intellectual and emotional lives of other black women. However, unlike O, the Essence reader and Essence magazine acknowledges a specific “higher being.” O and Oprah Winfrey have both received criticism from religious leaders because of the absence of the term “God” in the publication (Hoffman-Goetz, 1999; Hamlet, 2000).

Ebony: A glamorous urbanization of the black power movement

Political overtones emerge as a primary signifier of readership construction in Ebony magazine. The increased exposure to symbols of black liberation and measures of equality, in accordance with a narrative and semiotic emphasis on the African-American family and the social progression of blacks in America, implies that there is a visible awareness of several different audiences and an apparent assumption that readers are highly invested in politics and consumed with black culture and black life. The combination of three critical agendas – race politics, black political economy, and socio- cultural mobility work to create a subject, or a defined people, rather than an objectified and stereotypical Other. The objective of this conscious shift from object to subject is to move away from racism, oppression, sexism and primitivism so “that those relations are no longer abusive” (hooks, 1992, p. 47). Ebony makes an attempt to elevate racial consciousness for the African-American reader who is not racially and socially aware by playing on spatial relationships between blacks and America, blacks and whites, urbanites and the elite, male and female, and the liberal and conservative.

Cover blurbs and headlines incorporate terms such as “you,””your,” and “our” to imply ownership and possession and authorize the African-American reader, bell hooks revisits the invisibility of ownership that surfaced with desegregation, “What I remember most about that time is a deep sense of loss. It hurt to leave behind memories, schools that were Ours/ places we loved and cherished, places that honored us” (hooks, 1990, p. 34). Such vocabulary revises the implied meaning of the word American in the hierarchy of American society to identify a collective space in a place in which black culture is commonly made invisible or negatively categorized by the dominant society. “The Martin Luther King Nobody Knows” (January 2004, emphasis added), a literary strategy used by many publications, attracts the reader by again giving the illusion of possession, but in this sense the reader is granted access and offered an intimate look at a prominent African-American political figure. The intrigue with the particular piece, which is positioned in prime magazine cover space, the upper right corner, is the placement of this newly discovered information in an African- Americanspecific publication.

Front-of-book departments “For Brothers Only” and “Sisterspeak” strive to give a place and individual physical space to black women and men. The terms brother and sister are specific to black culture. Language, here, is a primary component of cultural and social identity. For instance, “No More Drama,” the title of a January 2004 cover story, is also the title of a contemporary rhythm and blues song. “Soul Yoga” is reminiscent of other cultural traditions – soul music and soul food. The intent here is to strengthen readers by reacquainting them with the past and black life, and also to privilege them or build upon what blacks have accomplished thus far.

Ebony addresses several components of AfricanAmerican life, and most likely because of recent criticism in African-American scholarship, incorporates articles that consider intellectual discourses. The unfortunate reality, however, is that Ebony suffers from sub-par writing standards, and although they display potential, interviews rarely delve below the surface of issues, even those of a complex nature. The word choice paradigm, “All of these outstanding young people represent not only themselves but also thousands of other talented young African-Americans,” (February 2004, p. 91) for example, resonates with that of the traditional suburban newspaper. In the case of scholarly driven articles, and those formatted for the purposes of the celebration of academic and professional achievement, the rhetoric and overall expectation of education or reading level of the audience are also ostensibly low in comparison to Essence and O magazine.

Accomplishment/economic mobility is yet another theme. The original intention of this publication was to highlight the intellect and talent of black Americans, not to emulate the conventional construction of a capitalist patriarchal society, but to combat the notion that blacks are professionally and intellectually incapable and inferior. Departments such as “Front Row” underscore professional, intellectual, and artistic accomplishments by placing scholars, noted corporate figures and entertainers on the forefront of mainstream society because historically, they were once marginalized and downplayed.

Ebony is produced under the notion that American identity is established through the ability to be successful and the capability to withstand the internalized norm of incompetence that defined blackness. A parenting guide in the January 2004 issue teaches “How to Prepare Your Child for Success.” In the same issue, “The “Brothers Only” column continues the theme with “A Roadmap to Success.” And “Sisters Speak” features the “Fruits of the Kingdom,” a descriptive historical analysis of how Martin Luther King was the preeminent “seed [that] was sown that became an oak tree in the modern civil rights forest” (Kinnon 2004, p. 38) and incubated black female leadership. The feature references “disciples of the King” in an effort to accentuate central and otherwise unknown women “who also had a dream.”

Even more significant than editorial elements in this reading of Ebony magazine is the methodical practice of addressing the intended audience. The potentially progressive content is supplemented with politically instructive tones that warrant a radical reaction or engagement. On the January 2004 cover a twenty-something Alicia Keys (R&B singer and pianist) offers the illusion of black liberation and social awareness. Keys is dressed in a black leather suit with an accompanying black leather cap, which is very reminiscent of the Black Panther Party, yet feminized with an urban contemporary bent. In activist mode, she assumes an Uncle Sam-like stance, pointing in the direction of the reader. The reader is reminded of the plight of African Americans and the social and political consciousness that resonated with political rallies during the Civil Rights Movement. The message is enforced by Keys’ stark stare and commanding pointed finger.

Ebony also understands the concept of the sexual object and the male gaze. Below Keys’ visible abdomen is a blurb communicating a story of black men and a recently introduced sex pill. The cover model’s physical appearance juxtaposed with the political overtones is an attempt to bridge generations by recreating the agony of a now- glamorized black power movement atmosphere and manipulating images and tendencies of a sexually liberated popular culture. In her attempt to center sexuality in the crux of the race revolution, hooks declares that black power and liberation literature reveals the manner in which “black women and men were usin\g sexualized metaphors to talk about the effort to resist racist domination” (hooks, 1990, p. 58).

Essence: A testimony of shared experience

Scholars (see for example hooks, 1990; Hamlet, 2000; and Balkin, 2002) agree that although language and rhetoric have always been a place of struggle for minority groups who live and work among the dominant culture, it is also a place of liberation and identification. For Essence readers, testimonial rhetorical speech fused with an understanding of the spiritual importance of their history and ancestry, is the cultural artifact with which they identify to construct their identity. Essence’s unified mode of direct address assumes that its readers share interconnecting ideologies about fashion, beauty, love, life, spiritual growth and self-improvement, and that they “buy into” the notion of a “spirit- led” life (McCormack. 1995, p. 34). In the January 2004 issue, Susan Taylor’s “In the Spirit” column encourages readers to acknowledge and experience God’s light in their lives, “Our soul and psyche need breathing space – a respite from leaping from one to-do to the next…Prayer, meditation, walking, journaling, spiritual reading, help us see clearly and hold depression and disease at bay. Moments free of work, worry, stress, and strain let our insight rise like sunlight.” In this conversational letter Taylor uses the first person to describe her spiritual insights and merges it with direct intimations on how readers might incorporate these self-discoveries into their personal spiritual missions.

The transformation, consciousness raising and empowerment potential of testimonial cultural rhetoric are employed here to not only connect with readers through shared experience and communal knowledge, but also to break stereotypical barriers that oppress and objectify the black woman. Permeating the psyche are images of an incompetent, hypersexualized, demeaned, unattractive and evil woman who occupies the very bottom rung of the socioeconomic and sociocultural ladder. Essence, with a spiritual manipulation of emotional, societal and political instruments that disenfranchise and disempower, takes the African-American woman and man, and many other women of color, on a spiritual journey through an identity movement beyond the socially unexpected.

The March 2004 issue embarks on a discussion regarding the solitude experienced by two disconnected African-American female executives in one patriarchal corporate structure. Taylor reminds the women that blacks collectively exist in “two worlds” and “must know the language and landscape of both.” They “could have brought sunlight, support and strategy” to each other. Taylor’s direct advice to her readers is to “don our spiritual armor,””have a plan” [of action in order to learn the navigational skills of one’s workplace], and “stay connected to the community.” In the February issue Taylor’s column assumes a political stance and addresses the absence of America’s attention to homeland issues such as homelessness, hunger, suicide rates, the presumed heirs to this country’s wealth – young white males and the mediated portrayals of African Americans. Exceptionally reminiscent of Martin Luther King who urged American citizens seeking cultural and societal affirmation to embrace communalism, Taylor again encourages readers to “have faith in black people..’the forces arrayed against us would wither before a unified, spiritually fortified, determined people,’ pick an issue, [and] hold a vision of what shall be.”

The positioning of the front-of-book, feature well and back-of- book departments in Essence are strategically calculated to communicate several points. Amid several middle-to-high-end advertisements, “In the Spirit” is the first department. The popular feature appears before “contents,””contributors,””your letters,””straight talk,” the editor’s letter, and the masthead, indicating that black women are multidimensional and their lives must be nurtured on the physical, emotional, intellectual and spiritual level; however, spiritual development is necessary to holistically progress through the layers of individual life. Reverting to the nineteenth-century practice of the implementation of religion and spirituality in popular magazines, it is suggested that practicing religion is traditionally natural and “the real test of readers’ faith lay in the feeling they brought to their daily activities (Kitch. 2001, p. 20).

Following the preliminary introduction to the Essence “spiritual journey,” the next portion of the publication features instructive health, fashion, beauty and lifestyle information, including those articles magnified in the cover blurbs, which instruct readers how to successfully progress to a specific place, be it physical – “Winning at weight loss” (January 2004), spiritual – “Inner peace: How to create ‘Me Time'” (January 2004), or economic – “Money: 5 Easy Steps to Credit Repair” (February 2004). The testimonial approach attempts to forge a link between the speaker and the audience through the African-American Christian tradition.

“I’m a Survivor,” (March 2004) “diary of my weight loss,” (January 2004) “7 Deadly Dating Sins (#1: Sex too Soon)” (January 2004) and “Healing Heartache” (February 2004) exemplify testimonial rhetoric that insinuates lived experience and implies understanding and triumph. For most African Americans, culture is grounded in spirituality and religion, more specifically, the black church. Therefore, Essence readers find comfort in the testimonial assertiveness of “Godly” or biblical messages. Of primary significance in the January 2004 issue is, “The Seven Deadly Dating Sins.” The illustration that accompanies this relationship how-to depicts an Afrocentric version of Eve in the Garden of Eden picking the forbidden fruit. Graphic elements are used to visually overdramatize deadly and sins.

Interestingly, the covers of the February 2004 and March 2004 issues picture celebrities, an editorial method most mainstream magazines exercise to attract readers. The January 2004 issue, however, is an exception. It features a black female model who is representative of the race, yet does not represent the political overtones of the month of January, Martin Luther King’s birthday. The cover image and editorial content, though saturated with highbrow intellectual verse and spiritual innuendo, avoid the social, cultural and political significance of the King holiday. Although Essence does not relegate a significant amount of editorial space to politics directly, the magazine does commonly demonstrate social awareness and makes a visible effort to celebrate African- American accomplishment, most notably in the area of political leadership.

This shift away from traditional celebratory content is also visible in the March 2004 issue, “The Career Issue,” which features an Essence Exclusive on Shoshana Johnson, the first African- American female POW. Editor-in-chief Diane Weathers makes a direct connection between Johnson and “The Career Issue” in her editor’s letter, which is focused primarily on the ex-soldier. “It’s fitting that Shoshana’s story appear in this issue, the theme of which is work and career,” Weathers says of the woman who presumably represents the true image of Essence. Again, Essence avoids the political significance of Women’s History Month and instead of Johnson, readers are greeted by a semiexposed Eve (hip-hop artist and actor) on the cover. The cover story, a combination of a fashion spread and Q&A, is oddly titled, “Blonde Ambition.” The phrase is customarily used in a pejorative fashion against Caucasian blonde women who rely on physical appearance for social and professional acceptance.

O, The Oprah Magazine: Consumer culture and a commodification of class

Like Ebony and Essence magazine, O relies on elements of the familiar to construct its preferred reader. Unlike the aforementioned publications, O resists the use of cultural references and historical tenets with which readers identify. Language, here, is that of the dominant culture only and, therefore, it does not act as a cultural indicator or identification vehicle. These visible absences, in accordance with the avoidance of gender, socially or economically diverse content, work to construct not a reader consumed with ethnic or political culture or an aspect of a sociocultural environment, but one who is financially apt to embrace consumer culture. O magazine assumes a homogeneous class of product- oriented educated readers who, because they are devoid of financial need, identify with this consumerist construction of life and lifestyle. Both the film and music industry are saturated with portrayals of abundant wealth accumulated easily, through circumstantial inheritance or as in the case of most mass-mediated portrayals of elitism, the desired socioeconomic position was acquired unrealistically. Movies such as Clueless revert to the Mistress-Slave paradigm in which the blonde, blue-eyed wealthy young girl flaunts her wealth frivolously while her less financially privileged black acquaintance is consumed with desire for an unattainable lifestyle that is seemingly “the only aspiration that has meaning” (hooks, 2000, p. 83).

The examination of O revealed an obvious assumption by the editors and publishers that Oprah Winfrey’s celebrity would bridge class, race and gender; consequently, there is no conscious effort to discuss class-based information, feature economically and culturally diverse content and products or examine current political issues. Winfrey’s phenomenon provides the privilege of not creating class distinctions in the publication or in the circulation information that publicly traded companies provide to current and potential stockholders. The resulting readership construction excludes several groups, most notably the group from which Winfrey originated. In a magazine that is a self-profes\sed connection of diverse groups in a disconnected world rocked by war and racial and religious politics, the dominant message in both the content and advertising appeals to affluent white women age 30 to 60 years old. Ads for Nexium, a prescription drug used to treat Acid Reflux Disease, and a three-page advertising spread for Zelnorm, used exclusively to treat Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS) in women, are featured along with a two-page layout for Effexor, Xr, a doctor- prescribed drug used to treat symptoms of depression. Both the advertising copy and the images in the ads target women. A similar strategy is used in a three-page Botox advertising spread that pictures women dermatologists who not only have used Botox themselves but also recommend it to their patients. While Botox may be used to reduce wrinkles in both men and women, the focus of these ads is primarily on women between the ages of 30 and 60. Interestingly, this is one of the few ad layouts to target women from various ethnic backgrounds. While the vast majority of the ads use Caucasian women and men, the ads for Botox depict one African- American physician, one Asian doctor, along with one Caucasian male doctor and two Caucasian female physicians.

With a production mix of about 50 percent for both advertising and editorial content, very little of the content of these ads appeals to older women, regardless of background, and only a few car advertisements might be of interest to male readers. Approximately one fourth of all of the advertisements present makeup, perfume and skin care products. They include an abundance of those most noted in the cosmetics industry – Clinique, Elizabeth Arden, Neutrogena, Dove, Jennifer Lopez, Eucerin, and Vaseline. These particular product advertisements do not target women of color, for her image is nearly absent. The pastel pink lip gloss, nail polish and blush in beauty features such as “beauty girls’ toys” in the February issue complement only women with a light complexion and blond hair. The fashion layout in style pages such as “One Suit, Four Ways” (February 2004) and “Fashion: Viva Las Vegas” in the March 2004 issue seem best suited to slim, white women with blond hair. More importantly, the fashion, beauty and lifestyle editorial products are not realistically cost effective. In “Workstyle: The O Memo” (February 2004) a back-of-book fashion feature depicting appropriate career attire pictures a striped silk Michael Kors blouse valued at $750 and $980 for the coordinating pleated skirt.

Each monthly publication consists of nearly one hundred full- page advertisements. In the February 2004 issue there are only eight images of African Americans (including one image that exposes only the model’s legs) four images of Asians, and three images of multiracial men and women. As is the case in the Botox advertisement, most of these diverse images are grouped together in the same ad, while images of white men and women proliferate throughout the magazine. “Advertising is especially persuasive when it offers the new through familiar imagery” (Kitch, 2001, p. 160). The dominant imagery in O is not the advertisements or the products placed within the sparse editorial pages. Readers are influenced by Oprah Winfrey and what she represents socially and culturally. Therefore, they approach the publication in search of self-identity and self-awareness through the illusion that it is attainable through economic mobility and material wealth.

Despite the absence of diverse material, there are several indications that the consumerist view is funneled according to an editorial hierarchy. Oprah’s ongoing interest in dieting methods and exercise techniques is reflected in the advertising as well. There are a variety of ads for diet programs such as Atkins, as well as those for power bars and healthy snacks. While issues of diversity abound on the Oprah Winfrey Show, they are virtually absent in the January, February and March 2004 issue of O. Such an omission seems especially noteworthy, and may certainly aid in O’s construction of its preferred reader. Winfrey, as an African American and privileged member of an elite society, has assumed the role of mediator “between the black masses and the white folks who are really in charge” (hooks, 2000, p. 91). hooks further argues that with the emergence of African Americans into a society dominated by patriarchy and capitalism, “Allegiance to their class interests usually supersedes racial solidarity” (hooks, 2000, p. 96). From this perspective, class then becomes not a caste system but a commodified object available for purchase by upper middle-class groups. From its inception, O magazine has urged readers to “see every experience and challenge as an opportunity to grow and discover their best self” (The Magazine Guys.com, 2004). Through visual and pictorial content and advertising, O prescribes, offers and endorses the best of the best of life for the reader searching for personal and material improvement.

From columnists Dr. Phil and Suze Orman to celebrity interviews with Jennifer Aniston (February 2004), Madonna (January 2004) and Sarah Jessica Parker (March 2004), O magazine furthers the construction of a white middle-upper-class reader. Analogous with Essence, O avoided a celebration of both the King holiday in January and Black History Month in February, opting to instead feature white female entertainment icons, Madonna and Jennifer Aniston.

Alternative spaces and the culture of consumption

This research study examine the construction of readership in Ebony, Essence and O, The Oprah magazine, three popular magazines that purport to be a vehicle of identity and awareness for their target audience. Upon evaluation we find that Ebony and Essence both challenge the hegemonic process with the incorporation of cultural artifacts that call upon collective memory to form reader association. Stuart Hall’s concept of encoding and decoding is relevant here in that the consumers of both publications, also members of a patriarchal society, are offered media messages that may help them to negotiate the dominant ideological position and help them to resist stereotypes and internalized norms. In some cases the magazines actually construct oppositional messages, challenging the dominant hegemony that audience members may embrace as resistant readings.

In Ebony and Essence, the primary method of reader construction is language in the form of testimonial rhetoric and black vernacular. Both work as cultural identifiers that manifest notions of shared meaning and collective ownership among African Americans. Language, as communicated by bell hooks, “is a place of struggle” (hooks, 1990, p. 46) for the minority who in order to remain productive and maintain individual space in the dominant society, must navigate the landscape of two-dimensional communication. In contrast O, The Oprah magazine constructs a readership firmly entrenched in the dominant hegemonic culture. Celebrating a culture of consumption and excess, O encourages readers to fulfill themselves through conspicuous consumption. While Ebony and Essence construct an alternative space for their readers, O maintains that fulfillment and selfrealization is the embodiment of fashion, make- up, gold-plated stationery and Manolo Blahnik stilettos. Such is the publication’s luxuriant language, the constructed reader, a middle- upper-class white woman is attracted to the magazine by its representation of a “luscious” lifestyle that implies holistic individual and social mobility.

References

Balkin, M. (Spring 2002). Phillis Wheatley’s construction of otherness and the rhetoric of performed ideology. African American Review, 36 (1), 121-136.

Carr, D. (2002, April 8). O magazine is expanding to South Africa. New York Times.

Cormack, M. (1995). Ideology. Ann Arbor: The University of Michigan Press.

G. J. (1996, October). The Essence of a good launch strategy. Folio: The Magazine for Magazine Management, 1, 29.

Gadsden, G. Y. (Spring 2000). The male voice in women’s magazines. Gender Issues, 49-57.

Gonser, S. (2001, February). The incredible, sellable O. Folio, 26-30.

Granastein, L. (2000, April). Mediaweek, 73-75.

Granastein, L. (2001, January). Sisters act. Mediaweek, 33-34.

Granastein, L. (2001, October). Soul sisters. Mediaweek, 38-39.

Hall, S. (2001). Encoding and Decoding. In M. G. Durham, & D. M. Kellner (Eds.), Media and Cultural Studies: Keyworks (pp. 166-176). Maiden, MA: Blackwell.

Hall, S. (1975). Introduction. In Smith, A.C.H., E. Immirzi, & T. Blackwell (Eds.), Paper Voices: The Popular Press and Social Change 1935-1965 (pp. 11-24). Totowata, N.J.: Rowman and Littlefield.

Hamlet, J. D. (Fall 2000). Assessing womanist thought: The rhetoric of Susan L. Taylor. Communication Quarterly, 8 (4), 420- 436.

Hoffman-Goetz, L. (1999). Cancer experiences of African-American woman as portrayed in popular mass magazines. Psycho-Oncology, 8, 36- 45.

hooks, bell. (2000). Where we stand: Class matters. New York: Routledge.

Kitch, C. (2001). The girl on the magazine cover. The origins of visual stereotypes in American mass media. Chapel Hill: The University of North Carolina Press.

Lears, T.J. (1985, June). The concept of cultural hegemony: Problems and possibilities. The American Historical Review, 90 (3), 567-593.

O’Leary, N. (2001, March). O positive. Spring Magazines,. 53-57.

Williams, R. (1977/1988). Marxism and Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

This paper was presented to the Magazine Division at the 2004 convention of the Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication, held in August in Toronto, Ontario, Canada.

Lee Miller is a doctoral candidate in the University of Missouri School of Journalism. Her research interests include popular American magazines and their relationship to social identity construction. Lee also studies heavily body image theory as it relates to hegemony and cultur\al ideals.

Bonnie Brennen is professor and chair of the journalism department at Temple University. She is the author of For the Record. An Oral History of Rochester, New York, Newsworkers (Fordham University Press 2001) and coeditor, with Hanno Hardt, of Picturing the Past. Media, History & Photography (University of Illinois Press 1999) and Newsworkers: Towards a History of the Rank and File (University of Minnesota Press, 1995).

Brenda Edgerton-Webster is a doctoral candidate in the Missouri School of Journalism. Her research interests include journalism history, particularly of the black press, and women’s studies. Brenda also conducts cultural and critical studies of minority images in television and print.

Copyright Communication Research Associates, Inc. Winter 2005

Can This Black Box See Into the Future?

DEEP in the basement of a dusty university library in Edinburgh lies a small black box, roughly the size of two cigarette packets side by side, that churns out random numbers in an endless stream.

At first glance it is an unremarkable piece of equipment. Encased in metal, it contains at its heart a microchip no more complex than the ones found in modern pocket calculators.

But, according to a growing band of top scientists, this box has quite extraordinary powers. It is, they claim, the ‘eye’ of a machine that appears capable of peering into the future and predicting major world events.

The machine apparently sensed the September 11 attacks on the World Trade Centre four hours before they happened – but in the fevered mood of conspiracy theories of the time, the claims were swiftly knocked back by sceptics. But last December, it also appeared to forewarn of the Asian tsunami just before the deep sea earthquake that precipitated the epic tragedy.

Now, even the doubters are acknowledging that here is a small box with apparently inexplicable powers.

‘It’s Earth-shattering stuff,’ says Dr Roger Nelson, emeritus researcher at Princeton University in the United States, who is heading the research project behind the ‘black box’ phenomenon.

‘We’re very early on in the process of trying to figure out what’s going on here. At the moment we’re stabbing in the dark.’ Dr Nelson’s investigations, called the Global Consciousness Project, were originally hosted by Princeton University and are centred on one of the most extraordinary experiments of all time. Its aim is to detect whether all of humanity shares a single subconscious mind that we can all tap into without realising.

And machines like the Edinburgh black box have thrown up a tantalising possibility: that scientists may have unwittingly discovered a way of predicting the future.

Although many would consider the project’s aims to be little more than fools’ gold, it has still attracted a roster of 75 respected scientists from 41 different nations. Researchers from Princeton – where Einstein spent much of his career – work alongside scientists from universities in Britain, the Netherlands, Switzerland and Germany. The project is also the most rigorous and longest-running investigation ever into the potential powers of the paranormal.

‘Very often paranormal phenomena evaporate if you study them for long enough,’ says physicist Dick Bierman of the University of Amsterdam. ‘But this is not happening with the Global Consciousness Project. The effect is real. The only dispute is about what it means.’ The project has its roots in the extraordinary work of Professor Robert Jahn of Princeton University during the late 1970s. He was one of the first modern scientists to take paranormal phenomena seriously. Intrigued by such things as telepathy, telekinesis – the supposed psychic power to move objects without the use of physical force – and extrasensory perception, he was determined to study the phenomena using the most up-to-date technology available.

One of these new technologies was a humble-looking black box known was a Random Event Generator (REG). This used computer technology to generate two numbers – a one and a zero – in a totally random sequence, rather like an electronic coin-flipper.

The pattern of ones and noughts – ‘heads’ and ‘tails’ as it were – could then be printed out as a graph. The laws of chance dictate that the generators should churn out equal numbers of ones and zeros – which would be represented by a nearly flat line on the graph. Any deviation from this equal number shows up as a gently rising curve.

During the late 1970s, Prof Jahn decided to investigate whether the power of human thought alone could interfere in some way with the machine’s usual readings. He hauled strangers off the street and asked them to concentrate their minds on his number generator. In effect, he was asking them to try to make it flip more heads than tails.

It was a preposterous idea at the time. The results, however, were stunning and have never been satisfactorily explained.

Again and again, entirely ordinary people proved that their minds could influence the machine and produce significant fluctuations on the graph, ‘forcing it’ to produce unequal numbers of ‘heads’ or ‘tails’.

According to all of the known laws of science, this should not have happened – but it did. And it kept on happening.

Dr Nelson, also working at Princeton University, then extended Prof Jahn’s work by taking random number machines to group meditations, which were very popular in America at the time. Again, the results were eyepopping. The groups were collectively able to cause dramatic shifts in the patterns of numbers.

From then on, Dr Nelson was hooked.

Using the internet, he connected up 40 random event generators from all over the world to his laboratory computer in Princeton. These ran constantly, day in day out, generating millions of different pieces of data. Most of the time, the resulting graph on his computer looked more or less like a flat line.

But then on September 6, 1997, something quite extraordinary happened: the graph shot upwards, recording a sudden and massive shift in the number sequence as his machines around the world started reporting huge deviations from the norm. The day was of historic importance for another reason, too.

For it was the same day that an estimated one billion people around the world watched the funeral of Diana, Princess of Wales at Westminster Abbey.

Dr Nelson was convinced that the two events must be related in some way.

Could he have detected a totally new phenomena? Could the concentrated emotional outpouring of millions of people be able to influence the output of his REGs. If so, how?

Dr Nelson was at a loss to explain it.

So, in 1998, he gathered together scientists from all over the world to analyse his findings. They, too, were stumped and resolved to extend and deepen the work of Prof Jahn and Dr Nelson. The Global Consciousness Project was born.

Since then, the project has expanded massively. A total of 65 Eggs (as the generators have been named) in 41 countries have now been recruited to act as the ‘eyes’ of the project.

And the results have been startling and inexplicable in equal measure.

For during the course of the experiment, the Eggs have ‘sensed’ a whole series of major world events as they were happening, from the Nato bombing of Yugoslavia to the Kursk submarine tragedy to America’s hung election of 2000.

The Eggs also regularly detect huge global celebrations, such as New Year’s Eve.

But the project threw up its greatest enigma on September 11, 2001.

As the world stood still and watched the horror of the terrorist attacks unfold across New York, something strange was happening to the Eggs.

Not only had they registered the attacks as they actually happened, but the characteristic shift in the pattern of numbers had begun four hours before the two planes even hit the Twin Towers.

They had, it appeared, detected that an event of historic importance was about to take place before the terrorists had even boarded their fateful flights. The implications, not least for the West’s security services who constantly monitor electronic ‘chatter’, are clearly enormous.

‘I knew then that we had a great deal of work ahead of us,’ says Dr Nelson.

What could be happening? Was it a freak occurrence, perhaps?

Apparently not. For in the closing weeks of December last year, the machines went wild once more.

Twenty-four hours later, an earthquake deep beneath the Indian Ocean triggered the tsunami which devastated South-East Asia, and claimed the lives of an estimated quarter of a million people.

So could the Global Consciousness Project really be forecasting the future?

Cynics will quite rightly point out that there is always some global event that could be used to ‘explain’ the times when the Egg machines behaved erratically. After all, our world is full of wars, disasters and terrorist outrages, as well as the occasional global celebration. Are the scientists simply trying too hard to detect patterns in their raw data?

The team behind the project insist not. They claim that by using rigorous scientific techniques and powerful mathematics it is possible to exclude any such random connections.

‘We’re perfectly willing to discover that we’ve made mistakes,’ says Dr Nelson. ‘But we haven’t been able to find any, and neither has anyone else.

Our data shows clearly that the chances of getting these results by fluke are one million to one against.

That’s hugely significant.’ But many remain sceptical.

Professor Chris French, a psychologist and noted sceptic at Goldsmiths College in London, says: ‘The Global Consciousness Project has generated some very intriguing results that cannot be readily dismissed. I’m involved in similar work to see if we get the same results. We haven’t managed to do so yet but it’s only an early experiment. The jury’s still out.’ Strange as it may seem, though, there’s nothing in the laws of physics that precludes the possibility of foreseeing the future.

It is possible – in theory – that time may not just move forwards but backwards, too. And if time ebbs and flows like the tides in the sea, it might just be possible to foretell major world events. We would, in effect, be ‘remembering’ things that had taken place in our future.

‘There’s plenty of evidence that time may run backwards,’ says Prof Bierman at the University of Amsterdam.

‘And if it’s possible for it to happen in physics, then it can happen in our minds, too.’ In other words, Prof Bierman believes that we are all capable of looking into the future, if only we could tap into the hidden power of our minds. And there is a tantalising body of evidence to support this theory.

Dr John Hartwell, working at the University of Utrecht in the Netherlands, was the first to uncover evidence that people could sense the future. In the mid-1970s he hooked people up to hospital scanning machines so that he could study their brainwave patterns.

He began by showing them a sequence of provocative cartoon drawings.

When the pictures were shown, the machines registered the subject’s brainwaves as they reacted strongly to the images before them. This was to be expected.

Far less easy to explain was the fact that in many cases, these dramatic patterns began to register a few seconds before each of the pictures were even flashed up.

It was as though Dr Hartwell’s case studies were somehow seeing into the future, and detecting when the next shocking image would be shown next.

It was extraordinary – and seemingly inexplicable.

But it was to be another 15 years before anyone else took Dr Hartwell’s work further when Dean Radin, a researcher working in America, connected people up to a machine that measured their skin’s resistance to electricity. This is known to fluctuate in tandem with our moods – indeed, it’s this principle that underlies many lie detectors.

Radin repeated Dr Hartwell’s ‘image response’ experiments while measuring skin resistance. Again, people began reacting a few seconds before they were shown the provocative pictures. This was clearly impossible, or so he thought, so he kept on repeating the experiments. And he kept getting the same results.

‘I didn’t believe it either,’ says Prof Bierman. ‘So I also repeated the experiment myself and got the same results. I was shocked. After this I started to think more deeply about the nature of time.’ To make matters even more intriguing, Prof Bierman says that other mainstream labs have now produced similar results but are yet to go public.

‘They don’t want to be ridiculed so they won’t release their findings,’ he says. ‘So I’m trying to persuade all of them to release their results at the same time. That would at least spread the ridicule a little more thinly!’ If Prof Bierman is right, though, then the experiments are no laughing matter.

They might help provide a solid scientific grounding for such strange phenomena as ‘deja vu’, intuition and a host of other curiosities that we have all experienced from time to time.

They may also open up a far more interesting possibility – that one day we might be able to enhance psychic powers using machines that can ‘tune in’ to our subconscious mind, machines like the little black box in Edinburgh.

Just as we have built mechanical engines to replace muscle power, could we one day build a device to enhance and interpret our hidden psychic abilities?

Dr Nelson is optimistic – but not for the short term. ‘We may be able to predict that a major world event is going to happen. But we won’t know exactly what will happen or where it’s going to happen,’ he says.

‘Put it this way – we haven’t yet got a machine we could sell to the CIA.’

But for Dr Nelson, talk of such psychic machines – with the potential to detect global catastrophes or terrorist outrages – is of far less importance than the implications of his work in terms of the human race.

For what his experiments appear to demonstrate is that while we may all operate as individuals, we also appear to share something far, far greater – a global consciousness. Some might call it the mind of God.

‘We’re taught to be individualistic monsters,’ he says. ‘We’re driven by society to separate ourselves from each other. That’s not right.

We may be connected together far more intimately than we realise.’

—–

On the Net:

Global Consciousness Project

Princeton University

Out of Breath ; Smoking and Environmental Pollutants Pack a One-Two Punch, Often Leading to Serious Respiratory Ailments

“Those damn cigarettes.”

During Johnny Carson’s final days, when he mustered enough strength to talk, he would repeat that phrase over and over. Carson, who died of emphysema last month, knew the damage done from a life of smoking in smog country — two strikes against his lungs, according to a pulmonary expert.

“A terrible one-two combination,” said Dr. Eric Ten Brock, chief of pulmonary and critical care medicine at Kaleida Health. “A lot of cigarette smoking and a lot of environmental pollutants contribute to obstructive lung disease in general.

“Some of my patients have grown up watching Johnny Carson,” Ten Brock added. “When they see he died of emphysema, they look at themselves: ‘If Johnny Carson can die of emphysema, that certainly means I can, too.’ And it scares people.”

Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease — or COPD, an umbrella term that includes emphysema, asthma and chronic bronchitis — is a costly killer. Not only was it the fourth leading cause of death last year claiming the lives of more than 120,000 Americans, according to the American Lung Association, it annually costs the nation $37.2 billion — directly through medical expenses and indirectly through loss of work time and productivity. In addition, the number of people with emphysema increased from 2.3 million in 1982 to 3.1 million in 2002.

The typical emphysema patient is male between the ages of 50 and 70. Those who develop the disease have commonly smoked for a very long time, destroying the tiny air sacs called alveoli in their lungs. This damage leads to holes in lung tissue, and once that damage is done, it can’t be reversed.

Carson, diagnosed with emphysema in 2002, was often seen smoking on camera as he sat behind his desk on the set of the “Tonight Show.” His desk, coincidentally, was equipped with a miniature fan to dissipate the smoke, and while no one may know how many packs a day Carson smoked, his habit was no secret.

“Smoking is measured in pack-years,” said Dr. Celestino Pietrantoni of Buffalo Cardiology and Pulmonary. “If you smoke one pack a day for a year, it’s considered the equivalent of one pack- year. If somebody smokes two packs a day for 10 years, that equates to 20 pack-years. Generally, people who wind up with emphysema smoke a minimum of 20 pack-years.”

At age 70, William Bradford of Clarence has lived with COPD for 15 years. His two-packs-of-Luckys-a-day habit was exacerbated by his work as a laborer in commercial construction.

“I worked with cement a lot,” Bradford said. “I worked on a farm where there was a lot of grain dust. I breathed in foundry sand, and a lot of silicates from grinding and cutting concrete. Every time I turned around, I was doing something that wasn’t good for me.”

And still, he smoked cigarettes. No matter how severe the lung damage, medical experts stress the importance of quitting smoking.

“I always tell my patients that no matter how severe their lung damage is, if they stop smoking they will still have a benefit over the next few years,” said Ten Brock, past president of the New York State Thoracic Society. “A lot of people say: ‘Hey, the damage is done. I might as well enjoy what life I have left.’ That’s the wrong thing to say.

“When your lungs are affected adversely by cigarette smoke, the rate of decline is generally three times greater — three times faster — than the rate of decline of a nonsmoker,” Ten Brock noted. “If you stop smoking, the rate of decline goes back to that of a nonsmoker.”

Four months after Bradford finally quit smoking — July 1989 — he discovered he had COPD.

“I went outside to take a tree down in my yard, and I couldn’t breath,” he recalled. “I just couldn’t get my breath. It was around Thanksgiving. Within a week I met with a specialist, and he told me I had COPD. There’s really nothing they can do about it. They just make it livable. I take quite a bit of medication.”

Chances are Bradford had been living with COPD for some time. The insidious nature of the disease makes it a silent stalker. It sneaks up on people, developing gradually over years. Those bad colds accompanied by a heavy cough? The cough that has become permanent? All signs of lungs in crisis.

“It creeps up on you,” Ten Brock said. “It’s easy to attribute to other things, and you adjust your lifestyle to accommodate your disability. That’s another way of not appreciating how impaired you are. Some of these people, when they first present, have severe emphysema, and they never knew it.”

Relief from nebulizers

It’s a vicious cycle. People who have emphysema typically lose muscle mass. They become weaker, their lifestyle compromised. Winter creates havoc, causing inflammation of the airways, keeping those with emphysema on the inside looking out.

“Every year it gets worse and worse,” Bradford said. “You can’t operate out in the cold, and it gets to be panicky if you are too far from a warm area where your nebulizer is. All of a sudden you can’t stay out there any longer. Your heart rate starts increasing, you’re gasping — and you get in the house and sit down and use a nebulizer. And then you relax, and you have that sigh.”

Bradford has three nebulizers: one portable and two in the house in case one breaks. The medications he breathes through the misting treatment — a respiratory cocktail consisting of albuterol, ipratropium, budesonide and theophylline — takes about 10 minutes to inhale. During the winter, he treats himself five times a day.

Waiting for lung transplant

There is no cure for emphysema, but in some extraordinary situations, a lung transplant is prescribed, according to Pietrantoni.

Kurt Koerner is waiting placement on a lung transplant registry. His lungs have not been the same since one collapsed last year during a predawn ordeal that he described as “pure hell.” It started out as what Koerner thought was a gas pain, but no matter how many Tums he took, the pain intensified. He couldn’t breath. He could not move. With his wife upstairs sleeping, Koerner waited on the couch for six hours until he was taken to the emergency room.

“I was told to quit smoking, and I didn’t do it,” said Koerner, 50. “The collapsed lung is what did it. I smoked a pack and a half to two a day, Merit Ultra Light 100s. After 30 years, it was tough to quit.”

Koerner used to look forward to that morning cup of coffee and cigarette almost as much as he loved going to work at his own auto repair business, where fumes from exhaust and paint taunted his lungs daily.

“It’s the only thing I ever did in my whole life,” said Koerner. “I definitely miss it. It was a skill, laying on a nice paint job and taking a car from junk to looking brand new. Now I tire real fast.”

The lung collapse changed everything. Koerner couldn’t cut his grass. He couldn’t carry bags of garbage to the street. Stairs became painful to climb.

“I’m on all kinds of medication,” he said. “I kept on getting infections in my lungs, so they would put me on prednisone and now I have osteoporosis. My bones are bad in my hips and shoulders. I’m waiting on a call now for my last round of tests, and then they’re going to put me on the (lung transplant) list.”

e-mail: [email protected]

Spa-Tial Treatments

ALL beauty spas offer rejuvenation and relaxation. So what makes one different from another? Our team of writers checks out some of the newer spas in Klang Valley

KHAREYANA

WE’VE all heard of floating restaurants but what about a floating spa? Welcome to Khareyana, a sprawling bungalow in Jalan Selangor, Petaling Jaya, that’s been converted into a spa.

Practically surrounded by water, at its heart is a beautiful water garden that functions as a centre court. Pass by water lilies and let the stepping stones lead you to the treatment rooms.

Designed by owner Azzam Abdullah, a big spa fan herself, there’s nothing not to like about the place. “Our theme is tropical/ethnic and we renovated the house extensively to get exactly what we wanted. Interior design and decor is a passion of mine,” said the bubbly lady.

Filled with wooden furniture imported from Indonesia, sandstone tiles and green plants, it’s an oasis that appeals to the five senses.

The air is fragrant with the smell of essential oils and herbal concoctions while lush greenery can be found everywhere you turn. As the skilled and experienced masseuses get to work on your body, enjoy the soothing sound of running water in the background.

“What we offer is personalised service,” says Azzam. “We know who our customers are. If I’m not here, then my daughter, Ryaihan, will be.”

The ladies-only spa offers a variety of treatments including aromatherapy, slimming, whitening, facial, bridal and postnatal. Guests can expect to be pampered in private rooms that are equipped with a bed, shower room, steamer and bath tub with a jacuzzi function. Only established and trusted Indonesian products such Martha Tilaar and Rudy Hadisawano are used for the body, face and hair.

After a rejuvenating treatment, feel free to chill out in the sitting area or the Jamu Bar which serves juices, herbal teas and light salads. There’s also a special area for those who want a manicure and pedicure.

Happily, Khareyana doesn’t cost a bomb. You can treat yourself to a basic body scrub for RM70 while a 30-minute leg massage costs RM30. Aromatherapy treatments start at RM260 and comprehensive, traditional body treatments such as Lulur Malih Warni, Ken Dedes and Dara Putih Aroma will only set you back RM240 each. – SOFIANNI SUBKI

SERENITY COVE IF you hate having to make decisions, then Serenity Cove would be perfect for you. It offers only one type of treatment – aromatherapy massage.

Before you scoff at its lack of space, its manager Cheryl Choong has this to say: “We are like the Air Asia of spas,” referring to its `no frills’ concept.

Located on the ground floor of Jasmine Towers condominium in SS2, PJ, the place is indeed confined to four walls – yet it is uncluttered and clean with a high ceiling for an airy feel.

There are two massage tables with a partition in between for a sense of privacy. To make you feel relaxed the minute you step in, all details are meticulously taken care of – from the soothing music to the wonderful smells of lavender and peppermint to nitty-gritty things like room temperature.

Though Serenity Cove charges only a humble RM60 for a 90-minute massage, Choong makes no compromises. At that price, no packages are necessary either.

Because it’s part of a condominium, appointments are necessary so that the security guards will expect you at the gates.

To start, I soaked my feet in the hot foot-bath filled with pretty petals, sea salt and peppermint oil. It was invigorating to just sit back and let the masseuse rub my soles and scrub my toes.

Then a hot towel was pressed all over the back and limbs, literally a warm-up for better things to come.

The massage was immensely wonderful with new techniques I had never experienced. Neck lifts and leg shakes left me feeling loosened at the joints. It also probably stirred every fibre of muscle in my body! If you can’t stand the pain, then insist on lighter pressure. Also, if you are bashful then insist on not baring your chest for when you’re lying on your back. Good spas will always accommodate.

As for this simple set-up called Serenity Cove, it gets a thumbs- up from me anyway regardless of its one and only treatment offered. – SHARIFAH SAKINAH ALJUNID

RUPINI’S

NEED a short trip to nirvana? Pop in at Rupini’s Beauty Haven along Jalan Telawi, Bangsar Baru, KL, for a delicate Indian break. With so many beauty spas in town, especially those using herbal products, one is eager to know what makes Rupini’s stand out.

The centre pays much attention to details such as decor, lighting, aroma and overall ambience. Therefore, while the beauty treatment pampers externally, the good aura or vibes of the place massages the soul.

“We call it soul healing,” its director Marianne Dass explains adding that the various chakra lights play a big role in soothing your soul.

Although only weeks old here, the centre is a well-known name in Singapore, with 10 years behind it. Star treatment is the Rupini’s Holistic Treatment. Here, dead skin cells are sloughed with a turmeric and rice paste. After a shower, a delicious mixture of sandalwood powder, yoghurt and honey is smeared all over your body and you are then wrapped in huge banana leaves which help absorb toxins.

After 15 minutes of soaking in all that goodness and another wash up, comes the massage with an ayurvedic blend of hot oil.

There’s more. A 15-minute soak in a flower bath before you take a warm shower followed by patchouli fragrance body splash.

The verdict? A rejuvenating break fit for a princess – all for RM350. – RACHAEL PHILIP

BODYCARE SPA CENTRE

ONE often judges a spa and the treatment it provides by the way it looks. Let’s face it, we are swayed by aromatherapy candles, dim lights and ethnic-looking sofas with brightly-coloured pillows that seems to be typical of stand-alone spas. The ambience of such a place often lulls us into a state of relaxation even before we head for the treatment room.

However, it is the treatment that eventually matters and while the Bodycare Spa Centre at Fitness First gyms in Menara Maxis and Menara John Hancock in Kuala Lumpur may not look as if it belongs in Bali, there is no doubt that the treatments it offers are excellent. After a two-hour treatment, which consisted of a Ginger Salt Scrub and a traditional Euronese massage, I was so relaxed that it was a strain to return to the office to work.

The 40-minute scrub goes deep into the skin to remove dead skin cells and excess toxins. The application of the scrub is not the rigorous exercise I have become accustomed to but it did the deed – after my shower, I was pleasantly surprised to see my skin glow.

However, since I have a weakness for massages, it was the second treatment that I’d been looking forward to. Always a fan of essential oils, I was a little disappointed that I wouldn’t have the scent of lavender wafting in the air as I lay blissfully on the treatment bed but the massage, a combination of East and West, was enough to make me wish that the one hour could stretch to two.

One of the most popular massage options at Bodycare Spa, the Euronese massage is priced at RM140 while the Scrub treatment is priced at RM110.

Other relaxing options include Swedish Aromatherapy, Lavender Therapeutic, Sports Therapeutic, Lymphatic Drainage and Lithostherapy Hot Stone massages.

The spa also offers body wraps, facial therapy, slimming therapy, hand and feet treatment and waxing treatments. – ANTHEA DE LIMA

JUST RELAX

THERE are no luxurious flowers baths and mud wraps but Just Relax offers three different massages that leave you feeling pampered and relaxed.

It all started when Theresa Wong decided to open a herbal massage therapy centre after having spent 14 years in advertising in Thailand.

Thus, it is not surprising that Wong’s place is decorated with Thai luxuries – silk shawls, simple paintings and the lingering scent of lavender and mint fill the air. The spa is tucked away in The Place in newly developed Damansara Perdana, PJ.

Soothing hand movements with a self-made herbal remedy is used in the Roman Experience to help stressed and tensed parts of the body.

If you like traditional Thai and Japanese indulgences, the Thai Body Massage and Shiatsu will help improve blood circulation and relieve tiredness.

The cleanliness of the place and the gentle yet firm and soothing remedies top off a most refreshing experience. – RACHAEL PHILIP